Category Archives: Psy

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Creative cooking over a stove is one of the joys of outdoor adventure. What to do with the leftovers, food waste and dirty dishes—the gray water—is a different matter. That’s why we’ve put together these tips on how to wash dishes while camping and other ideas for keeping it clean in the backcountry.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

When you’re in a backcountry environment, eating all the food on your plate is one of the most basic steps toward reducing food waste and human impact on the environment. “The key thing to keep in mind is to smartly plan your meals in advance to reduce waste and minimize clean up,” says Ben Lawhon, education director for the Leave No Trace Center for Outdoor Ethics. The LNT center is the leading organization promoting responsible enjoyment of the outdoors; it provides science-based techniques for minimizing visitor impact on parks and protected areas. “Pre-planning such as cooking with one pot instead of using three pots for meals and preparing the right portion sizes will reduce waste and reduce the amount of dishes that need to be cleaned.”

Dirty dishes are often unavoidable so when it’s time to wash up, Leave No Trace recommends using methods that are appropriate for the environment you’re visiting in order to protect water sources and minimize the chance of providing food rewards to local wildlife that may alter their natural habits.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

3 Tips for washing dishes in the backcountry

You’re in the backcountry. You’ve eaten a meal. There’s a dirty bowl, a dirty spoon, and a dirty pot. Now what do you do?

1. Scrape It and Pack It

Scrape any remaining food from all dishes into the trash that you’ll be packing out. You can almost get a bowl entirely clean with a small spatula, a tool like the MSR Alpine Dish Brush, or a camp towel.

2. Heat It and Strain It

Heat filtered water over a stove. Take the water and dishes at least 200 feet from water sources—approximately 70 adult paces.

With a scrub pad or something similar, use the hot water to clean the dishes. If possible, collect the wash water, also known as gray water, into a single pot.

Strain the gray water into a single pot using mesh, a bandana or a plastic bag with straining holes cut in it to capture food residue. Dump the food residue into the trash that you’re planning to pack out.

Get rid of the gray water by digging a sump hole (6-8-inch-deep hole) and straining the water into the hole (recommended in bear country), or broadcast it around in multiple directions, scattering to ensure the liquid is spread over a wide area.

Location is key. Keep gray water 200’ away from water sources like streams, springs and lakes. Ridgelines and hills are good.

3. Consider ditching the soap

It’s a judgment call but soap may not always be necessary for short, small group outings according to Leave No Trace. When soap is necessary for larger groups or germy partners, choose biodegradable options but consider that even seemingly environmentally friendly soaps take a long time to completely dissipate. Avoid soaps with phosphates, which can be damaging. Most importantly, prevent soap from getting into water sources. The bacteria that break down soap exist primarily in soil, not water. Soap that enters the backcountry’s waterways can remain for years. And if you use soap, use the minimum amount needed to get the job done.

Posted on Last updated: August 16, 2021

Home » Camping Tips » Camping Dish Washing Tips

Worried that hand washing camping dishes is not getting them clean? Below we show you how to set up a proper camping dish washing station.

This post was sponsored content when originally published and has since been updated and moved here to Let’s Camp S’more.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

When we are camping, my husband does all the cooking and cleaning up afterward. I am not sure how it worked out that way, but I enjoy it. I do not want to be critical of how he does the camp dishwashing, but I worry that the dirty dishes are not getting properly cleaned. He also does the laundry with our DIY Washing Machine.

He uses boiling water to make sure it kills any germs, but then he burns his hands. I did some thinking about how we could avoid burned hands and make sure the dishes are clean, and I remembered the old scout way of doing dishes.

Camping Dish Washing The Right Way

The key to clean dishes is to use three three wash basins, biodegradable camping dish soap, and a disinfectant. We have detailed this process at the bottom of the post.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Cleaning Tips

A key in making dishes easier to clean is to scrap them as clean as possible right away. Use a rubber spatula to scrape food from dishes into a garbage container. Since friction is an excellent sanitizer (if not the best — surgeons scrub their hands) use a sponge and/or scrub brush repeatedly, especially on forks, spoons, cups, and glasses.

For greasy pans and dishes wipe out with newspaper and then spray with full-strength vinegar and allowed that to sit for 5 to 10 minutes, scrub and rinse, preferably in warm or hot water. For more cleaning power, use baking soda and vinegar together for an all-natural, inexpensive, and minimal environmental impact!

How to Dispose of Dishwater When Camping

It is important to properly dispose of the dirty water created from doing dishes. Many campgrounds have regulations on how they want you to get rid of this water. If no rules are posted, please check with the ranger or camp host.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Some parks have a utility sink marked for dishwater disposal. Please be mindful that doing dishes at that sink might not be allowed. If pouring the dirty water on the ground is allowed, please make sure it is at least 100 feet from a water source or body of water.

J une turned out to be our big camping month. We planned it that way because the days are cooler and there are fewer bugs than later in the season. This year, the weather was particularly gorgeous, and we happened to luck out on some pretty great sunshine, too.

Now if you’re not into camping, please know that this is probably the last post on the subject for the summer and we’ll soon be moving onto gardening and putting up food. If you are all about the great outdoors, though, then you’ll find this post handy for your next adventure.

We pack all reusable dishes when we go camping. Years ago we were gifted a Coleman Enamelware Dining Kit and it saves us having to buy paper and plastic each summer. I love how durable enamelware is and I’ve been building my collection now that it’s proven to be so useful both at home and away.

Using camping gear year round makes the investment more ‘green’; if you only camp once a year, I believe paper dishes would be a better environmental choice.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean camping dishes the easy way

I happen to like washing camp dishes. Give me a pretty view, dapple sunlight on the table and tune in the happy voices of children playing among the trees, and I am perfectly willing to clean up. Somehow it seems less of a chore then at home.

To pack:

Here’s what I bring for washing up on our campsite.

  • 1 large pot for hauling and boiling water
  • 1 large basin or plastic tub
  • Biodegradable camp soap
  • Sponge with a scratch pad or an old dishrag
  • Collapsable drying rack

Sometimes I’ll pack a dish towel, but I find I don’t use it enough to warrant the space. I like to keep my kitchen equipment pretty tight.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The method:

  • Scrape. We encourage everyone to finish their meals, but there are always scraps like fish bones to dispose of responsibly. Scrape all excess food into a small garbage, which you should dispose of properly later. You don’t want to attract animals to your camp.
  • Soak. Unless you are cooking in foil, camping food often incurs really messy pots; food burns on the open fire or things bubble over and a good soak is needed. Rather than waste my time scrubbing, I leave the pots behind in a cold water soak while we hit the beach or the trail. When I get back, the food has had a chance to soften and the clean up goes much faster.
  • Hot Water Wash. Boil water in your largest pot and pour it into your wash basin together with plenty of biodegradable soap. Add enough cold water to make it cool enough to stand, then attack your dishes.
  • Drip-Dry. Dishes can air dry in mere minutes out in the breeze, so let them drain on the collapsable drying rack. A large mesh bag also works well (you can hang it from a tree limb) but I happened to have an old wooden rack from Ikea that needed a use.

And it’s as easy as that!

Now, who’s ready to go camping?

Cooking has always been Aimée’s preferred recreational activity, creative outlet, and source of relaxation. After nearly ten years in the professional cooking industry, she went from restaurant to RSS by trading her tongs and clogs for cookie cutters and a laptop, serving as editor here at Simple Bites. Her first book, Brown Eggs and Jam Jars – Family Recipes from the Kitchen of Simple Bites, was published in February 2015.

Subscribe For Free!

Like reading this post?
Get more delivered to your email inbox.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping tripWash, rinse, sanitize.

With the three-step dishwashing system, you can finish camp dishes in no time. That means you’re back to having fun faster.

Here’s how to wash dishes at a campsite, courtesy of the Boy Scout Handbook (page 308).

What you’ll need

  • A dishwashing spot that’s at least 200 feet from any sources of water
  • Hot water (Pro tip: start heating your wash water before you sit down to eat)
  • Three plastic tubs
  • Biodegradable dish soap
  • A dish brush/scrubber or two
  • Hot tongs for dipping plates and spoons into the hot rinse
  • Bleach or sanitizing tablets
  • Ground cloth, towel, mesh bag or lightweight hammock for air-drying

Before you begin

Get your dishes as clean as you can before placing them into the wash pot. That way you won’t overwhelm Pot 1 with food particles.

Note: This may involve scraping and literally licking your plate clean. At Scout camp, this is perfectly acceptable behavior.

Pot 1: Wash pot

Add a few drops of biodegradable soap to hot water. Your instinct will be to use more soap than you actually need, so use sparingly.

Pot 2: Hot-rinse pot

Fill the pot with clear, hot water.

Pot 3: Cold-rinse pot

Place a few drops of bleach or a sanitizing tablet (like Steramine) into cold water.

After you’re done

  1. Hang or place utensils and dishes to dry
  2. Dispose of soapy wash water 200 feet from any water sources. Filter out food particles, and put those in a plastic bag to throw away. Then spread the water over a wide area.

Also worth noting

  • Minimizing dishwashing time starts with menu planning. Meals that use one pot and few food-prep utensils will leave less mess afterward.
  • Scouts should use as few dishes and utensils as possible. One bowl, one mug and one spork will be all you’ll need for most meals.
  • Here’s a look at the Boy Scout Handbook guidance on the subject:

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Now it’s your turn

So that’s how to wash dishes at a campsite. What tips or advice can you offer for campsite dishwashing?

This post was updated in December 2019 to reflect latest guidelines from the Boy Scout Handbook. Thank you to all the commenters for their feedback.

Photo via this site, where you can learn to make a holder for your dish tubs.

Welcome to our “Considerate Camper” series. These are posts with tips and reminders on how to keep our provincial parks clean and healthy. Already know how it’s done? Please share these posts along for less-experienced campers 🙂

When it comes to keeping your campsite neat and tidy, doing your dishes properly is key.

However, many campers struggle with how to effectively wash their dishes.

We get a lot of questions about this topic, so we’ve compiled all the tips and tricks on the best way to clean your dishes while camping.

What to bring

Cleaning up after a delicious camping meal is easy if you have the right equipment.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Here are some items to pack for dish washing:

  • a pot to boil water in
  • camp stove
  • collapsible camp sink or plastic tub/basin
  • biodegradable soap
  • wash cloth
  • scrubbing pad

Where to clean your dishes

Newbie campers sometimes think it’s okay to wash their dishes under water taps or in comfort stations — these are both big no-no’s.

Comfort stations aren’t meant for dish-washing. Water often ends up all over the counter and floors. This is a safety hazard to other campers, as well as a lot of work for park staff to mop up. Dish-washing in comfort stations can also create line-ups and frustrations for visitors who are just trying to use the facilities.

Washing at water taps creates many of the same problems, including line-ups and safety hazards. Your dishwater is also a wildlife attractant. The gunk from your dishes gets splashed on the ground, and can lead to animals — from racoons to bears — sniffing around. Splashes of dishwater can also contaminate the water taps themselves, which your fellow campers are using for drinking water.

How to clean your dishes

Always clean your dishes on your campsite using a basin, and dispose of the water responsibly.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Start by scraping all food residue off your dishes and into your garbage container / bag (don’t forget to dispose of your garbage properly too!).

Boil water, then mix in cold, potable water to create the hottest water you can safely tolerate for dish washing.

Pour the water into a basin or collapsible camp sink, and add your soap.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Biodegradable camping soap is often concentrated so
just a few drops will suffice.

Set cleaned (but soapy) dishes on a clean surface while you wash all of your dirty dishes.

When finished, rinse all of the dishes with clean, cool water, allowing the soapy residue to drip into the camp sink or basin.

What to do with the dirty dishwater?

When finished, it’s time to dispose of your “grey” water or soapy water.

(Remember: this water shouldn’t contain any food residue because you did a great job of scraping your dishes before washing them!)

You can safely dispose of it at the trailer sanitation station or by pouring it down the vault toilets (outhouses).

You’re done — great work!

By washing your dishes in an eco-ethical and responsible way, you are helping protect the parks we all love.

No one wants to eat out of a grubby bowl. But is there a way to keep your dishes clean on the trail?

Share this

Join Backpacker

Create a personalized feed and bookmark your favorites.

Already have an account?

Join Backpacker

Create a personalized feed and bookmark your favorites.

Already have an account?

Camp dishes Photo: lucentius / iStock / Getty Images Plus

Get full access to Outside Learn, our online education hub featuring in-depth fitness, nutrition, and adventure courses and more than 2,000 instructional videos when you sign up for Outside+ >”,”name”:”in-content-cta”,”type”:”link”>>’>Sign up for Outside+ today.

No one knows gear like Backpacker. We’re sharing this story for free; get more expert advice on buying, using, and maintaining your equipment by signing up for Outside+.

Stupid question time: What is the best way to wash camp dishes without hauling extra gear and wasting water? Do you have to boil/filter the water used for cleaning? Are dishes detergents bad for the environment? How do you dispose of dirty dish water? —Aaron, North Berwick, ME

Actually, Aaron, it’s not a stupid question at all. I’ve seen people do atrocious things to wild rivers and lakes—like jump in with a bottle of shampoo. And soap labels are often confusing—does biodegradable mean I can wash my dishes in the river? Here are the highlights of proper dishwashing (Got to Leave No Trace for lots more details.)

All dishwashing (and body washing) should be done 200 feet away from any water source, because we need to keep even biodegradable soap out of rivers, streams, and lakes. (Fish don’t groove on peppermint-scented suds.)

Only use soap if you need to (for really greasy pots or on long trips, when serious grime buildup is inevitable). For the most part, hot water and a scrubby sponge will do the trick. Boiling dishwater before doing dishes would be the safest way to make sure you’re not scrubbing your pots with Giardia. But as for me, 99% of the time, I’m content with just getting it hot enough to cut the grease. Your call.

After scrubbing, strain your dishwater through a fine mesh strainer (or a bandana) and broadcast the wastewater. In other words, fling it far and wide. Then pack out the food remnants in your garbage bag.

Looking for some camping cleaning tips? People go camping mostly to get away and to relax. The thought of spending a bunch of time scrubbing out pots and pans is a reminder that they haven’t gotten away from everything, and it’s a chore that isn’t relaxing. Thankfully, it doesn’t have to be quite as much of a task as it would appear to be at first.

How to clean dishes on a camping tripThese are the best tips and tricks to clean while camping both the safest and most environmentally friendly way!

Looking for a fun activity? Check out this camping SVG bundle as a great option!

Camping Cleaning Tips

Here at Ruffles and Rain Boots, we love camping and everything that comes with it – except cleaning. But since we know that it’s part of the gig, we’ve found that having a few easy cleaning tips make it a much less painful process.

So, grab your favorite tent and let’s get started!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

No Time to Make This Now? Pin it for Later

Running a bit short on time? I totally get that! If you want to come back later and read this, just pin it to your favorite camping or travel board on Pinterest so it’s ready when you are!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Camping Etiquette Cleaning Tips

Cleaning Stuck-On Foods

Part of the problem is that people are often not used to cooking over an open flame, whether that is over a campfire or a camp stove. Foods that are cooked on, stick to the metal of the pots and pans.

Even if the pots and pans are stainless steel, this makes the gunk hard to remove. It does little good in hindsight to realize that the meal should have been cooked a little cooler or stirred a bit more often, once the food is already cooked on.

Note that we aren’t talking about just oily pots and pans. Some water and dish soap can take care of that. The issue is the baked-on gunk.

Between stainless steel and cast iron, stainless is usually easier to clean. Fill the pot or pan with water, and sprinkle the burned-on spots with a liberal amount of salt. Allow it to sit for a half-hour to an hour, heat it up until the water is just hot enough you can get your hands in it, and the baked-on stuff should come off without much difficulty, using a regular scouring pad.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Do not do this with cast iron, though! Salt has a reaction to cast iron and can cause the rapid formation of rust.

With cast iron, fill the pot or pan with water, add a small amount of dish soap, and bring the water to a low boil. Allow the water to continue boiling for about a half-hour, then remove from the heat and let the water cool to the point where you can handle it. Again, the water loosens the baked-on food, making it much easier to scour the pot or pan.

If some of the food particles remain stubborn, you can also use a bit of sand from the shores of a lake, the banks of a stream or river, or from the beach, for extra scouring power. Just remember that sand is abrasive, so go easy.

You want to remove the cooked-on mess, you don’t want to remove a layer of metal in the process. It also isn’t a good idea to use sand on stainless steel or those pans that have non-stick surfaces, as this can cut into the metal or coating.

A final tip is to put water in the pot or pan as soon as it is empty. This helps prevent the food particles from drying even more, and it helps loosen what is already there.

These tips can also be used at home, though they are especially useful in the camp when you are trying to relax. They are far better than spending a good amount of time scrubbing out those pots and pans.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to Clean Plates

Over the years whenever we have gone camping the soap, which I know was packed, was conveniently lost and no one could ever find it during our family camping trips.

I don’t know whether the kids just hid it so they could get out of the dishwasher duties or it just didn’t get packed being conveniently put back into the kitchen sink cupboard. So throughout these years, we had to find an alternative solution to this problem.

The solution came to me by accident and now today I can recommend it to you all.

At washing time all you need to use is either sand or soil instead of soap on the dinner plates and it does work. It’s an amazing process and it gets the plates clean. Leftover salad dressing, tomato sauce, steak oil, all get removed once and for all using this method.

This is how it works: Everyone at the campground finishes their evening meal and then the plates are then collected and taken to the tap.

Once the person on duty to clean arrives at the tap area before the tap is turned on, they reach down and grab a handful of sand or dirt into one of their hands.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The sand or dirt is then rubbed onto the dirty plates in a clockwise motion around the plate – do not add any water until the plate is full of sand or dirt. Once the plate has been completely covered please rinse this off immediately with tap water using your other clean hand to swirl any excess sand or dirt off the plate.

Since we discovered that using the environment to clean our plates at our camping trips we don’t take soap along with us anymore.

It’s environmentally friendly as the sand or dirt which you use gets washed right off the plates and goes back to where it originally came from and the plates are reused night after night.

I hope you all will try this just once the next time you go camping and it will all go towards helping save our planet even if it’s just a little bit at a time.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Even More Camping Ideas

Getting in the camping mode is so much fun so here are some other camping tips and ideas!

  • Grilled Camping Recipes – Don’t miss out on these easy camping rcipes!
  • Backyard Camping Fun – You don’t have to travel far at all to have a camping experience.
  • 12 Camping Games to Play Around the Campfire– Bonding around the campfire is one of my favorite things to do.

Please Save This to Pinterest

Thanks for being so supportive of our site! Share with others! Please share to Facebook or pin to your favorite camping board on Pinterest.

Your food will taste better, and you’ll stay healthier

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Get full access to Outside Learn, our online education hub featuring in-depth fitness, nutrition, and adventure courses and more than 2,000 instructional videos when you >”,”name”:”in-content-cta”,”type”:”link”>>’>sign up for Outside+.

There are acceptable levels of grime I’m willing to put up with when cooking outdoors. For example, my buddies and I refer to our dishes and utensils as “river clean,” “hut clean,” or “camp clean,” depending on the trip. Basically, we let them remain pretty dirty. But that has also led to me contracting nasty infections like giardia, norovirus, and any number of (admittedly undiagnosed) South American bugs that I was never tested for but had powerful—ahem—gastrointestinal effects.

To glean some pointers on keeping a camp kitchen spick-and-span, I spoke with Marco Johnson, who’s been teaching wilderness skills and first aid as the field staffing director at the National Outdoor Leadership School (NOLS) in Lander, Wyoming, since 1985.

Wash Your Hands

The most important step for staying healthy while cooking outdoors is something you should be using every day: hand soap. “The two best vectors for disease in the backcountry are your left hand and your right hand,” Johnson says. In NOLS courses, instructors issue soap and an alcohol-based hand sanitizer like Purell. They teach students to get in the habit of regularly washing their hands after going to the bathroom and before preparing food. “There has been a lot of talk in the past 30 years about waterborne illnesses,” Johnson says. “Yes, those things exist, but what a lot of people thought were waterborne illnesses were really unrelated issues associated with poor personal hygiene.”

Save the Soap for Your Hands, Not Your Dishes

“We don’t advocate cleaning dishes and utensils with soap,” Johnson says. “If you don’t rinse things well and clean off all the soap, you might end up ingesting it and upsetting your stomach anyway.”

Portion Carefully

As a best practice, cook only what you plan on eating, and finish everything. Leftovers can breed unseen bacteria that can stick around in the bowl or plate you kept them in.

Bring It to a Boil

“Bringing water to a rolling boil kills everything,” Johnson says. Boiling water in a pot will disinfect the pot itself; then, drop the utensils, cups, and other items that made contact with your food or mouth into the boiling water. “Scrubbing a greasy frying pan with warm water and a piece of pine branch you pick up off the ground is actually not a bad way to go before boiling the water” Johnson adds.

Keep Sick People out of the Kitchen

One of the reasons you’re washing dishes in the first place is to avoid sharing illnesses with each other. Keeping people who are coughing on their hands out of the food-prep space helps isolate those bugs. If the person is really excited to cook, be firm: There are plenty of other jobs around camp they can help with that won’t make the whole team sick.

Don’t Share

“We don’t advise sharing things like water bottles, utensils, or bowls,” Johnson says. No matter how thorough you are about cleaning after a meal, sharing your water bottle with a fellow team member is a direct path for bacteria and viruses.

Use Few Dishes

Washing dishes after a meal is a chore. But you’re more likely to clean if there’s a lighter load at the end—and fewer dishes means less weight in your pack. “For a three- or four-person group, we may just bring a four-quart pot and a frying pan, and we learn to be efficient,” Johnson says. He suggests planning meals around minimizing the number of dishes you use—like first making hot drinks or dehydrated meals that require only boiling water, and then simmering beans.

Make Dishwater Soup

Johnson suggests using water to scrub out the pot, and then bring that water to a boil and throw in a soup packet—like one from Knorr. “I am staying hydrated, made my hot water for my soup, and cleaned my pot all at the same time,” Johnson says. Just be sure to transfer the water to a bowl before adding the soup, since you don’t want to dirty the pot all over again.

Don’t Be Lazy

“Don’t get to the end of the meal and say, ‘Ah, this is mostly clean; I’ve scraped most everything out of here,’” Johnson says. While the extra four minutes to clean might seem unbearable at the end of a long day in the backcountry, just think about the alternative. “If you don’t have good hygiene, you’re going to get sick. And getting sick shuts a trip down.”

It’s true, camping does take a lot of planning ahead. However, you can make it easy and simple by bringing only the necessities and planning meals that highlight leftovers, use similar ingredients, and can be made over the fire.

From the ingredients list to what kind of appliances to bring, follow this guide (multiplying as needed for larger groups) and all you need to worry about is not burning your marshmallow while making s’mores.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Eating healthy should still be delicious.

What to Pack:

  • Cooler on wheels, we recommend one that is at least 82 qt.
  • Matches and lighter
  • Foil, make sure you have enough to use all weekend
  • Propane gas and stove
  • Two good knives
  • Spatula
  • Silverware for two: spoons, forks, and knives
  • Large and small resealable bags
  • Paper towels
  • Cleaning wipes, small dish soap, sponge, dish towels, and dishwashing bucket
  • Ice packs, you will stop multiple times for ice
  • Skillet with lid, saucepan with lid, and pot with lid
  • Plates and small bowls for each camper
  • Cups, mugs, and plastic cups for writing names, for each camper
  • Trash bags
  • Bug spray – here are some natural repellents we recommend.

How to Layer Food in the Cooler:

  • Bottom Level
    • Ice Packs
    • Drinks, water, and milk
    • Butter
    • Chocolate bars for s’mores
  • ​Middle Level
    • Deli meat and lunch supplies
    • Cheese
    • Salsa, pesto, and dips
    • Chicken and salmon
  • Top Level
    • Eggs – only buy in foam containers, cardboard will get soggy in the cooler
    • Any produce items
    • Bread and tortillas
    • Pre-cooked whole-wheat pasta in a zip-top bag with 1 teaspoon of olive oil

What Dry Goods To Pack:

  • Small salt and pepper shakers
  • Whole wheat sandwich bread
  • Peanut butter
  • Cooking spray
  • Marshmallows
  • Plastic bottle of olive oil
  • Basic seasonings
    • Salt and pepper shakers
    • 1 tablespoon of each:
    • Onion powder
    • Garlic powder
    • Cayenne

Make sure to review all the ingredients in the recipes below as well to complete your shopping list!

Day 1 – Buy fresh bags of ice:

Eat a filling breakfast before you leave and make snacks for the car ride beforehand.

  • Honey-Roasted Nuts and Fruit
  • Almond-Date Bars

Lunch Day 1:

Make this chicken salad ahead of time, store in the top of the cooler and assemble sandwiches during your first road trip stop.

  • Herbed Chicken Salad Sandwiches
  • Side Snack: Apples

Dinner Day 1:

You’ve made it to your camping ground! Time to relax and fix a quick dinner with pasta you’ve already prepped at home. Everyone can personalize their own pasta packet and make it themselves.

  • Whole Wheat Pasta Packets with Tomatoes

Stir in any pasta sauce of your choice, salt, pepper, and olive oil with prepared pasta. Place a single serving of pasta in a foil packet with shredded parmesan cheese, basil and diced tomatoes. Heat packets directly over the fire until the pasta is warm and the cheese is melted, approximately 10 minutes.

Dessert Day 1:

  • Grilled fruit kebabs
    • Peaches
    • Pineapple
    • Mango
    • Strawberries

Prepare the fruit before at home and keep them in one container. Cut fruit into 1 to 2 inch cubes or slices to make sure they can stay on the skewer over the grill. Do not cut the strawberries in half, just de-stem them. Let everyone build their own skewer and include marshmallows or cut up pound cake as well for an extra sweet treat. Grill over the campfire, turning every 1 to 2 minutes depending on the strength of the heat.

Breakfast Day 2 – Drain water from the cooler and get new ice:

  • Campfire Eggs

Eggs can be prepared directly over the fire however you like. Whether scrambled or over easy, be sure to use cooking spray or butter to make sure they do not stick.

There are few activities that I enjoy more than cooking in the great outdoors. There’s something about an open flame, a dusty grill grate, and some fresh air that make cooking even more enjoyable for me. But as much as I love taking my culinary skills outside, there are definitely some challenges that cooking while camping poses.

The biggest struggle? Cleaning up, of course. Caring for a cast iron is tricky enough when you have access to a full kitchen and running water, so you can imagine how difficult it is to keep this thing clean once you’re out in the middle of nowhere at a campsite with no amenities. Worry not, there are ways to keep your prized cast iron cookware in good shape. Here’s everything you need to keep in mind before you head out on your next trip.

Bring an Inexpensive Cast Iron

Listen, just because there are ways to care for your cast iron doesn’t mean you should bring the best cast iron skillet that you own. Leave your prized, enameled Staub or Le Creuset items at home and opt for a more budget friendly line like Lodge or Basic Essentials. These skillets are super durable, and more importantly, they’re not terribly pricey. So, if you do scruff ’em up, it’s no big deal.

Related Items

Lodge Seasoned Cast Iron Skillet, 10″

Basic Essentials 3-Piece Cast Iron Frying Pan Set

Bring Clean Kitchen Towels and Stainless Steel Scrubbers

There’s no way around the fact that you’re going to get some food stuck on your pan after you’ve been using it for eggs, burgers, tacos, and whatever else you’ve got going over the fire. To help wipe these stubborn bits away, it’s helpful to have some stainless steel scrubbers or a cast iron brush that can loosen stuck-on bits from the pan, as well as some clean kitchen towels to wipe it all away.

Related Items

Scotch-Brite Stainless Steel Scrubbing Pads (3-pk.)

Full Circle Tenacious C Cast Iron Brush

Mainstays 10-Piece Flour Sack Kitchen Towel Set

Make an Abrasive Salt Paste

If you’re still having trouble removing some especially stubborn, stuck-on food particles, sprinkle the pan with salt, then add a few drops of warm water and make a paste. This will act as an abrasive and help you scrub away any lingering food bits. Wipe away any salt after you’re done scrubbing.

Don’t Sweat the Soap

Most people will tell you to keep even a drop of soap miles away from your cast iron cookware. Sure — too much dish soap on your pan is not great for the pores in the cast iron, however a few drops won’t ruin the skillet. If you have warm, soapy water that you’re using to clean your other cookware and utensils, it’s okay to use this water on your cast iron, as well. Resources are limited in the great outdoors so now is not the time to be picky over what your cast iron can and cannot handle. Make sure to dry your pan immediately with a clean towel afterwards.

A Warm Pan Is a Clean Pan

It’s always easier to clean a warm pan with warm water. If you need to heat a little bit of water to pour over your pan for cleaning, then you should definitely do that. While it is generally a great trick to boil water in a dirty pan for a long time to loosen any caked-on bits, this is not ideal for a cast iron skillet because it’s so porous. Instead, you’ll want to pour a little bit of warm water on the dirty pan and gently massage it with a stainless steel scrubber, then dry it immediately afterwards.

Season With Oil

No matter where you’re cooking, one thing that is very much a constant when it comes to cast iron care is this: The best way to keep your skillet shimmery and looking brand new is by wiping the clean, dry skillet with oil and gently warming the pan after it’s been seasoned. This will keep the enamel strong and the exterior looking fresh and smooth. You can use whatever neutral flavored oil or even olive oil if that’s what you brought along to cook with.

Embrace the Imperfection

The beauty of camping is doing your best to deal with the elements. If you’re not able to clean your pan as thoroughly as you might be able to when you’re in the comfort of your home kitchen, that’s okay. Give it your best scrub, maybe a little abrasive salt paste, and a good wipe, and call it a night. There’s no reason to be stressing over the state of your cast iron when you’re out in nature. Make yourself a s’more and keep it moving.

Introduction: Camping Meal Clean-Up

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Cooking meals at a picnic or on a camping trip, I enjoy. Cleaning up afterwards, I don’t enjoy! Here’s an idea, though, that my family uses when traveling to make it easier to get the plates, cups, pots & pans ready for the next meal.

Step 1: Hot Water? No Problem.

Since we cook our meals on a Coleman stove, as soon as one of the burners is available, we heat a pot of water (water just needs to be hot, it doesn’t need to boil) to use for washing the dishes. By the time we’ve finished our meal, the water is hot and ready to use.

Step 2: Clean-Up Assembly Line

Most of the time we have access to water for cleanup, but just to be sure, we always travel with at least 1 gallon of water (reusing a Clorox bottle works great for this!). We have 2 large solid plastic bins that nest together and carry miscellaneous odds and ends until meal time. Then, we convert them into the ‘kitchen sink’ – one for washing and one for rinsing.

After the meal, we start the clean-up assembly line. Add cold water to each basin. Some plastic bins may melt if boiling or very hot water is added first; we’ve never had a problem by adding cold water before the hot water. Next, add hot water to both basins, more hot water in the bin used for washing dishes, plus liquid dish soap and about a teaspoon of Clorox (helps to sanitize dishes) to this bin.

We usually put the two basins on the picnic table bench seat as seen in the photos, but the edge of the table works well, too. Gather everything that needs to be washed, then start washing, rinsing, and placing on the table for drying, washing the ‘cleanest’ of the dirty dishes first and working your way through the stack to be washed. If you think you’ll need more hot water before all the dishes are washed, start heating more water while washing the dishes, and the water will be ready when you need it.

Everyone in the family or group can pitch in to tackle end-of-meal clean-up and then move on to having more outdoor fun.

Unkempt campsites attract pests and bears, so keep it tidy with these tips and tools.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

When it comes to a clean campsite, planning ahead is key. Set a few key rules for your group about clean-up before you arrive. Stock up on cleaning tools, reusable plates and cups, and bear-safe containers before your trip. You’ll keep animals and insects away while you’re enjoying the great outdoors, and your campsite will look just like it did when you arrived.

Clean Your Tent and Backpack Before the Trip

The week before your camping or backpacking trip, thoroughly rid your tent and backpack of any crumbs and stains, so lingering odors won’t attract pests or bears. REI recommends Nikwax Tech Wash, a specially-formulated cleaner for outdoor gear.

Bring Cleaning Tools

Consider bringing along a broom and dustpan, or a Dustbuster, for the inside of the tent and picnic tabletops and surfaces. Bring scouring pads to clean tough pots and pans.

Keep Your Clutter Together

Car camping can mean a lot of odds and ends in tote bags in the trunk. Make Marie Kondo proud by streamlining your camping miscellany so that it all fits in one or two Rubbermaid storage containers. Hauling small items to the campsite, however close, just got easier.

Create a Reusable Camp Kitchen

The less you have to throw out, the less food residue there will be to attract bugs or bears. Remove packaging before you get to camp, or pack it all out with you, and bring reusable kitchen utensils. Also pack reusable containers to wash out after consuming food, empty cardboard six-pack holders to store odds and ends, and collapsible cups. collapsible cups can hold almost six fluid ounces of hot or cold beverages and fold down easily to fit in a small bag or pouch, and Kuju Coffee is perfect for compact camp pour-overs.

Use a Groundcloth or Tarp to Catch Crumbs

Spread a picnic blanket, groundcloth, or fine mesh tarp under your cooking station and eating spots to catch any errant crumbs and prevent the ants from marching in.

Clean up Before Dark

It can be tough to motivate your camping comrades to clean up in the dark, especially after they’ve imbibed a few brews by a cozy campfire. Maybe you didn’t bring lights with you or you want to save energy, so before the sun goes down, crank up the dishwashing music so your camp crew can dig into scrubbing those pots and pans. Pack everything away safely and you’ll be ready to snuggle up into your sleeping bags and tell ghost stories instead of cleaning into the night.

Scrub Your Dishes with Biodegradable Cleansing Agents

Dr. Bronner’s is an easy camp dishwashing option you might already have lying around the house; Campsuds are also multi-purpose, working to clean your body and hands too. If you don’t have any biodegradable suds, skip the Dawn and use wood ashes. Set up your dishwashing station as far from your campsite as possible, and strain the greywater of any food remnants, which you’ll throw into the trash.

How to clean dishes on a camping tripHow to clean dishes on a camping trip

Last weekend we went camping in Macedonia State Park. It was beautiful. Our campsite was nestled along a babbling brook. I had always thought that was just an expression, babbling brook, but I will admit this brook convinced me other wise. It made such a peaceful sound as it moved over the stones. Listening to that sound all night…It was great!

Our campsite was set apart from the others. One of the reasons we picked the site was that it had its own bathroom and access water. Once we arrived I realized that the “bathroom”, and I use the term loosely, was not everything I had hoped for (don’t worry I will spare you the details), but the water access was actually pretty cool. The well water was accessed by using an old fashioned water pump. I had never used one of thee before and doing so made me feel like I had been transported in time. That is actually one of the things I am really starting to like about Connecticut, everywhere I look there is history. Whether it be old houses, stone walls dating back to colonial times, or really cool old water pumps.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Before the trip I sat down and wrote out our menu for the week. I tried to think about food I could easily cook in a skillet or on the grill top I was bringing. I also wanted to make sure the food I brought would not spoil in the coolers. I decided to marinate the cut up pieces of steak for the kabobs and then freeze the meat. This would help keep things cold in the freezer and the meat would continue to marinade as it thawed. I also froze the sausage links for our breakfast on Day 2.

How to clean dishes on a camping tripDay 1

We arrived at the campsite around 2:00 pm. I was pleasantly surprised to discover that the camp site had a grill already attached to the fire pit. I had brought my grill top from home, but having the pre-built grill made an excellent base for the one I brought. We were a little hungry when we arrived so instead of cooking, which was impossible since we had not built the fire yet, we had a quick snack of Almond Butter Protein Balls and cut up an apple. I find that preparing a few snacks ahead of time can be a real life saver!

We spent most of the afternoon setting up the campsite and gathering firewood. Once we had gathered enough wood we got the campfire started. We wanted to cook dinner over the embers and not the open fire so we built up the fire and let it burn down. This helped ensure more even heat for cooking our dinner.

Dinner: Since I knew we would likely be busy most of the first day I pre-made some burgers for us to grill up on the campfire. I brought one of the grates from my gas grill at home to cook on. I also cooked some of the squash and zucchini from my garden in a tin foil pouch with a little bit of butter.

Dessert: Roasted Homemade Marshmallows and pieces of dark chocolate. Before the trip I took the time to make some of our clean eating Homemade Marshmallows. While this may seem like a lot of extra work, I wanted to be able to enjoy this traditional camping treat without sacrificing our clean eating menu.

Day 2How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Breakfast: Our breakfast on the first morning was organic sausage and fried eggs with a dash of cayenne pepper. I cooked the sausage in the skillet first. This helped to season the skillet and give our fried eggs a little extra flavor. Yum!

Snack: For a snack we had s couple of Almond Butter Protein Balls that I had pre-made for the trip. I packed them in ice in the cooler and they held up perfectly!

Lunch: Since we had a big breakfast and morning snack, we didn’t really do any cooking for lunch. Instead we had some homemade hummus with veggies sticks, some bananas, and more almond butter protein balls. It was the perfect amount of food without weighing us down.

Dinner: For dinner on the second night we made Steak Kabobs, Sweet potatoes cooked in a pouch with onions, fresh rosemary and butter. I used the pieces of steak that I had marinaded before we left. I found that putting them in the cooler frozen worked out great! They were thawed and well marinaded by the time we were ready to cook them.

Dessert: For dessert we roasted some more Homemade Marshmallows. You can’t have too many marshmallows while camping right?

Day 3

Breakfast: For breakfast on our last day we made scrambled eggs. We also had a couple of pieces of homemade banana bread that I made before the trip.

For me, the prep work I did ahead of time made the biggest difference in the success of my clean eating camping trip. Preparing as much food as possible ahead of time really took some of the pressure off cooking and allowed me to fully enjoy my trip!

Backcountry camping or camping out on a campground for a few days always sounds like a great idea – enjoying nature, disconnecting from the grid, enjoying quality time with loved ones, and sitting around a campfire. But the thought of going multiple days without a shower is daunting. What about your greasy hair? And the general grimy feeling? And won’t everyone stink by day 3?

While some may like to let nature take its course, here are some important tips for maintaining your personal hygiene – for everyone’s sake – while on the trail or campground:

Pack two outfits to alternate days. By having two outfits, you can wash one with extra water (or water from a nearby source) and hang it up to dry at night. Even if you don’t have access to water, you should hang it up to air out through the night.

Bring extra water for undergarment laundering . If you don’t have access to water nearby, bring extra water so that you can, at the very least, wash underwear, socks, and bras daily.

If there is a lake or stream along your trail or near your campsite, take a bath in nature . Just rinsing off in fresh water will remove excess dirt and oils.

If that’s not your thing or there is no water, bring extra water and biodegradable soap in order to bathe yourself. Just strip down at least 200 feet away from your campsite and 200 feet away from any water source that may exist. Then, using the water and soap, bathe away, paying particular attention to the groin, underarms, and face.

If there is no lake or stream, and it’s too cold to take a bath with soap and water, an alternative is to bring baby wipes or biowipes and clean yourself with this method. These are also useful for when nature calls.

In any of the above bathing scenarios, use a microfiber towel for quick drying.

Use hand sanitizer after every bathroom break, as well as before cooking and eating.

If greasy hair bums you out, try an unscented dry shampoo (unscented to avoid those B’s – bears and bugs), or work some baby powder into your roots to cut the grease.

Wear synthetic-material clothing that wicks moisture. Bacteria thrives in moist conditions, so avoid cotton clothes that may soak up the sweat and opt for wicking clothes instead.

Bring a toothbrush, toothpaste, and floss as well as the above materials, but avoid deodorant, perfume, hairspray, shampoo, and any other scented and environmentally-unfriendly materials. Also remember to avoid brushing teeth and bathing within 200 feet of a water source or your campsite. You may be a welcome guest, but it is ultimately nature’s home, and it’d be terribly rude to contaminate it.

Hey guys! Sorry I have been MIA for the last little while – life just got crazy busy all of a sudden and I needed some time to catch up. I’ve also been spending a ton of time working on getting our yard ready for the summer and the weather really hasn’t been helping me out.

Anyways… we just had our Victoria Day long weekend here in Canada so I kind of feel like summer has unofficially started – even though we still have over a month left of school. Camping season is here and, whether or not you actually had off to a campsite or just enjoy a campfire out in your backyard, cooking up some good ol’ camping food is a fun way to celebrate summer. For some reason, everything just tastes better when it is cooked over the fire!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

With a little prep work, you can plan some yummy meals for your next camping trip AND save more time for fun while you are away! Here are some of the best camping recipes and easy prep ideas around…

First off, if you don’t have a pie iron you really need to get one . There are so many fun and delicious recipes that you can whip up with these, I could really devote a whole post to them. I was a little leary of these spaghetti sandwiches at first, but they were SO good. It’s basically just combining your garlic bread with the spaghetti but a lot easier to eat when you’re camping!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Pizza pockets are another favorite of ours for the pie iron and can easily be customized with whatever filling you would like – the ham and pineapple pizza pockets are one of my favs.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

These tacos in a bag are another easy idea and a big hit with the kids. As an added bonus, they also really cut down on the dish washing required!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Campfire potatoes make a great side dish for either dinner or breakfast.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Foil packets are another fun way to eat during camping trips and, with minimal dishes and no grill to clean, you can’t really go wrong! To cut down on prep time, many of the foil pack recipes can always be prepared prior to leaving so you have one less thing to worry about while you are away. Breakfast burritos are always a hit with everyone and can be easily cooked in large batches

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

If you like to make your breakfast fresh, these lumbarjack foil packs are another way to go and just as delicious!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

For the fancy camper, you can even make french toast on the campfire– just add some fresh fruit and syrup.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Cheesy fries are a fun treat to add with sandwiches for lunch. Have a few toppings pre-chopped on hand and everyone can customize their own packets.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

There are tons of foil pack options for dinner too such as this BBQ chicken with potatoes…

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The aluminum pie trays are another good option if you like to prepare your food ahead of time. You can either make things in the large pie trays or use the smaller ones for individual serving dishes so you don’t have to use plates. You can even enjoy homemade mac and cheese!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Of course, the best part of campfire cooking is the desserts! There are so many yummy treats to pick from – it’s so hard to decide. You can never go wrong with s’mores though and I love mixing up the cookies and chocolate layers .

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

If you are looking to take your s’mores to the next level, try these samoa s’mores. These are definitely on my list for our next camping trip!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The kids always go crazy with campfire cones and they love picking out what treats to put inside.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

For something a little bit different, try this Chocolate Pie Iron Monkey Bread. It’s the best ooey gooey goodness ever!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

What about you? Any favorite camping recipes I should try?

For more camping ideas, check out these posts…

Published November 17, 2021

Reviewed October 2021

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Camping and hiking can be the perfect escape to enjoy the beauty nature has to offer. But whether you set out for a few hours or a few days, keep important food safety principles in mind when planning meals, snacks and drinks.

1. Keep Hot Foods Hot and Cold Foods Cold

Bacteria multiply rapidly within the “danger zone,” the temperature range between 40°F and 140°F. Keep foods out of the danger zone by keeping hot foods hot and cold foods cold. This means not only cooking and reheating foods to a safe internal temperature, but also properly storing foods that require refrigeration. Perishable foods should not be left unrefrigerated for more than two hours, or more than one hour if it’s over 90°F outside. Luckily, with a few simple steps, you can keep food safe even without the luxury of a refrigerator or microwave.

Short Hikes: If you are going out for a short hike, bring along nonperishables or chilled foods. To keep cold foods cold, freeze overnight or cover them with frozen gel packs or frozen juice boxes and bottled water. These frozen beverages will thaw during the hike while keeping your food cold.

Overnight Camping: If you are camping overnight, cook foods at the campsite to the proper internal temperature. Pack a food thermometer to ensure foods have reached a safe temperature, because you can’t rely on sight or taste alone to determine doneness.

  • Cook burgers made of raw ground beef, pork, lamb and veal to an internal temperature of 160°F.
  • Heat hot dogs and any leftover food to 165°F.
  • Cook all poultry to a safe minimum internal temperature of 165°F.
  • Cook all raw beef, pork, lamb and veal steaks, chops and roasts to a minimum internal temperature of 145°F. For safety and quality, allow meat to rest for at least three minutes before carving or consuming.

Only eat the cold items if they remain at or below 40°F. In most circumstances, eat cold foods on the first day. However, if you are car camping (driving to your site) you will have the luxury of being able to bring a cooler. To keep food coldest – and safest – load food straight from the fridge into your cooler just before you leave the house, rather than packing it in advance. And remember, don’t eat any perishable food that has been out of the cooler for more than two hours, or more than one hour in temperatures above 90°F.

2. Don’t Forget to Wash

Bacteria will spread easily in an unclean environment. Bring soap, water, clean towels and hand sanitizer. Always wash your hands, utensils and all surfaces before and after preparing and eating food.

3. Keep Water Safe for Drinking and Dishes

Don’t drink water directly from a lake or stream no matter how clean it looks or use it to cook food or wash dishes. Some pathogens thrive in remote bodies of water and there is no way to tell what is in the water. Bring a full bottle of purified water and replenish your supply from tested public systems. If that is not possible, purify any water from the wild.

One way to make water safe, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, is to boil it to kill microorganisms. Bring water to a rolling boil and then boil for at least one minute. If water is muddy, allow it to stand for a while until the silt settles to the bottom. Then boil only the clear water off the top. At higher elevations, boil for at least three minutes because the boiling point of water is lower. Allow it to cool for at least 30 minutes, then store in clean, sanitized containers with lids.

If boiling water is not an option, water purification tablets and water filters may be used but their effectiveness in controlling viruses, bacteria and parasites can vary. For safety, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Prevent Cross-contamination

Bacteria from raw meat and poultry can easily spread to other foods from dripping juices, hands or utensils. Avoid cross-contamination by washing your hands before and after handling food and by using different platters and utensils for raw and cooked meats, seafood, eggs and poultry. Double-wrap meat and poultry when transporting in a cooler to prevent raw meat juices from dripping onto other foods.

5. Always Clean Up

Keep food safety tips in mind when washing dishes and cleaning up the campsite. You can buy biodegradable camping soap but use it sparingly and keep it out of fresh bodies of water because it will pollute them. Wash dishes at the campsite, not the water’s edge, and make sure all water is purified. As you get ready to leave the campsite, leftover food should be burned or carried out with you. Bring garbage bags to dispose of any trash.

RV Expeditioners may collect a share of sales or other compensation from the links on this page. This comes at no additional cost to you, and all the prices and availability are accurate at the time of publishing.

People don’t exactly look forward to doing dishes at home, let alone when camping with an RV and a limited supply of water. Nevertheless, you have to keep your RV tidy and your dishes should be just as clean as they would be at home.

Here are some tips and tricks on how to clean your dishes if you don’t want or can’t depend on the RV sink.

Necessary Items

  • (3) Sinks, buckets, or plastic containers
  • Coarse sponge
  • Biodegradable dish soap
  • Metal strainer
  • Absorbent cloth
  • Paper towels
  • Sanitizer

Step-by-Step Guide

Clean plate club

This step is all about logic. The better you finish your food, the easier it is to clean the dishes. A dog bowl would be very easy to clean, for example.

Prep dishes

Clean the dishes before washing them. This means you have to scrape as much as you can of the leftovers, grease, and sauces. Use paper towels, kitchenware, or bread.

The dish line

The dish line or the three-bucket system requires you to use three separate plastic containers or buckets. Each one has a specific purpose. Arrange them in the following order: wash, rinse, bleach (optional).

Fill each container up to half full with water from a stream. Use the first one to wash the dishes, the second one to rinse them, and the third to sanitize the dishes (required if you’re not using water from the sink).

Towel drying

Use a paper towel or a highly absorbent cloth to quick-dry the dishes. There’s nothing wrong with air-drying, it just takes too long.

Look for all your dishes and kitchen utensils

After you’re done with the last plate or bowl, start looking for other things that need cleaning. Knives, forks, strainers, pots and all. This way you can save time and the limited supply of water available.

Consolidate gray water

Dump all the water from your sanitize and rinse sinks into the wash sink.

Strain food scraps

Use a large strainer to separate leftovers from the water when pouring the water from the wash sink into another sink.

Dispose of gray water

Dispose of the gray water in designated locations. If you’re not near any specially designated facilities with drain water basins, you’ll want to scarcely disperse the water over a large area. Also, make sure you’re at least 200 ft. away from freshwater sources.

Tips and Warnings

  • Consider a vegetarian menu as opposed to always cooking meats. This will minimize grease and leave you with easier to clean dishes.
  • Don’t cook too much food
  • Using a slice of bread to clean a plate of leftovers is always a good idea. It works even better on greasy plates
  • If you’re all about the outdoors then you might want to avoid using disposable plastic tableware to help protect the environment
  • If your RV doesn’t have enough water left to handle washing dishes, consider locating some nearby water sources and wash your dishes outside using the dish line method
  • When you are cooking your camp food, don’t take your eyes off the pot. You know what they say about prevention. Be sure to stir the mixture frequently and to add more water than you think is necessary. There is nothing worse than a burnt pot when you’re camping.
  • Avoid using the bathroom sink to wash dishes

Conclusion

Even though you now know how to clean dishes while camping, without water you can’t do a thorough job. Whenever your RV sink is unavailable, plan ahead and store some water in a free compartment or park your RV near a water source.

If you’re spending time in the great outdoors and happen to be cooking over a wood fire, you can take a page from our ancestors and use wood ashes to clean your pots, pans, and dishes. Mixing wood ashes with fats and oils left in dirty cookware will make a very basic type of soap that works well in the field.

Authority-questioning blog Truth is Treason notes that human beings have used wood ashes as a source of lye to make soap for centuries. Commercial lye is very caustic and, as any viewer of Fight Club will note, causes chemical burns. The small amount of lye you extract from a few cups of wood ashes will not harm you but it can leave your hands dry if you forget to wash them after the dishes are cleaned.

Pick your greasiest pot and add a few cups of wood ash to that pot. Add enough hot water to make a paste; the hot water will create potassium salts from the wood ash that will mix with the fats in the pot to make a rudimentary soap. When the paste is cool to the touch smear it over your dirty cookware and dishes and allow it to dry for several minutes. Finally scrub and rinse your dishes. Make sure you use purified water to clean the dishes; they’ll be touching food again and you don’t want any disease-causing organisms to come into contact.

While there are many types of biodegradable soaps that work well for camping such as Dr. Bronners and Campsuds , it’s worth knowing how to make your own if you forget to pack soap or if you run out. Photo by Rick Bradley .

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

We’ve compiled 60 easy camping food ideas to take away the stress of creating a camping meal plan, all the way from breakfast to dessert.

Yup – 10 easy camping breakfasts, 10 lunches, 10 camping dinner ideas with 10 easy side dishes, plus 10 snack ideas and 10 camping dessert options. We’ve got you covered!

And to make our list of easy camping food, the food or dish had to be portable, require little prep or be able to be prepped ahead at home, be simple to cook or reheat using a camping stove or fire, and use minimal dishes while at camp.

And be sure to print our free camping meal plan template along with a printable version of these 60 meal ideas at the bottom of the post!

*(This post contains affiliate links. This means we may receive a small commission, at no additional cost to you, if you make a purchase through a link. See our full disclosure.)

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Easy Camping Breakfasts

Banana Bread or Muffins

Your favorite banana bread is something worth making in bulk so you’ve always got some on hand in your freezer. Biting into delicious bread when camping is such a treat! And if you’re camping with a lot of people (especially kids), baking your recipe in a mini muffin pan* cuts out the step of slicing while at camp.

Fruit and Yogurt Parfaits

At home: Wash and chop up several kinds of fruit, and smaller pieces are usually better if intended to go in a parfait. Pineapple, grapes, apples, blueberries, raspberries – just about anything is delicious! If using a fruit that gets brown like apples, dip them in orange juice after chopping and dry on a paper towel (the orange juice will still taste great too). Consider bringing granola or nuts as well.

At camp: Using individually bought yogurt containers will cut down on your cleanup. Simply lay out your tupperware full of fruit and nuts/granola choices and let everyone make their own!

Banana Roll

Spread peanut butter on a tortilla (warmed is even better), peel the banana, and roll it up in the tortilla. You could cut the banana in half lengthwise and use only half of it for little ones, or cut the snack into bite sized pieces after its rolled.

Ziploc Omelets

At home: A day or so before camping, wash, chop, and add any ingredients you’d like in your omelet to a Ziploc bag. The morning you’re leaving, break open a couple eggs into the bag. Press the air out and seal.

At camp: Squeeze the ingredients around in the bag before dropping it in a pot of boiling water. For a couple bag omelets, about 8 or 10 minutes in boiling water should do the trick. Remove a bag with tongs to check its doneness before dumping them all out onto plates.

Deluxe Camping Meal: Add salsa or cilantro, a side of fruit, and a slice of banana bread.

Quick Cook Oats or Overnight Oats and Toast

At home: We like to make our own packets of quick cook oats to limit the amount of added sugar – here’s the recipe I use to make them in bulk every couple of months. And if you don’t even want to heat water in the morning, another option is to make overnight oats – here’s a recipe for that.

At camp: For the quick cook oats, just boil ½ cup of water, stir it into the oats, and let sit for a couple minutes. For overnight oats, they are ready to eat! Making toast in a cast iron skillet with just a little cooking spray is a nice addition!

Aunt Jemima (just add water) Pancake Mix

This specific pancake mix* only requires that you add water to the batter before cooking – so simple. Don’t forget syrup or honey!

Avocado Toast with Hard Boiled Egg

At home: Boil your eggs. Afterwards, mark the shells with a sharpie so you don’t get them mixed up with any raw eggs while at camp.

At camp: Chop up your boiled egg. Either slice or mash up your avocado. If you have a cast iron skillet, heat it up, spray it lightly with cooking oil, and add your bread, turning once brown. Layer the avocado and boiled egg on your toast, add some salt and pepper, and enjoy!

Boiled Egg Sandwiches

At home: Boil your eggs.

At camp: Assemble simple but delicious breakfast sandwiches. Use english muffins and add your favorite cheese, sliced ham or precooked bacon, and the sliced boiled egg.

Deluxe Camping Meal: Taking the extra step of quickly heating all the ingredients in a pan before assembling can make this even tastier. And better yet, you could cook fresh eggs to go in the english muffin if you’ve got the time and energy.

Egg and Potato Scrambler

At home: Wash and chop up any veggies you’ll want in your scrambler. And purchase frozen cubed potatoes or frozen hash browns.

At camp: Start cooking the potatoes as directed on the package, add in your veggies and eggs towards the end of the cooking time and top with shredded cheese.

Deluxe Camping Meal: Toast some bread in a cast iron skillet or serve with banana bread and fruit.

Premade Breakfast Burritos

At home: Follow your favorite breakfast burrito recipe at home by cooking everything that goes in the burrito as directed, wrap them in a tortilla, and then tightly wrap it in foil. If the burritos are made to order, write each person’s name on the foil. These can be made ahead of time and frozen.

At camp: If frozen, these could be thawing in your cooler while you’re at camp. Heat over your stove or fire the morning you want to enjoy this delicious camping breakfast!

Deluxe Camping Breakfast: Add salsa and a side of fruit.

Camping and picnics require planning to keep your food safe.

How to clean dishes on a camping tripFollow these simple steps to improve your camping experience and prevent food contamination on your trip.

Camping and picnics provide unique challenges in keeping your food safe. Keeping foods cold both during travel and camping requires planning.

Michigan State University Extension offers the following food safety tips so that you have a most enjoyable outing with your family and friends.

  1. Eggs, meat, poultry, fish and milk and precooked foods need to be store at temperatures under or close to 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Pathogens, which are microorganisms that can make you sick begin to grow quickly in food as it warms up. During extended camp trips, it is especially difficult to keep the food as cold as necessary.
  2. Plan ahead and freeze large containers of ice to help keep your food as cold as possible. Large blocks of ice will take longer to melt than the same amount of ice in smaller containers. It’s easy to make ice by putting water into clean half-gallon milk cartons, plastic buckets that have had food in them, like ice cream buckets or partially filled zip-lock plastic bags. Plastic pop bottles can also be used but only fill them two-third of the way full of water. The extra room in the containers allows for the water to expand as it freezes. Individual servings of juice in cartons can be frozen and used later.
  3. Ice that is loose in the ice chest cools food rapidly, but can easily become contaminated from meat juices or hands reaching into the cooler. Keep ice for drinks in a container that is not in contact with food.
  4. Prepare perishable food at home. This will result in fewer problems with clean up and cross-contamination at the picnic grounds or camping site. Put meat and poultry in an extra plastic bag. For example, hamburger patties can be shaped at home and put in a plastic bag. If they are to be used that day, refrigerate. If they will be used 2-3 days later, freeze and let thaw in the ice chest.
  5. Keep the ice chest as cool as possible. The back seat of a vehicle can be cooler than the trunk of the car during travel. Extra insulation can be added to the ice chest by wrapping it in a beach towel or blanket. Keep the ice chest in the shade at the picnic or campsite.
  6. Always pack a food thermometer to check the temperature of both the cold food, which should be 40 degrees Fahrenheit or lower, and to check the temperature of your cooked foods. Whole fresh produce such as potatoes, onions, apples and oranges are safe with out cooking (but you still want to wash your produce before using). Canned foods, dried foods, peanut butter and jelly are always safe. Pickles, mustard, mayonnaise and catsup have a high enough acid content that it is not essential they be kept cold throughout the trip. On longer camping trips, plan on using nonperishable food towards the end of the trip just in case your ice is gone.

By following the tips above you will know you have done your best to keep your family and friends safe from a nasty foodborne illness that would surely ruin a fun picnic or camping trip.

This article was published by Michigan State University Extension. For more information, visit https://extension.msu.edu. To have a digest of information delivered straight to your email inbox, visit https://extension.msu.edu/newsletters. To contact an expert in your area, visit https://extension.msu.edu/experts, or call 888-MSUE4MI (888-678-3464).

Did you find this article useful?

Figuring out your camping packing list can certainly seem daunting. Camping gear lists will vary based on your planned activities, time of year and length of trip. Plus, everyone’s needs are a little different. But a really helpful approach is to break your list down into different areas.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

We’re going to start with must-haves, then move into more specific lists for your needs.

Camping can be so much fun: living in the great outdoors, relaxation, sunshine and going as rustic as you choose. From provincial parks to Crown Land to privately owned campgrounds, there is a campground for everyone. If you are camping for a family vacation, a couple weekend getaway, a guy’s angling adventure or even a girls’ escape to nature, to help you plan your fun we have developed some helpful lists to make the packing task so much easier.

The must-haves for camping trips include:

  • Equipment
  • Cooking gear
  • Personal “stuff”
  • First Aid and general everyday health needs
  • And (of course) clothing

So let’s dive into each!

Ontario safely aligns to COVID-19 public health and safety measures.

Please check directly with the business operator before you travel. Get the most up-to-date information now.

Equipment: Camping Packing List

  • A tent that is big enough to comfortably sleep your group
  • Enough pegs to properly fit your tent and a mallet to secure pegs
  • A ground sheet that should be about 2-3 inches smaller than the outside dimensions of your tent to avoid pooling of water
  • A piece of indoor/outdoor carpet or a mat for outside your tent
  • A tarp, this is so important, as you still have to cook outside in the rain. This tarp is key to keeping dry! Some campers pack a dining tent in addition to their sleeping tent, but a tarp is still required for cooking in the rain
  • Sleeping pad or an air mattress and a sleeping bag. Always ensure your sleeping bag is rated the same as the temperatures you expect during your trip
  • Pillow(s)
  • Extension cords if your campsite has electricity
  • Rope and clothespins
  • Flashlight, battery powered lanterns, extra batteries, candles, matches/lighter
  • Broom, dustpan, axe/hatchet, pocketknife
  • Battery powered radio
  • Watch, alarm clock, solar powered/electric phone charger
  • Backpack
  • Garbage bags, rope, duct tape
  • If you are planning to hike or explore, bring a map and a compass or better still invest in a GPS unit. Always be aware that in many areas, particularly in Northern Ontario, there is no cell service
  • If your campsite does not have picnic tables bring a folding table and chairs
  • Campfire wood, of note you cannot bring campfire wood into Canada from the U.S. You can, however, purchase firewood in Ontario. Provincial Parks in Ontario do not allow collection of firewood in the campgrounds
  • Drinking water, not all parks have access to clean drinking water

Cooking Gear: Camping Packing List

  • Fuel powered stove top with extra fuel
  • Plastic or steel washable plates, bowls, cups
  • Eating and cooking utensils, including a set of sharp knives
  • Pots, frying pan, strainer, mixing bowl(s)
  • Oven mitts, potholder
  • Can opener
  • Cutting board
  • Dish pan, dish soap, dish clothes, t-towels, scrub pad/steel wool
  • Cooler(s)
  • Plastic containers
  • Wipeable tablecloth
  • Paper towels, aluminum foil, plastic wrap
  • Personal water bottles, one for each camper
  • Kettle (electric, if you have electricity available, or a stove top kettle)
  • Corkscrew
  • Coffee pot
  • marshmallow/hotdog skewers

Personal “Stuff”: Camping Packing List

  • Shampoo, soap, hairbrush/comb
  • Towels, bath and hand towels
  • Portable shower or shower bag, if there is no shower access where you are camping
  • Toothbrush, toothpaste, floss
  • Mirror
  • Hand sanitizer, wipes
  • Toilet paper
  • Feminine products
  • Body lotion, hand lotion, deodorant, lip balm
  • Nail clippers, tweezers
  • Kleenex
  • Prescriptions, enough for the entire trip
  • EpiPen
  • Sunglasses
  • Sewing kit
  • Shower flip flops
  • Camera and extra batteries

First Aid and General Health Needs for All Camping Trips

  • First aid kit
  • Sunscreen and sunburn lotion
  • Burn ointment
  • Gas relief medication, antacids, laxative
  • Insect repellent, bug spray
  • Antacids
  • Ibuprofen or aspirin
  • Insect repellent with DEET
  • Thermometer
  • Antihistamine medication

Camping is such a wonderful way to spend your holiday or even just a weekend. Each adventure is full of smiles, laughter and, of course, relaxation. So remember to take your time to pack well, and then your only worry will be trying to pack in all of the great things to do in Ontario.

Festivals are back! But so is the rain and the mud. Here’s how to clean your kit clean so it’s ready for next time.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Festivals are finally back! After many events being cancelled and postponed, glitter-soaked music fans are flocking back to muddy fields in their thousands for the weekend of a lifetime.

Anyone who has been to a festival knows just how messy they can get. Whether it’s hot and dusty or wet and muddy, being exposed to the great outdoors can wreak havoc on our clothes and our equipment. Not to mention the germs living in communal toilets and showers, and after the year we’ve had, we should all know the importance of staying clean and sanitised.

Whether you’re just back from a festival or have been on a family camping trip, your kit needs cleaning, drying and repacking ready for next time. Here’s how to speed through it as efficiently as possible.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

We earn a commission for products purchased through some links in this article.

Mud on your clothes

Mud will often come out of washable fabrics simply by machine-washing it at 40C with a biological detergent. For more stubborn stains, first pre-soak in a branded stain removal product. Follow the manufacturer’s guidelines and then wash the item as normal on a biological wash.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Muddy tent

It’s best to partially clean it before it comes home with you, but if you haven’t, give it a good clean now and make sure to air and dry it really thoroughly before putting it away. A good cleaner we recommend is Fabsil Tent Care Kit. Also, if it has windows, open these up to encourage venting. Store your tent in a dry place, such as the loft or shed.

Dirty wellies

Decent wellies can cost a fortune and need looking after. After every wear, scrape off any large clumps of mud – if it dries on, it’s often much tougher to get rid of. Then, take some soapy, lukewarm water and a cloth and go over the boots to get rid of all the remaining dirt and mud.

After this, allow the boots to dry completely, away from direct sunlight or artificial sources of heat. If kept near these for too long as they dry, the boots can suffer permanent damage to the rubber. Then use a proprietary boot buff and shine spray to restore them to their glory.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Top festival washing items

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Sleeping bag

You can often machine-wash synthetic sleeping bags but do ensure you follow recommendations on its care label. During washing, ensure all zippers and Velcro tabs are secured. Wash on a gentle cycle (up to 30°C) with a gentle detergent.

For hand-washing, fill your bath with warm water and add a gentle detergent. Place your bag into the tub and gently massage the water into the bag until it is saturated. Leave to soak for 1-4 hours, depending on how dirty it is.

Drain the water and then add fresh water, and massage the water into the bag again. Repeat this process until no suds are visible in the water. Press the water out of the bag and squeeze out as much water as possible. Fold the ends of the semi-dry bag in towards its centre and press firmly until water is expelled.

For drying, you can often tumble-dry your sleeping bag on a low temperature setting. Please note that excess heat can melt the fabric. To air-dry your sleeping bag, lay it out flat on towels over two portable clothes racks. Dry in a shaded area out of direct sunlight, as excessive exposure to UV will degrade the nylon shell fabric. A hot dry windy day provides the perfect conditions for air-drying your sleeping bag outside.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Backpack

Depending on the size of the backpack itself, you can either hand or machine wash it. Always check the care label to ensure you are washing it in a way that won’t damage the bag.

To machine wash, empty the backpack, checking all pockets. Leave pockets unzipped. If there are removable straps you may wish to hand wash these separately. Make sure you backpack will fit in the machine and has enough room to move about.

Put your backpack in a laundry bag, this will stop straps and zips getting caught and damaging the bag or machine. Alternatively, you can use a pillow case or turn the backpack inside out. Use a small amount of gentle detergent (not regular detergent or fabric softener as these can damage the material). Wash on a gentle cycle in cold water. Allow the backpack to dry naturally away from direct heat sources.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

If possible hang the backpack upside down to dry. Do not tumble dry as this can damage the bag. Ensure the bag is 100% dry before storing.

If your pack is too large to fit in the machine, wash it in the bath. Fill a bath with plenty of lukewarm water as hot water can cause colours to bleed. Add a small amount of gentle detergent and, using a soft brush or cloth, scrub the bag, focusing on areas that are particularly dirty.

An old toothbrush is useful for particularly tough stains and getting into difficult to reach areas. Allow the backpack to dry naturally away from direct heat sources. If possible hang the backpack upside down to dry. Do not tumble dry as this can damage the bag. Ensure the bag is 100% dry before storing. If the care label states not to fully submerge the backpack, use a wet cloth with a small amount of cleaner.

How to clean dishes on a camping tripSome people have a hard enough time washing dirty pots and pans at home, let alone out in the backcountry. Cleaning camping cookware while on the trail comes with a number of unique challenges. Here are a few tips to help you keep those pots, pans, and dishes clean while backpacking or camping.

1. Don’t clean dishes directly in water sources

Cleaning your cookware directly in a stream or river may seem convenient, but it contaminates water sources. This can affect the organisms in and around these water sources.

Always wash dishes and camping cookware at least 200 feet away from a water source. It’s tedious to do it right – walking back and forth between water and where you clean your cookware – but it’s the responsible thing to do.

2. Dig a hole

When doing dishes on the trail or in the backcountry you should always dig a hole for the dirty water. These holes, known as catholes or sumps, should be 6 to 8 inches deep.

Burying water in these holes helps break down dirty or soapy water, and is also makes it more difficult for animals to come across.

3. Minimize dirty dishes

Consider cooking and eating in the same pot to reduce the amount of dirty dishes you create.

You can eat some foods, such as instant oatmeal or dehydrated backpacking meals, directly from the packaging, further eliminating clean up.

4. Bring wipes or a scouring pad

Having a wipe, rag, sponge, or scouring pad helps remove stuck on food. You should already have a resealable bag or container for trash, but consider bringing an extra one for your cleaning instruments.

5. Use dirt to clean your cookware

Dirt helps absorb oils and food particles, making cleaning much easier. Make sure that there aren’t any rocks that might scratch your camping cookware, and avoid using dirt on cookware that scratches easily.

Again, dig a hole at least 6 inches deep to bury the used dirt.

6. Bring biodegradable soap

Biodegradable soap is better than using other types of soap, but that doesn’t give you license to dump your suds anywhere you please. There’s no soap out there that’s OK to dump in nature.

Biodegradable camp soap is better, but be sure to pour any dirty or soapy water into a hole.

7. Clean is a relative term in the backcountry

Accepting that your camping cookware is “clean enough” can help immensely. Do your best to clean your dishes and utensils, but know that you can’t always get that deep clean like you can at home.

Stop by Uncle Sam’s Safari Outfitters for camping cookware, backpacking stoves, dehydrated hiking meals, and any other outdoor gear you need before your next outing!

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The thought of camping in the woods can be daunting — hot showers and bathroom facilities aren’t easy to come by — but the activity needn’t be synonymous with dirtiness. Whether you’re off on a quick weekend getaway to a national park or a week-long backcountry trip, there are ways to practice personal hygiene and stay clean throughout your trip. Even better, reduce your impact on the environment with product suggestions that are biodegradable and eco-friendly.

Clean It All With One Soap

Packing a multi-purpose soap that’s tough enough for dishes and sensitive enough for your skin is a space saver when camping. Crafted with plant oils like nourishing olive, coconut, and palm, Dr. Bronner’s 18-in-1 pure Castile soap can be used safely to clean almost anything, including dishes, fruits and vegetables, hair, and dirty laundry. A small amount goes a long way, and because it’s a highly concentrated soap, consult their website for proper dilution ratios depending on whether you’re using it as a shaving cream or as a body soap. While phosphates found in regular soaps can promote algae growth in water sources that can be harmful to animal health, Dr. Bronner’s soap is both non-toxic and biodegradable. However, continue to use it at least 200 feet away from your campsite and any stream or lake. Dispose of grey water at your campground’s disposal units instead, or scatter the grey water over a wide area away from the site. Though the soap comes in a variety of scents like peppermint, lavender, and rose, scentless is best while camping to avoid attracting wildlife.

Don’t Skip Out on Brushing Your Teeth

When you’re out in the woods where bathroom facilities are non-existent, brushing your teeth without leaving a trace can be tricky. While some campers choose to swallow their toothpaste, others walk far away from their campsite and adopt the spray method by swishing their mouth with water and spraying the residue over a wide area to minimize any potential environmental impacts. This prevents wildlife from sniffing out the residue and eating it later. You can reduce the impact of your oral hygiene routine out in the woods by choosing an all-natural toothpaste, like one from this Tom’s of Maine line. Passionate about the quality of their products, Tom’s of Maine keeps your mouth feeling fresh with wholesome ingredients derived from vegetable oils, birch trees, and naturally sourced silicas.

Choose from the following to find a site:

Campground Open Dates and Fees are Subject to Change

Campgrounds are seasonally opened and closed. Open dates are approximate. A heavy snow pack may delay the opening date. Early closure may occur in order to protect water systems from freezing and to efficiently schedule work for seasonal shutdown.

Links to easy print documents:

Campgrounds – contains complete campground information

Reservations
Toll Free 877-444-6777
TDD 877-833-6777
Intl: 518-885-3639
Internet: www.recreation.gov
• Group campgrounds can be reserved up to 12 months in advance.
• Standard campsites can be reserved up to 6 months in advance.
• For sites that do not accept reservations, select an empty site and self register when you arrive.

Campground Rules
Specific campground rules are posted at each campground entrance. The maximum stay period allowed varies. Backpacking trailhead camps generally have a one night limit. A maximum stay period of 7-14 days is normal for most campgrounds. Standard sites accommodate up to 6 people per site. Group sites accommodate larger groups.

Occupying Your Campsite:
• Pay your camping fee within 30 minutes of arrival, and before 2:00 p.m. if staying another day.
• All tents and equipment must be located within the designated site. Use designated parking space.
• Carry water to your campsite for all washing. Do not use faucets or restrooms for washing dishes, cleaning fish, or bathing.
• Site cannot be unoccupied for more than 24 hours without permission.

Campfires:
• Remember to check for fire restrictions before your trip.
• Use designated fire ring for all fires.
• Purchase firewood on site. Burn it where you buy it!
• If collecting firewood, do not cut standing or live trees. Collect only dead and down wood.

Food Storage:
Do not leave anything attractive to animals in your car, including: coolers, grocery bags, recycling and trash, canned food, beverages, coffee cups, alcohol, air fresheners, cans or bottles, toiletries, or anything with a scent. Bears are known to break into cars to access all of these items.
• Clean up promptly after meals and secure food.
• Use the bear-resistant lockers to store all food and scented items, including ice chests and coolers.
• Secure trash and recycling in the proper receptacles.

Pets:
• Leash your pets at all times and clean up after them.
• Keep your pet within your designated campsite.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Published on June 17, 2021

Camping season is here. Is your cooler ready? Call me a romantic, but there’s something about cooking over a fire and eating in the dirt that makes food taste better, even if a troupe of ants are fighting to claim the watermelon. Still, a bit of strategizing is essential for creating a well-fed camping trip. My meal plan always includes a mix of campfire-ready classics and a few make ahead staples (read: cold brew , because I’m not getting up for a sunrise hike without caffeine).

There’s no need to pack a whole kitchens’ worth of tools in the trunk, but you’ll definitely want to bring along a few staples. In addition to plates and utensils, consider bringing along these tools for the below menu: A cast iron to cook directly over the fire, a cooler to keep perishables from going bad, a trusty chef’s knife, a few sturdy mixing bowls, a roll of tin foil to make packets (more on that below), and some containers to hold any leftovers.

Read on, and don’t forget the s’mores supplies.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Photo Credit: REI

1. Foil Packet Shrimp Boil from REI

I know what you’re thinking: shrimp, on a camping trip? But the pleasure of eating Cajun-spiced shrimp around a crackling fire is too good to pass up, and a bit of advance planning makes this the perfect first night dinner. Trust camping authority REI to drop a recipe uses foil packets instead of the classic bubbling pot of water so you’re not draining that water jug on dinner. The foil also helps seal in moisture by creating steam, ensuring everything will cook evenly (as long as the ingredients are roughly the same size). For bonus points, slice the corn, zucchini, and andouille sausage before you go (or appoint a camp-side sous chef).

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Photo Credit: Asha Loupy

2. Asha’s Double Date and Ginger Granola from Diaspora Co.

Granola is a make-ahead camping hero. It’s perfect for breakfast and mid-hike snacks, and can even be scattered atop s’mores for extra crunch. Asha Loupy’s recipe for equitable (and wildly delicious) spice company Diaspora Co features tahini for a dose of nutty richness, date syrup for sweetness, and two kinds of ginger (powdered and crystallized) for major gingerbread vibes. Use whatever nuts and dried fruits your group likes most, and be sure to make a double batch. This is guaranteed to go fast.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Photo Credit: Andrew Scrivani for The New York Times

3. Everyday Pancakes from The New York Times

Pancakes are the ultimate camping breakfast. Mark Bittman’s recipe is especially suited for outdoor cooking due to its simplicity—the basic batter is just eggs, flour, milk and baking powder. For ultimate ease, combine and pack the flour and baking powder before heading out on your trip, then add the milk and eggs in the morning to make the whole campground jealous.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Photo Credit: J. Kenji López-Alt

4. Skillet Shakshuka from Serious Eats

A bubbling skillet of juicy tomatoes and just-set poached eggs is perfect for any meal of the day, although this North African and Middle Eastern staple is especially popular for breakfast. J Kenji López-Alt’s one-skillet recipe cooks eggs in a tomato-red pepper sauce perfumed with cumin, paprika, and cayenne. A few traits make it especially ideal for camping: it’s easily assembled in a cast-iron skillet, simple to scale up for larger groups, and relies on pantry staples. Pack a few toppings like pre-picked parsley or cilantro, canned artichoke hearts, and hot sauce for extra credit.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Photo Credit: Kyle Johnson

5. Ember-Roasted Corn and Leeks from Bon Appetit

A foolproof side, no de-silking corn husks required. Chris Morocco’s recipe cooks leeks and corn directly on the hot embers leftover from a large campfire, so it can be the last thing you make after cooking those shrimp boil packets above. Once charred, the vegetables are coated with butter and a fiery spice blend: coriander seeds, pepper flakes, and sesame seeds. Mix up the spice blend before you head out and make double to season your morning eggs.

Keep your hands, your cookware, and your environment clean

Share this:

  • Click to share on Facebook (Opens in new window)
  • Click to share on Twitter (Opens in new window)

With we start camping close to home and summer skiing spots begin to open up, staying on point with washing your hands during the pandemic is super important. Sure, you can continually keep dosing your hands with hand sanitizer when there isn’t soap available, but being able to fully wash your hands has been shown by the CDC to protect yourself and others from getting sick.

We dove into a couple biodegradable soaps that are available in small containers (making them super useful for camping in your truck, van, or in the backcountry), to see how well they work for scrubbing off your plates and your paws. The standard of cleaning was a dirty pan that cooked scrambled eggs for breakfast burritos, as well as how well it lathered and cleaned hands to keep us germ free as we begin to embark into the outdoors.

Alpine Provisions

Fir + Sage Castille Soap 2oz

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

I’ve been using Alpine Provisions Castile Body Wash for over a year now since I live in SLC’s watershed and it’s perhaps the best thing to use for shaving. It’s a concentrated and gentle soap made of organic olive and coconut oils along with sustainably sourced essential oils.

In short, it smells amazing and isn’t full of sketchy detergents. A little bit goes a long way in terms of lathering and it’s great for keeping your hands and face clean at the campsite. However, it didn’t tackle the dirty pan that well, but was substantially less harsh than the other trail soaps. All in all, the two-ounce bottle was the best for having a nice soap to lather and clean hands at the campsite.

Juniper Ridge

Coastal Pine Travel Size

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The Juniper Ridge Cascade Forest wash has a refreshing citrusy pine scent. The concentrated soap lathered up the dirty pan well for cleaning though it didn’t quite accomplish much, even with heavy scrubbing.

It cut grease better than the Alpine Provisions, so it could do some light duty dishes, but it’s more appropriate for keeping up with good hygiene. Both, the Juniper Ridge and Alpine Provisions are a good option to keep in the truck outside of camping, as we travel to trailheads for biking and running, etc.

Pure Castille Liquid Soap 4oz

Dr. Bronner’s

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Perhaps the best of the bunch given its widespread availability and ability to clean while not being toxic. Dr. Bronner’s is made with organic oils and fair trade ingredients, and has no synthetics or harmful products. They were one of the first to lead in this realm, and their soap worked well for all tasks.

From washing dishes, properly cleaning hands to prevent germ spread, to quickly washing off from a dusty bike ride it handled everything. It also comes in a variety of scents, though I personally like the 18-In-1 Hemp Lavender.

Campsuds

Biodegradable Concentrated Soap

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

The Campsuds annihilated the egg pan with ease. Just a few drops in some water provided quick and easy cleaning of the dish. It lathered up well, and while the other soaps here are concentrated I would say this one is much more potent.

I only had to place a tiny drop on my hands before adding water to properly wash them. What’s also nice is the bottle explains proper discarding of the biodegradable soap, so you don’t harm surrounding vegetation and wildlife.

Sea to Summit

Super Concentrated Wilderness Citronella Wash

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Sea to Summit’s Super Concentrated Wash was another jack-of-all-trades soaps. It made for easy work of the egg pan with a cap full of soap and added water, and then was just as pleasant to properly wash my hands.

It felt less harsh than the Campsuds on my skin, and when compared to washing off some areas of my legs that had scrapes and nicks from trees it didn’t have a burning sensation. The citronella smell was nice, and apparently it can keep bugs away as well.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to wash dishes by hand:

  1. Prep – scrape off food
  2. Fill – get some clean, hot, soapy water
  3. Wash – scrub them, under the water
  4. Rinse – wash off all suds and residue
  5. Dry – air dry or towel dry

There are two common ways to hand wash dishes: by “diluting” dish detergent in a sink or dishpan filled with water, or by squirting detergent directly onto a sponge or the dirty dish (called the “neat” method). Whichever dishwashing method you choose, be sure to follow product directions to determine the right amount of detergent – especially with concentrated varieties, which may require less product than you think. So, read the label!

And remember: some cookware, like baking pans with air cushioned inside, should not be submerged in water. Check the manufacturer’s instructions for advice!

Here are details on each step to make the job as easy as possible:

1. PREP

Scrape dishes to remove leftover food – use a rubber spatula or paper towel. For stuck-on foods, soak dishes/cookware before washing: add detergent or baking soda to the sink/dishpan (or soiled pot) and fill with hot water; soak for 15 to 30 minutes, then drain and proceed with Step 2.

TIP: never pour grease down the drain — it can cause a clog.

2. FILL

Fill sink or dishpan with clean, hot water. Add dish soap to the water (read the label for dosage; some concentrated dish detergents require a smaller amount). Stack a few dishes in the sink at a time – this allows a few minutes of soaking time while you work on washing.

TIP: Throughout the process, drain the water and start over if it becomes greasy, tool cool, or if suds disappear.

3. WASH

Wash “in order,” starting with lightly soiled items. This usually includes glasses, cups, and flatware. Washing these items first followed by plates/bowls and serving dishes. In general, dishes wash easily if you keep them under the water while scrubbing them; as you work, pull each dish out of the water to check for missed spots. End with cookware/pots and pans; if you soaked pans with baked-on foods, washing will be easier. Don’t forget to wash the bottom of the pan.

TIP: Be extra careful when handling kitchen knives! Don’t pile them in the sink; instead, wash them one by one and immediately place them handle-up in the drying rack (or flat to dry).

4. RINSE

Rinse suds and residue with clean hot water. Rinse by dipping in a rinsing sink or pan, passing under a stream or spray of hot water; or, by placing them in a drying rack and pouring or spraying water over them. If you have a double sink, use the second sink to rinse off washed dishes.

TIP: Be sure to rinse inside cups, bowls and glassware

5. DRY

Air drying is easier than towel drying. However, wiping with a clean towel is helpful when glassware or flatware is spotted or filmed. Make sure the towel is clean, and change the towel when it becomes damp. Paper towels work well for drying pots and pans, especially if they contain traces of grease.

TIP: Remember to clean up when you’re done. It’ll make tomorrow’s task easier! Rinse and wipe down the sink, dish drainer, and dishpan. Rags, dish cloths, and sponges should be left out to air dry, or laundered in the washing machine. Remember to replace sponges and rags frequently.

This post may contain affiliate sales links. Please read my disclosure policy.

This Camping Mac and Cheese recipe is the easiest and cheesiest make-ahead meal! This recipe is for when you want macaroni and cheese on the go. Get ready for the best camping dinner experience ever.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Camping Mac and Cheese | On the Go!

Camping Mac and Cheese? A Pacific Northwest kind of thing.

Probably more of a Lauren’s Latest thing.

Do you camp? You’re going to want to after one peek at this recipe.

You guys, camping for me isn’t just hot dogs over a fire. My mom taught me from a young age that we can eat just as deliciously on vacation at the beach camping then we do at home. It just means a little cooking in advance! So in honor of me having gone on a camping trip sans husband and providing my fellow campers with oatmeal chocolate chip cookie s’mores, I decided that I should think of more meals that people would probably not want to make or think they couldn’t make whilst camping.

Why macaroni and cheese was the first thing that popped into my head, I’ll never know. But here is the recipe! I do take a few short cuts, but by golly is this stuff amazing!! Try it and see 🙂

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Main Ingredients Needed

Super simple recipe made from super simple ingredients! Here’s what you’ll need:

  • Elbow Pasta – this is the pasta of choice when it comes to making mac and cheese. So good!
  • Alfredo Sauce – either use store-bought (I got mine from Trader Joe’s) or make homemade alfredo sauce.
  • Cheddar, Mozzarella + Parmesan Cheese – three types of cheeses for maximum flavor!
  • Half & Half – this helps the alfredo and cheese blend together when heating.
  • Salt + Pepper – season to taste!
  • Anything Else You’d Like to Add – bacon, jalapenos, smoked sausage, bell peppers, etc.!
  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip
  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Preparing Camping Mac and Cheese

For all of the nitty gritty details, see the recipe card down below 🙂

Find Aluminium Pie Tins

Since we’re cooking these on the fire/on an outdoor grill, start by finding these mini aluminum pie tins. Just found these at the grocery store! Spray 4 of them with nonstick cooking spray and set them aside.

Cook Pasta + Combine Ingredients

For the actual mac and cheese recipe….it’s not much of a recipe. I like to call it a cheaters mac and cheese because that’s exactly how I feel about it. This recipe is cooked elbow macaroni, store-bought alfredo sauce, parmesan cheese, mozzarella cheese, cheddar cheese, half & half, salt & pepper. Once the pasta is done cooking, rinse it with cool water and drain well. Then stir in all of these goodies and that’s basically it.

Cool + Add Lots of Cheese

You want to cool down your pasta so the cheese doesn’t melt. The last thing you want is a glob of cheese in the middle of your dish. It would be so hard to divide!

Anyways, divide this cheesy mixture in between your pie tins. Obviously top with more cheese!

  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip
  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip

Storing

Now, as for storage: we’re going to cover these with foil because again: foil won’t get completely destroyed in a fire pit. Write out what it is so that in your cooler when you go camping, you’ll know to keep these all together and away from the melty ice water.

Be sure to spray the other side of your foil with more nonstick cooking spray. I hate when all that melty, gooey cheese sticks to the top . The things I think of…

Cover these bad boys up and seal them as best as you can. I like to actually put all 4 of these guys into a large ziploc bag so if they do happen to get submerged into that grody, melty ice water in the cooler, it’s no big deal.

These should last 3-4 days in a cooler, if kept cold enough!

  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip
  • How to clean dishes on a camping trip

How to Cook Camping Mac and Cheese

Prepare Coals

Once you are ready to cook these, get a fire nice and hot and let it burn down to hot coals.

Heat the Mac and Cheese

Place a grill over top and heat up your mac n cheese 8-10 minutes or until hot and cheesy! YUM. Depending on how hot your fire is, this could take no time at all, or could take a little longer. The key is to not set them directly over your heat source. Burnt mac n cheese was never good.

Since everything is more or less cooked, all you have to do is heat it through.

The best part of this recipe is the edges and the tops got a thin layer of crispy cheese that added a whole new level of deliciousness.

I’m kind of in love with crispy cheese.

How to clean dishes on a camping trip

More Macaroni and Cheese Recipes to Try!

  • Smoked Sausage Mac and Cheese
  • Pumpkin Mac and Cheese
  • Buffalo Chicken Mac and Cheese
  • Pimento Mac and Cheese
  • Broccoli Mac and Cheese
  • Instant Pot Mac and Cheese
  • Butternut Squash Mac and Cheese

Anyways, if any of you are headed out to camp or even if you don’t camp, try this mac n cheese recipe out. It’s so fast, so simple, and awfully delicious!

How to hug a girl who’s taller than you

Hugging a girl taller than you is difficult. His height causes them to be difficult targets to embrace.

1. Hug her. To do it properly, read on.

2. If you are afraid of having your breasts on your face or some other uncomfortable part of the hug, try one of these techniques:

3. Try the lateral hug. Simply, place an arm behind your back as you stand shoulder to shoulder and give it a firm squeeze. You can learn more of it from http://happyvalentinesdaylove.com/.

4. Hold it from behind – Keep your hands around your waist and do not let them go up or down. This is a hug for couples.

5. Embrace normally, but watch your head. Keep your head out of the portion of a breast to avoid slipping on them or seeing them directly. One way to avoid planting yourself in your breasts is to turn your face away from the center, so that your cheek is against it and your nose points towards your closest arm.

6. Investigate a point for a hug that gives you an advantage in height. Standing a step up from the tall girl can create a perfect hug position.

· If you have enough confidence and plan to hug the tall girl a lot, get comfortable with the idea of ​​her breasts on your face. It is possible to ignore them.

· Stand on points.

· Tilt your neck towards your ear.

· Put one hand under her arm and gently pull her over her collarbone. This will cause her to tilt, eliminating the breast problem. If you are much shorter than her, something like 5 inches then have her stand even higher to avoid the breast problem.

· Do not hug a girl who does not want to be hugged.

· Be careful when you hug, and make sure she also wants to hug you; you do not want to give the impression that you just hug her to put your head on her breasts.

· Be careful where you put your hands! Do not even think about putting them on your ass, that’s a lack of respect for her.

ok ive been going out with this for a bout 5 weeks and we havent hugged yet were 11 (kinda sad i know) and were planning to hug tomorrow shes a little taller than me 2 or 3 inches what would be the best way to hug her i really want her to enjoy this hug because we really like each other any other small tips would be appreciated but the main question is what would be the best way to hug her im thinking aroud the waist but im not sure thank you to all that help and God bless you.

13 Answers

Aww this is the cutest question i have seen so far today i mean your planning to hug thats cute. Well then guys should always hug girls around the waist. Just hug her normally like if you were hugging a girl shorter than you. But, try hugging her everyday like when you see her in the morning it shows that you really like her.

okay last yr i was in 6th grade 11 lol

and i was taller than my boyfriend and he just hugged me around the waist cuz it would be awkward if he hugged me how guys would normally hug girls but yeah lol that’s why i date people the same height as me now !

i do no longer think of smallness has something to do with it. it truly is unlike dudes love each and each short woman. it truly is a stereotype. If that grow to be actual actual i would not be 19 and easily have had one boyfriend and 5′ and 80 5 lbs. yet we’ve been at the same time considering that center college so because it truly is probable why yet nonetheless the two way. additionally i do no longer think of it truly is straightforward u merely eager as much as now a dude merely for being super tall. it truly is like singling out short dudes merely how u sense ur being singled via human beings because of the fact of ur top. If u do no longer prefer human beings juding u over being short than do no longer single all people else out for being short. Plus i myself do no longer see how ur so short yet u won’t be able to be pleased with somebody familiar top. i could comprehend if u have been a tall woman than yeah i might comprehend yet. considered one of my puppy peeves while a woman is variety of a midget below 5′ and can’t be thoroughly pleased with a individual merely a tad bit below 6’0. it truly is one element to loving a guy inspite of the fact he’s over 6′ and it truly is yet another element to easily seem particularly for a guy whose over 6’0 on purpose. It merely would not make any experience to me. besides some dudes do no longer innovations short human beings. i’ve got have been given some tall guy pals they have by no potential suggested something approximately my top and that i myself could care much less approximately theirs merely saying. so idk what’s up with the human beings ur with. so goodluck. notwithstanding

if possible – go for a hug around her neck – it is more manly and you will feel more in control. If you ever hug around the waist it should be to pick her up. Good luck.

Hmm. When you hug her reach up towards her shoulders and she’ll most likely bend down. She’ll probably feel a little uncomfortable too. Don’t worry too much. good luck!

Stand on your tip toes.

She will probably put her arms around your neck, so put your arms around her waist.

stand on your tippy toes, jkjk i dont think it matters

Latest Articles

Ex-SQ Girl & Director Quit Her Cushy Desk Job to Become a Pork Seller.

JB Has a Daiso-Like Store That Sells Everything for Mere SGD$0.70 & it’s Just.

95YO Granny Travels 1 Hour to Work as Coffee Shop Cleaner in Woodlands As.

Taxi Fares from S’pore to JB is at $12 Per Pax or $48 Per.

A Boy Has Allegedly Been Going Around Asking for Piggyback, Claiming to be Injured.

Whenever you go out, you will always couples everywhere hand-in-hand. But they all have one thing in common. Most of the time, it’s always the guy that is taller than the girl, not the other way around. Maybe there are but it is still uncommon. Apparently, it seems that guys do not want to date girls taller than them mainly due the intimidation and stares other people give when they go on a date. Plus, in every relationship, the guy is sort of supposed to be the taller on, not the girl.

But if you disregard these factors, dating a taller girl than yourself is actually way much better and more fun than you think. These are the reasons why.

1)Builds self-esteem
To the guys, sure, approaching a woman taller than them may actually feel a bit intimidating, not to mention asking them out on a date. Not only do you fear mockery and rejection from the taller girl, you also will be uncomfortable at the looks people give.

But here’s the thing. Height is just a physical measurement and cannot be used to dictate love. Furthermore, by successfully dating a girl taller than you, not only do you automatically feel great since you just conquered something that is physically taller than you, it is also the first step in you begin letting go of some of your insecurities in dating a taller girl as height has become something less to worry about.

And in turn, this helps you build more self-esteem and self-confidence since not only have you broken the intimidation barrier, you have done something not many guys are willing to do.

2) You don’t have to see them wearing heels that hurt their feet just to accommodate your height
Every woman who wore heels will know how painful and uncomfortable they are to the balls of their feet. Not to mention the feeling of about to fall down whenever they lean back. Plus, which guy would have the heart to see their girls in pain just to accommodate your height?

However, if you guys date a girl taller than you, you can spare them the misery of wearing heels whenever you two go out. I mean, heels are there to make girls feel taller, but since she is already taller than you, no point wearing heels. Instead, she can wear comfortable flats and still look hot, thanks to her long legs.

3) They look good in almost any outfit
Maybe this does not apply to all tall girls, in general, their long limbs and legs make them rock any outfit they wear. A dress will make them look like a goddess while pants make their legs look like they go on forever. She will look fabulous even in the simplest form of the dress. She can even change her hair style as per the changing trends. Any latest trendy cut will look great on her. Now, tell me, which guy wouldn’t like a girl that looks like a model in anything she wears?

4) Long legs
Do I need to say more? Studies have shown that in addition to the chest, guys also tend to get turned on more by long legs . Plus, long legs look damn sexy in tight jeans or skirt. So, it isn’t that bad when the girl you date is taller than you. At least she possesses a pair of long legs.

5) They tend to be more independent
In general, tall girls tend to grow up in an environment where they are treated like guys due to the fact that they are taller than most guys. They are probably expected to play basketball and participate in guy activities. But that is not totally. They are still pretty dainty and do things which any normal girl does. They also know how to do so much more but it has nothing to with the fact that they are tall. Instead, society has taught them to be independent and masculine because they are built like men in terms of height. Plus, they don’t really have to call you over just because she cannot reach something. She can well manage things by her own.

6) They are your personal oversized cuddle toys
If you date a girl taller than you, and when you hug her, you basically feel like you are hugging your bolster at home, albeit an oversized one that appreciates the cuddle. Plus, if your height only reaches up to the chest and when she just hugs you and your face just get plastered into her uhm, chest, not only will you be guaranteed a hard on, but you can enjoy the feeling of her uhm, warm and soft breasts against your face.

If you’re on Tiktok regularly, you’d have seen Raymond dance on TikTok. Who is Raymond and why he is so popular on TikTok? And who’s the lady beside him? Here’s who he is and what the song is all about:

Hugs can be awkward for tall guys, if the person who wants to hug is a lot shorter. Although, tall guys do appreciate hugs like everyone else, so just avoid these 3 things and go for it.

The most important advice when you want to hug a tall man is to 1) not hug his waist, 2) not stop mid-way and 3) not hug for too long.

These are tips you’ll quickly learn to remember and use without thinking about it when the situation arises where a tall guy needs a hug.

Let’s dive into each of the 3 things to avoid.

Tall Hugs and How to Not Make it Awkward

The most awkward hugs to get as a tall guy are the ones where the other person makes a big deal out of the height difference. If they try to hug you in a different way than they normally would, chances are you’ll get a cold, misplaced hug that none of you enjoy.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Why You Shouldn’t Hug his Waist

As a tall man, you feel like a giant if someone hugs you around the stomach—almost like when a child hugs a parent.

Imagine that a tall teenage guy gets a hug by a girl from his class (that he likes). She walks up to him and hugs him around the waist, which makes the guy feel like he’s a dad being hugged by his daughter.

This isn’t a very nice feeling, if you are interested in the other person. And even if you aren’t, these waist-hugs feel awkward as you’re just standing there, being hugged—rather than hugging back.

The resemblance to tree-hugging is not far-fetched, as it looks and feels like being a tree that is being passively hugged by a person. The tall guy’s arms are most likely locked in, so there’s no possibility of taking part in the hug (read: hugging back).

What you should do instead is to go for the chest, like you would with a person at the same height as you. The classic “over-under” where one arm goes over the shoulder and the other goes around the chest also works for tall guys.

The only difference is that you might want to stand on your toes, stand on something that elevates you a little or just accept that he has to bow down a little to receive the hug, you have in store for him.

Why You Shouldn’t Stop Half-Way

You might feel tempted to just stop mid-way through the hug. If you’re short and hug a tall guy, you may think it’s not possible and just give him the impression that you wanted to give a big hug but couldn’t because of height differences.

Well, as a tall guy, this is worse than not getting a hug at all. Either you go all-in and insist on hugging—or you choose not to. The half hug doesn’t make a tall guy happy. It makes him feel very tall and awkward.

What you should do instead is to openly show your intensions of wanting to give a hug—by opening your arms while walking towards him and throw in a big smile.

This gives the tall guy time to bow down a little and position his long limbs the right way, so the hug can be carried through with no entanglement or half-way interruptions.

To get a hug from someone who insists on hugging you is the best feeling. If you can tell the other person really wants to give you the hug and doesn’t care how tall or small you are, that carries over into a warm feeling of being appreciated.

This sincerity is much more important than any hugging technique you’ll find online and should be the foundation underneath any attempted hug towards anyone.

Why You Shouldn’t Hug for Long

If you have understood the first 2 points of this post and feel well-equipped to not hug his waist and not stop half way, then you’re close to being the perfect tall hugger.

You’ll be able to give a real, sincere hug to him that he can do and feel. Now, the only thing to avoid now is that it drags out for too long. Because even though you hug him right, he can’t do it for too long.

Tall guys will need to bow down to you, if you give him the classic “over-under” hug with one arm over and one arm under his shoulders. It’s a “chest to chest” hug, and as your chest is lower down, he will naturally have to bow a little.

As good as it feels to be hugged liked a regular person, it also becomes straining to stand in the bowed-down hugging position for much longer than 3-4 seconds.

So, what you do is that you do the right hug, go all in on it, then release him after a few seconds of loving connection.

Those are the 3 tips I want to give you—based on “my own career” as a tall man at 6’8″. I’ve been lucky to receive many hugs over the years, and the best ones are the sincere ones.

If you avoid these 3 pitfalls when hugging your tall friend, partner og family member, you are good to go and can let the hugging begin.

How to Go for the Kiss?

If you are ready to go for the next level and kiss a tall guy, you should absolutely do so. We love it. Just remember these few extra tips, and you’ll be kissing tall boys in no time.

  1. It’s a great help if you can stand on your toes while the kissing is happening. Not having to bow down longer than necessary is a huge help and will enable the kiss to go on for longer.
  2. A bench is a great place for a kiss. It’s romantic, it’s comfortable and the height difference between you and him matters a lot less when you are both seated.
  3. Find some stairs, curbs or similar elevated ground that gives you a little extra height. This will reduced the strain on your neck as you kiss him. And it will also force him to bow down less than he normally would.

Those are the 3 main things to have in mind as you prepare for the perfect moment, where you either stand on your toes, seat him on a bench or drag him over to a curb—before reaching for the stars.

As I mentioned, you only need a handful of pointers to make hugs and kisses for tall guys a lot more convenient and enjoyable.

But, just don’t get swallowed up and discouraged by the internet’s “rules, ways and don’ts” of kissing tall guys.

If the intention is good, you are doing your best to accommodate the height difference and he’s ready for it, a hug and a kiss is always a nice thing to receive—no matter how tall you are.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

When I was at school, I could only get close to my friends by sitting on their laps or jumping into them. But you can’t do that in adulthood, so it’s always awkward when you have to hug someone shorter than you are. Likewise, it can get uncomfortable and uneasy while hugging a short girl, not to mention that it might leave her feeling like you are just making fun of her. So, if you’re willing to put in some effort, there are ways about how to hug a girl shorter that you so that it is more enjoyable and less awkward for both of you.

Why it’s hard to hug a short girl?

It is not easy to embrace a short girl. We have to bend our backs and get on one leg. That is leaning too much! Instead, we should hug them from the side, so we don’t have to get on one leg. Hence, this will not be too difficult for you, and the girl will also feel more comfortable being hugged from the side. It is a common misconception that all people love hugs. But not everyone likes them, and some people don’t want to be touched at all. The most probable reason for this happening is that a taller person has a higher centre of gravity which means they have more grip on the ground. There is also an advantage that why do girls like tall boys because when a tall boy hugs them from behind, the girl feels it very special.

Therefore, they can balance themselves better when someone hugs them from behind. On the other hand, short people have a lower centre of gravity closer to the ground. Therefore, if someone hugs them from behind, it is easy for them to lose their balance and fall over. We have highlighted few tips to keep in mind before leaning on for hugs. Such as-

  • Successful hugs require a certain degree of stature, not to mention the amount of space between people. The problem here is that hugging is much more complicated than it seems.
  • The first thing to factor in is the height difference between the two people. A person must be taller than the other for their arms to reach around them – this generally means that men need to hug women (and vice versa)
  • It also requires an appropriate distance between people, which can be about an arm’s length or more depending on their preferences but shouldn’t be too close like for platonic friends or siblings.
  • There is also the option of kneeling to be at eye level with the shorter person – the position may feel more comfortable for both of you.
  • If you have bent to hug a girl, you should retain that position for the duration you are hugging, don’t just relax your pose after placing your hands on her back.
  • The way to hug a short girl is to not put your arms around her but instead put your palms on her upper back, near the shoulder blades. Put your thumbs in the middle of her back and then slightly lean in. For this to work best, you should gently brace the base of her spine with one hand while you gently wrap your other arm around her. This way, you have better control over the height difference without having to bend over too much if they are very short. While you do this, make sure to lean in and talk to her.

It is important not to go overboard with your hug when hugging a short girl because otherwise, it can become too uncomfortable for both of you. If you are unsure how long the hug should last, simply do what feels natural instead of memorizing a time!

The Etiquettes of a hug

Hugging a girl the right way is not something that you should take lightly. You need to know when it’s appropriate to do so and when it’s inappropriate. It may seem like an innocent gesture, but certain circumstances when hugging a girl can cross the line.

A hug can be a very intimate gesture, and sometimes people get confused about whether or not they should hug someone, so if you’re unsure about when it’s okay to embrace your friend or loved one in a hug and when it might be best,, to leave them alone. But, on the other hand, hugs and cuddling are great ways to show someone that you care.

However, if the person you are hugging is not your friend, date, or girlfriend, there are some restrictions. The right way to hug a girl depends on how tall are you. If you hug a girl for the first time, it is best to keep the embrace brief and light. When you’re not sure if a hug is a right move, ask them if they want one or not, or offer something else like a handshake or a high-five instead.

Hugs are a form of physical contact, which is used to show appreciation, love and support. It’s not just for family and friends anymore. Hugs can also be used in business settings, with clients and even during the interview process. There are some guidelines when it comes to hugging for it to be appropriate. Here are some of the etiquettes of a hug:

– Don’t initiate a hug with someone you don’t know well

– Don’t make an awkward or aggressive hug

– Avoid messing up with her hair! (That is definitely something a girl will not like)

– Make sure your intentions are clear before initiating a hug

– Not to mention, do not touch someone inappropriately while hugging

– Allow space for the person who initiates the hug to pull away

– Don’t squeeze too tight. It is something that can be interpreted as uncomfortable or even aggressive

– Allow for air circulation while hugging

Be sure of your relationship with the girl you are going to initiate a hug with. If she reacts negatively, then this is the time to step back or even say sorry. But, from time to time, people like to hug for various reasons, be it a celebration, a wish, a congratulation, a farewell hug, and so on. If you have encountered that “one situation,” make sure to be a gentleman and do it the right way!

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

1. He can always grab that vase for you. I mean, I don’t know why I’m keeping that vase that high anyway, but he still grabs it for me every single time.

2. He makes you feel like a dainty little Tinkerbell. And he, he is a gentle giant. Even if I don’t fit into his jeans, I still feel like I could probably fit into his pocket.

3. You can wear 5-inch heels and still be shorter than him. Not that you can’t be taller than your boyfriend, but sometimes it’s nice to be able to wear your stilettos without feeling like a dominatrix leading your sub around the party on a leash. “Oh, him? This is Number 2. Bark like a dog, Number 2. Good boy.”

4. He always upgrades you to the extra legroom airplane seats when you go on vacation. Sorry you still have to cram in here, daddy long legs, but I could basically live in this legroom. *Rolls out sleeping bag, snuggles in for a nap.*

5. He’s the designated lightbulb changer. Thomas Edison designed lightbulbs to hang from the ceiling because he was a selfish Very Tall Man and he didn’t want anyone but Very Tall Men to reach them. He told me.

6. You can stand directly in front of him at a concert without blocking his view. Is there any way to take in a John Legend concert other than standing-spoon position?

7. When you sleep at his place, you can seriously sprawl out because he has a bigger bed than you. Don’t mind me, I’m just going to spread out like a kid making a snow angel because boy, you got rooooooom.

8. You always feel like you’re rolling with your own personal bodyguard. Is this my security detail? No, but it’s funny you should say that because that’s absolutely what I want people to think when they see us together.

9. You can literally run and jump on him like you’re in any movie love scene you’ve ever wanted to reenact and he won’t tumble over. We’ve already done six different Notebook reenactments and it’s not even Friday. This is the perfect relationship.

10. If you’re short and you procreate with him, there’s a fifty-fifty chance your kids will be tall. I think about this often and this is my strategy.

11. He’s basically a Forehead Kissing Factory. Every time you hug him, your forehead is right there, ready to be kissed, and he takes every opportunity to get on that shit.

12. Your calves are super-ripped because you’re on your tiptoes all the time. Six months of dating him is equivalent to a year of Ballet Beautiful classes.

13. He will for real pick you up. There is some part of me that absolutely wants to be picked up and carried. For romantic reasons and also because of laziness.

14. You will never lose him in a crowd. Even if you want to because he ate your Cheetos and those were your favorite and he knows it. Seriously, get your own bag, WTF.

Follow Emma and Lane on Twitter.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

This article originally appeared on VICE Canada. On Tinder, it’s super common to see guys listing their height. The implied reason is that women who are attracted to men, actually give a shit about this physical trait. I even once saw a guy list his height on his profile—5’8″—while simultaneously complaining that women cared so much about it. That was definitely a swipe left, but it seems like there’s this perceived obsession that women usually only want to date guys who are taller than them.

So, I decided to ask a bunch of women who are into guys if they actually give a shit. For the record, I’m 5’4” and, as a general rule, won’t seriously date guys who are shorter than me (though I have dated someone the same height as me).

Here’s what other women think about your height:

Relationships are an investment. Women get the short end of the stick in most cases. Men will use us to prove their worth socially… It is only fair we get to do the same because society looks at women with short, unattractive men as being foolish, gold diggers, etc. Why should I take a social blow for a short man when they rarely take social blows being with an ugly woman? They want to judge us on dating sites by photos of our faces and bodies to decide if we’re “worthy” of their attention. Well, how tall are you? Are you worthy of my attention back? Why are men the only people who get to make ego-based decisions? I have an ego as well.

If you know the man long-term and he’s short, but you like his personality, there’s no issue there with dating. The issue comes when we can’t make decisions to protect our own egos; when we are being told that the egos of unfamiliar men are more valuable than our own. On a format as shallow as Tinder, women are being solely judged on their appearance overall. If you have an issue with telling me your height so I can make a socially conscious decision, then I have an issue with you looking at my face so you can do the same. —Celia, 26

The VICE Guide to Tinder for Men, by a Woman

I’m 5’9”, so I’m pretty tall, but I still like to wear heels. My boyfriend is only a few inches taller than me, but he prefers when I wear heels that don’t make me look taller than him. I personally don’t mind it at all and do it anyway. I’ve also had a few men I was interested in before tell me that they didn’t like that I was taller than them—I think they find it intimidating for some reason. —Sam, 26

It doesn’t matter when you’re lying down, but significant differences in height do make some couple activities like dancing or taking photos a little more challenging. But it’s nothing that can’t be remedied with a little creativity. Plus, it can be really cute when people are in love and are different heights. If it’s like a fling though, and I were choosing for superficial reasons, taller than me is preferable. If you’re looking for a significant connection, measurements are not that important, but for a one-night stand, you might just want to sleep with someone who checks all the boxes in terms of your own idea of what is attractive, which could be tall or short. —Hannah, 28

I’m 5’8”, and my new boyfriend is much taller than my ex. My ex was about my height. I’m a pretty tall girl. Honestly, it’s never a thought to me. Sometimes, I see myself almost being like, omg, [my boyfriend] is so much taller than me! But then I’m like, why do I care? Am I joyful in comparison to my ex? I just don’t have the time or the heart space to look into these things. I just like to hug him, which for playful purposes, I do love the height of [my boyfriend]. But we’re just a more playful couple than my previous relationship so, back to that heart space… don’t care. You’re hot. —Megan, 24

I’m decently tall—5’7”—and would like for my partner to be taller than me. I’d like it if they were taller than me in heels, too. My last partner was 6’1, and I was happy with that, but the two before him were 5’9. It’s a preference, but not a requirement. And I’m willing to break that preference for Zac Efron or Scott Disick. Generally speaking, I have a type. But I will not rule someone out based on height alone. It may, however, be a contributing factor when paired with other things I don’t like. —Erica, 24

I don’t find height matters personally, like, at all. But some guys have hang-ups if they are shorter than you. I found they make little comments like when we are dancing or if they wanted a kiss. They would make little apologies or ask if I could avoid wearing high shoes. Personally, I am only 5’3″, so it’s pretty rare for me to find anyone shorter. I briefly went out with a guy who came just under my shoulders. I found it was him or others who seemed most affected. The guy I am currently with is much taller than I am, and it gets tricky when cropping or posing for photos, but other than that, it’s no big deal. One guy I liked was almost exactly my height. It was convenient in some ways but not a factor in the attraction department. I find it is always handy to have someone tall to help me with household things, but I have friends for that. There are much more important things to look for in a partner. —Laney, 31

I’m 5’7″. I have dated dudes shorter than me, my height, and taller than me. I’ve got to say it was much better when they were my height. Tall is OK and convenient for getting shit off of shelves and stuff, but that’s too much person. People don’t need to be that much people. —Kaylin, 26

History of ​National Short Person Day

If you can’t point out the short friend in your group, chances are you are the short friend. Not sure if that’s actually you though? Well, is your view often blocked at concerts? Do you find yourself doing a slight jog to keep up with your friend’s “slow pace?” Are you still carded at bars, even though you’re 30? Well, we have news for you, you’re the short friend.

Did you know that Napoleon Bonaparte, who is known for being short, wasn’t actually that short? In fact, he was around 5 feet 7 inches, which was tall for Frenchmen of his time. The myth of Napoleon being short actually arose because the British liked to portray their French enemy as “little Boney.” Also, since Napoleon was usually surrounded by soldiers from his guard, who were even more above average height than he was, he often appeared short in comparison. In his autopsy, he’s measured as 5 feet 2 inches, but that was in French inches which were larger than British and American inches.

Short people have obviously been around forever, but the classification of short differs depending on time period and nationality. In America, the average height for a woman is considered 5 feet 5 inches, while the average height for men is 5 feet 10 inches. In comparison, the average female height in China is 5 feet 2 inches and the average male height is 5 feet 6 inches. Therefore a man who might be considered short in America can be considered tall in China, meaning that tallness and shortness is all relative. But, if you’re short in your country, don’t be afraid to own it. This day is for you!

When they said “opposites attract”, we bet they weren’t exactly talking about height! Yet some of us are dating boys much more blessed than us in the vertical department. From the downright adorable to hilariously awkward, here are 23 things that happen when you’re dating a “tall-y”.

1. You always have to stretch for kisses and hugs. You’re now a pro at standing on your tiptoes.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

2. The house ladder has become redundant. But you’ve considered getting a step ladder for your make out sessions.

3. You have learnt to walk in his shadow (literally!)

4. You can’t hear the end of “Imagine how tall your kids are going to be!”

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

5. You inevitably end up teasing him with “How’s the weather up there?” He usually responds with an eye-roll.

6. There’s no such thing as a non-awkward public display of affection.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

7. Even if someone hadn’t noticed that you are vertically challenged, now they do!

8. You don’t need yoga, because all-that-stretching!

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

9.On the bright side, you feel tiny and protected by his towering presence.

10. You always have someone to reach the top shelf for you. It’s also super-convenient when you’re trying to stuff your bag in the overhead bin on an aircraft.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

11. You look up to him for everything. Something he never gets tired of teasing you about!

12. Holding his hand is super-uncomfortable. Instead you end up holding his arm.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

13. There’s no such thing as romantic walks in the rain, as sharing an umbrella is no easy feat.

14. He’s basically a forehead/ nose-kissing factory.

15. You have to wear sky-high heels every time you go out together. Ouch!

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

16. You find it really easy to spot him in a crowd.

17. You end up cutting off his face in most of your selfies.Thank God for selfie sticks!

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

18. You have to crane your neck to look at him, and for those long kisses. You are wondering if you’re going to need a neck brace soon.

19. You have to tell him to slow down when you are walking next to him. It’s NOT possible to keep up with his long strides without breaking out into a run.

20. You basically have super toned calves, because hello, you’re on your tip-toes all the time!

21. Too short to actually be able to watch that concert? No problem, he will – for real – pick you up.

22. Every time you’re on a staircase, you make sure you go up ahead of him. So that you can turn around and kiss him on the lips, which are – for once! – at level with yours.

23. When he hugs you, it feels like a big teddy bear is keeping you safe.

Shopping Cart

Your cart is empty

by Alex Sinanan | Mar 22, 2021

It is a figment of my imagination or do tall guys really have a preference for short girls? Yes, you heard it here: it’s a thing and there is even a study to prove it.

In 2015, Dr. Kitae Sohn, a Professor at the Konkuk University of Seoul, South Korea, ran a study of 7850 women to assess how happy women were in their relationships. What he found was interesting. Dr. Kitae Sohn found that tall guys actually made women happier. Yes, it’s a proven fact, in romantic relationships your height difference correlates to lasting relationships and happiness.

So let’s take a deeper look into why tall guys like short girls.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Cute Factor

There is no doubt that cute things come in small packages. So what is it that is so cute about shorter women?

Dare I say this is a primal facet rearing its head. When a tall guy sees a petite woman, his instincts kick in to protect her. In his eyes she is more feminine, and he will feel stronger and more appreciated for taking care of her.

From personal experience, small girls are fierce. They don’t need protection at all, however, relationship experts will tell you that a successful relationship is more about perception rather than reality.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Cuddling is Great

Everyone loves a good cuddle and the height difference between a tall man and an average woman makes hugs all that more intimate. The all-encompassing nature of long arms wrapping up a woman is something special. A woman feels safe and the man feels like he is powerful and dominant.

It doesn’t stop at a hug either.

Tall men love the notion that they could if they wanted to, lift a little lady up and canoodle with her. This too seems to be an aspect of protectionism, appealing to a man’s deepest level of primal instinct.

It is true that attractive women are tall women as well as short, and I don’t mean to show height discrimination, however, sometimes you just can’t fight nature.

Men Feel Valued and Needed

The key to a secure relationship is both parties feeling secure, cared for, and needed. After all, being needed is something everyone wants in life. Is this why this combination works so well?

When a tall guy chooses an average height or a smaller woman, he is guaranteed to be needed on an ongoing basis.

Whether it be to simply reach the top shelves in the supermarket, changing those light bulbs, or coming to her rescue if threatened, there is definitely a need to fulfill.

Shorter women feel protected by the added strength behind a tall guy, even if it’s purely perception. She will feel like she will have protection when it comes time to start a family.

Sex is Fun

This statement is quite obvious, yes sex is fun. However, tall guys are perceived as being stronger than shorter guys. This gives them the ability to be more inventive and experimental when their partner is on the petite side.

Relationship experts state that romantic relationships thrive when the sex is fun and relaxed. As long as all parties are comfortable, why not have a bit of fun in the bedroom. or wherever.

Tall girls may be more cumbersome and awkward to maneuver, making the smaller ladies more appealing to a tall guy on a sexual level.

Protective Instincts Kick In

As mentioned previously, we men are very primal creatures. The confidence that is ensued by being the physically dominant person in a relationship is empowering. It does wonders to the tall guy’s self-esteem.

It’s no secret that the happier you are within yourself, the easier it is to hold a lasting relationship. Choosing small, “vulnerable” women as partners could in fact be wired into a man’s DNA.

Another factor contributing to a protective partner is income. We all need to eat and tall men statistically earn a higher income due to their height making them seem more trustworthy and able to take on greater responsibility.

Whether that is true or not, women are attracted to this as part of the ‘protective package’ tall guys can offer.

Don’t despair if you’re a tall woman or short guy

These factors are all subconscious thoughts and very generalized. In reality, we are all very different and what appeals to one, will be totally different from what appeals to another. After all, the initial attraction only lasts so long, it’s what’s inside that makes lasting relationships work.

A woman has been accused of double standards after reacting with fury to a prospective date who told her she was too short for him.

When it comes to dating, height matters.

A 2014 study conducted by researchers from Rice University and the University of North Texas analyzed data from 470 women’s personal dating ads in the U.S and showed that 49 percent specified that they were looking to date only men that were taller than them.

The study also saw 131 female volunteers answer a series of open-ended questions on dating as part of an online survey. According to the results, 55 percent said they would only date men taller than them.

By contrast, 13 percent of men in the first part of the study listed height as an important consideration with 37 percent stating a preference for short partners in the second part of the research.

The numbers would suggest women aren’t especially eager to date short partners but they aren’t necessarily alone in that respect.

In a post shared to Reddit by life__navigator, a man shared a recent exchange with a woman he matched with on a dating app whom he ended up brushing off after determining there was “too much height difference” between them.

When the man had first revealed to the woman he was “6′ 3″ (191 cms)” she was delighted. “That’s the perfect height for a guy,” she responded, according to a screenshot of what is purported to be a text exchange between the pair. “I’m 5′ 1″ and petite,” she wrote back.

Unfortunately for her, he quickly determined that the height difference would be too much. “Oops,” he wrote. “That’s too much height difference I guess. Don’t think it would work out, sorry.”

  • Internet Slams Mother Who Gave Up Custody of Young Daughter With Cancer
  • Internet Appalled by ‘Creepy’ Texts Sent to Widow From Husband’s Coworker
  • Internet Slams Boyfriend Who Said Redditor ‘Tricked’ Him Into Eating Vegan

She reacted with fury. “So you’re rejecting me because of my height? The audacity.” The man tried to defend his stance, telling her: “We all have our preferences. Even your profile bio says 6ft and above.” At this point, the woman began throwing insults at the man, branding him an “incel” and accusing him of having a “small d***”

“How’s it different from you having a height requirement?” he asked. “I’m a woman,” she fired back. “So it’s not the same.” The exchange ended abruptly after that but the discussion has raged on over on Reddit, where the post has amassed over 7,700 comments.

“Sounds like he missed out on a classy lady,” Strength-Speed wrote.
Trimungasoid agreed, accusing the woman of exhibiting “double standards” in her response. “He dodged a bullet,” they said. “She seems pretty s*****.”

For some users like OdinGray, the fact the woman had a height requirement to begin with was a big turn-off. “I’m 6′ 2″, but when I used Tinder, anyone with a ‘height requirement’ was an instant no,” they wrote. “Pretty big red flag, even if I am ‘tall enough.'”

Loveroffitchicks was of a similar mindset, writing: “Who the hell swipes right on someone who has a height requirement in their bio? I’m 6’4 but I instantly left swipe those entitled b*****s.”

Others appeared eager to highlight the realities of being part of a tall man/short woman couple. “I don’t understand the obsession with such large height differences, it makes things really awkward,” Yeetuslafeetus commented. “Me and my partner are about 8 inches apart and that’s already fairly difficult.”

Troglodyte_terrorist went further, responding: “Lugging around a giant 7 month old when you marry a tall person really is not a joke. Our kid has been the height of twice his age his entire life. Now, at age 1.5, he is wearing clothes for 4 year olds.”

TheStonkmanCometh, meanwhile, questioned the woman’s motives for wanting a tall partner. “Has nothing to do with personal preference and everything to do with ego,” they wrote. “This girl sees a tall man as an object that she can show off to other women. She just wants a tall man to boost her self worth.”

The reasons may be more complicated than that though. According to the data gathered as part of the study from Rice University and the University of North Texas, the dominant reasons females cited for preferring a tall partner centered around the ideas of protection and femininity.

One woman, who is 5′ 3″, told researchers: “As the girl, I like to feel delicate and secure at the same time. Something just feels weird in thinking about looking ‘down’ into my man’s eyes.

“There is also something to be said about being able to wear shoes with high heels and still being shorter. I also want to be able to hug him with my arms reaching up and around his neck.”

Newsweek has contacted the original poster for comment.

Back in November, a woman earned viral fame on TikTok after deducing a man claiming to be 6 feet tall was, in fact, significantly shorter than he said, by analyzing his photos on social media.

Another woman drew criticism after sharing her strict set of rules for a first date.

Did you know that the way you hug your partner reveals a lot about your relationship?

Yes, there are different types of hugs, and each type tells a different story about your relationship. But, the one you do on a regular basis will describe your relationship in the best way. So, if you are curious to find out what the different types of hugs suggest about your relationship, go through this blog, and all your questions will get answered. Also, these are some of the types of hugs guys like a lot.

1. ‘Rest-On-Shoulder’ Hug

In this hug, a girl puts her head on her boyfriend’s shoulder and this way they like to converse for hours. Therefore, if you often love to hug your guy this way, there is an enormous amount of love, warmth, and understanding in your relationship. His touch is comfortable and peaceful for you.

2. From The Back Hug

The meaning of this hug is ambiguous. By hugging you from the back, your partner is trying to tell you that he has been missing you from quite a long time. And, if your partner hugs you this way on a regular basis then, know that he always wants to make you feel loved. It also suggests that he is protective towards you when he wraps his arms around your waist from the back.

3. The ‘Grasp On Waist’ Hug

This is a kind of intimate hug that suggests that you share a very close bond with your partner where there is love, trust, and romance. This is a beautiful way of making things spiced up between you and your partner. This type of hug suggests that your guy is deeply into you and wants to embrace you.

4. ‘Never Let You Go’ Hug

It is a kind of a hug when two people hold each other close and tight. This intense hug when a guy hugs you with both arms suggests that both of them have a fear of letting each other go. Also known as deadlock hug, this hug elaborates deep commitment, trust, and forever togetherness. So, if you and your partner share this kinda hug, it means you guys are very serious about each other. Hence, you see a future together.

5. The ‘Eye-To-Eye’ Hug

When two people look in each other’s eyes and hug each other, it means that love is in the air. It demonstrates true love and affection. So, if your partner hugs you this way, you can consider yourself lucky because it is a sign that he or she is a keeper and he or she is irrevocably in love with you.

6. The ‘Slow Dance’ Hug

This hug is all about passionate love and romance between two people wherein the guy wraps his arms around the girl’s waist, while the girl wraps her arms around the guy’s neck, evoking a sense of high school kind of romance. So, if you and your partner hug this way, you are allowing your love life to live and grow.

7. The One-Arm Hug

This kind of hug is considered as a half hug wherein a person reaches an arm around his or her partner. This kind of hug is often shared between couples in a public space where they can’t go for a public display of affection. It’s more about being next to each other in a comfortable way.

8. The Perfectly Pervert Hug

Well, this hug is a perfect way of telling how intense your sexual attraction is for one another. So, when you partner grabs your lower back while you hug him or her, it means that your partner is ready to tell how he or she feels about you without any feeling of shame. That’s why we named this hug as ‘perfectly pervert hug’ because it’s absolutely okay to share this kind of hug with your partner.

9. The ‘Back Stroke’ Hug

This hug represents reassurance. So, when you and your partner rub each other’s back while sharing a hug, you guys are actually trying to convey that how much you care for each other. In short, this is the kind of hug you would always want to share with your partner whenever you are sad or feeling low because this hug makes you feel comfortable and secure.

10. The Pickpocket Hug

When both the partners put their hands into the pockets of each other and share a hug, it means they are very comfortable with each other. So, if you and your partner love to share a hug in this way and find the silence between you two comfortable at that moment, your love is true.

Let’s face it, everyone loves a good hug and we give them out to different types of people for different reasons. Sometimes, however, these gestures of affection can be quite cringe-worthy, especially when you hug a shorter man and get it wrong.

Sharing a hug between different sized people can be achieved with good technique and a little teamwork. Hugging a shorter man as a woman is most awkward when face and chest accidentally meet. Another awkwardness is him not being able to reach around your neck if trying to give a romantic embrace.

Overall though, hugging a shorter man can be just as rewarding for him and you as with any other huggee. All you need to do is realize what is happening differently and adapt to it.

I’ve spent my life being hugged by taller people, and so this is why I’m going to share some of my own experiences with you in this article.

How to hug a shorter man without it getting weird

The key thing when hugging a shorter guy as a much taller woman is not to suffocate him with your breasts. Right, I’ve said it and now we both know what we were both thinking!

Of course, the hug is defined by the person you are sharing it with and if this guy is a potential boyfriend, you might not mind as much contact as to when you are hugging a colleague or nephew.

The key thing here is to get yourself down far enough that you can offer him a shoulder to push his face into rather than anything else. Make sure you bend your knees and arch your back enough that you can reduce your height down to his head height.

You should bring your arms over his head and around his shoulder like you would do when comforting a small child. Try not to go for the under the arms hug you might with someone more your own size, that is going to make face-boob a reality.

If the hug is more platonic, don’t bring him in so hard, and don’t let the hug linger for too long. That will make any problem contact a lot less embarrassing than it might be.

What is the most embarrassing thing about hugging a short guy?

In addition to his face being brushed up against your chest, the most embarrassing things are you doubling over trying to be ‘the girl’ and him failing to reach around your neck and looking like a lost child. When you adapt to your relative heights, however, you can eliminate all of these mishaps.

If the man you are hugging is more than a foot shorter than you it can really muck up your lifelong hugging techniques. Often a hug involves a head on a shoulder or the classic cross-armed embrace.

Although you can manage this by really squatting down if you both stay rigged and he doesn’t get on his tippy toes you may end up looking and feeling quite awkward.

If you are worried about being the shorter person though, learn more about how to grow taller as a teenager and an adult by looking at my article here.

Will hugging a shorter male friend turn him on?

As I said, I’m a fairly short guy in comparison to most of my peers so I’ve had my fair share of hugs from long-legged females. Did some of those cuddles stir something inside me, sure, but it was more the woman than the hug.

If you are hugging your shorter male friend in a friendly way, even if there is accidental boobage, they are probably used to it. Simply brushing up against a woman isn’t going to light a fire of lust inside them. I mean it could, but it’s not automatically going to happen.

What is more likely is that the guy has a secret crush on you and every time you give them a hug it just makes their day. If you actually find your friend cute but have never taken it further because of his height, maybe you should look a little closer at him as a man.

You might be surprised by what you see.

But, on the other hand, if you are worried that the close contact during the hug is getting too personal, then make the hugs shorter or just stop doing them altogether.

Should you use stairs as a hugging opportunity?

If your relative height makes a ‘normal’ hug impossible, then evening up the inches makes sense, right? It would be beyond mortifying to ask him to stand on a chair or step ladder, but stairs are everywhere.

All you have to do is choose your moment on a stairwell or escalator by getting in front of him and then turning to offer a hug. Of course, make sure that you are descending the stairs otherwise you are going to make the problem worse.

This is a good option when it presents itself, but you can’t form an entire relationship around stairs, so learn how to hug without any outside help too!

Is it a good idea to hug a shorter co-worker?

If you feel awkward hugging a male friend who is shorter than you because of the increased contact with your personal areas, wouldn’t it be worse with a colleague or boss?

Well, it can be if you don’t go through the techniques we mentioned above.

If you work in an environment where it’s a little bit more physical than in some offices, make sure you don’t hug everyone else and single this shorter man out for cuddle-free treatment.

Again, make sure you really bend at the knees and get yourself down as much as you can so that you are offering as much of your shoulder as chin height as you can rather than your torso. Keep the embrace brief and not too tight to avoid full contact.

Hugging another man who is shorter

If you are hugging another man who is much shorter, then there is less awkwardness in terms of your chest brushing his face, but you definitely still need to squat for a better hug.

Make sure that you don’t stand upright and draw the other guy into your crotch area, that could be even more embarrassing than if a woman smothers him with her breasts.

Latest Sexual Health News

  • Meningitis Vaccine May Guard Against Gonorrhea
  • US STD Cases Spiked During Pandemic
  • Orgasm’s Key Role in Women’s Sexual Satisfaction
  • One Dose of HPV Vaccine Enough for Cancer Protect
  • IUDs a Very Effective Form of Birth Control

TUESDAY, Feb. 11, 2014 (HealthDay News) — A new study confirms there is an unspoken rule among women: Don’t settle for a short man.

The researchers first analyzed data from online dating ads posted by about 450 men and 470 women across the United States. The men had an average age of 36 and an average height of 5 feet, 8 inches, while the women had an average age of 35 and an average height of 5 feet, 4 inches.

Although 13.5 percent of men wanted to date only shorter women, 49 percent of women wanted to date only taller men.

The researchers then conducted an online survey of 54 men (with an average height of 5 feet, 9 inches) and 131 women (average height 5 feet, 4 inches) at a U.S. university. They found that 37 percent of the men wanted to date only women shorter than them, while 55 percent of the women wanted to date only men taller than them.

Feeling protected and feminine were the main reasons women gave for preferring taller men, according to the study, which was published online recently in the Journal of Family Issues.

“As the girl, I like to feel delicate and secure at the same time,” said one woman in the study. “Something just feels weird in thinking about looking down into my man’s eyes. There is also something to be said about being able to wear shoes with high heels and still be shorter. I also want to be able to hug him with my arms reaching up and around his neck.”

The researchers said gender stereotypes might explain things.

“Evolutionary psychology theory argues that similarity is overwhelmingly the rule in human mating,” study co-author Michael Emerson, a professor of sociology and co-director of the Kinder Institute for Urban Research at Rice University, said in a university news release. “However, our study suggests that for physical features such as height, similarity is not the dominant rule, especially with females.”

The height preferences revealed in the study are due to gender stereotypes and traditional societal expectations, said study author George Yancey, a professor of sociology at the University of North Texas.

“The masculine ability to offer physical protection is clearly connected to the gender stereotype of men as protectors,” Yancey said in the news release. “And in a society that encourages men to be dominant and women to be submissive, having the image of tall men hovering over short women reinforces this value.”

Copyright © 2014 HealthDay. All rights reserved.

You will require props.

TENNIS PLAYER DUDI Sela is 5’9″. His opponent, Ivo Karlovic, is a whopping 6’11″.

So when Karlovic defeated Sela at the Colombia Open and Sela wanted to give the winner a congratulatory hug, what did he do?

That’s right. No shame. Tiny people of the world, UNITE!

This dad vs daughter dance off is the cutest thing you’ll see today>

Kid provides hilariously irrefutable evidence that her dog is a girl>

About the author:

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Contribute to this story:

Read next:

To embed this post, copy the code below on your site

COMMENTS

Read Next:

Download our app

Top Features:

  • 5x faster loading of articles
  • In-flight/offline reading
  • Swipe between articles & photos
  • Live-scores from rugby and football matches

About Us

  • About Us
  • We’re Hiring!
  • Contact Us
  • Advertise With Us
  • The Journal FactCheck

Follow Us

  • Twitter
  • Facebook

Corrections

Policies

  • Terms of Use
  • Cookies & Privacy
  • Advertising
  • Comments
  • Copyright
  • Competition

TheJournal.ie supports the work of the Press Council of Ireland and the Office of the Press Ombudsman, and our staff operate within the Code of Practice. You can obtain a copy of the Code, or contact the Council, at www.presscouncil.ie, PH: (01) 6489130, Lo-Call 1890 208 080 or email: [email protected]

Please note that TheJournal.ie uses cookies to improve your experience and to provide services and advertising. For more information on cookies please refer to our cookies policy.

News images provided by Press Association and Photocall Ireland unless otherwise stated. Irish sport images provided by Inpho Photography unless otherwise stated. Wire service provided by Associated Press.

Journal Media does not control and is not responsible for user created content, posts, comments, submissions or preferences. Users are reminded that they are fully responsible for their own created content and their own posts, comments and submissions and fully and effectively warrant and indemnify Journal Media in relation to such content and their ability to make such content, posts, comments and submissions available. Journal Media does not control and is not responsible for the content of external websites.

Edit Locked

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Men are generally half a head taller than women in Real Life; in fiction, it’s practically codified that every couple will have the man One Head Taller than the woman. If this is reversed, expect seeing Marshmallow Hells and Funbag Airbags. Taking this to extremes gives you Huge Guy, Tiny Girl and Tiny Guy, Huge Girl. As transplanting traditional gender roles into same-sex couples is popular in fanfiction, the character who could be considered “dominant” (often more serious or reserved) in the relationship is often similarly taller than their significant other. (A noticeable exception is the phenomenon of aggressive and dominant Tsunderes being shorter than their partners. On the other hand, the act of cuddling is designed to show off their cute side.) Either way, being One Head Taller naturally allows you to tuck someone under your chin when surprising them with a hug. This rarely works the other way around, although the “cutesy” partner being taller is usually a deliberate humorous device for the audience to notice. In that case, the grouchier counterpart is hugged the way one would a puppy. Usually, if the shorter partner is doing the hugging from behind, the arms will come around at about elbow-height, and the hugger will either rest their cheek against the huggee’s back, or tuck their chin around an arm.

With some skill, this trope can give the illusion of characters being much older (or younger) than they actually are. On the other hand, if one wants to disguise a huge difference, expect a Scully Box to be used.

This is an extremely pervasive trope in Boys’ Love works, to the point where shippers drawing doujinshi will occasionally modify the heights of characters to make the taller Seme/shorter Uke stereotype work. An Onee-sama is also very likely to be taller than her relevant object of attention. Bara however, usually has the Seme “shorter and cute” while Uke “tall and handsome” instead.

Fun fact: On Tumblr, this trope is known as “tol and smol”.

She Loves Me But She Is Way Taller Than Me. – Romance – Nairaland

Chibuhealth: Get a cement block like two or three,carry it about whenever u re with her so dat u can be able to stand on it to make d hight equal or rather get a high heel shoe.

Chibuhealth: Get a cement block like two or three,carry it about whenever u re with her so dat u can be able to stand on it to make d hight equal or rather get a high heel shoe.

[quote
author=Chibuhealth]Get a cement block like two or three,carry it about
whenever u re with her so dat u can be able to stand on it to make d
hight equal or rather get a high heel shoe.[/quote]

lol.rolling on my floor

Chibuhealth: Get a cement block like two or three,carry it about whenever u re with her so dat u can be able to stand on it to make d hight equal or rather get a high heel shoe.

Is she also taller than you in bed?

Na d bed height concern me.

*falls from MTN mast*

You dwarf reach that level ni?

Be proud of yourself man, carry yourself with lots of respect and confidence. Remember no one can make you inferior without your own personal consent.

nitlad:

temmytboi: There is this Girl that just packed into our neighbourhood, very Pretty and Sexy. After some Months I found out that she likes me and She said it to My face but the problem there is She is much taller than me.. Even Sometimes when she tells me to give her a hug I feel embarrased. But She is always Proud to tell her friends that am her bf even tho I’m short. What Can I do? Tho I love her in return? No Abuses pls..

it doesn’t matter but I noticed most guys don’t like girls taller than them.

nitlad:

initialize: Is she also taller than you in bed?

Na d bed height concern me.

Yield: The fact that she likes you even though she’s taller and you’re shorter should tell you that she is not bothered by it. She’s proud to tell her friends you’re her man too. You’ve got a girl who accepts you for you and doesn’t care about things she knows you have no control over, so don’t worry yourself.

Chibuhealth: Get a cement block like two or three,carry it about whenever u re with her so dat u can be able to stand on it to make d hight equal or rather get a high heel shoe.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Tall women are real. We see them every day, cramped on the airplane, cramped in the car, cramped at the desk, or endlessly trying on dress after dress in the fitting room. You may be one of them. The easiest way to know is to use this magic height percentile calculator. But if math and standard deviations aren’t your thing, maybe these hints will help.

Do you hear this question too often – “Do you play basketball?”

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Everywhere you turn people ask you incessantly if you play basketball. If you actually do play basketball then there’s another hint you may be tall.

Are you taller with flat feet than your friends wearing heels?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

If you’re friends wearing heels still aren’t taller than you, there’s a good chance that you are tall. Especially if those are three or six-inch heels. You know you are mega tall if your friends need to stand on a chair to be taller than you.

Can you find pants that fit on the first, second, or even third try?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

This is a common problem that plagues all tall people. Either the legs are too short or the waist is too big. You may be extra tall if those “tall” pants you ordered online are still at least one inch too short.

Do you have to squat at the water fountain?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Believe it or not, not everyone needs to squat like a giraffe to drink from the fountain.

Are shoes mysteriously “un-cute” in your size?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

They looked so good on your friend last week, they look even better on display at Nordstrom. But when they bring out a size 10.5 for you to try on, they’re suddenly not-so-cute anymore and you’re embarrassed you even tried.

Do you walk faster than everyone else without even trying?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

When you’re walking and talking with your bestie and fail to notice she’s fallen 3 miles behind…

Is hugging your friends always awkward?

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

There is no solution for the tall girl hug. If your friends complain of getting a face full of chest every time they hug you, then you’re probably tall. Perhaps the best solution is to put on some heels and give them a faceful of belly-button instead.

It’s a tough world out there for the tall woman. One thing you don’t need is for people to make it tougher. That’s why we at TallSlim Tees makes long, perfectly fitting shirts for women. That’s right, TallSlim Tees aren’t just for men, they’re for women too. So next time you find yourself in a cramped airplane, car, or wherever you are, know that we are here for you and that we know the struggle is real.

As Phoebe would explain Ross in the popular sitcom “FRIENDS“, women are shorter because the top of their head releases hormones that make men fall in love with them instantly. But this is not the only perk of being short for a girl. Listed below are some other reasons why men love short girls and dating a short girl is awesome. If you are one of those, take a look and see if this sounds familiar.

1. Hugs.

Moreover, it is always the best feeling when you steal this soft loving kiss on the forehead while hugging your girl, and all she can do is smile and feel the love you have for her.

2. Carrying her is so easy and so fun!

3. Acting like a savior every time

Short girls always get stuck, trying to take out something that’s kept in the top, may it be a utensil on the top shelf of the kitchen or a book on the top shelf of the library. And it feels awesome to be the one who gets to rescue them. Now, one important tip here, grabbing that thing yourself may be easier, but its much more romantic to pick your girl up and help her reach the shelf herself. Either ways, you get the cutest little Thank You kiss, something that can melt your insides when coming from a short girl. See the next point for its reason.

4. Kisses

Another most adorable part of having a relationship with a short girl is the way she has to stand up on her toes to kiss you, o therwise she will just end up kissing your chin every time.

The perfect kiss, to look at and to have, is that of a short girl with a tall guy. It gives you the most wonderful feel when your girl stands up on her toes to match the height difference and brings her lips close to yours. You can even tease her a bit, standing on the toes yourself. 😉

5. She can wear heels and still wont look taller than you.

One problem that guys with tall girlfriends face is that as soon as they wear some heels, they start looking taller than their men. But with short girls, you will never face this problem. Her heels would only make them look adorable, and maybe hide their shortness. But they would never look taller than you, making you feel inferior. And obviously, wearing these heels can help you feel like a fairy tale prince at the end of the day. (see #2)

(No offence to tall girls, but it is a fact that guys like looking taller always.)

6. You can save a lot of money.

Short girls don’t need much food to keep their body going. They don’t need to many accessories. You can shop in the kid’s section for them, and save money of having to buy proper sized dresses. And they are too conscious about their figure, since they are already short and they don’t want to be fat too. As a result, you end up saving a lot on your dates and shopping. Most of the money you spend is on your own energy needs, which sometimes even make you feel like a hungry giant. But, at the end of the day, it still costs you lesser than dating a tall girl.

7. They look adorable.

Short girls look like teddy bears, adorable and cute. Something you can pick up and play with. When they laugh, they look like a little cute child laughing. When they are angry, they end up looking even more adorable. When they are sad, you can hold them in your arms and tell them everything is fine. Whatever their emotion is, it is just too hard to control the urge of kissing them, they are so adorable.

8. The way she holds your arm.

The one big challenge of a short girl’s life is that they cant hold a man’s hand properly while walking with him. Hence, they end up grabbing his arm. And that is the most amazing feeling a guy can ask for. Walking besides her on the road, with her hands wrapped around your arms, kissing your shoulder (since that’s the farthest she can reach). There’s nothing that can trump this feeling for a guy.

9. The way she tries to fight with you.

You can always tease her with stuff like “Ye baccha kiska kho gaya” and her reply would be trying to hit you. But being little, she obviously cant match you. Hence, it ends up something like having a pillow fight with a cute kid. You let her beat you and smile from the inside and her cuteness and finally, grab her and kiss her to make it all go away. There can’t be a relationship more perfect than this.

As an Amazon Associate, Tall People Guide earns from qualifying purchases. We get commissions for purchases made through links in this post.

People hug to express romantic and non-romantic expressions. But you must agree, learning how to hug a guy taller than you can be challenging. Right?How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Well, it doesn’t have to be so, especially after you try out techniques like high ground technique, side hug, head aside, wearing high heels, standing on tiptoes, among others.

Whether it’s a partner, a friend, a colleague, or a sibling, you should be able to hug them without looking awkward, even if you are shorter.

Let’s jump into the techniques right away.

Tips for Short Girls on How to Hug a Guy Taller Than You

1. High Ground Technique

Given that the guy is taller than you, it makes sense to stand on higher ground. You could even take the stairs or stand on the sidewalk as the other person stands on the road.

And if you are on a slope, consider taking the higher point and let the taller guy stand a few inches down.

The trick is to try and level the playfield to appear like you are of the same height even if you aren’t.

If you are outdoors, this technique is much more comfortable, and you can do it unplanned. The method is more expressive for intimacy reasons.

2. Side Hug or Head Aside

Usually, tall person hugging short person face to face when they aren’t intimate can make them appear awkward. That’s why a side hug is always an option.

This technique saves you from placing your face on the guy’s chest. Instead, you angle your body on one side and slip an arm around the guy.

The chances are that the guy will wrap his arm around you without having to look awkwardly close.

Alternatively, turn your head to the side. That means your ear will touch his chest, which counts as a friendly hug.

Besides, most guys would rather have your ear touch their chest than their face. This is the kind of hug that a taller guy can give the mother.

3. Stand on Your Tiptoes

By standing on your tiptoes, you stretch your height to match your guy’s, and as a result, it becomes easy to hug him in whichever manner you want.

This technique on how to hug a tall guy is generally an excellent way to express intimacy.

4. High Heels

If you cannot find a high point or uneven ground to stand on, then you can unify the odds by wearing high heels.

The heels will boost your height by a few inches, and if the guy is not very tall, you could make up for the height difference.

Just ensure the heels are comfortable and cute to match your outfit.

5. Stand Upright

Since you are already short, there’s no need to recline since it only makes you appear shorter.

So, why don’t you do you a favor and stand upright when hugging your guy? The chances are that he’ll lean slightly to reciprocate your hug, which somehow puts you at the same height.

To perform this technique, avoid standing on your tiptoes. Instead, put your feet straight on the ground and stand upright.

While at it, ensure you lift your head high and raise your shoulders. If you flex your feet, you will likely improve your height by a few inches, making up for the shorter stature.

This also works for men who ask: how to hug a short girl when you’re tall.

6. Short (Brief Hug) Hug

You can also avoid looking awkward hugging a taller person by keeping the hug short. It’s more important if it’s an acquaintance or someone you’ve deep respect for.

Generally, the moment can only get awkward if you extend it, and that’s why a quick hug is always a safe approach. It’s also safe for those asking: how to hug a girl shorter than you.

7. Sitting StrategyHow to hug a girl who's taller than you

This requires no preplanning when it comes to hugging someone taller than you. So, it’s best for expressing intimacy with close friends, spouses, and family members.

The good thing about the technique is that you don’t have to struggle to match the other person’s height.

All you have to do is lean towards the other person while sited and put your arms around his waist.

Expectedly, the guy will put his hands on your back and head slightly on your shoulders.

8. Jump and Hug

You can try this technique on someone close to you, like a taller spouse or boyfriend. It requires you to jump on the person and allow them to catch you.

Of course, they should expect the jump and should be able to catch you.

Tips for Short Guys on How to Hug a Girl Taller Than You

Consider applying these techniques if your girl is shorter than you:

  • Hug her sideways to avoid looking awkward close
  • Lean towards her and tilt your head with your arms stretched out wide
  • Turn your head on the side as you encourage her to place her ear on your chest
  • If there’s an uneven surface like a staircase or slope, take the lower end as you hug
  • Wrap your hand around her waist as you hug
  • Consider hugging as you sit

How to Hug a Guy Friend Taller Than You

Usually, it’s never a big deal to hug a guy friend since there are no romantic emotions. But with the height difference, consider doing the following:

  • Open up your arms in advance a few feet away to force the other person to slightly lean and match your height while reciprocating the hug.
  • Stand upright and put your arms around your tall friend’s waste
  • Try aiming your head on his shoulders and keep the hug as short as possible

Related:

How to Hug a Guy Taller Than You: Bottom-line

Now you know how to hug a guy taller than you. So, your short stature shouldn’t restrain you from expressing your emotion through a hug.

Besides, hugs can be romantic or non-romantic. Your task is to know how to draw the difference, and I hope this post will help you.

Written with ❤️ by a member of the Tall People Guide team

report this ad report this ad report this ad

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Synopsis

  • Abc Small
  • Abc Normal
  • Abc Large

When you google Nicole Kidman, words like “ice queen” and “control freak” pop up. But in Seoul early this month, to unveil Omega’s De Ville line, the Hollywood star exudes a chatty vibe.

In a figure-hugging Dolce &Gabbana cocktail gown, she asks us for advice on what nightclubs and hotspots to visit. Kidman suffered a recent setback when her father Dr Antony Kidman died suddenly while on holiday with her sister in Singapore.

Barely two weeks later, she says that the family is still “shattered”. Here she reveals to ETPanache what she looks for in her man (and why it doesn’t matter if he’s shorter than her):

Do you judge a man by his shoes or by his watch?

(Laughs) I primarily judge him by his heart and his actions. Men can do the talk, right? But they’ve got to be able to show you as well. If I had to choose between shoes or a watch, I’d go for the latter. The Dark Side of the Moon is the coolest watch. It instantly made me go, “Okay, there’s Keith’s (husband Keith Urban) Christmas present.”But shhhh. don’t tell.

Shorter men are often intimidated by tall women. As a tall, beautiful woman, what advice can you give them?

I’ve always gone out with men shorter than me. I’ve never gone out with a man that’s taller. But I don’t judge. I’d say a guy should stand up tall and not worry because — I don’t know if I should this, but I will anyway — aren’t we all the same height lying down? At least, that’s what many men have told me.

You’re Australian, but live in the US. Where do you feel at home? How do you beat jetlag?

I was just given this tip to eat two kiwi fruits to beat jetlag. Home is where my family is. We can live anywhere in the world, strangely enough. We bring along blankies, pillows and candles, but can set up home everywhere. I did a film this year in Morocco and had my kids living out in tents.

How do you talk to your children when you travel without them?

FaceTime. I even have dinner with them on FaceTime. Recently, I was chatting with my daughter and I could tell that she was hungry. I told my husband, “She needs a peanut butter and jelly sandwich and she’ll want to go to gymnastics.” I was right.

What’s your secret to beat ageing?

I feel like I’m ageing. I find travel a lot harder now. I don’t sleep as well as I used to. What I love about being older is the patience and wisdom that you get. On the flip side, you don’t have the physical energy.

How do you cheer yourself up when you’re down?

Hug my children. Kiss my husband. Make love, not war. The simplest things give joy. I don’t need that much. Looking at the sun rise. A swim in the ocean — that makes my day. Playing in the park with my kids. When you’re 17, that’s like. (groans). But at this age, it’s joyful. We always do big Christmases and Halloween parties at home. My husband says,”You love seeing other people have a great time.”

Is it easy being part of a couple when you’re both famous?

If there is an enormous amount of love, yes. I have a partner who is an extraordinary man. That makes it incredibly easy.

How have you coped with your father’s sudden death?

It was devastating because I was so close to him. My family is shattered. He was so joyful. Every time he’d see me worrying about a part or my children, he’d say, “Nicci, don’t worry, be happy.” That is how I’ve pledged to live my life from this point on. He was also about the underdog, taking care of people who were less fortunate. He was a psychologist and a giver. That is what I hope he’s given me and my sister.

You never forget the first time you hug your child. Holding them in your arms and feeling the warmth of their body is a wonderful experience. There’s nothing like it! But did you know there are scientific benefits besides feeling all warm and fuzzy? It’s true.

It turns out those warm and fuzzy feelings are connected to positive physical and mental changes in our bodies. It’s especially important for your child’s emotional, cognitive, and physical development. Let’s explore five scientific benefits of hugging your child.

1. Hugging Makes Kids Smarter

Children need a lot of sensory stimulation as their brains grow and develop. Studies looking at infants in orphanages where they were rarely held were found to have severe cognitive impairments. But when they were held for just 20 minutes per day for 10 weeks , they scored higher on brain development assessments.

Because newborns first learn to navigate the world through touch, physical contact such as a hug and skin-on-skin contact is crucial for development. Of our five senses, touch is the first to develop, so a nurturing touch provides the stimulation young brains need for normal growth and development.

As your baby grows, they will continue to benefit from receiving and giving physical affection. Research reveals that kids who get more hugs have more developed brains .

2. Hugging Keeps Kids Healthy

Children need more than adequate nutrients to thrive. When children are deprived of physical contact, their bodies will fail to meet expected growth milestones. This can contribute to a condition called failure-to-thrive . But when nurturing hugs are provided, kids can go from unhealthy to healthy very quickly.

The science: hugging triggers the release of oxytocin, a hormone associated with trust, safety, and love. When this hormone is released it also stimulates particular growth hormones in the body. While researchers continue studying oxytocin’s complicated effect on the body, it seems clear that the release of this hormone in our brains aids in physical development from a young age.

3. Hugging Can Stop Tantrums

Not only are hugs good for children’s brain development and physical growth, but they also support emotional development. Nothing soothes the cries of a child with a skinned knee more quickly than a warm hug from an adult who loves them.

In addition, hugs are the most effective way to end a temper tantrum . Many adults worry that hugging a child who is having a tantrum will reinforce bad behavior. But this is a myth. When a toddler has an emotional tantrum, they are releasing emotions in response to something in their environment. They are not being stubborn or trying to ruin everyone else’s day.

Children lose control of their emotions, just like adults do sometimes. The difference is that children haven’t learned how to regulate their emotions. This is an emotional developmental milestone and until your child reaches this stage in development, their emotions are like a runaway train.

Hugging your child in these moments of intense emotional outbursts will calm them down, teach them that you are there to support them during tough times, and help them avoid an emotional crash.

4. Hugging Makes Kids More Resilient

During moments of distress and stress, adrenaline and cortisol are released into the body and brain. Because children haven’t learned how to regulate their emotions, stress can linger in the bodies of kids reaching toxic levels. When this happens, these stress hormones can impact a child’s health both mentally and physically.

Studies show that exposure to high levels of stress hormones can lead to negative consequences in adulthood too such as an increase in risk for physical illness as well as depression and other adverse conditions.

Hugs trigger the release of oxytocin, lowering levels of stress hormones, buffering against these negative effects and helping children develop resilience .

5. Hugging Helps You Bond With Your Child

In addition to the scientific benefits for your child, hugging your child also creates a stronger bond with you. Hugs improve trust, reduce fear, and strengthen relationships. And these benefits are mutual. Giving and receiving physical affection is good for both you and your child.

From the first time you hold your child, you form a special bond and this initial bond needs to be nurtured throughout childhood. As your child grows, your bond will evolve, but the need for feeling your nurturing touch will never be eliminated.

One final note: It shouldn’t be necessary to say, but the above positive benefits all result from wanted hugs. We also, of course, want to emphasize the importance of bodily autonomy. Teaching children how to politely refuse hugs and deal with the potentially awkward fallout is another good lesson.

So the next time you hug your child, with their permission, remember you’re also doing great things for their physical and mental health.

Are you looking for additional parenting resources? Explore our list of resources and service offerings on the Exchange Family Center website . We’re here to support children, parents, and families throughout Durham and beyond.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

A man and a woman in front of the waning full moon in Erfurt, central Germany, Thursday, Aug. 2, 2012. (AP / Jens Meyer)

Share:

A new study confirms a truism in the dating world: when it comes to love, size — or more specifically height — matters.

This is particularly true for women, who expressed a preference for taller men as a matter of protection and femininity in a new study published jointly out of Rice University and the University of North Texas.

Researchers conducted their study in two parts. For the first experiment, they looked at the dating preferences of men and women using data from 925 personal dating ads posted Yahoo!.

Of the 455 men, the average age was 36 and the average height 5 feet 8 inches (177 cm).

The sample of 470 women averaged a height of 5 feet 4 inches (165 cm) and age 35.

Asking open-ended questions in an online survey to ascertain height preferences, researchers concluded that 14 percent of men expressed a desire to date exclusively shorter women.

But when it came to women, nearly half or 49 percent of females said they only wanted to date men who were taller than themselves.

“As the girl, I like to feel delicate and secure at the same time. Something just feels weird in thinking about looking ‘down’ into my man’s eyes,” said one female participant.

“There is also something to be said about being able to wear shoes with high heels and still being shorter. I also want to be able to hug him with my arms reaching up and around his neck.”

The second part of the study involved 54 men and 131 women recruited from a US university whose answers to an online survey corroborated the previous findings, with more than half (55 percent of females) expressing a preference for taller men, and 37 percent of men preferring shorter women.

For men, a preference for shorter women comes from the mechanics of physical intimacy.

“I like it when the body of your partner fits yours,” said one man. “It also makes it easier to kiss, hold hands and do other activities with your partner.”

According to science, tall men with low voices have hit the biological jackpot, as another study out of McMaster University in Hamilton, Ontario found that women found low-pitched male voices sexy, but also less trustworthy.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

UPDATE: There is now some scientific evidence that even concludes that short men make better partners. So by all means, gentlemen, go forth and ignore society’s small-minded trivialities.

The first question most strangers ask me is “How tall are you?” If I’m feeling charitable, I answer honestly: “6-foot-2.” They often follow-up with, “Do you ever date shorter men?” Consider this my full answer.

First off: Yes, I have. Which makes me weird. The average woman is eight percent shorter than her male partner. In one survey, about half of collegiate men required their date to be shorter, while a monstrous nine of every ten women said they would only date a taller man. And online, it’s even more brutal: Women can calculate how tall they are in their highest heels, add a few inches for good measure, and then filter out men who fall below that sum. Of course the ability to search for people who meet our criteria is part of the appeal of online dating. But while women say they have a “type”—they love bearded gingers or get off on guys in glasses—they don’t filter out every man who doesn’t meet those specific physical criteria. Height is different. It’s a sweeping prejudice masquerading as sexual preference. When one guy changed his height on his OkCupid profile from his actual 5’4″ to an average 5’9″, his response rate nearly doubled.

This is bullshit. Single people sign up for a half-dozen dating sites and apps in order to widen their pool, yet most won’t break the height taboo. It needs to change. Men should date women who are taller than they are, and women should date shorter men. For chrissakes, I’m talking about all of us getting laid here! Only four percent of heterosexual couples feature a shorter man. Let’s increase our odds.

Now, in order for you, a shorter man*, to circumvent this bullshit and convince wonderful taller women to date you, you have to understand why women feel this way. Let me explain.

* To be clear: You can be tall and still be shorter. I’m taller than 95 percent of American men.

Right now, many men incorrectly believe that women want a taller man for evolutionary reasons—to protect us and our offspring. But if you ask women, it’s about feeling feminine. In Data: A Love Story, Amy Webb’s memoir about online dating, she confesses she felt she needed a man who was at least five-ten. (Webb is five-six, making that requirement just one inch shy of the eight-percent average.) “I wanted someone to overpower me, who could wrap his entire body around me in a hug, but who could also throw me down on a bed and ravish me,” she writes. “Someone who’s smaller may be wonderful, but in my case he will never make me feel like he’s in control.” (To those of you who just thought Fuck that, I agree. I’ll get there in a minute.)

Women have internalized the message that it’s better for us to be smaller. This is essential to know—it’s not just about shortness, but also skinniness. To be bigger than men is to worry that you’ll turn them off. Webb found that it isn’t just men lying about their height online, women do, too—to appear shorter. (With good cause: Women over six feet receive forty percent fewer messages on OkCupid than their 5’4″ counterparts.) Ask any super-tall woman about her dateless teenage years and the number of times a well-meaning adult said to her, “The boys are just intimidated by you.” Taller is mannish. Taller is… weird.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

So how do we get over our collective height hangup? Tall women provide a natural test case. After all, it’s nearly impossible for we amazons to find a partner who meets the classic 8-percent height differential, so we’ve had to get comfortable dating smaller men. If I hadn’t, I would still be a virgin. So let’s first take a basic lesson from the world of super-tall women: Do not approach a leggy lady and fucking open with “How tall are you?” Or some dumb joke about the weather up there. She will dismiss you. I’ve taken to giving my whiskey a single swirl, looking down my nose and saying slowly, “You are boring me. Go away.”

A novel idea: Think of height like tits. You would never walk up to a woman and open with, “What’s your bra size?” Even if her height is part of her appeal, wait until fifth-date post-coital bliss to say how much you love it.

Which brings us to your more general task: neutralizing her insecurity by conveying that bigger is sexy. That you love her in heels. That you don’t feel like less of a man when you’re with her. This is complicated stuff. Some of it boils down to you owning a more classic masculinity—going in for the kiss first, deciding the dinner location, simply being more assertive. But keep in mind that, because you’re asking her to question gut-level beliefs about what she finds attractive, you need to be willing to broaden your own definition of what you find attractive—and convey to her that it does not contain the phrase “smaller than me.”

Of course, women also have to be willing to check their own biases about short men. I consider short guys my natural allies and am constantly making the case to my female friends that they should stop fetishizing tall men. (When one friend narrowed her OkCupid search to men taller than six feet and then complained about a boring date with some guy built like an NBA player, I laughed in her face.) Here’s how I figure it: If a man is comfortable with the fact that I’m taller, he’s also likely to be comfortable with the fact that I’m competitive and outgoing and career-oriented. As in: It means he’s a secure man.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Everyone, it is time to expect more. To go on even just one date with someone who falls outside of our eight-percent range, and to ask ourselves whether there’s actually less chemistry there. To think of a world with all these new, gorgeous options. If you won’t do it for yourself, try it for my sake. I’d really appreciate if we could all stop asking “How tall are you?” We’re above it.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Stand up straight. Walk tall. No slouching!

This energetic command by Fareeda, the protagonist’s best friend, is probably the most-spoken advice given to us tall girls by our loved ones. No slouching means standing confidently and tall instead of trying to be something that you’re not – a normal height. Standing tall as a woman over 6 feet requires powerful self-love against the bombardment by others who make you feel like a freak every day. In Tall Girl, a new movie by Netflix, a 6-foot-1 teenager struggles to find self-acceptance and learn that she is more than just a tall girl.

Before its release, Tall Girl faced some backlash for centering on the adversity faced by a pretty, white, cis-gendered, straight, wealthy girl who is also in the top one percent of women’s heights. Well, those Twitter critics seeking to invalidate her struggles must be short. The very first scene of Tall Girl shows how even though she’s bringing the privilege of skin color, looks and intelligence to the table, when she stands up, height erases the attractiveness of those privileges. At 6’2″ I know from experience that my height is the best predictor my interactions with strangers – before my race or class. “How’s the weather up there?” is a sneer that I’ve heard hundreds, if not thousands, of times in my life. I’m constantly alienated by this comment and reminded that I don’t fit in. What’s worse – because my height is considered a privilege, strangers carelessly comment on how tall I am and expect me to receive it as a compliment. Newsflash – any comment that brings attention to how someone is outside of the norm – because of race, ethnicity, religion, sexual orientation, weight, or height – is othering and offensive! Being on the margins, a statistical outlier in any extreme, is not a privilege in society.

How to hug a girl who's taller than youWe all need a friend like Fareeda!

Like Jodi, I grew up with a school filled with kids taking small digs at my height (microaggressions) and I also dealt with persistent bullies like Kimmy and Schnipper who would berate me daily with insults, nicknames, and instigated conflicts. People attack tall girls and make them feel afraid to be seen. The saddest line of the movie came when Jodi explained to her family why she stopped playing piano: “When you’re good at something people tend to want to watch you do it and I don’t need to give people another reason to look at me.” I wonder how many women today have stunted their growth from worry over being seen as too tall. Would we have more tall dancers, singers, actresses, or professionals if more tall girls felt confident to take the stage or raise their hands in class and be seen for their talent and intelligence?

It could have been me hiding in the back of the class, afraid to stand out. In fact, it probably would have been me if I hadn’t had an unexpected conversation that changed my self-perception and altered the course of my life. Instead of Kimmy’s hurtful movie line, “You’re the tall girl, you’ll never be the pretty girl,” a popular girl in class came up to me in the final days of middle school and asked, “Robyn, you’re smart, pretty and nice. Why don’t more people like you?”

That question hit me like a pile of bricks. I had so much going for me. Why was I letting haters bully me for being tall and erase the rest of my identity? No, I had control over how I see myself and how I invite others to look at me. I was transformed, like the main character, into “Face your fears, Jodi. Going after what you want, Jodi. Look at me ’cause I look good, Jodi!” I entered high school determined to be happy every day. That happiness helped me to grow less shy in class, extracurriculars, and building friendships and gave me the confidence to set goals for myself.

That change of perspective also made me confident in my standards for a boyfriend and I was not going to settle for some short guy, even if that meant I would be single all through high school. I was single and I don’t regret it.

How to hug a girl who's taller than youThis boy was gaslighting! None of his actions in the entire film were okay and yet we’re made to celebrate his character because he held a crush on the protagonist before she loved herself. No thank you.

I am upset that Jodi ends up with the short guy (Dunkleman). I am especially upset at how that short guy manipulated the tall guy (Stig) into betraying Jodi because he wanted her for himself. (He orchestrated the whole thing and then is celebrated as the hero! What. ) Is the writer suggesting that guys should be rewarded for sabotaging the relationships of their friends? Moreover, by pairing Jodi with the short guy it extends the common misconception that tall women only refuse to date shorter men because they’re too embarrassed to draw attention to their heights in public. Tall Girl missed a huge opportunity to destroy that misconception and show that a confident girl/woman can have a type and a taste for taller men that’s fully formed by her own interests, not the gaze of others. Allow us to say that we’re incompatible with guys that have to step on milk crates to kiss us!

Overall, I am glad that Tall Girl was made and I hope that people who watch it will have a few takeaways:

  • It is not okay to say “How’s the weather up there” and otherwise alienate tall people by drawing attention to our heights.
  • You can be tall, smart, talented, caring, creative, and all of the things. Height is not your only identity.
  • Don’t let anyone make you feel prejudiced because you have standards for the men you date.

Oh, and stand up straight. Walk tall. No slouching!

“[People with disabilities] is the largest minority group in the country. But yet we do not see ourselves represented. We’re in less than one percent of TV shows and movies. Five years ago, I was sick of those same statistics. And I decided I wanted to take action.”

–Nic Novicki, Creator of the Easterseals Disability Film Challenge

Game of Thrones’ Peter Dinklage, NCIS: Los Angeles’ Linda Hunt
and Seinfeld’s Danny Woodburn also are Little People.

A little person is one of the more than 200 medical conditions known as dwarfism. Dwarfism is a medical or genetic condition that usually results in an adult height of 4’10” or shorter, although in some cases a person with a form of dwarfism may be slightly taller than that. The condition that causes dwarfism may also cause other symptoms. The average height of an adult with dwarfism is 4’0, but typical heights range from 2’8” to 4’8”.

Do not crouch or kneel when speaking to a Little Person. Appropriate terms include little person, person of short stature, dwarf or LP, though it is most respectful to refer to someone just by name. The word “midget” is considered highly offensive. A little person may choose not to identify as a person with a disability or part of the disability community.

Because dwarfism can be caused by so many different genetic or medical conditions, it is difficult to get an accurate number of individuals affected. However, according to Understanding Dwarfism, it has been estimated that 30,000 people in the United States are affected.

A definitive guide to the relationship status of Team USA’s pairs skaters at the 2022 Beijing Olympics.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

The best part of watching pairs figure skating and the ice dancing competitions is guessing whether or not the duo are dating off the ice. Well, you no longer have to guess for the 2022 Beijing Olympics—we have all the answers on relationship status of Team USA’s figure skaters, just for you.

Madison Chock and Evan Bates

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Madison Chock and Evan Bates are very much dating. Chock, 29, and Bates, 32, started skating together in 2011, and later started dating in 2017. This is their third Olympics together.

“I’ve always had great chemistry with [Bates],” Chock explained to NBC. “We’ve always gotten along so well. Skating together is something that we love doing, and we love doing it together. Now, we’re together on and off the ice and it makes it even more powerful. It feels completely genuine and real.”

Bates said he was always “having a blast” with her and their base of friendship led to romance.

And Chock believes their ice dancing has benefitted from the fact they’re dating: “We are just more emotionally connected,” she told Insider. They currently train in Montreal, Quebec, where they live with their two toy poodles.

Madison Hubbell and Zachary Donohue

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Madison Hubbell and Zachary Donohue did date, but they’re no longer dating. The pair have been skating together since 2011, and started dating around the same time, but broke up after two and a half years.

“A lot of people are like, ‘Oh it’s so amazing that you guys broke up and you still skated together.’ But it wasn’t a choice for us,” Hubbell told USA Today. “The relationship didn’t work. We weren’t willing to make it work. But the love made it so we couldn’t say goodbye.”

“We have this innate back-of-the-mind care for each other and love for each other that has grown in some ways,” Donohue adds. “The more romantic ways no longer exist, but it’s something that goes kind of beyond an everyday expression of emotion or even a cognizant feeling.”

Hubbell, 30, and Donohue, 31, are now both dating other ice dancers: Hubbell is engaged to Spanish ice dancer Adrian Diaz and Donohue is dating Australian ice dancer Chantelle Kerry. They have said this Olympics will be their last.

Kaitlin Hawayek and Jean-Luc Baker

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Kaitlin Hawayek and Jean-Luc Baker are reportedly not dating, but are very close friends. Hawayek and Baker teamed up in June 2012, and the 2022 Beijing Olympics is their first Olympic competition.

While they aren’t in a romantic relationship, Hawayek, 25, and Baker, 28, have been open about working with a sports psychologist on their partnership. Hawayek says learning to communicate with each other—openly and honestly—was key to their success on the ice.

“Ultimately, we periodize our physical training to be kind of peaking at the same point. But the emotional connection and that relationship is something that I think was the most effortful part of growing our partnership,” Baker explained to WBUR, Boston’s NPR News Station. Still: not dating.

Alexa Knierim and Brandon Frazier

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Alexa Knierim and Brandon Frazier are definitely not dating; Knierim is married to Chris Knierim, who she competed with until 2020. Alexa Knierm, née Scimeca, first teamed up with Chris Knierim in 2012 and started dating shortly thereafter. They married in June 2016, and skated together at the 2018 Olympics in Pyeongchang.

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

When Chris decided to retire in 2020, citing physical and mental health, Alexa was fully supportive. “First and foremost, I’m his wife over his [skating] partner,” Alexa said. “We know skating ends and life continues. For us, our marriage, our relationship is what’s important.”

A few months later, she teamed up with Brandon Frazier, and Knierim and Frazier are competing at the 2022 Beijing Olympics together—not married, just friends and figure skating partners. Chris Knierim is cheering his wife on from their home in California.

Ashley Cain-Gribble and Timothy LeDuc

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Ashley Cain-Gribble and Timothy LeDuc are also very much not dating. LeDuc, 31, made history this Olympics as the first openly non-binary athlete to compete at the Games. The duo have been skating together since 2016.

“For a long time, Timothy and I didn’t see ourselves represented, and so we didn’t quite feel like we belonged,” Cain-Gribble, 26, told CNN Sport.“And for a long time, people had things to say about us. Even when we teamed up, they had a lot of things to say about my body, or about Timothy’s sexuality. People still will make those comments.”

LeDuc identifies as gay, and Cain-Gribble, at 5’6″, is taller than most women in figure skating. They choose not to portray romantic stories with their skates, instead wanting to emphasize two strong athletes, skating in unison.

“Ashley and I are just different in that way; we’ve never done a romantic story and we’ve never been a romantic pair. We’ve always been about equality and showing two amazing athletes coming together to create something beautiful,” LeDuc says.

Other figure skaters:

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

A quick trip away from team USA: Japanese ice dancers Misato Komatsubara and Tim Koleto are together—they married in 2017. Koleto became a Japanese citizen in 2020, and legally adopted name Takeru Komatsubara. “To be Japanese but ask my wife to change to a foreign surname I thought was quite strange,” he explained to Europe on Ice. I chose to change my surname to Komatsubara, and it is rare in life that you get to choose your own name so I started to think about it and I played around with a few.” He eventually asked Komatsubara’s mom, who suggested Takeru for his first name. He skates under Tim Koleto in international competitions, like the Olympics, and Komatsubara Takeru in Japan.

Miriam Ziegler and Severin Kiefer, an Austrian figure skating pair, are also dating. This is their third Olympics competing together. As Kiefer told a figure skating blog in 2015: “Miriam and I spend close to twenty four hours a day together and quite honestly, I wouldn’t have it any other way. Our on ice relationship is very professional. We have a pretty good way of separating our on ice partnership with what we have away from skating and don’t let problems that occur on the ice interfere with our relationship off the ice.”

A viral TikTok has a lot to teach us about internalised misogyny

How to hug a girl who's taller than you

Before I met my boyfriend, I couldn’t imagine dating a shorter man. I usually fell in love with tall men — if I wanted to kiss them, I had to stand on my toes.

And that’s what women usually seem to want, isn’t it? Every time I watch the UK reality TV show Love Island, the consensus is more than clear: desirable men are tall, dark and handsome.

This phenomenon kind of makes sense because men are on average taller than women. The average male in the USA is 1,77 meters tall, while the average female is 1,63. This means that most women are paired up with men that are taller than them. The stereotype resulting from this is self-explanatory.

However, women don’t desire tall men just because they’re most likely going to date one, statistically speaking. After discussing this issue with multiple female friends, I’ve realised the problem isn’t about women accepting that most men are taller. It’s about women refusing to date men that are shorter, no matter how handsome or amazing they are.

This goes way beyond statistics. It’s time to face internalised misogyny.

Yesterday, I stumbled upon a viral TikTok that made me laugh because it reminded me of my own situation.

Abbie and her husband make for a beautiful couple, and just like with my own relationship, it would have been a shame if Abbie hadn’t overcome her prejudice and had ditched Josh Herbert because of his height.

This TikTok shows women all around the world that they should throw prejudice out of the window and focus on qualities that are much more important than height. Abbie is standing tall and proud next to her husband and manages to make her audience laugh and feel at ease in the process.

The video also raises questions I’ve been asking myself for the longest time. Why are women so set on never dating shorter men? Why do we need an amazing attractive short man to appear in our lives so he can prove us wrong, instead of just accepting that short men, in general, can be just as attractive as the tall ones?

I have thoughts.

Ever since you’re born as a female in our society, you’re perceived as the weaker gender. Girls are led to be quiet, nice, nonproblematic, sensitive. Boys, on the other hand, have their own issues to deal with — they’re laughed at for showing vulnerability and sadness and they’re always told they need to “toughen up”.

Weak and strong. Sensitive and cold-hearted. Quiet and loud. Caring and violent. Nurturing and ambitious. We assign ourselves adjectives after adjectives based on our gender, and every time you step over the line, you’re in danger of being socially persecuted.

A boy in a dress? Not “manly”.

A girl who hates dresses? A tomboy.

A woman who’s tall and muscular? Not fragile enough. Not feminine enough.

And a man who’s short? You guessed it.

When I met my boyfriend for the first time, I thought he was gorgeous. We got on extremely well and I was looking forward to our second date. But I had my doubts.

“Will I be attracted to him even though he’s shorter than me? Will I still feel safe, taken care of, elegant and feminine?” I was asking myself at the back of my mind.

I didn’t let my fears deter me, and he ended up winning over every single man I’d ever dated when it comes to attraction. Turns out, I’m madly attracted to him, madly in love with him and he makes me feel like the most gorgeous woman on Earth.

What’s more, I love his masculinity. There’s no toxicity in it, no unhealthy lack of self-esteem that could be a potential strain on the relationship, no worries about his height whatsoever. He’s a beautiful man who is at peace with himself and he never feels “emasculated” next to a taller woman.

Later, as I started unpacking those doubts I’d had after our first date, I realised how toxic and unhealthy my prejudice against short men was. Why did I need his physical appearance to make me feel “safe” or “taken care of” or “feminine”? Wasn’t I all those things on my own? Why would I need a man for that?

Well, when you’re socialised into appearing weak, skinny and fragile your whole life, standing next to a smaller man can easily highlight insecurities you didn’t even know you had. Suddenly, your female ego is at risk — can you still be a fragile flower when you’re so much bigger than your partner?

And the answer is: Yes. Yes, you can be a fragile flower no matter how tall your partner is. His height has no effect on your femininity whatsoever because every woman is feminine in her own way.

But another, more important answer is: Do you even want to be one? Why should women be fragile? Why should we be weak? We can literally create life inside ourselves and then push it out while being in horrible pain for hours. Doesn’t sound so weak to me.

One of the problems I see here is that many women have internalised misogyny. It’s sexist to expect us to be polished, skinny, made out of sugar and to poop rainbows. Yet because we grew up in a certain society, that’s what we end up thinking about ourselves.

To quote the UMKC Women’s Center’s website:

“It can be difficult to identify internalized misogyny. As independent as we think we may be, we have many preconceived notions about how a woman should exist that stem from societal expectations and gender norms. It is important to be conscious of this, and to be conscious of your thoughts and ideas not only about other women but also in regards to yourself. Remember — empowered women empower women!”

I don’t care that my boyfriend is shorter than me. My doubts weren’t that immense to begin with — even though I had them, I was more curious than anything else — but many women I know struggle with this and deliberately reject shorter men.

Well, I’m here to tell you that you don’t need your man to be big and strong to feel feminine. It helps neither men, who feel even more pressured into appearing strong and protective and never showing any weakness, nor women.

Every woman is feminine in her own way. Femininity doesn’t have to mean weakness, emotional turmoil or fragility. Femininity is strength, too. So be your own woman. Your insecurities are something to work on, not something to project on potential partners. Let’s stop letting our society dictate to us what a woman should be.

And maybe give short men a chance. Many of them are lovely and make for excellent boyfriends. I speak from experience.

If you liked this, you might enjoy reading more of my work:

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Posted on May 27, 2016 by Anytime Plumbing, Inc

One of the handiest things to have in your kitchen is a garbage disposal. It makes quick work of cleaning off dishes, pots, and pans. Plus, you do not have to worry about putting food in your garbage cans that might entice vermin.

Most garbage disposals work by flipping a switch above the sink. All you have to do is put small scraps of food in it and run cold water while it disposes of the waste.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalUnfortunately, anything that handles waste is going to collect smells after a while. If you use your garbage disposal a lot, it is naturally going to get some build-up that will stink. Often, it starts as a slightly sour smell around the sink. If you let it go for a while, a dirty garbage disposal can smell up the whole kitchen.

Sometimes the whole disposal may get clogged, and you need a professional plumber to fix it. One of the biggest culprits of clogged and smelly garbage disposals is grease.

Some people may not think about dumping a bunch of oil down their disposal. When it cools, the oil can make a big clog in the disposal or the drain pipes. Grease also can build up and cause terrible smells.

There are a few things you can do to keep your garbage disposal clean and fresh. You just have to be careful what you put down it and be sure to run water in it while it is working. The best remedy is prevention. If your garbage disposal smells like something died in it, try some of these proven remedies to make it fresh again.

1. Use Natural Remedies

  • Baking Soda and White Vinegar: One of the greenest ways of freshening your garbage disposal is to pour ¼ cup of baking soda in it, then add a cup of white vinegar. The bubbling reaction naturally kills bacteria and germs that cause odor. Let it bubble for a few minutes and then run some water through the disposal. This method also cleans away mineral deposits that can be harboring smelly germs.
  • Borax: This is a powerful mineral that cleans and destroys odor. Use a half cup of borax in your garbage disposal once a week to keep in smelling fresh.
  • Salt and Ice: When used together, salt and ice clean all the gunk out of the disposal that is responsible for the awful odors. It also cleans the disposal blades well.
  • Mouthwash: Many people do not know that the original mouthwash started out as an antiseptic treatment to sterilize surgery tools. If mouthwash can kill germs that cause bad breath, it will work just as well in the garbage disposal. Just rinse your disposal with a cup of mouthwash whenever it needs to be refreshed.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal2. The Power of Citrus

Citrus fruits are acidic and contain natural oils that are antibacterial and anti-fungal. Plus, they make your garbage disposal have a pleasant, citrus smell. Most of these oils are in the rinds of oranges, grapefruit, lemons, and limes.

To take advantage of Mother Nature’s lovely deodorizer, grind a handful of peelings in your garbage disposal whenever it starts to stink. Some people like to cut up slices and use the whole fruit. The citrus oils kill odor-causing bacteria and whisk away stinky residue in the disposal.

3. Scouring Powder

There are several brands of quality scouring powders that are safe to clean your garbage disposal. Just sprinkle about ½ cup of your favorite brand down the disposal and add a little cold water.

After it has sat for about 15 minutes, run the disposal with some more cold water. The gentle abrasion of the powder will clean the blades, and the ingredients will take away bad smells. If you do not want to use scouring powder, then plain baking soda will do the same thing.

4. Avoidable Objects

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalSome foods do not grind up well in a garbage disposal. They can easily cause dull blades, build-up, and clogs. Where there is a build-up, there will be a foul odor. Avoid these things in your garbage disposal:

  • Oils and fats: These can cause fat clogs that would require professional plumbing help.
  • Meats: Cooked or uncooked
  • Stringy vegetables and fruits, such as celery, onions, rhubarb, corn husks, and banana peels. The strings get all wrapped around the blades and can burn out the motor. Plus, the build-up on the blades causes odor.
  • Egg shells

5. Bottle Brush

Use a little dishwashing liquid and a bottle brush to scrub out your disposal. Make sure the disposal is turned off. NEVER stick your fingers in a garbage disposal to clean or dislodge anything.

If you need a professional plumber to fix your garbage disposal, call Anytime Plumbing, Inc in Las Vegas, NV at (702) 362-9300.

If you’re using your garbage disposal as a catch-all, you may want to reconsider. There are a lot of things you shouldn’t put down the garbage disposal, from eggshells and coffee grounds to oils and grease.

The reality is that sometimes, whether you’re putting the right things or the wrong things down your sink, a foul garbage disposal odor can develop that takes over your whole kitchen!

Before you start lighting candles and spraying air freshening spray, see if you can tackle the smell directly. Not sure how? We’ve got your back!

Read on for tips and tricks from our expert home cleaners on how to get rid of that nasty garbage disposal odor.

Step 1: Start With Some Ice

Believe it or not, the first thing you can try is something you’ll find right in your own freezer: ice! Throwing an ice cube or two down the garbage disposal is something you can do if you need a quick fix to sharpen your blades. It’s also a good way to try to tackle strange smells.

The reason why we suggest starting with ice is that it can help to clean up those blades without any chemicals. Plus, it can help dislodge any food scraps that are stuck in the garbage disposal without running the risk of adding another strange smell to the mix.

Run your garbage disposal and drop one to three ice cubes into it one at a time. Give it at least an hour and see if the smell clears up.

Step 2: Go Natural With Citrus

If the ice doesn’t do the trick (or you want to add some natural freshness to the air), we recommend using citrus fruits to your advantage. You can use a lemon, a lime, or an orange for this trick.

Why is citrus the way to go? Citrus fruits are acidic and can help eat away at all sorts of caked-on or greasy messes. Citrus also helps to neutralize unpleasant odors while filling the air with something much sweeter and more refreshing.

To try the citrus trick, discard the peel of the fruit in the trash–it’s too tough to go down the disposal. Then, cut the fruit into small pieces, turn on your garbage disposal, and throw the pieces in one at a time. Just like you did with the ice, give it about an hour and check again to see if the smell is still lingering.

Step 3: Bleach OR Vinegar and Baking Soda

Please take note that for this step, we’re advising you to use bleach or vinegar and baking soda. Do not use one right after the other and never mix bleach and vinegar. Doing so creates a toxic gas that can cause serious health problems.

Because vinegar and baking soda aren’t harsh on the skin or respiratory system, we do suggest using this method instead of bleach. However, we’ll discuss both methods in case you don’t have vinegar and baking soda on hand.

The Bleach Method

If you’re going to use bleach to get rid of that garbage disposal odor, look for something on the milder side. Turn on the tap and make sure that you’re running cold water–you can leave the garbage disposal, itself, off. Then, pour about a tablespoon of bleach into the running water so that it washes down the drain.

The bleach should knock out whatever is causing your sink to stink. Bleach is also an odor neutralizer, although it does come with a pungent smell of its own. If possible, open surrounding windows for at least 30 minutes after using bleach.

The Vinegar and Baking Soda Method

When vinegar and baking soda get together, they start to fizz and knock out the toughest, most stuck-on goops and greases out there. To try out this method, you’re going to want about one cup of baking soda and one cup of vinegar. (Remember, we’re talking white vinegar, not red wine vinegar!)

First, turn on your garbage disposal and dump your baking soda down the drain. Then, turn the disposal off and slowly and evenly pour the vinegar down the drain. You will most likely be able to hear the fizzing or bubbling sound as the baking soda and vinegar react to one another.

Like bleach, vinegar does have a pretty pungent odor. However, it clears out faster than bleach and it doesn’t pose any threats to your respiratory system.

No Dice? Try Speciality Products

If none of these methods are working, you may need to break out the serious stuff. Head to the grocery store or home improvement store to pick up a bottle of cleaning product designed specifically for cleaning garbage disposals. Then, head home and follow the instructions on the bottle or package to hopefully take care of your garbage disposal odor for good!

(Some cleaning products contain chemicals, which means that you’ll want to take precautions. You may want to wear gloves and other protective gear. You may also need to turn on a fan or open a window to increase ventilation in your kitchen.)

No Time to Tackle That Garbage Disposal Odor? Let Us Take It From Here

Some smells love nothing more to linger no matter what you do. If that garbage disposal odor is one of them and you’re tired of giving it all of your free time, it’s time to sit down, relax, and get back to what you want to do. We’ll take it from here!

To find out more about our services or request a free quote for your next cleaning, contact us today. We pride ourselves in helping keep houses across Georgia clean so that you don’t have to!

If there’s an unpleasant stench wafting from your garbage disposal, it’s time to give it a good cleaning. Here’s how to get rid of stinky food residue in your disposal.

By Bob Vila | Updated Sep 22, 2020 4:37 PM

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

There’s no denying the convenience of the garbage disposal: It simplifies so many of the activities that take place in the kitchen. Frequent use of the appliance, however, can sometimes lead to foul odors. If you’ve noticed a not-so-pleasing scent emanating from yours, don’t worry—it’s nothing permanent. Getting rid of a garbage disposal smell is by no means an arduous task. In fact, you probably have everything you need for it in your pantry, and the job won’t take more than 10 minutes.

MATERIALS AND TOOLS Available on Amazon
– Scrub brush
– Dish soap

STEP 1

Start by dabbing about a tablespoon of dish soap onto your choice of either a scrub brush or dish wand. Scrub the visible portion of the garbage disposal, paying special attention to the seam where the disposal flange meets the sink basin. Small particles have the tendency to linger there, and even mold can sometimes grow.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

STEP 2

When you run the kitchen faucet while operating the garbage disposal, its housing never completely fills with water. That’s normal. But if your garbage disposal has begun to smell, it can be a huge help to give the guts of the appliance a good soak. Here’s how to do it: Plug the drain in your sink, fill the basin about halfway with water, and then add a bit of dish soap (or vinegar, a natural cleaner). Next, unplug the drain and activate the garbage disposal. Doing so propels the soapy water through the housing, rinsing off its hidden nooks and crannies.

STEP 3

Even after the bath you gave the garbage disposal in Step 2, there may still be slimy residue left inside the appliance. To dislodge it, you need to go only as far as the spice rack: As it happens, kosher salt can be an effective abrasive cleaner. Pour a large cup of ice cubes into the garbage disposal, switch on the appliance, then add one-half cup of the salt. Together, the ice and salt should combine to grind away what remains of the odor-causing residue.

By now, the garbage disposal smell that had been bothering you should be gone. If you’ve got an extra lemon lying around, why not imbue the kitchen with a fresh citrus scent by simply grinding a few peels through the appliance?

Preventing Bad Smells

Although it’s easy enough to eliminate a garbage disposal smell, prevention is perhaps the best cure. Bear in mind these simple guidelines, and you’ll cut down on the accumulated food residue in the disposal that causes the foul odors in the first place. First, remember to use the disposal only for the organic materials it was designed to handle. Also, try to keep fibrous vegetables—for example, celery—and starchy foods like potatoes out of there. Meanwhile, don’t be hesitant to put eggshells and small fruit pits through the machine, as they actually go a long way toward cleaning its blades. Finally, dispel persistent particles from within the housing by always running the machine for five seconds longer than you think is strictly necessary.

With regular care and a bit of extra attention on occasion, your garbage disposal can be a boon to your everyday life without becoming a stinky inconvenience.

It happens in every kitchen, sooner or later – one morning you walk in for a much-needed cup of coffee and instead encounter a disgusting mystery odor coming from your garbage disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalIt’s understandable, considering all of the food waste we throw down there on a daily basis, but fear not – deodorizing a disposal is simple! Here are five easy ways to get rid of the funk.

1) The Simplest Solution

The first thing to try is a simple hot water flush. Plug up the disposal with a rubber stopper, then fill the sink with hot water and a couple of drops of dish detergent.

Then, use rubber gloves or kitchen tongs to pull up the rubber stopper carefully (don’t burn yourself!).

The rush of hot water will hopefully remove any bits of smelly food stuck to the sides of the disposal. For better results, you can repeat this method a few times in a row, as well as daily to keep the stinky smells at bay.

2) Use Natural Remedies

Many things around your home can be cleaned with simple baking soda and vinegar, and the garbage disposal is no exception! Simply pour a cup of vinegar down a running disposal with cool water, or sprinkle in half a cup of baking soda. Either one will work well on by itself, but for the toughest jobs, you can combine them for extra cleaning power.

Take one cup of vinegar, and half a cup of baking soda, as before, but don’t mix them yet! Sprinkle in the baking soda first, then pour the vinegar on top. They will react to form a natural foaming cleanser and deodorizer. Leave it to set for about five minutes, then finish with a hot water run of the disposal.

3) The Ice Method

Toss some ice cubes down the disposal – anywhere from a handful to a whole tray will work – and pour in a little of your favorite cleaning solution. Turn on the cold water faucet, and run the disposal. As the ice gets crushed up, it will scrape away all of the old food particles, giving the disposal a good deep cleaning.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalThis can be done once a week for ongoing maintenance, more than that will eventually dull the blades. You can also substitute kosher salt for the cleaning solution if you prefer a more natural method, as the salt will provide abrasive scrubbing as well as kill any smell-causing bacteria.

4) The Power of Citrus

There’s a reason many cleaners are fragranced with citrus oil – it smells fresh and clean! An easy way to deodorize your garbage disposal is to peel any citrus fruit – lemons, limes, oranges, even grapefruits – and throw the peels into the disposal (eating the fruit is optional). Remember to only add the peels, being especially careful to remove any pits, seeds or cores as they will harm the disposal.

Run cold water as you turn on the disposal, and in just a few seconds a lovely citrus scent will replace the bad odor. You can do this anytime you think about it to keep the disposal smelling fresh and clean.

5) Prevention is the Cure

Ideally, it would be best to avoid a smelly garbage disposal altogether. Fortunately, there are some simple things that can be done in just a few minutes every day to prevent bad odors, such as:

  • Always use cold water when running the garbage disposal. Though hot water is great when trying to clean it, cold water will help prevent buildup from melted grease and oils.
  • If you are cooking with eggs or citrus, save the eggshells and fruit peels to run down last. The eggshells will act as an abrasive, scrubbing the grime off the sides of the disposal, while the peels will deodorize and freshen.
  • Always run the disposal an additional 20-30 seconds after you hear that all of the food particles have been pulverized. This allows sufficient water to run through the disposal, effectively rinsing it clean for less chance of lingering odor.
  • Remember to occasionally clean under the rubber seal of the garbage disposal, as gunk will build up there as well. Any easy way is to put a few drops of dish soap or cleaning solution on a handled scrub brush and maneuver it under and through the flaps. In some of the newer disposal models, this is removable, making it even easier to clean once or twice a week.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalAdditionally, there are certain things that you should avoid putting down the garbage disposal, such as:

  • Grease/Oils: while most liquids will go down the drain just fine, avoid pouring any cooking oils or grease down, as they can solidify inside the disposal and create clogs.
  • Coffee grounds: you would think coffee grounds might be a perfect candidate to run through the disposal, but they can get caught in the drain trap and eventually cause problems.
  • Rice and Pasta: these items have the ability to expand in water, thus potentially causing a messy blockage.
  • Bones, seeds, fruit cores, and pits: for the most part, these are too hard for your garbage disposal to handle and may break the blades.
  • Vegetables with fibers, such as celery and artichokes: the fibers in these types of foods can wrap around the edges and damage the garbage disposal.
  • Non-foods items: this might be obvious, but often a bottle cap or straw or even a piece of silverware can slip down the disposal drain accidentally. Before turning the unit on, always check to make sure nothing is down there that shouldn’t be!

If you follow these tips, your garbage disposal should last you many years smelling fresh and clean. However, if you do have a problem with your garbage disposal, do not hesitate to call in a professional.

We here at PHD Mechanical Inc are a reputable repair service in Wayne, NJ with 26 years of experience. Contact us for a consultation today at (973) 492-5931. We would be happy to help!

Like what you’re reading? Feel free to share by clicking the share buttons!

If you’ve noticed a funky smell lingering in your kitchen even after taking out the trash and cleaning the fridge, it could be your garbage disposal. Bits of food can get stuck to the grinder blades, leading to bacteria growth and a stinky sink.

Here are 3 natural ways to clean and deodorize a smelly garbage disposal, using things you probably already have in your kitchen:

Use Ice and Salt to Clean the Grinder Blades

Put a big cup full of ice cubes into the disposal, turn it on, and then add about half a cup of kosher or rock salt. The ice and salt will work together to scrub the gunk off the inside of your disposal.

Use Citrus Peels for a Fresher Disposal

Throw a few lemon or orange peels into the disposal and grind them up to add a clean citrus scent to your kitchen. This can be done anytime, even if the appliance isn’t stinky.

Make a Deodorizing Volcano with Baking Soda & Vinegar

Mixing baking soda and vinegar creates a strong chemical reaction that looks like a giant, fizzy volcano. But these two ingredients also have incredible deodorizing and cleaning powers. Sprinkle half a cup of baking soda into the disposal and add some vinegar. Let the mixture sit for 10-15 minutes before rinsing with hot water.

If you try these methods and your garbage disposal still smells, call Reddi Root’r at 316-847-4277. Our plumbing professionals will quickly diagnose and fix the problem.

THE MATERIAL CONTAINED IN THIS ARTICLE IS PROVIDED FOR GENERAL INFORMATION PURPOSES ONLY AND DOES NOT CONSTITUTE PROFESSIONAL ADVICE.LANDMARK HOME WARRANTY DOES NOT PURPORT TO BE A SUBJECT MATTER EXPERT WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, AND YOU SHOULD CONDUCT YOUR OWN RESEARCH AND/OR SEEK THE ADVICE OF APPROPRIATELY QUALIFIED PROFESSIONALS WITH REGARD TO YOUR SPECIFIC CIRCUMSTANCES BEFORE YOU TAKE ACTION. LANDMARK HOME WARRANTY ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY, FOR YOUR USE OF ANY AND ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN.

Have you ever been in your kitchen and there’s just a horrible, reeking smell? You’ve taken out the trash, you’ve thrown out bad food in the fridge . what could it be?

As you saw in the post How Does a Garbage Disposal Work?, when you put food waste down the drain and then turn on your disposal, the food is pushed against the shredder ring by centrifugal force, is essentially liquefied, and is pushed out of the waste pipe. Sometimes the food gets thrown onto the sides of the garbage disposal and on the undersides of the rubber splash guard, and starts to rot. We won’t lie to you, those rotting food particles can start to stink!

At Landmark Home Warranty, part of our contract stipulates that we don’t cover for smells or noise coming from your home appliances. That goes for garbage disposals too, so that’s why it’s important to learn how to clean your garbage disposal to get rid of that funky smell.

HOW TO GET RID OF YOUR GARBAGE DISPOSALS SMELLS

First things first, there is a lot of advice out there about how to clean those rotting food particles off of the sides of your garbage disposal. Don’t put drain cleaner down your drain, as it can be corrosive to the parts within. Here are some quick DIY tips to fix dirty garbage disposals or rid those nasty smells from your sink basin.

1. USE ICE

Take 2 cups of ice, and 1 cup of salt and put it in the garbage disposal. Then, run cold water, and turn on the garbage disposal for 5 to 10 seconds at a time until the ice has been crushed. If you want to, you can use frozen vinegar cubes.

2. USE BAKING SODA AND VINEGAR

You can also use baking soda and vinegar to clean our the disposal. Let the vinegar and baking soda foam for a few minutes, and then rinse it down the drain with running water. This will have hopefully cleaned the sludge off of the sides of your disposal.

3. USE LEMON PEELS

Take extremely small slices of lemon rind and grind them up to freshen the smell.

4. CLEAN THE UNDERSIDE OF THE SPLASH GUARD

Don’t forget that the undersides of your splash guard need to be cleaned as well. You can lift up the undersides of the guard and clean it with an old toothbrush.

Even if you’re diligent about food scraps and run plenty of water when using your garbage disposal, it’s likely to accumulate smelly food particles over time. Cleaning a garbage disposal requires both scraping away built-up grime and deodorizing the appliance while paying attention to the disposal chamber, splash guard, and trap.

Although it’s often overlooked, the garbage disposal is an essential item on your kitchen cleaning checklist. Make the process easier by utilizing the natural cleaning materials you already use to clean countertops and kitchen appliances. The best way to clean a garbage disposal is a combination of the methods outlined below. These tips for cleaning a garbage disposal will remove odor and grime while helping to keep the appliance running smoothly.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal Chamber

Before cleaning your garbage disposal, turn on cold water and run it to empty the chamber of debris. If it sounds like something might be stuck, turn off the disposal. For safety, wear rubber gloves and unplug the disposal before putting your hand in the chamber. Carefully reach in and pull out any large debris.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal with Ice

Check out the product manual (often easily downloaded from the manufacturer or retailer website) for cleaning instructions for your disposal model. For example, Insinkerator suggests grinding hard materials, like ice, to scour the chamber.

To clean a garbage disposal with ice, place a few cups of ice into the chamber. Turn on cold water, then the disposal, running both until well after the ice is gone. For additional friction to remove pesky interior crud, add salt—large rock salt is especially effective—with the ice.

Although the popular hack that pairs ice cubes with hot water might seem effective, professionals and product manufacturers do not recommend using hot water while running the disposal.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal with Baking Soda and Vinegar

Another common cleaning solution is baking soda, which acts as both a deodorizer and a scouring agent. For example, KitchenAid recommends stopping the drain and filling the sink with warm water and 1/4 cup baking soda, then removing the stopper while turning on the disposal. Similarly, you can pour both baking soda and distilled white vinegar into the chamber, letting it sit for a few minutes before turning on the tap and disposal to rinse.

How to Clean a Smelly Garbage Disposal

Cleaning a garbage disposal chamber will help remove food residue, but it might not entirely eliminate odors. Scrubbing the splash guard and adding a natural scent will freshen up any lingering smells.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal Rubber Flange

The garbage-disposal splash guard—the rubber flanges around the drain that prevent food particles from coming back up—can be a major source of gunk and odor. To clean, apply grease-cutting dish soap to an old toothbrush and scrub under the splash guard, scraping off any residue that clings underneath. For extra protection, use an antibacterial cleaner to help combat smelly bacteria buildup.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal with Lemon

In addition to the baking soda and vinegar method, lemon can be used to eliminate garbage disposal smells. Grind lemon, lime, or other citrus peelings to remove odors and grease the grinder blades for a good clean, too. To combat disposal stink, recommendations vary from fresh or frozen peels to wedges or quarters of lemon. Experiment to find what works best with your disposal and the strength of your grinder.

How to Clean the Garbage Disposal Trap

Running cold water helps flush debris in the disposal trap (the S- or P-pipe that connects to the disposal under the sink). However, if it is clogged or draining slowly, it could mean things like coffee grounds or starchy foods are wedged in the trap. Do not use traditional chemical drain-cleaning products on a garbage disposal. Instead, place a bucket underneath the sink and remove the S-trap or P-trap. Clean out any stuck-on debris using a bottle brush and soapy water. Rinse with clean water before reassembling the disposal trap.

Why Does My Garbage Disposal Smell So Bad? And Can It Be Fixed?

Prepare your kitchen for the holidays by eliminating the garbage disposal smell emanating from your kitchen sink.

A garbage disposal is a kitchen appliance used to grind or break up kitchen waste such as food scraps small enough so you can wash them down the drain. Although the machine is very efficient when it comes to disposing of unwanted food wastes, it can sometimes develop an offensive smell that will linger throughout your kitchen. The garbage disposal smell is caused by rotting or decaying food lying around the appliance’s cutting blades or the drainpipes connected to it. Learn what can be done to rid your kitchen of this horrible garbage disposal smell.

Rinsing or Flushing with Clean Water

Simply rinsing the garbage disposal with hot water while it is running is sometimes enough to eliminate the odoriferous problem. The hot water washes the decaying food particles and scraps out of the appliance and its drainpipes and into the sewer. This should be practiced after each time you use your garbage disposal.

Rinsing or Flushing with Soapy Water

Filling the sink with hot, soapy water and allowing it to drain while running the garbage disposal provides a more thorough cleaning. A quality grease-cutting dish detergent helps to cut through the grease and food attached to the disposal blades and pipes.

Scrub-a-dub-dub

Often, the rubber flap around the disposal drain as well as its rubber stopper needs a brisk cleaning. A stiff, nylon brush and some all-purpose kitchen cleaner make quick work of this task. It doesn’t hurt to clean around the sink drain openings as well.

Deodorizing the Appliance

Baking soda is one of mankind’s finest inventions. The all-purpose powder is used in more applications than just about anything. Pouring about 1/2 cup of the miraculous powder into your garbage disposal along with 1/2 cup of vinegar will eliminate most odors emanating from it. The solution should be allowed to sit in the disposal for approximately one hour before applying a thorough rinse with clean water.

Professional Cleaning

When these simple, home remedies fail to rid your kitchen of a nasty garbage disposal smell, it might be time to call in a professional plumber. Over longer periods, food particles can harden and encrust the cutting blades of your disposal. No manner of rinsing or flushing with hot water and soap will loosen them. It takes a stronger cleaning solution and hours of soaking to remove them from the blades. After disconnecting the garbage disposal drain, a plumber will cap the outlet tube on the disposal to prevent it from draining. A cleaning solution is poured in and allowed to sit for approximately one hour or more. The drain is reconnected and the disposal is flushed with clean, hot water.

Dunwoody residents of the greater Atlanta metro area seeking additional expert advice regarding garbage disposal smells and service should contact Reliable Heating and Air. Reliable Heating and Air will handle the funky smells coming from your garbage disposal. They know your home should smell of balsam and cloves over the holidays, not week-old veggies.

A garbage disposal offers a convenient way to dispose of food scraps without clogging your drain or filling your kitchen trash. But anyone who’s battled disposal odor knows offensive smells can quickly take over without regular maintenance. We’ll review how cleaning with the right tools and techniques can banish odor when your garbage disposal smells bad.

Garbage Disposal Smells Bad? Follow These Steps to Dispel the Smell

Kitchen conveniences that handle food can require specific cleaning methods to fight odor effectively. We’ll detail what cleaning techniques work best when your garbage disposal smells bad as well as how to prevent odor from returning. But why does my garbage disposal stink in the first place? Here’s how odor originates.

Why Does My Garbage Disposal Smell So Bad?

One of the most common garbage disposal myths is that it uses blades to break down food. But food particles are actually broken down by rotating impellers and flushed down the drain with water. While this system is effective, food particles do get left behind. Any lingering debris can rapidly start to decay inside the disposal’s upper chamber, creating an offensive odor.

If these food particles accumulate, clogs can also cause bad smells and prevent proper draining. The following steps detail how to clean a garbage disposal to remove smelly clogs and leftover debris.

#1. Clear Out Garbage Disposal Clogs

If your garbage disposal smells bad a clog is often the reason. Here’s how to check for odor-causing clogs and remove them safely:

  • Unplug the disposal.
  • Shine a flashlight into the disposal chamber to help locate obstructions.
  • Use tongs or pliers to remove any visible blockages.
  • Plug the disposal in again.
  • Run the disposal with cold running water for 1 minute.

#2. Use Soapy Water to Soak Garbage Disposal

A disposal’s design and location can make it difficult to clean, enabling food particles to stick around and decay. When your garbage disposal smells really bad here’s how an effective soaking can help eliminate odor:

  • Plug the disposal’s drain.
  • Fill the sink with at least 4 inches of water.
  • Add 2 tsp of dish soap, swishing the water to create suds.
  • Unplug the drain.
  • Run the disposal to process the soapy water.
  • Turn the disposal off and add dish soap to a scrub brush or sponge.
  • Scrub all visible components, including the sink rim, baffle, and inside the drain.

#3. Clean Garbage Disposal with Salt and Ice

Cleaning with salt and ice can provide helpful friction to dislodge decaying food particles and banish bad smells. These steps detail how to use ice cubes and a coarse salt effectively:

  • Place 10 ice cubes in the sink around the disposal.
  • Sprinkle the ice cubes with ½ cup of coarse salt.
  • Turn on the disposal and push the ice cubes and salt towards its opening.
  • Allow the disposal to process the ice and salt until it’s completely gone.
  • Flush remaining debris by running cold tap water as hard as possible, directly into the disposal, for 1-2 minutes.

#4. How to Deodorize a Garbage Disposal

Even when food particles are gone bad smells can continue to linger. When your garbage disposal smells bad even after a thorough cleaning, eliminate odor with natural remedies like baking soda and vinegar:

  • Pour 2 cups of baking soda directly into the disposal chamber.
  • Slowly add ½ cup of white vinegar.
  • Allow the mixture to sit for 1 hour.
  • Run the water and disposal for 1 minute to dispel the mixture.

After bad odors are banished you can freshen the disposal and give it a pleasant scent by processing lemon peels. Cut the lemon peel into 1-inch pieces and slowly feed them down the disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Tips to Prevent Garbage Disposal Odors

Regular cleanings with the above methods can quickly eliminate disposal odor. But how to prevent it from returning? Follow these tips to keep bad smells at bay:

  • Avoid putting fibrous or starchy food down the disposal. Banana peels, artichokes and celery can jam the motor and clog the drain while breads and pastas expand with moisture, leading to blockages.
  • Cut large particles into smaller pieces and only add food in small amounts to avoid clogs.
  • When using the disposal always run a strong stream of cold water to properly flush food particles and prevent blockages.

If your garbage disposal smells really bad even after these cleaning tips then you may need a professional assessment from a garbage disposal repair service.

Conner’s Appliance can help with any disposal concern. Call us for fast and expert service!

We’ll share all of our tips and tricks for clearing out the rotting food smell coming from your garbage disposal.

Katie is a Writer at CNET, covering all things how-to. When she’s not writing, she enjoys playing in golf scrambles, practicing yoga and spending time on the lake.

This story is part of Try This , CNET’s collection of simple tips to improve your life, fast.

Nothing can ruin your appetite more than a bad odor coming from your kitchen sink’s garbage disposal. It’s not enough to just flip the power switch and turn on the faucet every time you cram food into the disposal. All that’s doing is blending up the food so it can flow through the pipes. But food particles can be left behind, which allows the food to rot and bacteria to build up, which can cause an awful smell to arise.

We’ll share some tips for clearing up the bad smell coming from your disposal. For more kitchen tricks, here’s how to clear a clogged drain without using chemicals.

Try the ice cube method

If your blades have food particles or other grime stuck on them, it makes them less efficient at grinding up the food going down the drain and can cause bad smells. Pour a cup of ice down the disposal, followed by cold water to clean the blades (and even sharpen them). Keep the disposal and water running until you don’t hear a grinding sound anymore.

Note that the ice cube method only works for garbage disposals with blades.

Lemons make everything smell fresh

Lemons are great to use for cleaning just about anything in your kitchen. For your disposal, grab a full lemon, then slice it in half and quarter each half — you should have a total of eight lemon slices. Try to remove the seeds if possible. Next, turn on the cold water and the disposal and begin placing the lemon quarters (one at a time) into the disposal.

You may not need to place all eight lemon slices into the disposal, so save any leftovers for the next time you clean it — or use them to start a pitcher of lemonade.

You likely have many of these cleaning items stored at home.

Baking soda and vinegar can freshen it up

Baking soda and vinegar can accomplish quite a lot when combined together. Start by pouring half a cup of baking soda into your disposal. Let it sit for 30 minutes to an hour to give it time to absorb the odor. Next, pour a cup of vinegar down the drain and let it work its magic for about five to 10 minutes. Lastly, turn on the cold water and disposal and let it run for 15 seconds.

Clean the rubber splatter-proof flap

Have you ever wondered what the rubber thing is that sits in your sink drain? It’s there to help prevent food from splattering when it’s getting ground into tiny bits. That also means it’s a hoarder of bacteria as food can and will stick underneath it.

How can you clean what you can’t see? Fortunately, some of the flaps are removable and you can soak them in dish detergent and water — or run them through the dishwasher. For those that aren’t, you’ll need to get creative.

What we don’t want is for you to stick your hand in the disposal, so grab a toothbrush and dish soap. Gently pull each flap up one at a time and give it a good scrub.

Voila! Your kitchen should be back to smelling fresh in no time. Repeat these methods once a week. For more, here’s how to kill and prevent mold growing in your washer and this hack that unclogs your showerhead in just one hour .

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Pippin Brothers Home Services happily services the Greater Lawton, Fort Sill, and Duncan, Oklahoma area. If your house is uncomfortable; wasting energy; has plumbing problems or if you want to avoid breakdowns or verify everything in your home is working as it should, give us call at 580-699-5662. We’ve already helped many of your neighbors, and would be honored to help you.

Does your kitchen sink’s garbage disposal smell so awful that it’s almost embarrassing?

You don’t want to call a plumber if you can fix it yourself, right?

Well, good news: You can possibly get rid of this rotten smell using items just laying around your kitchen.

1.) Water and dish soap

The first method for removing a rotten smell from a sink’s garbage disposal is also the simplest—mixing hot water and soap.

  1. Put a rubber or steel stopper into the drain.
  2. Fill the sink about half-way full with hot water.
  3. Add in a couple squirts of liquid dishwashing soap.
  4. Mix the soap and water together.
  5. Lift the drain stopper and run the garbage disposal

Why this works: Hot water and soap combined help remove and wash away the gunk in your garbage disposal just like it would remove food off of your dishes.

Running the disposal unit will suck in the water/soap mixture quickly and help clean anything stuck on the grind ring.

2.) Ice cubes and kosher salt

If the smell persists after the soap and water method, try this:

  1. Throw down a few handfuls of ice cubes and one handful of kosher salt down the drain.
  2. Turn on the garbage disposal and let it run until you’ve stopped hearing noise for about 10-15 seconds.

Why this works: The ice cubes, while being ground up, act like millions of miniature missiles, all firing towards any leftover and stuck-on debris that may be stinking up your sink. The tiny ice particles knock off most of the gunk from the spinning blades of your disposal, while the handful of salt helps scrub the sides of the disposal’s upper tank.

3.) Baking soda and vinegar

This next method is one of the oldest plumbing tricks in the book. All you need for this next drain cleaning method is a half-cup of baking soda and a half-cup of vinegar.

Pour the baking soda inside the drain
Add the vinegar and then let the mixture sizzle and fizzle for 10-15 minutes.
Then, turn on the garbage disposal and run hot water from the tap for about 30 seconds.

Why this works: Vinegar acts as a natural deodorizer and is also great at killing bacteria.

Note: Because vinegar is also acidic you should not use the baking soda and vinegar method very often on your drain. Over time the vinegar could do long-term damage to the rubber parts of your disposal.

4.) Lemon peel

The last method for getting rid of the nasty smell just requires the peelings from a few lemons.

  1. Cut the peels into half-inch strips and place in your drain.
  2. Run your tap at half-power with hot water
  3. Turn on the garbage disposal and let it run until you’ve stopped hearing noise for about 10-15 seconds.

Why this works: The natural citrus of the lemons will coat the inside plate and rubber housing of the disposal and give off a fresh-cleaned smell without having to use any hard chemicals.

Note: This method only provides a nice scent. It does not get rid of any food build up. So only use the lemon peel method after the actual problem-causing sludge and grime has been eliminated. Otherwise it will just be like covering a dumpster with potpourri.

How to prevent future issues

Don’t turn off the disposal when you stop hearing the noise of things being ground up. There could still be loads of food and other particles stuck to the grinding plate or the sides of the disposal tank itself. Then the food sits and cakes itself onto any surface it can find, and over time converts into the foul-smelling awfulness that has stunk up your kitchen time and time again.

So continue to run your disposal for about 10-15 seconds after you’ve stopped hearing noise. Then shut off the disposal, but continue to run the water for another minute or so.

This helps flush your water heater, keeping food and scraps from building up inside of the disposal and drain.

We also recommend a product called Bio-Clean® which you can pour down your drains each month. This drain cleaner uses naturally occurring bacteria and enzymes that “digest” dead organic waste found in your plumbing system, helping prevent drain clogs and nasty smells.

If all else fails

If you’ve done all of the above, but something funky is still coming up from the pits of your sink, there are several possible causes, including:

  • You need a new disposal
  • It’s actually your dishwasher that smells
  • You have a septic tank backup.

Don’t panic. We can help if you live in the Lawton, OK area. From nasty kitchen drains, to beautiful bathroom remodeling, our expertly-trained and certified plumbers are here to take care of you and your home whenever you might need us.

Garbage disposal’s can be a beneficial asset to your kitchen, especially for those of you that love to cook. A garbage disposal will break down food into small pieces to prevent food from clogging your pipes and stinking up your trash can. Unfortunately, the garbage disposal itself can still stink. It’s best to keep your garbage disposal as clean as possible and take measures to prevent a smell from occurring.

What Makes a Garbage Disposal Stink?
Possible odors can include:

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

  • Decomposing food and grease. Even though the purpose of a garbage disposal is to get rid of food waste, rotting particles in the pipes can produce a bad odor.
  • Mold and bacteria. Kitchen sinks and drains are often a warm and moist environment creating a place for mold and bacteria to thrive. The underside of your rubber strainer can be a breeding ground for nasty bacteria and other microbes that may be the source of your stinky sink.
  • Sewer gases. All sinks, if done properly, have a trap in them that holds water and prevents sewer gases from rising up. Blockages in the drain vent, a leaky vent, or a dried up trap can cause your trap to not work properly and gases can seep into your drains.

Preventing a Smelly Garbage Disposal
Now that you know where odors can come from, there are a few tips to follow that will help you prevent stinky sinks.

  • Run cold water when using the garbage disposal to prevent overheating.
  • Send ice cubes down the disposal to remove gunk from the blades, then toss in a couple of lemon peels to give a nice citrus scent.
  • Run the disposal for a few seconds after the grinding noise stops to ensure all food particles have gone down the drain.
  • While garbage disposal’s are convenient, they are not a one-stop shop for all of your food waste. Be careful of things like coffee grounds, corn husks, egg shells, celery stalks and potato peels as these foods can wrap themselves around the blades and accumulate in the pipes, creating breeding ground for bacteria.

If you notice your garbage disposal is smelly and you are having trouble getting rid of the odor, the problem could be inside your drains. Contact the professional plumber’s at Miller’s Services to take care of drains and get your garbage disposal running (and smelling) like new. Call 804-758-4314 to schedule!

Expert plumbers are ready to help!

  • Home
  • Resources
  • What Can I Do To Eliminate Odor In My Garbage Disposal

What Can I Do to Eliminate Odor in My Garbage Disposal?

Dealing with a garbage disposal that emits a foul odor throughout your home can be frustrating, unpleasant, and embarrassing. After months of regular use, your garbage disposal begins to incur smelly bacteria and food particles lodged deep within those hard to reach places. To remove those embarrassing smells, here are simple, inexpensive ways to clean and maintain your garbage disposal:

Cleaning the Blades

To clean the blades of your garbage disposal you do not have to purchase expensive cleaners but only need a few common household items. All you need are ice cubes, rock salt, vinegar, and baking soda.

Ice Cubes and Rock Salt

Pour two cups of ice cubes and one cup of rock salt into your garbage disposal. Run cold water over the ice and rock salt and turn on your garbage disposal allowing it to run for 10 to 15 seconds. Combined, the ice and rock salt break up and dislodge any food particles and debris from your garbage disposal.

It is recommended that you use cold water when cleaning your garbage disposal to prevent any grease in your garbage disposal from congealing down your drain.

Ice Cubes and Vinegar

If you do not have rock salt, you can use vinegar as a substitute. Pour two cups of ice cubes and one cup of vinegar into your garbage disposal. Run cold water over the ice and rock salt and turn on your garbage disposal allowing it to run for 10 to 15 seconds. The ice and vinegar act similarly to the ice and rock salt by freeing any bacteria and food stuck within your garbage disposal.

Interestingly enough, the ice cubes actually help sharpen the blades within your garbage disposal while simultaneously cleaning it.

Baking Soda and Vinegar

Another solution for cleaning your garbage disposal using household items involves baking soda and vinegar. Pour one cup of baking soda and one cup of vinegar into your garbage disposal. This will create a chemical reaction that helps dissolve any odorous bacteria and food particles in your garbage disposal, especially in those hard to reach place.

Additionally, the baking soda and vinegar will help clear your drain by breaking apart debris and smelly bacteria.

Clearing the Drain

After cleaning the blades on your garbage disposal, it is recommended that clear your drain by plugging up your sink and filling it with two to four inches of water. Remove the plug and immediately turn on your garbage disposal to help rinse it clean, clearing any remaining debris from your drain.

Freshening Up Your Garbage Disposal

After cleaning and clearing all smelly debris from your garbage disposal, freshen things up by putting a handful of citrus peels or slices in the disposal while running cold water. Using a lemon, orange, lime, etc. can instantly give your garbage disposal a fresh smell that is pleasant and inviting.

Maintaining Your Garbage Disposal

To ensure your garbage disposal never returns the smelly state it used to be in, you should consider cleaning it on a monthly basis using the various methods and practices conveyed above. Besides cleaning your garbage disposal, here are a few tips and tricks to help maintain its overall health during everyday use:

Do Not Treat Your Garbage Disposal Like a Trash Can

Garbage disposals are great at getting rid of a lot of unwanted food items; however, there are some substances you should never put down your garbage disposal such as: grease, coffee grinds, oil, fats, rice, pasta, seeds, and bones. Egg shells and fibrous vegetables are fine when disposed of irregularly and in small quantities. However, they tend to get wrapped around the blades causing your garbage disposal to clog so they should be disposed of minimally.

Run Your Garbage Disposal Longer

Plumbers recommend that you run your garbage disposal an additional 5 – 10 seconds after you believe your garbage disposal has processed all the substances you have placed in it. Even though it sounds like your garbage disposal is finished, there is generally some debris or particles that need disposed of. Running your garbage disposal a little longer can help make sure nothing gets stuck or results in an unpleasant odor.

Buy Garbage Disposal Cleaner Products

Your garbage disposal can certainly benefit from an occasional cleaning using certified products designed to remove bacteria and prevent clogs. While not the most frugal solution, cleaner products from your local home improvement store will help you tackle the worst garbage disposal clogs and smells.

Cleaning your garbage disposal once a month using any of the methods presented above will keep it working with no unpleasant smells.

December 10, 2019 By Lyle Wedell Comments are Off

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalNobody wants unpleasant odors drifting through their homes. Unfortunately, sometimes parts of the drain and sewer system in homes can suffer damage and clogs, which then sends sewer gases into the house. Smelly plumbing is an unfortunately common problem, and something our plumbers are often fixing for our customers.

A part of the plumbing people often find emitting terrible odors is the garbage disposal. If you’re currently dealing with a stinky garbage disposal, you’ll want to know what to do about it, and if it’s a serious enough problem to require a plumber. Let’s see what might be happening in your kitchen plumbing to cause this.

The Dirty Disposal

A common cause of terrible garbage disposal smells is excess food waste that hasn’t washed down the drains. This waste can build up in plenty of places, such as under the impellers and in grooves and crannies. Solving this can be as simple as pouring down a solution of baking soda and vinegar into the disposal. Lemon slices (remove the peel!) can then help with deodorizing the disposal.

If your garbage disposal begins to smell due to a build-up of food, it may be due to aging mechanics. The disposal is no longer grinding food down as well as it used to, allowing for organic waste to become more easily caught. If you have noticed unpleasant garbage disposal smells recently, we recommend calling our plumbers to look into the system and see if you need a new one. Most disposals should be replaced after ten years of service.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposalThe Broken Disposal

If your garbage disposal stinks, it may not be sending down food waste the way it should. The odors you smell are from an accumulation of rotting food—and this will soon lead to a complete clog in the kitchen drains. It’s tempting to use chemical cleaners to eat away at the obstruction, but this is not much of a “cleaning” solution, since it leaves behind most of the organic particles and the acidic action of the drain cleaner can seriously damage the drain pipes. Get a plumber to check out the situation and see what needs to be repaired.

Deeper Trouble in the Plumbing

Bad odors from the kitchen sink disposal may not be the fault of the disposal at all. You may have blockage or leaks down in the sewer lines or blocked drain vents. Either situation causes sewer gas to be pushed the wrong direction through the drainpipes. The gas will rise through the water in the p-trap (you may hear a gurgling noise) and cause a terrible smell to form near your garbage disposal. Check other drains to see if they are also emitting a sewer odor. If they are, you may have a serious plumbing problem on your hands. Don’t hesitate to call for a professional plumber, since you’ll soon have even bigger troubles with drains around the house unless the problem is remedied.

Please note that, aside from doing basic cleaning with vinegar and baking soda, you don’t want to try to do any more extensive work to eliminate the garbage disposal smells without a licensed plumber. It takes professionals to diagnose the problem, find a solution, and make the repairs.

Our team offers offers prompt and professional plumbing services such as garbage disposal repair, gas line installation, and water heater repair to homes in Pennsylvania. Are you having issues with your air conditioner compressor? We also provide dependable air conditioning repair, installation, and replacement services to households. WM Henderson provides services throughout Delaware and Chester Counties & The Main Line. Schedule an appointment for great kitchen plumbing.

When it’s time to eat and you walk into the kitchen, it is awfully unappetizing to be greeted by a bad smell from the garbage disposal. How can you remove this smell for your own comfort, or quickly before guests arrive? In this step-by-step guide, we’ll show you how to get rid of the gross smell from your garbage disposal. Plus, we will show you how you can avoid making this unpleasant odor in the future.

Tools and Materials

Here are the tools and materials you can use to clean out your garbage disposal. They might not all be necessary, depending on what kind of clean you want to give the disposal. So, give the instructions a read before you gather all of this up:

  • Sponge
  • Stiff-bristle brush
  • Dish soap
  • Vinegar
  • Salt
  • Ice
  • Lemons
  • Candles
  • Baking soda
  • Deodorizing spray

Step One: Safety

When cleaning out the garbage disposal, it’s always a good idea to turn it off and unplug it. You don’t want to just turn it off because you could accidentally flip the switch. Or, more likely, a child or pet could. You don’t want to have your fingers anywhere near the blades when the garbage disposal could turn on.

Step Two: Scrubbing

Start with your sponge and work up a lather on it. Scrub all of the parts of the garbage disposal that you can see, including the flange and where it meets the sink basin. Any foodstuffs that are stuck here, even microscopic ones, are exposed to water all the time and are likely to rot and grow mold. This could be the cause of the smell.

Step Three: Soak and Spin

When you run the garbage disposal, water passes through it and could leave behind food bits everywhere. These could also be the source of your smell. There is a quick way to rinse them all out, with the added benefit of the scrubbing power of vinegar.

Plug your sink and fill it with warm water, about three-quarters of the way. While it runs, add dish soap to make some bubbles. You can also add up to half parts vinegar to help clean things out. Make a point of ensuring the sink isn’t full all of the way, or what you’re about to do next will be messy.

Plug the garbage disposal back in. Unplug the sink and then turn the garbage disposal on. The water will run into it and be propelled through the housing by the moving blades. It may sputter up a bit and should do a good job of cleaning out the far corners of the disposal.

Step Four: Ice and Salt

Did that not quite do the trick? You can follow the water flush with something a little more serious. First, place about 2 cups of ice into the garbage disposal. Start running some cold water and then turn on the disposal. Then begin to pour in about a half cup of kosher salt. The salt abrasive and the ice helps it make an impact, without risking making a clog in the garbage disposal, as it will melt.

Step Five: New Smells

You have almost certainly removed whatever cause the smell. But, the molecules will still linger in the air for a little while. What should you do to get rid of the smell in the short term? You can run lemons or another citrus in the garbage disposal to make a more pleasant smell. Or you can try to absorb the smell with baking soda or a deodorizing cleaning spray (like Febreze). If you don’t have any of those, you could also light a candle in the kitchen and use that scent to mask the remaining smell.

How to Prevent Smells in the Garbage Disposal

While you can do major cleans like this to handle smells that develop in the disposal, it is probably more convenient to just follow a few simple tips to keep the disposal smelling good all of the time. Here’s what you can do:

  • Run the disposal for longer than you might normally. Running it for about five seconds more than is absolutely necessary will help clear out gunk and prevent smells.
  • Only use the disposal for what it’s designed for; soft foods. Starchy foods, peels and other tough objects won’t go down easily. They may make smells or even clogs.

Do you have other garbage disposal woes? If you live in Columbia or throughout mid-Missouri, you can call us at MasterTech Plumbing, Heating and Cooling. We’re happy to help answer your questions and keep your garbage disposal running smoothly.

When it’s time to eat and you walk into the kitchen, it is awfully unappetizing to be greeted by a bad smell from the garbage disposal. How can you remove this smell for your own comfort, or quickly before guests arrive? In this step-by-step guide, we’ll show you how to get rid of the gross smell from your garbage disposal. Plus, we will show you how you can avoid making this unpleasant odor in the future.

Tools and Materials

Here are the tools and materials you can use to clean out your garbage disposal. They might not all be necessary, depending on what kind of clean you want to give the disposal. So, give the instructions a read before you gather all of this up:

  • Sponge
  • Stiff-bristle brush
  • Dish soap
  • Vinegar
  • Salt
  • Ice
  • Lemons
  • Candles
  • Baking soda
  • Deodorizing spray

Step One: Safety

When cleaning out the garbage disposal, it’s always a good idea to turn it off and unplug it. You don’t want to just turn it off because you could accidentally flip the switch. Or, more likely, a child or pet could. You don’t want to have your fingers anywhere near the blades when the garbage disposal could turn on.

Step Two: Scrubbing

Start with your sponge and work up a lather on it. Scrub all of the parts of the garbage disposal that you can see, including the flange and where it meets the sink basin. Any foodstuffs that are stuck here, even microscopic ones, are exposed to water all the time and are likely to rot and grow mold. This could be the cause of the smell.

Step Three: Soak and Spin

When you run the garbage disposal, water passes through it and could leave behind food bits everywhere. These could also be the source of your smell. There is a quick way to rinse them all out, with the added benefit of the scrubbing power of vinegar.

Plug your sink and fill it with warm water, about three-quarters of the way. While it runs, add dish soap to make some bubbles. You can also add up to half parts vinegar to help clean things out. Make a point of ensuring the sink isn’t full all of the way, or what you’re about to do next will be messy.

Plug the garbage disposal back in. Unplug the sink and then turn the garbage disposal on. The water will run into it and be propelled through the housing by the moving blades. It may sputter up a bit and should do a good job of cleaning out the far corners of the disposal.

Step Four: Ice and Salt

Did that not quite do the trick? You can follow the water flush with something a little more serious. First, place your ice into the garbage disposal. Salt running it, and then begin to pour in about a half cup of kosher salt. The salt abrasive and the ice helps it make an impact, without risking making a clog in the garbage disposal, as it will melt.

Step Five: New Smells

You have almost certainly removed whatever cause the smell. But, the molecules will still linger in the air for a little while. What should you do to get rid of the smell in the short term? You can run lemons or another citrus in the garbage disposal to make a more pleasant smell. Or you can try to absorb the smell with baking soda or a deodorizing cleaning spray (like Febreze). If you don’t have any of those, you could also light a candle in the kitchen and use that scent to mask the remaining smell.

How to Prevent Smells in the Garbage Disposal

While you can do major cleans like this to handle smells that develop in the disposal, it is probably more convenient to just follow a few simple tips to keep the disposal smelling good all of the time. Here’s what you can do:

  • Run the disposal for longer than you might normally. Running it for about five seconds more than is absolutely necessary will help clear out gunk and prevent smells.
  • Only use the disposal for what it’s designed for; soft foods. Starchy foods, peels and other tough objects won’t go down easily. They may make smells or even clogs.

Do you have other garbage disposal woes? If you live in San Luis Obispo County, you can call us aRocksteady Plumbing. We’re happy to help answer your questions and keep your garbage disposal running smoothly.

Aaron Stickley is a licensed plumber with 15 years of experience in commercial, new residential plumbing, and residential service and repair. He started his own residential service and repair plumbing business. Aaron’s articles about plumbing on The Spruce span four years.

  • Pin
  • Share
  • Email

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

The Spruce / Lacey Johnson

  • Working Time: 20 mins
  • Total Time: 20 mins
  • Skill Level: Beginner

Cleaning your garbage disposal can help prevent and remove foul odors, and some cleaning methods can also help keep the kitchen sink’s drain clear. When the sink starts giving off bad smells, it’s a sure sign that the garbage disposal and drain could use some cleaning.

How to Properly Clean a Garbage Disposal

How Often to Clean the Garbage Disposal

Garbage disposals generally do a great job of cleaning themselves, effectively breaking up the food particles and sending them down the drain, so the chamber inside the disposal remains relatively clean.

Over time a stinky slime builds up over the areas that don’t get scrubbed by the disposal’s grinding action. These are the undersides of the rubber baffle at the drain opening and the smooth, sloped area at the top of the grinding chamber.

Weekly cleaning can keep the garbage disposal clean and free of smells.

What You’ll Need

Equipment / Tools

  • Sink stopper
  • Rubber gloves (optional)

Materials

  • Kitchen sponge with an abrasive side
  • Dish soap
  • 1/2 cup baking soda (optional)
  • 1/2 to 1 cup vinegar (optional)
  • Ice (optional)
  • 1 cup rock salt (optional)
  • 1/3 cup bleach solution (optional)
  • Citrus peels (optional)

Instructions

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

How to Clean a Disposal With a Soapy Sponge

Turn off the Power

Turn off the power to prevent the disposal from being turned accidentally on while you are cleaning, even though your hand shouldn’t be near the grinding “teeth” at the bottom of the chamber. Unplug the disposal from the outlet under the sink, or turn off the disposal’s breaker in your home’s service panel (breaker box).

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Clean the Baffle

Apply dish soap to an abrasive kitchen sponge and scrub thoroughly under the baffle to get all into all of the folds and creases. Rinse the sponge frequently to remove all the gunk.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Clean the Grinding Chamber

Swipe around the top of the grinding chamber. Again, rinse the sponge frequently. Repeat until the sponge pulls up no more gunk and the disposal’s surfaces feel clean.

If you do nothing other than clean these two key areas, your sink will probably be in great shape. But if you want to freshen the disposal and drainpipe while you’re at it, then continue to the next step of adding in baking soda and vinegar (or read on for the ice, and either rock salt, or vinegar technique).

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Add the Baking Soda and Vinegar

Pour 1/2 cup of baking soda into the garbage disposal, then slowly and carefully pour 1/2 cup of vinegar into the disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Cover the Drain

Place the sink stopper over the drain opening. The mixture of baking soda and vinegar will fizz up like a kids’ science class volcano (it’s the same “lava” mixture). The sink stopper traps the fizzing baking soda inside the disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Flush the Disposal

Wait a few minutes, then remove the stopper, and flush the disposal with hot water while running the garbage disposal. If the sink has two basins, the cleaner will work best if both sides are cleaned at the same time. Use the same amounts of baking soda and vinegar in the other sink drain. Repeat all steps if needed.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

How to Clean a Disposal With Ice and Vinegar or Rock Salt

Ice, and either rock salt, or vinegar are also great for cleaning a garbage disposal. The ice helps to scrape the inside of the grinding chamber, dislodging any buildup.

Add Ice

Fill the disposal with ice cubes.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Add Salt or Vinegar

Pour 1 cup of salt or vinegar into the disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Flush the Disposal

Run the disposal for several seconds with the water turned on to grind up the ice. Repeat all the steps if necessary.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Tips for Deodorizing a Garbage Disposal

If the disposal is really smelly, or you have tried other cleaners and still get a foul odor, you can use a diluted bleach solution of two parts warm water and one part bleach. Don’t use more than 1/3 cup of bleach, and wear gloves when pouring into the drain. After pouring the bleach solution into the drain, run warm (not hot) water down the drain for several seconds.

Using citrus peels is another popular way to freshen up a smelly garbage disposal. The citrus oils in the peels certainly add some fragrance to the air, but the fact is, the peels do little to clean the disposal, and they do nothing to get rid of those slimy areas (which are hopefully already sponged clean).

To give your disposal a little spritz of fragrance, grind a small handful of citrus peels (cut into small pieces) in the disposal with cool water. If desired, you can also add a few ice cubes. The citrus oil can give the disposal a pleasant smell that lasts a little while. Keep in mind that this freshening method works best on a relatively clean disposal.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

You figured that once your garbage disposal was installed, you’d never have to think about it again. Alas, you were wrong: A garbage disposal, like most appliances in your home, will get pretty gross if you don’t clean it from time to time. So while we hate to add another chore to your to-do list, there’s no reason to despair—here’s how to clean a garbage disposal in just a few easy steps using items you likely already have at home.

Why should you clean a garbage disposal?

Garbage disposals make short work of food waste, pulverizing leftovers and scraps into tiny particles that can then be flushed away into the plumbing system. However, some of this food sludge (yuck) can stick to the splash guard of the disposal and get left behind. In fact, it’s inevitable that this will occur to a small degree—and this gunk can accumulate over time. And so, if you never clean your garbage disposal, your handy kitchen helper could attract harmful mold and bacteria and/or begin to smell. But we’re guessing you didn’t just stumble upon this article by chance. So, what’s the solution for a yucky garbage disposal? A deep clean, of course.

How to clean a garbage disposal

The task of deep cleaning a garbage disposal might sound intimidating, but it’s not so bad. Here’s a quick and easy way to clean your garbage disposal, courtesy of the pros at InSinkErator.

What you’ll need:

  • Gloves
  • Scouring pad
  • Ice cubes
  • Lemon or lime wedges
  • Baking soda and vinegar (optional)
  • Dish detergent

1. Disconnect the power. For obvious reasons, you don’t want to clean this appliance when the power is connected. Unplug the garbage disposal—or head to the breaker box to cut the power that way, if you prefer—and be sure to check (and then check again) that the garbage disposal isn’t up and running before you get started.

2. Clean the splash guard. The splash guard, also called a sink baffle, is a piece of heavy-duty rubber that sits between the sink drain and the garbage disposal to prevent food particles from flying everywhere when the disposal is in use. If your garbage disposal has started to stink, it’s most certainly because of decaying food stuck to the splash guard. Once the appliance is turned off, remove this piece and start scrubbing it under hot water, using a scouring pad and a generous amount of dish soap.

3. Replace the splash guard. Once the splash guard is squeaky clean, return it to the sinkhole where it belongs. (Congratulations, you can pretty much declare victory at this point.)

4. Reconnect the power. Plug your garbage disposal back in—you’ll need it up and running for the final step of the cleaning process.

5. Freshen the chamber. Now that you’ve tackled the major culprit, the only thing that remains is to freshen up the parts of the garbage disposal that you don’t have easy access to—namely the chamber where all the chopping happens. Fortunately, there’s no disassembly required here. Simply run a medium stream of cold water, turn on the disposal and dump a combination of ice cubes and lemon wedges down the sinkhole. In most cases, this is all it takes to remove any residue from the rest of the garbage disposal and get it smelling nice and fresh.

That said, if your garbage disposal is in particularly bad shape, you can start by putting one part baking soda, followed by two parts vinegar into it for a chemical reaction with added cleaning power. Let the two ingredients fizz for a few minutes; then turn on the tap and run the disposal to wash them away with hot water. After this, proceed to the ice cube and lemon trick mentioned above for a one-two punch that’s sure to get the job done.

How often should you clean a garbage disposal?

Per the experts at InSinkErator, garbage disposals are fairly low-maintenance appliances—simply running them regularly goes a long way towards flushing out the nasty stuff. Yes, they do need a deep clean occasionally, but there’s no hard and fast rule regarding how often you should do it—namely because when it’s time, your nose will know. The takeaway? Give your garbage disposal a deep clean with this step-by-step process whenever it gets smelly.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Why is that awful dead fish smell coming from the garbage disposal? That’s a place no one wants to smell bad odors. You’ll want to get rid of that stink ASAP!

Our kitchens have so many great inventions that allow us to spend less time doing work and more time enjoying life. One of these great inventions is the garbage disposal, which deals with food scraps and helps to prevent kitchen sink clogs. It’s also a place that can start to smell with lingering bad odors if left unattended. It’s important to know how to clean your garbage disposal, get rid of the bad smells, and prevent these unpleasant odors from returning in the future.

Often a combined build-up of grease, soap scum, and food particles (aka rotten food) contribute to this horrendous odor in your garbage disposal. If you’re not using enough water when running the disposal, over time an accumulation of food and grease will occur. This build-up or clog creates a bad odor that stinks up your kitchen.

Remove the Clog

Here are the steps to safely unclog your disposal. When cleaning the disposal, NEVER put your hand in the drain, even if it’s turned off. First, unplug the disposal. Next, shine a flashlight into the drain to see if you can locate a large clog or any blockages. Using tongs, long tweezers, or pliers try to remove the blockage. You can now plug the disposal back in. Turn the water on first, and then the disposal, run for a minute or more. Finally, turn the disposal off first, then the water.

Clean the Disposal

To clean your disposal, put a plug in the disposal drain, fill the sink with several inches of water (3-4 inches), add two teaspoons of liquid dish soap, swish around to create suds, and then unplug the drain. Turn on the garbage disposal and let it work through the soapy water, turning off the disposal when all of the water has drained out. It’s also a good idea to scrub the parts that contribute to this bad smell. Using a dish brush pour liquid dish soap on the brush. Next, scrub the accessible parts, including the rim and sink basin inside the drain.

Keeping Your Disposal Clean & Fresh

To keep your disposal clean and fresh try grinding up some ice cubes in it. This will help clean the blades and freshen the chamber. Some people will even grind up an apple for a fresh scent. If you try all of the steps above and are still having smells coming from your sink, you may have a more serious clog that will require a professional plumber. Keep the stinky dead fish odor out of your kitchen by removing any clogs in your disposal, cleaning the disposal, and learning ways to prevent bad smells in the future. Michael’s Plumbing is your Central Florida plumbing expert, call us for all your plumbing needs. We are local clog experts! Call us at (407) 219-9772 or contact us online.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Garbage disposals are quite convenient when it comes to getting rid of the organic waste that accumulates quickly in your kitchen. However the smell can eventually detract from any convenience enjoyed. That doesn’t have to be a problem though. With these few tips you can take the unpleasant odour out of your garbage disposal.

Cleaning Materials

There are lots of materials available for cleaning your garbage disposal, and some of them can probably be found in your home right now. These materials include: a scrub brush or nylon brush, soap, ice, kosher salt, baking soda and lemon peels.

Cleaning Method

Run some hot water through your garbage disposal for approximately one minute. This is a practical way to combat the odour that comes from food particles and other refuse. Fill the basin with water again, this time with the rubber stopper plugged in. Make the sure the garbage disposal is off. Once the sink has been half filled (no need to fill it to capacity) then add in the cleaning agents you have on hand, whether they be salt, detergent, baking soda or some other agent. Turn on the garbage disposal again and allow the water (with whatever cleaning agent you use) to run through the disposal.

Once this is done, turn the garbage disposal off again. You can use the brush once again to thoroughly clean any leftover residue. This is also a good time to make further use of cleaning agents to finish the job. This should get rid of whatever odour is still lingering.

Odour Prevention

As with many things, prevention is better than cure. If you take some simple precautions to prevent odours then you can save the time and energy spent trying to get rid of them. Do not expose the garbage disposal to organic material it wasn’t designed to handle. Avoid putting in fibrous vegetables like celery. Some garbage is actually good for the blades, such as fruit and egg shells. Finally, run the machine for a little longer than you think is necessary, to get rid of excess materials that might still be around.

Preventing odours is pretty easy if you practice the above mentioned strategies on a regular basis. It will be good for your garbage disposal and good for your kitchen. Call us today to see how we can help you make your kitchen cleaner.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Take Care of Sink Stink…Once and For All!

If your kitchen is beginning to smell like the local landfill but you just can’t figure out why, it could be the garbage disposal. An often overlooked source of unpleasant kitchen odors, the garbage disposal can collect bits of food and waste that rot and cause nasty smells. The following tips can help you clean out the garbage disposal and eliminate garbage disposal odor.

The Basic Approach: Soap and Water
Once a month or so, plug the sink with the stopper and fill the basin with hot water and about 1/8 cup of grease-cutting dish soap. Take out the stopper when the sink is full and run the garbage disposal as the water and soap drain. This should not only remove trapped waste but will also help clean out the pipes for a fresher smelling sink.

The Commercial Approach: Disposal Deodorizer
There are several different garbage disposal deodorizers on the market. You’ll find these chemicals > usually in liquid, gel, or dissolvable tablet form > at most supermarkets and home improvement stores. They can be costly, but if used regularly as directed they can help clean out the garbage disposal and prevent odor build-up.

The Natural Approach: Vinegar and Citrus
Vinegar is a powerful and effective cleaning agent that’s been used around the house for decades. It’s a great deodorizer despite its pungent odor and also has some antibacterial properties. There are two ways to use vinegar to remove odors from your garbage disposal:

  • Vinegar and Ice: Fill an ordinary ice tray with a 50/50 mixture of water and plain white vinegar (use more vinegar if your drain is particularly smelly). When the cubes freeze, run cold water into the sink and run the ice through the garbage disposal. The vinegar will eliminate bad smells and the ice will help sharpen the garbage disposal blades. Use this method two or three times a month and be sure to clearly label the ice tray so no one accidentally uses a vinegar cube in their drink.
  • Vinegar and Baking Soda: Cover the inside of the drain with baking soda and pour in a half cup of white vinegar. Let the mixture sit for at least an hour. When time’s up, run cold water down the drain as you run the garbage disposal. Once the vinegar smell is gone, the nasty smells should disappear, too.

Another natural way to freshen your garbage disposal is with citrus fruit. Orange, lemon, lime, grapefruit > choose the scent you prefer, drop the peels into the drain, and run the disposal. Citrus juice or pieces of the fruit would work, too. Just be sure to cut the fruit or peels into small pieces so they don’t damage the garbage disposal blades.

The Classic Approach: Bleach
Household bleach is another great all-around garbage disposal cleaning agent. Simply plug the sink and fill the basin with a mixture of water and a little bit of bleach. Slosh everything around with a plastic spoon or your hand (wear rubber gloves!). Let the mixture sit for about half an hour, and then unplug the drain. The bleach will clean and deodorize the garbage disposal, eliminating any bad smells.

WARNING:
NEVER put your hand or fingers down the garbage disposal unit. Even if the switch is off, it could easily flip on and your hand or fingers could be sliced or mashed. If you have food or other items stuck down in the garbage disposal, try to remove with prongs or pliers. If you cannot remove the items, call the plumbing and drain pros at Horizon Services; we’ll quickly and safely remove the object.

  • How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

As convenient as garbage disposals can be, removing bad smells can be downright challenging. Wondering how to clean a garbage disposal that smells bad? Remove any clogs before cleaning with soapy water, ice cubes, and coarse salt. Follow these steps to clean a smelly garbage disposal and learn how to prevent odor from returning.

How to Clean a Garbage Disposal That Smells in 4 Simple Steps

Though garbage disposal odor can overwhelm your kitchen, some basic ingredients and simple techniques can get rid of the smell. The following steps detail how to clean a garbage disposal but, first, we’ll answer, “Why does my garbage disposal stink?”

Why Does My Garbage Disposal Stink?

Any appliance that deals with food can be prone to odor if not cleaned regularly. Garbage disposals, in particular, are predisposed to bad smells when food sticks to their blades and starts to break down. Clogs only compound this problem as food continues to collect and decompose without draining.

While removing clogs and food particles can address the source of the smell, odor tends to linger in the disposal’s small, contained environment. Here’s how to clean a garbage disposal that smells with just a few kitchen supplies.

1. Unclog Garbage Disposal

Garbage disposal smells are often the result of a clog. Whether it’s one large item or a collection of food particles, the first step in how to clean a garbage disposal is to remove any clogs.

Here’s how to unclog a garbage disposal safely :

  • Unplug the disposal
  • Use a flashlight to locate blockages
  • With tongs or tweezers (never your hand) remove the clog
  • Restore power
  • Run the disposal and water for 1 minute

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Image from Home Stratosphere

2. Soak Garbage Disposal in Soapy Water

Even though the clog has been removed, the disposal still needs to be cleaned to rid it of lingering odor. Soaking and scrubbing can loosen stubborn food particles while attacking bad smells.

Follow these steps to soak and scrub the garbage disposal :

  • Plug the disposal drain
  • Fill the sink with 4 inches of water and add 2 teaspoons of dish soap
  • Swirl the water to create suds
  • Unplug the drain and turn on the disposal to process the soapy water
  • Pour dish soap on a dampened scrub brush
  • Scrub the garbage disposal’s sink rim and drain

3. Clean Disposal Using Salt and Ice

Once the outside and drain are cleaned, the blades themselves require a good scrubbing to remove stubborn food particles.

Here’s how to clean garbage disposal blades with salt and ice :

  • Place at least 10 ice cubes in the sink
  • Cover them with ½ cup of coarse salt
  • Turn on the disposal and push the ice and salt down the drain
  • Continue running the disposal until all the ice and salt is gone
  • Flush with cold water for 1-2 minutes

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Image from Everyday Cheapskate

4. Deodorize Your Garbage Disposal

Just as our dishwasher cleaning tips use baking soda and vinegar to remove odor, these ingredients can also deodorize a disposal.

How to use baking soda and vinegar as a final odor-removing step :

  • Pour 2 cups baking soda down the disposal drain
  • Slowly add ½ cup white vinegar
  • Let sit for 1 hour
  • Run the disposal and water for 1 minute

How to Prevent Garbage Disposal Smells

Once the odor is gone, regular garbage disposal maintenance and proper use and care can prevent its return.

Follow these tips to avoid garbage disposal smells :

  • Process the right foods : Avoid putting starches like pastas, rice, and potatoes down the disposal, as they can expand and cause clogs. Also, avoid fibrous foods such as banana peels and corn husks that can wind around impeller blades.
  • Monitor quantity and size : Cut large items into small pieces and add food in small quantities to prevent clogs.
  • Always run water with the disposal : Cold water helps process and drain food. Continue to run the water for at least 5 seconds after turning the disposal off.

Knowing how to clean a garbage disposal that smells can maintain function but won’t prevent every problem. When you need a garbage disposal repair , call Callahan’s Appliance for fast and professional service.

Does your garbage disposal smell like, well, garbage? This common issue is one that no homeowner should have to put up with. We expect garbage disposals to do away with food and other organic materials. They are not, however, supposed to retain the smell of refuse or sewage.

What causes a smelly garbage disposal, and what can you do to solve and prevent it from happening again in the future ?

What Does a Garbage Disposal Do?

A garbage disposal unit is a small machine found between the drain and the piping in a kitchen sink. It is designed to shred food waste and other organic matter into super small pieces How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal. Doing so enables these disposal materials to easily flow through pipes, reducing the risk of clogs.

Though garbage disposals are used to break down food and other organic materials, homeowners should not intentionally throw these materials down their garbage disposals. Contrary to popular belief, garbage disposals are not made for this purpose. Instead, their purpose is a last line of defense to prevent clogging due to materials that may have accidentally gone down the drain .

To ensure that your unit is working the way it’s supposed to, we recommend running it regularly and avoid intentionally throwing food or other organic matter down it. You’ll also want to run your disposal with running cold water. Cold water solidifies any grease or oils, enabling your disposal to grind them into smaller bits.

What Causes a Bad Smell?

Even with proper maintenance, garbage disposals can have issues. One of the most common and frustrating of these issues is odor. Often, an unpleasant (and seemingly inexplicable) smell will emanate from a kitchen garbage disposal. This smell can have several sources, all of which can be dealt with relatively easily.

Here are the three primary causes of a smelly garbage disposal:

  • A Clog: Many homeowners may have clogs pinned as the primary culprits for garbage disposal odor . But the fact is that clogged disposals are rarely to blame for that mystery smell emanating from the sink . Clogs don’t occur that often, and when they do, it is easy to identify them—thus, no mystery smell.
  • Biofilm Buildup on Pipes: Beneath your drain, your garbage disposal is connected to a series of pipes that send water through your septic system and out into the municipal sewer. Often, biofilm (residue from organic matter) can build up on the insides of these pipes. When an unpleasant smell starts to emanate from a garbage disposal, it’s often due to biofilm buildup on the pipe directly below garbage disposal itself. This pipe connects the garbage disposal to the p-trap. The p-trap serves to block odor from reaching the drain, but it can’t block odor on a pipe that’s located between it and the drain . This is why biofilm buildup on this specific pipe is a common problem .
  • P-Trap Problems: If biofilm buildup is not to blame for a smelly garbage disposal, then there is likely a p-trap problem at play. The p-trap is a curved pipe underneath a kitchen sink that traps water once the tap stops running. This water serves as a barrier to block odor and gas from sewer pipes from reaching the drain. P-traps that have leaks or haven’t had water cycled through them in awhile won’t perform this function properly. To stop the smell, the p-trap must be filled with water.

To identify which of these problems may be the source of your smelly garbage disposal, use the solutions provided in the sections below. Begin by exploring the possibility of a clog, then move on to biofilm buildup, and finally to potential p-trap problems. When in doubt, it is always a good idea to hire a professional in your area.

Solutions: What Works and What Doesn’t

Never fear: The culprits behind garbage disposal odor are all fairly easy to take care of. In this section, we explore solutions to the three most common sources of garbage disposal odor mentioned above.

  • Clearing a Clog: If you’ve determined that a simple garbage disposal clog is to blame for the unpleasant smell coming from your drain, you’ll first want to turn off the unit and the power. Use a flashlight to inspect the clog, and then use pliers, a long dowel, or another appropriate tool to dislodge the clog. Don’t use common drain-cleaning chemicals to unclog your garbage disposal. Many of these are highly corrosive and may damage rubber or plastic parts. Wait 15 minutes for the motor of your garbage disposal to cool, then run your disposal with flowing water.
  • Eliminating Biofilm Buildup on Pipes: Is biofilm buildup on the pipe below your drain to blame for your smelly garbage disposal? Follow these steps to get rid of this odor-causing intruder:
    1. Take the cover off of the sink drain so you can clearly see into the drain pipe.
    2. Use a non-corrosive bacteria waste eliminator to eat away the biofilm buildup on your pipe. Follow directions on packaging clearly.
    3. Rinse thoroughly with clean water until the entire drain is clean.How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal
  • Solving P-Trap Problems: If unclogging and cleaning with a non-corrosive bacteria waste eliminator doesn’t solve the problem, there’s only one place left to turn: the p-trap. If your p-trap isn’t holding water, it isn’t blocking odor. Sometimes, this occurs because you haven’t used your faucet in a while. Run the water for a minute or two and see if the odor goes away. If that doesn’t work, you’ll want to inspect your p-trap for a leak. If you can’t find a leak, there may be a vacuum caused by other pipes in your home that is sucking water out of your p-trap. In this case (and in other cases where you can’t identify the source of the odor), it’s time to hire a professional.

“Solutions” to Avoid

There are many DIY “solutions” that many homeowners use to get rid of garbage disposal odor or fix clogs. The vast majority of these “solutions” are ineffective, or worse, damaging. As mentioned above, using common drain-cleaning chemicals is a bad idea. These chemicals can corrode your garbage disposal’s hardware. Another garbage disposal cleaning “solution” to avoid include is the use of citrus fruit to clean blades. The highly acidic juice of citrus fruits may dissolve some buildup, but it will also corrode your blades.

Professional Plumbing Solutions at 1-800-anytyme

If you have a smelly garbage disposal that you just can’t fix, it’s a good idea to hire a plumber to help you find a solution. Professional plumbing teams like ours use advanced tools and technology to inspect plumbing systems and stop unwanted odors at their source. We have decades of experience dealing with garbage disposals and plumbing configurations of all shapes and sizes. In addition to our troubleshooting and cleaning services, we also offer repairs and full-scale replacements to properties across the greater San Diego area. If you have a garbage disposal problem, there is no better team to call.

Call Our Plumbers for Fast and Reliable 24/7 Service

Dealing with a smelly garbage disposal? Don’t wait — contact our plumbing professionals here at 1-800-anytyme for fast and effective garbage disposal servicing. We’ve helped hundreds of homeowners across San Diego solve their smelly problems in just minutes. Let us help you with yours. For San Diego’s best 24/7 plumbing service, contact our team today at (760) 477-0072!

Why Does My Garbage Disposal Smell?

The most common reason garbage disposals smell is that food or waste has not been properly disposed of. When food particles and waste are left in the disposal and are unable to drain properly, this will inevitably lead to foul odors. Some of the ways to prevent this include:

  • Running warm water when the disposal is on
  • Running the disposal for at least 30 seconds

What Does it Mean if Your Garbage Disposal Smells Like:

The way your garbage disposal smells can be an indicator of whether or not the problem is simply food that has not been properly disposed and drained or if a more serious problem is to blame.

Rotten Food

When your disposal smells like rotten food, then it’s likely because rotten food is to blame. When you don’t run your disposal for long enough, or when warm water is not running while the disposal is running to help move waste through your plumbing system, food and leftovers can accumulate in just beneath your sink or in your pipes, leading to clogged drains and unpleasant smells. Regularly cleaning your disposal should eliminate the foul odors.

Sewage

If your garbage disposal smells like sewage, it’s time to call the plumber. While temporary fixes may mask the smell, if your disposal smells like sewage, then there’s a good chance there’s a leak that needs to be addressed sooner rather than later.

Mold or Mildew

If your garbage disposal smells like mold or mildew, it’s likely caused by mold or mildew accumulating in your sink and drain. This is most often caused by placing food in the drain and not running the disposal or not running the disposal long enough to properly dispose of waste. Using a mixture of vinegar, warm water, and baking soda can eliminate the mold.

What Not to Put in the Garbage Disposal

One of the most common causes of foul smells from garbage disposals are disposing of foods that should never be put in the garbage disposal in the first place. These foods can cause a buildup of waste, which can cause clogged drains and more serious issues that are much harder to fix than foul smells. To keep your garbage disposal running smoothly and efficiently, avoid disposing of these foods in your kitchen and opt for the garbage can or a compost pile instead.

Coffee Grounds

Coffee grounds should never be poured down the sink, since they can clump and harden along the sides of your pipes and plumbing system. High efficiency drain cleaners can eliminate the problem, and coffee grounds can be repurposed as fertilizer or in compost mixtures. Coffee grounds can also be used to create more acidic environments for plants and flowers that thrive in these locations, such as:

  • Azaleas
  • Beans
  • Begonias
  • Blueberries
  • Broccoli
  • Carrots
  • Cucumbers
  • Daffodils
  • Dogwood
  • Gardenias
  • Hydrangeas
  • Irises
  • Magnolia Trees
  • Marigolds
  • Parsley
  • Peppers
  • Radishes
  • Rhubarb
  • Sweet Potatoes
  • Egg Shells

Egg shells are horrible for kitchen sinks, as the yolks can cause the shells to stick to the sides of pipes, which can cause clogs and drainage problems, not to mention the rotten egg smell. Egg shells are better served as fertilizer for your garden, where the calcium helps balance the acidity of the soil. If you have acidic soil and wish to make it more habitable for plants and flowers that thrive in alkaline soil, egg shells can also be beneficial.

Potato Peels + Banana Peels

Potato peels and banana peels can wreak havoc on garbage disposal systems and drains. Often, potato skins and banana peels are not able to be broken down by the garbage disposal, and this can result in clogs and foul smells. Again, adding these items to your compost pile is the easiest and most environmentally-friendly way to dispose of these leftovers.

Bleach

You may have considered using bleach to clean your garbage disposal system of leftover waste and materials, but bleach can actually cause more damage to your disposal by making grease and other sludge harder, and therefore less likely to move through your drain properly. Bleach can also affect the amount of bacteria in your septic tank, which are actually beneficial for breaking down food waste and particles, which can prevent backups, clogs, and unpleasant smells.

How to Clean the Garbage Disposal

There are a couple of simple ways to keep your garbage disposal in tip top shape. Whether your disposal is older and functioning less efficiently or brand new and not exhibiting signs of wear and tear at all, it’s always a good idea to periodically “clean” your disposal system with the following methods at least once per month.

Garbage Disposal Cleaning Pods

Many grocery stores and large retailers sell garbage disposal cleaning pods that both mask unpleasant odors and help unclog your drain to help prevent the backup of food waste that can lead to strong smells and broken disposal systems. Simply drop a pod or two down the sink, turn on the water, and turn on the disposal, and the cleaning pods will go to work. A package of 5-10 pods typically retails for less than $5.

Ice Cubes for Garbage Disposal Systems

You may have heard ice can help clean your garbage disposal, and it’s true. Ice can help sharpen the blades on your garbage disposal system to help make food disposal more efficient. The problem with both cleaning pods and ice is that while providing a temporary solution to help maintain the life of your disposal system, they won’t fix serious problems, so if you’re noticing frequent odors, or if your system has become less efficient at disposing of waste, call a professional home service today.

Baking Soda and Vinegar Cleaning Solution

A mixture of baking soda, vinegar, and warm water is a natural, non-toxic cleaner that can help eliminate odors and break down leftover food particles in your garbage disposal and drains. Simply allow the mixture to sit for at least ten minutes, and then run both the garbage disposal and warm water to drain the remnants.

Citrus Peels for Odor Elimination

Running lemon and orange peels through your disposal can freshen up your drain and help control stinky smells. A small amount of citrus-scented dish soap placed in the drain while the disposal is running along with warm water can also do the trick.

How Do I Fix a Broken Garbage Disposal?

If your garbage disposal is broken, not working as efficiently as it once was, or if it makes strange humming or whirring noises, we strongly recommend calling a professional Memphis plumber. Because garbage disposal systems use both sharp blades and electricity to function, we strongly advise not attempting to disconnect, reconnect, or repair a broken garbage disposal without the help of a professional.

Those scenes in scary movies aren’t just a possibility – it’s very possible to cause serious damage to yourself or others when working with electricity and sharp objects. Give the experts a call so you don’t have to worry about the dangers of working on your garbage disposal system yourself. Our customer service representatives are standing by and able to assist you seven days a week. Call today or schedule an appointment online.

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Your kitchen is no stranger to weird smells. From burnt smells to ethnic foods, your kitchen can smell like something new depending on what you’re cooking. But one smell that you’ll never get used to is that foul smell coming from your garbage disposal. That unpleasant stench is a mixture of stinky food residue that has built up in your drain pipes for a while, and the only way to really get rid of the odor is to use by using a quality disposal cleaner like Rejuvenate’s Disposer and Pipe Cleaner!

Your garbage disposal is one of the most convenient appliances in your kitchen, which is probably why you run it a lot. But because you use it daily, foul scents might be creeping up from the drains, causing you to pinch your nose every time you’re near it. But don’t fret because Rejuvenate has solved your smelly garbage disposal dilemma with its awesome drain pipe cleaner.

The Best Garbage Disposal Cleaner Around

Dirty pipes are gross and that smell can be annoying. Washing dishes can become a hated chore because of the stench, which is why you need to be armed with one of Rejuvenate’s Disposer and Pipe Cleaner, which not only cleans the dirty and smelly pipes, but also deodorizes and maintains them so that the awful smell doesn’t come back. All you need is one convenient disposal cleaner down your pipes and you’ve got a fresh scent and squeaky-clean pipes!

The Best Smelling Disposal Cleaner

Some garbage disposal cleaners can have a very overpowering smell that’s just as bad as the foul smell itself, but that’s not the case with Rejuvenate’s awesome formula that comes in either Lavender, Citrus or Lemon scents. And trust us, all three cleaners smell just as enticing as the other, so you can’t really go wrong with any of them. And the best part is that they feature powerful faming action that will scrub away any grease, food or odors that build-up on the disposal’s blades, sidewalls and even under the splash guard.

The Only Drain Pipe Cleaner You’ll Ever Need

When you use the amazing garbage disposal cleaner by Rejuvenate, you can literally throw out all the others you have under the sink because this is the only product you’ll ever need. Just one packet is all you need to let its powerful enzymes break down and eliminate waste in your drains. Plus, it’s safe for your septic system and really any sink surface (including your bathroom sink), helping to reduce how often you need to pump your septic tank. It really doesn’t get any better than this garbage disposal cleaner!

We work our kitchen sinks hard! Even when we use a sink strainer or a garbage disposal, it’s inevitable that food particles and other debris make their way down our drain and get stuck there. Avoid waking up to a smelly odor in your kitchen, by following these sink cleaning tips!

How to get a bad smell out of a garbage disposal

Tricks to try if you have a garbage disposal:

Tip #1: Hot water & dish soap

  • Start simple! Let a sink full of very hot, soapy water flush through the garbage disposal while it’s running. You may even want to repeat one more time, but this step alone could do the trick!

If you’re still noticing a foul odor coming from your garbage disposal, try tip #2.

Tip #2: Ice cubes, coarse salt & lemon peels

  • A strong smell coming from your sink could be caused by your disposal blades. To make sure the blades are clean and free of lingering food particles, try this ice cube, salt and lemon peel combo. Toss a few cubes and a handful of coarse salt down the disposal. The ice will knock food off the grinder and the salt will scrub the sides. Once this is complete, flush with water and add some lemon peels for freshness! You should be odor free in no time!
Tricks to try if you don’t have a garbage disposal:

Tip#1: Boiling water

  • Don’t underestimate the power of hot water! Boil up a pot of water (or better yet, use leftovers from cooking pasta or making tea) and pour it down the sink. This may be enough to take care of more mild smells and also doubles as a great way to clear some gunk out of old pipes.

If the hot water isn’t doing the trick, check out tip #2.

Tip #2: Baking soda, boiling water & vinegar

  • These common household products are great in cleaning a variety of substances around the home. Pour one cup of baking soda down the drain and top it off with two cups of vinegar. Let the mixture bubble up and sit for a few minutes while your water finishes boiling. Then run scorching hot water down the drain to wash it all down and hopefully take care of that smell. Repeat as necessary, but typically one time of this cleaning concoction should do the trick!

Garbage disposals are a common amenity found in many homes. They provide easy kitchen clean-up as well as more sustainable living. However, garbage disposals can also lead to some inconvenient and unpleasant odors. So… what is causing that awful smell, anyway?

Why does my garbage disposal smell bad?

A garbage disposal is meant for grinding up food scraps. When these scraps are not broken up fully, it can leave a bad smell lingering in the pipes that will eventually make its way into the air. Luckily, we have some simple fixes to get rid of and prevent sink odors.

If your sink smells like rotten eggs or spoiled food:

Something may have been unintentionally put into the drain such as grease, oil, or fat. T ry using bio-enzyme drain cleaner or vinegar and baking soda to clear out the smell. You could also try running ice cubes through the disposal or putting slices of citrus in the disposal to freshen the odor.

If the foul smell is not from the garbage disposal:

It could be caused from a sewer gas leak. If this is the case, check the sink trap or drain vent . There could be a blockage or leak; you may even be lacking a drain vent all together. If the odor persists, we recommend having a professional assess the problem more thoroughly.

How do I prevent my garbage disposal from smelling?

  1. Pour a small amount of dish soap in the disposal while it’s running. Make sure cold water is running during this process.
  2. Run your garbage disposal often to avoid accumulation of leftover food within the drain.
  3. Grind your food with a strong flow of cold water to avoid grease build up.
  4. Avoid clogging by putting larger waste items into the trash.

What shouldn’t I put down my garbage disposal?

  • Don’t pour oil, grease, or fat into your drain as it slowly accumulates over time, causing costly repairs.
  • Don’t grind up fibrous foods like celery, artichokes, asparagus, lettuce, corn husks, carrots, or potato peels. These types of foods can wrap around the blades and create an odor while potentially damaging the disposal.
  • Avoid putting egg shells down the drain; the leftover membranes can become wrapped around the shredder ring, causing it to age over time and leaving a bad smell in the air.
  • Don’t put pasta, rice, potatoes, or beans into the disposal; they can swell with water and create a paste that clogs and traps particles from other types of foods.

What if the smell is coming from my sink?

While garbage disposals are the typical culprit for foul smells, the bathroom sink can also produce pesky odors. Leftover biofilms cause these odors; when the biofilm coats the inside of the pipes, it harbors a feeding ground for bacteria build-up. Running hot water down the pipes can dislodge some of the slimy film, it also forces the smell up and out of the pipe. We recommend using a household product like baking soda or vinegar; these can be used to kill bacteria, resulting in a clean smelling bathroom sink.

These odors are not dangerous. However, smelling them is not pleasant. If the tips and tricks above don’t solve the problem, contact Applewood today! We can rid your sink of these funky smells and help prevent them in the future.

How to convert webm to mp4

CloudConvert converts your video files online. Amongst many others, we support MP4, WEBM and AVI. You can use the options to control video resolution, quality and file size.

convert to

compress

capture website as

create archive

extract

WebM is an video format which consists of VP8 video and Vorbis audio. It provides open video compression for HTML5 videos and most major web browsers support WebM as a part of HTML5 video delivery. WebM is an alternative to the patented h.264 and MPEG4 standards, and is suitable for commercial and non-commercial applications.

MP4, also known as MPEG4 is mainly a video format that is used to store video and audio data. Also it can store images and subtitles. Normally it is used to share videos over internet. MP4 can embed any data over private streams. Streaming information is included in MP4 using a distinct hint.

+200 Formats Supported

CloudConvert is your Swiss army knife for file conversions. We support nearly all audio, video, document, ebook, archive, image, spreadsheet, and presentation formats. Plus, you can use our online tool without downloading any software.

Data Security

CloudConvert has been trusted by our users and customers since its founding in 2012. No one except you will ever have access to your files. We earn money by selling access to our API, not by selling your data. Read more about that in our Privacy Policy.

High-Quality Conversions

Besides using open source software under the hood, we’ve partnered with various software vendors to provide the best possible results. Most conversion types can be adjusted to your needs such as setting the quality and many other options.

Powerful API

Our API allows custom integrations with your app. You pay only for what you actually use, and there are huge discounts for high-volume customers. We provide a lot of handy features such as full Amazon S3 integration. Check out the API documentation.

Convert WEBM to MP4 – online and free

How to convert a WEBM to a MP4 file?

  1. Choose the WEBM file that you want to convert.
  2. Select MP4 as the the format you want to convert your WEBM file to.
  3. Click “Convert” to convert your WEBM file.

Zamzar Pro Tip: You can use modern versions of Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox and Safari to open WEBM files.

Step 1 – Select a file(s) to convert

Choose Files Toggle Dropdown

Drag & drop files, or select link
Max. file size 50MB (want more?)

Step 2 – Convert your files to

Or choose a different format

Step 3 – Start converting

(And agree to our Terms)

Email when done?

We’ll get right on it

File Size Warning

You are attempting to upload a file that exceeds our 50MB free limit.

You will need to create a paid Zamzar account to be able to download your converted file. Would you like to continue to upload your file for conversion?

Overall conversion/upload progress:

File Name File Size Progress

Click Choose Files to add more files or Convert Now to start converting your files

You’re in good company:
Zamzar has converted over 510 million files since 2006

File conversion for developers

1 simple API to convert files from your application

100’s of formats for you to choose from

Documents, Videos, Audio, Images & more .

WEBM (Video)

MP4 (Video)

Convert WEBM file

Using Zamzar it is possible to convert WEBM files to a variety of other formats

  • webm to 3gp (3GPP Multimedia File)
  • webm to 3g2 (3GPP2 Multimedia File)
  • webm to aac (Advanced Audio Coding File)
  • webm to ac3 (AC3 Audio File)
  • webm to avi (Windows video file)
  • webm to flac (Free Lossless Audio Codec)
  • webm to flv (Flash video)
  • webm to gif (Compuserve graphics interchange)
  • webm to ipad (MPEG-4 (H264) Video File)
  • webm to iphone (MPEG-4 (H264) Video File)
  • webm to ipod (MPEG-4 Video File)
  • webm to mp3 (Compressed audio file)
  • webm to mov (Apple QuickTime Movie)
  • webm to mp4 (MPEG-4 Video File)
  • webm to mpg (Moving Picture Experts Group File)
  • webm to ogg (Ogg Vorbis Compressed Audio File)
  • webm to wav (Windows audio file)
  • webm to wmv (Windows Media Video)

Install the new Zamzar
Desktop Application for free

Convert WEBM to MP4

Convert your file from Web Media File to MPEG-4 Video Stream with this WEBM to MP4 converter.

How to convert a WEBM to a MP4 file?

  1. Choose the WEBM file you want to convert
  2. Change quality or size (optional)
  3. Click on “Start conversion” to convert your file from WEBM to MP4
  4. Download your MP4 file

To convert in the opposite direction, click here to convert from MP4 to WEBM:

Not convinced? Click on the following link to convert our demo file from WEBM to MP4:

  • Bookmark
  • Like 107k
  • share 2k
  • tweet

You need to convert and download at least 1 file to provide feedback

Thank you for your vote

Convert to WEBM

Convert from WEBM

File Format

WEBM (Web Media File)

WEBM file formats are intended for royalty-free use in HTML5 videos based on the Matroska file container. Mozilla Firefox, Opera, and Google Chrome web browsers support the video playback of WEBM files but Internet Explorer 9 and Safari usually need .

MP4 (MPEG-4 Video Stream)

MPEG-4 Part 14 files (MP4) are capable of storing multimedia such as audio, video, and subtitles. This file type is commonly used by Apple and other producers of mobile products which allow audio, still images, or video. This includes but is not limi.

Онлайн и бесплатный конвертер WEBM в MP4

  • Image
  • Document
  • Ebook
  • Audio
  • Archive
  • Video
  • Presentation
  • Font
  • Vector
  • CAD
  • abc
  • abw
  • csv
  • dbk
  • djvu
  • dng
  • doc
  • docm
  • docx
  • erf
  • ebm
  • ewm
  • emw
  • gzip
  • kwd
  • odt
  • oxps
  • ppt
  • pptx
  • pdf
  • rtf
  • rar
  • txt
  • wps
  • xls
  • xlsx
  • zip
  • Image
  • Document
  • Ebook
  • Audio
  • Archive
  • Video
  • Presentation
  • Font
  • Vector
  • CAD
  • abc
  • abw
  • csv
  • dbk
  • djvu
  • dng
  • doc
  • docm
  • docx
  • erf
  • ebm
  • ewm
  • emw
  • gzip
  • kwd
  • odt
  • oxps
  • ppt
  • pptx
  • pdf
  • rtf
  • rar
  • txt
  • wps
  • xls
  • xlsx
  • zip

Настройки

WEB Media

MPEG-4 Part 14

Как сконвертировать WEBM в MP4

Загрузите файл

Чтобы преобразовать ваше видео в формат MP4, выберите или перетащите исходное WEBM-видео со своего компьютера, iPhone или Android. Более того, его можно выбрать из своего аккаунта Google Диск или Dropbox.

Сконвертируйте файл

Теперь ваше видео загружено, и вы можете начать преобразование WEBM в MP4. Если это необходимо, измените выходной формат на любой из поддерживаемых 37 видеоформатов. После этого вы можете добавить больше видео для пакетной конвертации.

Настройте свое видео

Если хотите, то можете настроить такие параметры, как разрешение, качество, соотношение сторон и другие, нажав на значок шестеренки в строке с файлом. Если необходимо, примените настройки ко всем видеофайлам и нажмите кнопку «Конвертировать» для обработки.

Скачайте видео

Как только ваше видео сконвертировано и отредактировано, вы можете загрузить его на свой Mac, ПК или другое устройство. При необходимости сохраните файл в свой аккаунт Dropbox или Google Диск.

Fast convert WEBM to MP4 online for free in easy steps.

Upgrade to Premium

1GB Maximum File Size

High Speed Conversion

High Speed Compression

30 Concurrent Conversions

How to convert WEBM file to MP4?

Step 1
Upload WEBM File

Click Choose Files button to add your WEBM files.

Step 2
Convert WEBM to MP4 Online

Choose MP4 as the output format and click on the Convert button to change WEBM to MP4.

Step 3
Save Your Converted MP4

Download the converted MP4 files directly or save to Dropbox/Google Drive.

Information about WEBM file and MP4 file

File Extension .webm WEBM Converter
Description WebM is an open-source, royalty-free multimedia format for streaming content online. It contains compressed video streams of either VP8 or VP9 codec and compressed audio streams of Oupus or Vorbis codec. Today, it’s one of the most widely used file formats to stream videos online because of its lightweight and real-time delivery nature.
Associated Programs Google Chrome
Firefox
VLC Media Player
Windows Media Player
Developed By Google Inc.
MIME Type video/webm, audio/webm
Useful Links from Wikipedia What is a WEBM file
File Extension .mp4 MP4 Converter
Description MP4 (MPEG-4 Part 14) is a video container format based on QuickTime MOV. But unlike MOV, it adds support for other MPEG features. MP4 supports video (MPEG-4 Part 2 and MPEG-4 Part 10/H.264), audio (MP3, AAC, SLS, TTSI, and ALAC), and subtitles (MPEG-4 timed text). It’s this codec combination that gives MP4 its flexibility.
Associated Programs Apple QuickTime Player
VLC Media Player
5KPLayer
Windows Media Player
Developed By International Organization for Standardization
MIME Type video/mp4
Useful Links from Wikipedia What is a MP4 file

People also ask about WEBM to MP4

1. Is WEBM better than MP4?

WebM and MP4 are different video formats supported by HTML5. WEBM performs better in compression while MP4 supports more codecs and higher quality. It is hard to say which is better, and it depends on your usage.
Note: In view of file quality and format compatibility, MP4 would be better. That said, sometimes you may need to convert WEBM format to MP4.

2. How do I convert WEBM to MP4 for free?

Online UniConverter (Originally Media.io) is an online free WEBM to MP4 converter. It’s fast and free to use. You can easily turn video into MP4 within 3 steps without any ads/watermarks or software download and installation.

3. How to convert WEBM to MP4 with VLC?

VLC, a well-known media player, can be also used as a video converter to help turn WEBM into MP4. Now follow the below three simple steps to learn VLC WEBM conversion procedures:
Step 1. Click on the Media button in the upper left and select Convert/Save option to add your WEBM files.
Step 2. Click on the Browser to negative your output file path.
Step 3. Click on the Start button to convert your WEBM files to MP4 with VLC.

Note: At some points, you may find that VLC fails to perfectly complete WEBM conversion task and that trying to figure out what’s wrong with it could be time-consuming, then please don’t hesitate to apply our free WEBM to MP4 converter. It is bound to be your right choice!

4. What is the best WEBM to MP4 converter?

With the support for more than 1000+ file formats conversion, Wondershare UniConverter is regarded as one of the best WEBM to MP4 converter of 2021. Just in a few quick clicks, WEBM video files can be instantly turned into MP4 online. Perferably, you could choose the desktop-based UniConverter for batch file conversion without size limitations.

How to convert WEBM to MP4 and MP4 to WEBM on Windows/Mac offline?

With .webm extension, a WEBM file is an audiovisual media file format by Google. Being new in the field, a lot of PCs, devices, and smartphones would need plug-ins, components, and other specific requirements to play WebM files. To avoid this hassle, a simple and quick solution would be to convert WEBM to MP4, a widely accepted format. As free online WebM to MP4 converters always have file size limitations, it would be a better choice to use a desktop program such as Wondershare UniConverter (originally Wondershare Video Converter Ultimate). Available for both Windows and Mac system, the software supports Superspeed batch conversion, various parameters customization or other video editing options. The steps below will teach how to convert WebM to MP4 on PC/Mac. Now free download and install Wondershare UniCovnerter firstly.

Convert your video files online, free.

Convert

Upload Your File

Drag and Drop here

Supported file types avi, flv, gif, mkv, mov, mp4, mpeg, ogg, swf, ts, vob, webm, wmv, mp3, wav, flac, m4a, wma, aac, mp2, opus

Supported file types avi, flv, gif, mkv, mov, mp4, mpeg, ogg, swf, ts, vob, webm, wmv, mp3, wav, flac, m4a, wma, aac, mp2, opus

WebM is used for streaming high-quality videos on the web. You can upload WebM videos to Facebook and YouTube, but not to mobile-based social media platforms like Instagram and TikTok. It is compatible with media players like VLC and Windows Media Player. You cannot play WebM files on QuickTime Media Player. Content stored as WebM files features instant playback times. It requires a compatible browser to be played, like Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Internet Explorer.

MP4 is one of the most compatible video file formats. You can upload MP4 files to YouTube, Instagram, TikTok, Twitter, Facebook, and other social media sites. You can also play MP4 files with Windows Media Player, VLC, QuickTime, iPhone, iPad, Android, and almost all media players. MP4 files are popular because they can be viewed almost anywhere, and even with high-quality video, the file sizes remain relatively small, making them easy to share. MP4 is short for ‘MPEG4’, and is a format that normally contains video and audio, but can also be used to store images and subtitles.

How to Convert WebM to MP4:

How to convert webm to mp4

1 . Upload a file

Upload the WebM file you wish to convert. Just drag & drop it onto the page, or click the blue button to choose from a folder on your device (you can also add files from Dropbox, or even straight from a YouTube URL).

How to convert webm to mp4

2 . Convert your video

Choose MP4 as the output format, by selecting from the dropdown list of file types. Then just press ‘Convert File’. It’s that easy!

How to convert webm to mp4

3 . Download (& Edit) your video

Hit the ‘Download File’ button to save your newly converted WebM file. You can also click the ‘Edit’ button to add text, auto-subtitles, progress bars, and more to your video. It’s super-easy, with VEED!

Last Updated: 5 months ago

Want to convert your videos from WEBM to MP4? You’ve come to the right place! This post shows you how to convert WEBM to MP4 step by step.

WEBM is an open and free media file format that is supported on Google Chrome, Firefox, Mozilla, and Opera. And MP4 is a digital multimedia container format, which is supported for desktop/mobile Internet Explorer, Safari, and Google Chrome.

How to convert WEBM to MP4

  1. Convert WEBM to MP4 online
  2. Convert WEBM to MP4 with a video editor

Method 1: Convert WEBM to MP4 online

Converting WEBM to MP4 online is much easier since you don’t have to register or download the video editing software. If you don’t know which one to use, try this:

2) Click the + button or drag and drop your WEBM file here, then choose your WEBM file to upload.

How to convert webm to mp4

3) In the drop-down menu, click Video > MP4.

How to convert webm to mp4

4) Click CONVERT.

How to convert webm to mp4

5) The website will be converting your file(s). After completing, click Download orDownload All to download your file(s).

How to convert webm to mp4

5) Go to the file location where you save your browser downloads and you’ll see your .MP4 file(s).

Converting the video files online is convenient and it saves your time when it comes to small file sizes. If you need to convert video files of large size, you should do it with video editing software.

Method 2: Convert WEBM to MP4 with a video editor

To convert WEBM to MP4, usually, you can do it with video editor software. This guarantees you high-quality videos after converting and more powerful features for professional video editing requirements.

There are a variety of video converters. If you’re not sure which one to trust, try WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe.

With WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe, you can convert VOB to almost 1000 formats, including MP4, AVI, and MOV, you can edit and enhance your videos, and you can add DVD content to your computer with any format.

Why you should use the video converter:

  • Edit, merge, crop, cut, trim your videos easily
  • Convert videos and fix video playback problems
  • Download videos/music from 1000+ sites
  • 30X Faster Video Conversion Speed
  • Record videos from a computer screen or webcam
  • ……

Follow these steps to convert VOB to MP4 quickly and easily:

1) Download and install WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe (available on Windows and Mac).

2) Run the downloaded WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe.

3) Click the Video or the Add button. You can either add a local video file, DVD, or a YouTube Video URL).

How to convert webm to mp4

4) Once uploaded, choose what kind of format you want to convert to, and select OK.

How to convert webm to mp4

5) Once you’ve made sure the destination folder, click Run at the bottom right corner to start processing.

How to convert webm to mp4

6) WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe will convert the file for you. Once complete, open the file location and you’ll see the MP4 file.

This is easy and fast, isn’t it?!

If you have any questions, feel free to leave us a comment below.

How to convert webm to mp4

WebM is nothing but the audiovisual format that has been used and accepted by Chromecast and HTML5. It works on modern browsers including Chrome, Firefox, Safari, Opera, etc.

Unfortunately, you can’t play it on Windows, Mac, or other devices. To get rid of this situation, you can consider converting a WebM file to an MP4 file.

Read this article, and you’ll be able to know how to convert WebM to MP4 format.

Part 1: How to convert WebM to MP4 on Windows 10

You shouldn’t go for an ordinary video converter if you want to convert WebM to MP4. Instead, it would help if you went for HitPaw Video Converter.

It is a splendid video converter that has been a massive hit over the past few months. It makes things look simple and serves your purpose with minimal effort.

Apart from converting your videos, it also helps you resize, merge, crop, or trim your videos.

Features:

  • Using HitPaw Video Converter, you can convert your video into 500+ video formats, including MKV, MP4, MOV, WebM, etc.
  • It allows you to get interesting videos downloaded from over 1000 websites.
  • You can also edit your video after converting it to the desired format.
  • HitPaw Video Converter also supports 300+ audio formats, including MP3, M4A, WAV, M4A, etc.

How to Convert WebM to MP4 Using HitPaw Video Converter?

Step 1: Launch HitPaw Video Converter

You’ll need to launch the software after downloading and installing it from the official website.

Step 2: Import the file

Now, you need to hit ”Add Files” from the HitPaw Video Converter’s interface and select a WebM format video you’d like to convert into other output formats.

How to convert webm to mp4

Step 3: Select video output

After importing the video, you’ll need to select the MP4 format and the quality of the video you’d like to download. Luckily, you can also convert multiple videos after hitting the “Convert all” option.

How to convert webm to mp4

Part 2: How to convert WebM to MP4 Mac

VLC player is another spectacular tool that can help you convert WebM to MP4 Mac with minimal effort. Mac users can use the Media Player for multiple purposes as it allows you to explore multiple functions.

Apart from MP4, VLC Media Player also allows you to convert your video into many other video formats.

Features:

  • Open source and Free.
  • It boasts customizable, and built-in conversion presets.
  • It comes with a hardware decoding procedure to allow fast conversion.
  • It supports multiple social media platforms.
  • You can convert your favorite videos directly from the streams.

Converting WebM to MP4 using VLC

Step 1:

Install VLC on your Mac after downloading it. Later, you’ll need to launch it without a second invitation.

Step 2:

After hitting the “Media” option, you’ll need to tap on Convert/Save option. Later, you’ll need to click Add button icon to import your WebM file.

Step 3:

Now, you’ll need to hit Convert/Save option, and you’ll see Convert Window afterward.

Step 4:

In this phase, you’ll need to navigate to the Profile section and select the Video-H.264+MP3 (MP4). After, you can hit the Browse option to save the edited file in your destination place.

Step 5:

Finally, all you need to do is hit the “Start” icon to start the conversion process.

How to convert webm to mp4

Part 3: How to convert WebM to MP4 online

If you find it hard and time-consuming to download the converter and serve your purpose, you can look at the HitPaw Online Video Converter.

It is a pretty simple converter, and you’ll only need to visit the tool’s official website to put things in order. Besides converting your video, HitPaw Online Video Converter also helps you crop, cut, trim, and watermark your video.

Luckily, it doesn’t come with a hectic user interface. Instead, you can access all its features without any ad popping your way.

How to convert WebM file to MP4 Using HitPaw Online Video Converter

Here’s the step-by-step guide to convert WebM videos into MP4 format.

Step 1: Visit HitPaw Online Video Converter

First of all, you’ll need to navigate to HitPaw Online Video Converter. After reaching there, you’ll need to select the “Choose File” option. From there, you’ll need to import the WebM video from the computer library.

How to convert webm to mp4

Step 2: Select your format

After importing the video, you’ll need to select the output format. Since you’re looking to convert WebM video to MP4 video, you can select MP4 format from there.

Later, you can select Convert, and your video will be converted into your desired video format. Next, you’ll need to press “Download” and you’ll be able to save the file to your desired destination.

How to convert webm to mp4

Conclusion

If you don’t know how to convert WebM to MP4, we’ve mentioned the ideal solutions in this article. You can test all the tools one by one and see how it does.

However, HitPaw Video Converter has to be the best option citing its flexibility and quality. Hence, you can use HitPaw Video Converter as WebM to MP4 converter.

FAQ: WebM vs. MP4, what is the difference?

WebM is a simple video format that consists of Vorbis audio and VP8 video. Apart from offering you open video compression for multiple HTML5 videos, WebM is also compatible with several web browsers, including Safari, Chrome, Opera, Firefox, etc.

On the other side, MP4 is a pretty popular format termed MPEG. This file format is pretty good for storing video and audio data. Moreover, it also helps you to store images and subtitles.

The majority of the people share videos in MP4 format, and this format is also more accessible than WebM format videos.

Disclaimer: This is a sponsored post, made possible in association with HitPaw. PiunikaWeb doesn’t take any responsibility for the product being advertised here as well as how these devices are used.

About HitPaw: HitPaw is a software company that was founded in 2019. It offers video editing/converting, image editing, meme maker, and other tools.

PiunikaWeb started as purely an investigative tech journalism website with main focus on ‘breaking’ or ‘exclusive’ news. In no time, our stories got picked up by the likes of Forbes, Foxnews, Gizmodo, TechCrunch, Engadget, The Verge, Macrumors, and many others. Want to know more about us? Head here.

Free, Simple WebM to MP4 Converter

Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter

Convert Google WebM to MP4 and Other Formats to Enjoy on Your iPod, iPad, iPhone, PSP, Android, etc.

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

  • Convert WebM for playback on MP4 players
  • Batch convert video files of any formats
  • Extract sound from video files
  • Preset quality adjustment and wizard-style operation
  • 100% FREE and Easy

WebM format is a VP8 code video on Html5, and some of them are on the YouTube website. If you download YouTube WebM Video on your computer and want to put it into your PMPs, you need to convert the WebM video to more common video formats. Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter lets you convert your WebM video to MP4 and other formats compatible with your devices.

WebM is an open media file format designed for the web. WebM files consist of video streams compressed with the VP8 video codec and audio streams compressed with the Vorbis audio codec. The WebM file structure is based on the Matroska media container. Do you want to convert WebM to iPod iPad iPhone? You don’t need to know what file types your device supports, the resolution values, bit rate, sample rate or lots of other tech details. Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter would be your top solution as it already knows everything about WebM conversion and in few minutes you get the video in the right format ready to be uploaded to your iPod, iPad, iPhone, etc.

Convert WebM to MP4

Wanna enjoy your WebM videos at anywhere and anytime with portable players? Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter can perfectly convert your favorite WebM video files to the more common MP4 format. In this way, you can enjoy your WebM videos on MP4 compatible devices like iPod, iPad, iPhone, PSP, Apple TV, etc.

Extract Audio from Video

This smart WebM to MP4 converter provides an easy way to extract main theme or favorite dialogue from AVI, MPEG, MPG, FLV (Flash Video), YouTube, DAT, WMV, MOV, MP4, 3GP video files and save them as MP3, AAC, WMA, WAV and more audio formats to play on music player.

Preset Output Quality

A range of configuration parameters of each format are provided to customize your output quality with ease. Just pick the one you need from many presets with different combinations of conversion settings to playback on all kinds of software applications and devices.

Batch Process

Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter allows you to batch convert dozens of files in specified order without waiting for each conversion to finish. The batch conversion helps a lot when dealing with lots of huge size files, saves your much time and offers you more convenience.

Support 300+ Video Formats & Multimedia Devices

This free WebM to MP4 converter lets you input over 300 video formats including AVI, WMV, MP4, MPEG, MKV, FLV, SWF, 3GP, MOV, RM, RMVB, ASF and much more as source formats. Also, it is available to convert videos to many devices like: iPod, iPhone, iPad, Apple TV, PSP, Mobile Phone, Android, etc.

Experience Faster Speed with CUDA & DXVA Technology

Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter features integrated both DXVA/CUDA technology and less CPU usage, which bring you a considerable increase in video conversion. The CUDA/DXVA auto-switching is added for maximum conversion speed and economy of hard disk resource – increased video decoding speed up to 40%. Therefore, more spaces and resources can be reserved to accelerate the conversion process.

Exceptional Output Quality

With the powerful detecting ability and decoding engine, Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter offers you an exceptional output quality. In this way, video fans can smoothly watch videos of all popular formats on various tech toys with perfect audio & video synchronization and no skipped frame!

100% Free, Safe & Ease

Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter is totally free to use. It contains no adware, spyware or any other malicious components. It’s 100% clean and reliable to install and run. What’s more, with the understandable UI, anything can be found in seconds. With tutorial instruction, even beginners can do the conversion just by clicking buttons.

How to convert webm to mp4

  • Humanization Design
  • Optimal output quality
  • Super-fast processing technology built-in
  • Presets with popular settings
  • Support tons of input/output formats
  • Cutting-edge encoding/decoding technology
  • Support multicore CPU
  • Less burden on your system
  • Abundant guide contents & online support
  • Free, safe & no restrictions

We promise our software will be 100% free, 100% clean, forever!

Screenshots

What you see is what you get

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

Download Free WebM to MP4 Converter

  • 100% Free
  • |
  • Safe with No Malware
  • |
  • Release date:
  • |
  • Runs on Windows XP/Vista/7/8/8.1/10

Tutorials

What does Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter do?

How to Convert WebM to MP4?

Have you ever thought about importing WebM to MP4 devices for enjoying on a long journey, on the way home or killing time? Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter provides you with an easy way to convert WebM to MP4 video format for playback on MP4 compatible devices like iPod, iPad, iPhone, PSP, Apple TV, iMovie and other software, multimedia players.[More. ]

The Studio

FreeMoreSoft, founded in 2002, is basically in charge of the audio, video, document & image management software. The products are designed for home and office use. Through these years, we provide the first-rate tools and support for novices and professionals in many industries. Now, our audio, video, document & image management as well as our high-quality service have quickly earned us a strong reputation for efficiency and reliability. We’ll constantly improve the quality and enrich the function of our products.

Reviews

  • Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter is really a problem solver, which takes the frustration out of having incompatible file formats by giving you the power to convert them. It also takes the hassle out of file conversion by making it easy, practical and affordable. Combine reliable performance with flexible options and professional results. We’d like to see more of the uncommon file formats supported. – Computer Build Editor’s Choice – Very Good,
  • Each program comes with its own set of advantages, and this program is no exception. Freemore WebM to MP4 Converter’s conversion is comparatively faster and the quality setting is much easier. – PCWorld Editor’s Review – Five Stars,

by Christine Smith • 2022-03-09 11:37:45 • Proven solutions

WebM is a video format that is developed and formed by Google. Most of the videos which are downloaded or uploaded on YouTube happen in the WebM format. In the same way, MP4 is also most commonly used for video formatting and is supported by almost all video players. The VLC media player is a well-known media player supporting different kinds of video compression and file formats.

Sometimes, when you download or find a video from a website, it is generally in WebM form and might not be supported by your Device. Hence, an easy WebM to MP4 converter is the need of the hour.

Part 1. A full guide to convert WebM to MP4 with VLC

VLC media player, short for, VideoLan Client, is one of the most renounced media players, supporting various kinds of video compression and file formats. VLC is a free and open-source cross-platform which supports both the PC and mobile platforms like Android, Windows, iOS, iPad OS, etc. It Is incredibly safe, hassle-free and easy to use.

Steps to convert WebM to MP4 with VLC

To convert WebM to MP4, the steps are as follows:

Step 1 – Download VLC on your Windows/Mac and install it for further operations to convert WebM to MP4.

Step 2 – Select Media

Click Media on the top right corner, and select convert/save. You can also use the shortcut Ctrl+R to choose the files.

Step 3 – Choose the files that you want to convert from WebM to MP4 with VLC. Once the media page has opened, select the Add button to choose the files from your computer that you want to convert.

Step 4 – Convert/Save and choose WebM. Select the Convert/Save button to enter into the convert window. After this, Select WebM as your target file format to convert WebM to MP4 with VLC.

Step 5 – Select the Destination File Location . Select the browse button to select a destination file name where you want to save your target file. Edit the file name and keep it.

Step 6 – Begin the conversion process. Press on Start to commence the conversion process within a few minutes. The media file will be saved as MP4 on your computer. Also, you can convert MP4 to WebM by VLC by following the vice-versa process.

Part 2. The best alternative to convert WebM to MP4 recommended

Wondershare UniConverter (originally Wondershare Video Converter Ultimate) is a promising WebM Video Converter. It is 30 times faster than many and promises no quality loss during the conversion process. You can even add your desired customization like adding a subtitle, editing, watermark, etc. The conversion also gives the advantage of batch processing. It is hassle-free and extremely safe with a user-friendly interface. Wondershare UniConverter has its free version with many cool features to play with, but if you want to take it up a notch, the paid version is at a price one can surely afford.

Convert WEBM files

Alberto Gonzalez

Designed for iPad

    • Free

Screenshots

Description

Convert WEBM files to GIF, MOV, MKV, VOB, AVI, OGV and MP4, without long waits

Do you need to convert your WEBM file into another file?
Convert WEBM to MP4? WEBM to GIF?
Convert your WEBM file easily and completely free of charge (No additional costs)

Make your WEBM video files easy to view by converting them into other formats.

This conversion application allows you to convert any WEBM video file to other files like GIF, MOV, MKV, VOB, FLV, WMV, AVI, MPEG, OGV and MP4, it can also convert other files to WEBM.

No limit on conversions or exaggerated waiting times and totally free!

Main features of WEBM Converter

Excellent conversion quality.
Very fast conversions, stop waiting for absurd times to convert your files.
Totally free, without subscriptions or additional payments.
Video files are precisely optimized, preserving image and sound quality at all times.
Convert from WEBM (WEBM to MP4) and from (WEBM to GIF)
No limit on the number of converted files and on the file size.
Supported extensions: GIF, MOV, MKV, VOB, FLV, WMV, AVI, MPEG, OGV, MP4, MP3, M4A, AAC, OGG, WAV and WMA
Easy and fast!

In the conversion options, you can configure “Video size”, “Video bit rate”, “Frame rate” and “Video aspect” of the video files you want to convert!

Convert WEBM video files private, no email required, just select the file you want to convert and convert it. Without wasting time in the registration process. When the conversion is complete, the file will be available for use.

You can convert an unlimited number of files. WEBM video converter is completely free and there is no limit on the number of files converted. The conversion speed depends on the size of the file.

All the converted files are saved in the root folder of your phone, in the folder “WEBM Converter”

Application translated into the following languages: Spanish, English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Russian.

App Privacy

The developer, Alberto Gonzalez , indicated that the app’s privacy practices may include handling of data as described below. For more information, see the developer’s privacy policy.

Data Used to Track You

The following data may be used to track you across apps and websites owned by other companies:

Data Linked to You

The following data may be collected and linked to your identity:

Data Not Linked to You

The following data may be collected but it is not linked to your identity:

Privacy practices may vary based on, for example, the features you use or your age. Learn More

By Nathan E. Malpass, Last updated: February 16, 2022

Which do you support more? WEBM or MP4? If you choose MP4, then too bad for WEBM as only Android supports them. Still, here is a way to help you convert WEBM to MP4.

Nowadays, people prefer quality over file size as most computers have been expanding their storage over the years. So, despite a certain format having larger quality over an alternative, they still choose to keep it as it offers great quality. MP4 is a great example of having a high-quality video with a larger file than WEBM. WEBM’s quality isn’t lacking when compared to other formats and MP4 isn’t really that much of a high-definition but users still prefer it. Because of this, they choose to convert WEBM to MP4. If you’re curious and want to know how to read on more to find out.

Tip: You can also learn how to convert DVD to MP4 format.

Part 1. Why Convert WEBM to MP4?

How to convert webm to mp4

Watching videos is a pain when the format isn’t supported by your device. WEBM is only supported by Android so you can only play WEBM videos on android phones whereas you can play MP4 videos on any type of phone.

The WEBM format was first introduced in 2010 by Google and is initially designed for the web as HTML5 supports this type of format. It is smaller in size compared to MP4 but has lower quality. Aside from that, it isn’t compatible or accepted by many media players that’s why they have no choice but to convert WEBM to MP4 in the end.

Even though MP4 has a larger file size than WEBM, it’s only by a small margin. Devices, nowadays, have been upgrading their storage so that more files will be stored. So, what better way than to download videos that have the MP4 format than with the WEBM.

Part 2. How to Convert WEBM to MP4 Through Online Converters?

Now that it is understandable the need to convert WEBM to MP4, we will now move on to how and what to use. Well, free online conversion tools are available on the web. Your job is to find one that will suit your tastes and something you can use in the long run if you plan to have conversions being done either once or twice a month.

Listed below are some conversion tools we have provided for you:

CloudConvert

How to convert webm to mp4

CloudConvert is a great tool to use when trying to convert WEBM to MP4. You can adjust the resolution, quality, and file size of your computer. It offers high-quality conversions, is fairly simple to use, and supports over 200+ formats.

FreeFileConvert

Another worthy tool on the list is the FreeFileConvert. It doesn’t just support video formats for conversion but others, as well, such as archives, vectors, documents, images, e-books, and more. It is easy to use because of the instructions that will guide you and has an amazing conversion speed.

Webmtomp4

And lastly, we have the webmtomp4. Just like its name, it only supports MP4 conversions so it can only receive files that have the format WEBM, MOV, AVI, and a bonus is the MP4 to GIF. It even has an MP4 compressor. Instructions are on the tool to guide you.

If you find your worthy tool to help you convert WEBM to MP4, then maybe you can do other conversions, as well if that particular format is available. It’s still your choice on what tool to use so find something that you deem worthy of using.

Part 3. The Best Way to Convert WEBM to MP4

If you haven’t found the right tool to use to help you convert WEBM to MP4 and have been looking for hours or even days, then maybe you aren’t satisfied with the features of the tool you have found. Maybe you noticed that it was lacking something, like another feature you want or wished for it to add something you wished it had. If you weren’t satisfied, then maybe we can help you experience perfection by suggesting the FoneDog Video Converter.

The FoneDog Video Converter is like your own handy pocket knife that has all the right features you need in life. It offers batch conversion, adjusting the settings of your video, including subtitles and even editing it to either have 3D effects. You can even clip video and/or audio and merge it with another and add external audio tracks! Anything that will help you achieve that perfect video you want; you can find it here.

But for now, we will just show you the steps using the Conversion features this tool has. A list of instructions is stated below to help you convert WEBM to MP4:

  1. To upload the files, you can drag the files to the right side of the software.
  2. Choose the “Convert Format” to pick out your desired format. If you’re done with the settings, remember to press “Save” to save the options you adjusted and select the folder you want your file to be in.
  3. Your successfully converted files will be found in the “Recent Projects” category.

How to convert webm to mp4

And there you have it! Since the app is easy to use, you won’t have a hard time navigating your way through. Just spend a couple of minutes with it and you’ll get to know the ins and outs of the tool.

Tip: If you want to know how to convert SWF to MP4 format, you can refer to this guide.

Part 4. In Conclusion

WEBM and MP4 only have a few differences to note when compared. One just has better quality than the other or one just has a smaller size. That’s why it is important to learn a way to convert WEBM to MP4. Still, MP4 wins this round as it is accepted by a lot of media players, not like WEBM. The FoneDog Video Converter can be your go-to app not just in conversion but maybe in editing as well since the features you need for it are already found on the tool. It has made many users content and happy that they made the right choice to install it and maybe, you, as well. Don’t miss out on this fantastic tool and download it on your computer now.

When I try to convert a webm file to mp4 the output is very very choppy and it appears as if many frames have been dropped by ffmpeg

I used the following commands to convert

All of them have the same problem. When I use ffprobe it seems to show the frames more or less properly.

UPDATE:

5 Answers 5

As your input file report a strange frame rate value 1k fps coming from the tbs and tbr value (look here for their definition)

the encoder generate a different result, 16k tbn, 1k tbc (default)

You configure ffmpeg to generate new pts (a.k.a Presentation TimeStamp) for each frame and you set the target frame-rate to 24.

So your output mp4 file info ( ffmpeg -i . ) change from

How to convert webm to mp4

If you want to stream copy (re-mux) and avoid re-encoding:

This will copy the VP9/VP8 video and Opus/Vorbis audio from WebM to MP4. This is like a “copy and paste”. No re-encoding occurs, so no quality is lost and the process is very fast.

If you get error: “opus in MP4 support is experimental”

If you get this error:

  • Use a newer ffmpeg as Opus in MP4 is no longer experimental in newer ffmpeg versions.
  • Or add -strict experimental (or the alias -strict -2 ) if you are stuck with outdated ffmpeg .

How to convert webm to mp4

I summarize here the results of converting from webm to mp4 using the many command line options suggested.

We assume here that if you’re asking this question, then you’re forced to use webm because the Android device emulator within Android Studio generated it for you, and you’re on a Mac so you’d really like to use iMovie to edit the video.

1 ffmpeg -i vid.webm vid-1.mp4 Ref Takes 17.8 sec. Output file is 1.5 MB.

2 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -crf 1 -c:v libx264 vid-2.mp4 Takes 18 sec. Output file is 7.6 MB.

3 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -crf 0 -c:v libx264 vid-3.mp4 Ref Takes 21 sec. Output file is 11.9 MB.

4 ffmpeg -fflags +genpts -i vid.webm -r 24 vid-4.mp4 Ref Takes 0.16 sec. Output file is 1.5 MB.

5 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -c copy vid-5.mp4 Ref Takes 2.8 sec. Output file is 64.6 MB.

6 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -strict experimental vid-6.mp4 Ref Takes 18 sec. Output file is 1.5 MB.

7 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -c copy -strict experimental vid-7.mp4 Ref Takes 0.16 sec. Output file is 64.6 MB.

8 ffmpeg -i vid.webm -c:v copy -strict experimental vid-8.mp4 Also Ref Takes 0.69 sec. Output file is 64.5 MB.

Only numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 can be imported to iMovie (10.2).

The version of ffmpeg used is 4.3.

This is a first step. I am leaving out the more complicated quality comparison.

Perhaps the worst trap waiting for you is that iMovie really wants to produce a 1920×1080 movie, and so you may well get two large black bars on the side. If you’re editing a demo of your app in portrait mode, you’ll be wasting a lot of space. If you can, ideally you’ll want to produce a video in that resolution.

The most immediate sequel question is: Assuming you truly have no need for the heavily pushed Final Cut Pro (because you’re a programmer, not a video editor), will FCP allow you to set your own resolution?

You can achieve the best results using a WinX Video Converter.

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

How to convert webm to mp4

One of the most outstanding achievements of technology in the 21s century is the ability to compress video and share it seamlessly across mobile platforms – or devices. Of course, we all love HD videos, but there is a limit to how many 4k videos our mobile devices or computer can accommodate, hence the need to convert WebM to MP4.

As you would have noticed, using a WinX Video Converter for WebM to MP4 conversions is more accessible than downloading a Webm player application on your devices – which occupies more space.

This article will highlight and discuss everything you need to know about Webm and Mp4 video formats, and most importantly, how you can compress video without compromising on quality. The days of poor quality compressed videos are long gone, and you don’t have to delete your old videos anymore to accommodate new ones (Hint: There is no such thing as ‘old videos’!)

What is WebM Video Format?

Initially developed by On2, Matroska, and Xiph before its adoption by Google, WebM is an audio-visual supported file format that provides a royalty-free substitute to HTML5 video and audio. It was released on 18 May 2010 and is a twin project to WebP, designed to support images only.

The African Exponent Weekly

Every week, get a digest of Top African News and Articles from The African Exponent.

This site is protected by reCAPTCHA and the Google Privacy Policy and Terms of Service apply.

WebM is compatible with most of the world’s famous web browsers like Google Chrome, Opera Mini, and Firefox. However, modern users find videos in WebM formats to be very heavy and occupy a lot of space.

Why is MP4 Preferred to WebM?

Also referred to as MPEG-4, MP4 is a digital audio-video multimedia storage format. Apart from storing files in smaller bytes when you compress video or convert WebM to MP4 directly, MP4can also be used to store data.

Unlike many traditional multimedia storage options, MP4 can be used to store subtitles and motion graphic images. It is also one of the easiest formats that promote seamless streaming over the internet.

How to Convert WebM to MP4

Thanks to modern technology, converting WebM to MP4 is like ordering a piece of cake over the telephone. Whether over the phone or on your mobile device, you can achieve the best results using a WinX Video Converter in the following steps.

Step 1: Download the FREE WinX Video Converter on Mobile or PC

Step 2: Install and Open the Converter

Step 3: Upload the WEBM you wish to convert

Step 5: Then, Convert! Yes, it is that simple, and you have a brand new MP4 video ready for use.

Why Should You Choose WinX Video Converter?

The real question should be, ‘why shouldn’t you?’ WinX Video Converter is a tested and trusted proven tool efficient to compress video and convert WebM to MP4 in record time. Users of the tool and critics alike have also attested to the high-quality levels of videos produced after conversion.

Below, we have highlighted the points that make WinX Video Converter one of the best video converting tools available today.

  • Compression Rate: It boasts of the highest compression rates, reducing files up to 90% less for seamless online/offline sharing and storage.
  • GPU-acceleration: The tool efficiently employs the GPU and CPU to enable the best quality outputs in real-time.
  • Quality: Users experience no quality loss when converting WebM to MP4 – or any other format using the tool.
  • Multiple Tool Options: It offers an all-in-one option where you can add subtitles, merge, cut, crop, and trim your video using the tool without having to download a separate software or application.
  • Offline Option: You can work offline, and the privacy of your data is 100% guaranteed!
  • Inputs and Outputs: You can take advantage of hundreds of inputs and outputs to upload/convert videos of any compatible format.

Here you will find out:

  • how to convert WebM to MP4
  • how DiskInternals can help you

Are you ready? Let’s read!

The best way to recover MP3 and any other video format is to use dedicated software like DiskInternals Video Recovery. Video and audio loss can occur not only during WebM to MP4 conversion, it can also happen as a result of system errors, virus attacks, hardware problems, etc.

This professional software tool will help you recover video files quickly and automatically, even if you are new to the business. Use a free trial of DiskInternals Video Recovery before purchasing a license for this software. Thus, before purchasing, you will see all the benefits of this application and be sure that it is exactly what you need in this situation. You can use the preview function and see the video file before recovery; you will also notice the amazing sound quality.

For clarity, use the instructions below to make the application easier and more intuitive to work with.

Step 1. Download and run DiskInternals Video Recovery (you can use the free version).

Step 2. In a new window, you will see all storage devices that are present and connected to your computer. Select the drive containing your lost or deleted MP3 / MP4 and other files and click Next.

Step 2.1. Select the type of files you want to recover and click Next.

Step 3. Scan. Select the scanning method: Fast or Full (recommended) and wait for the process to complete.

Step 4. Preview and recover lost video files. Right-click on the file and select Preview in New Window or press the hotkey combination Ctrl + P. After viewing the files, you can recover them automatically.

Step 5. Saving. You just need to purchase a license and choose a location to save the recovered files. It is best to store the video somewhere safe to prevent data overwriting.

Top 5 Recommended Apps:

1. WinX HD Video Converter

WinX HD Video Converter Deluxe is software that provides conversion of Web to MP4. In addition, the program also works with other formats. In addition, the converter also offers video editing functions:

  • Crop/combine videos,
  • Add subtitles in .srt, .ssa format to your videos.

In addition, you can take advantage of other useful features:

  • Optimization video for mobile devices and online sharing,
  • Compatible with 4K video from different sources,
  • Available on Mac and PC.

2. Wondershare UniConverter

Wondershare UniConverter is a WebM to MP4 converter with lossless video conversion technology.

You can also do video editing here, namely, add subtitles, crop videos, add additional effects and adjust sound, compress your videos, and change compression settings. Wondershare UniConverter uses converting and burning DVDs and offers the ability to download videos from over 10,000 sites.

3. Converter365

Converter365 is a converter available online on the Internet. Therefore, you do not need to download and install anything on your computer. Just drag the video file into the selected area and click on the Start Conversion button. After a few minutes, you can get the MP4 file, then you can download the file to your computer.

4. Use CloudConverter

CloudConverter is also an online convert WebM application. It’s easy to use and requires only a few clicks from you. That is, you need to select the file WebM you want to convert, change the conversion options (it is recommended to set it by default), and just wait for the conversion process to complete. Downloading the converted file to your computer is no longer difficult.

5. Online Convert

This online application is available for Mac and Windows 10. You need to click Select Files or enter the URL of the WebM file.

After changing the settings of the video (this is not necessary, you can leave everything as it is), click Start converting and wait for the conversion to complete.

How to convert webm to mp4

Although the types of video are constantly iterating, some of them still exist at the same time. People also have a preference for a particular video format for usage. Except for some commonly seen video formats like AVI, MOV, MP4, and FLV, etc., WebM becomes one of the hot topics again after Safari supports WebM playback in IOS 15 and macOS Big Sur.

It means that you can enjoy this type of video on some mainstreaming sites like YouTube. However, problems also appear. You may find WebM video is incompatible with your device system including phone, PC, or Windows. Therefore, users have the need to convert WebM video to a more compatible format like MP4. Then how to convert WebM to MP4 file?

What are WebM and MP4

WebM is a video format developed on the basis of MKV. The codec to compress it is VP8 or VP9, and the audio is compressed by codec Vorbis or Opus. As for MP4 format, the codec compressing it are MPEG4, H.264, or, HEVC, while AAC is for its audio stream commonly.

Then what are their pro and cons? Check out the following lines:

WebM->Pros:

  • Small size.
  • It is free.
  • WebM’s video codec can compress and decompress files with very few computer functions.
  • Streaming over the Internet allowed.

Con: WebM videos cannot be played on most portable devices.

MP4-> Pros:

  • Great compatibility. MP4 videos can be played on most devices.
  • Good compression ratio, much smaller file size under the same quality compared with other formats.
  • Streaming over the Internet is allowed.

Con: It is difficult to edit with a video editor, and it is easy to involve privacy. Moreover, MP4 is also a lossy compression format and cannot completely maintain the original quality.

Therefore, MP4 stands out for its overall better performance.

How to convert WebM to MP4 with utmost quality reserved

Use WinX Video Converter

WinX Video Converter is the optimal choice for you to convert WebM video files because it will not damage video quality after converting it to MP4. You don’t have to worry about image quality loss. Besides, 47X real-time faster processing speed is one of its advantages as well. In addition, it reduces video size by a large scale—up to 90%, which saves a lot of space for your devices. The following is how to convert WebM to MP4 with it:

  • Step one: Click “+Video” to load. Additionally, you can do this by drag-and-drop.
  • Step two: Choose “General Video” in the category on the left side of the “Output Profile” Window, then find and click “MP4 H.264+AAC”.
  • Step three: Click on the “RUN” button to start the conversion process.

Use HandBrake

HandBrake is a free video converting tool. There are a lot of preset options on it. However, its interface is not so intuitive, and the advanced settings may be handier to use for the experienced. Now let’s see how to convert:

  • Step one: “Source Selection”-> “File” option-> “Open”. In this way, you can upload a WebM video file.
  • Step two: Click “Presets”-> Choose “MP4”
  • Step three: Click “Start Encode”.

Use Zamzar

Zamzar is an online video converting tool. It can only convert video that is not bigger than 50 MB if you do not make a monthly subscription. Follow the next steps to convert WebM to MP4 with it:

  • Step one: Click “Add Files” to load the WebM video.
  • Step two: Hit on “Convert To” to choose MP4 as the output format.
  • Step three: Trigger the “Convert Now” button to start converting WebM to MP4.

Bonus Tips

How can I make the video file further smaller?

There are many advanced settings to help you reduce video file size. Here we take WinX Video Converter for example. When you choose the output format, please pay attention to the codec. For instance, if the original video codec is H.264, then you can choose a video format with H.265 codec to have the file compressed at a higher rate. In addition, cropping the image is accessible. And some parts of the video are unnecessary, so you can cut it out.

Besides, the parameter can also be adjusted. Lowering the resolution is what most people will do. Change on the bit rate has to be carefully dealt with, because if you change it largely, the video may be unable to watch. Also, you have to know that video playback is possibly not smooth after making changes to the frame rate.

There are different codecs of MP4, so which one should I choose?

As mentioned above, codecs of MP4 video files include MPEG4, H.264, and HEVC. The first one is commonly used to playback video on the internet while H.264 is used on streaming sources and Blu-ray discs. And HEVC can be seen in 4K or 8K video recording and playback. H.264 has a higher compression rate than MPEG4, while HEVC is higher than the other both. You can choose a codec as you need.

Summary

There are so many WebM to MP4 converters nowadays, choose one as your need. WinX Video Converter has excellent performance concerning video quality, processing speed, and video file size. It is a good choice for experienced and beginners. If you are experienced in processing videos, then you can choose HandBrake, but there is video quality loss after conversion. In addition, the users who are dealing with small-sized videos can use online convert like Zamzar.

WebM (VP8/VP9 video + Vorbis/Opus audio) is an open, royalty-free, container format designed for delivering videos on webpage using the HTML5 video tag. It is widely deployed by YouTube, Vimeo and other video hosting websites, and files end with .webm extension can play directly in most web browsers such as Firefox, Opera, Internet Explorer, Chrome.

WebM can be accessed in HTML5 environment without a problem, but the web-friendly format can run into trouble when it comes to offline. Desktop media players and applications on computer such as Apple QuickTime, Microsoft Windows Media Player, iTunes won’t support a playback of WebM by default. Even popular devices like iPhone, iPad, Android phones, tablets, PS4, and HDTVs refuse to open the Web video files you throw at it.

Convert WebM to MP4, a more compliant format for multipurpose

Fortunately, there are many of ways you can take to get rid of WebM playback issue. Among them, converting the WebM to MP4, the most flexible and resilient file format on the planet, would be a nice option you can go after. In this article, we’ll be using an application called Video Converter for Mac to help you convert the file from .webm to .mp4 format on Mac so you can use it on multiple platforms as well as the vast majority of multimedia devices & players.

It is a full-fledged tool with all of the added features one would expect in a file conversion tool, including preset choosing, parameters tweaking, video editing and the ability to create you own custom format profile for use next time. To convert a Web video in MP4 file on a Windows machine, please go and stick with its PC version—Video Converter for Windows, and the steps are akin to Mac’s.

How-to guide on Mac platform.

Step 1: Launch the Program and Add WebM Files

Start the program on your computer, you’ll notice it’s nothing more than an interface with main choices and clear-cut wizard built into the app, which are perhaps too sensitive and with the slightest click sending you off to the options you required.

To add one or more WebM files into the sequence on the program, you can either use the convenient drag-and-drop feature or import files with the touch of a “Add File” button at the toolbar.

Once a video is added to queue, you can preview it via a small preview window at the right pane.

How to convert webm to mp4

Tip: there is a “Merge into one file” option located in the lower right corner available, allowing to merge two or more video files together.

Step 2: Select MP4 from “Profile” Drop-down Menu, and Adjust the Settings as Required

The critical part of performing conversion task is to choose an output format.

Head to the lower left hand corner of the screen, there should be a “Profile” pull-down box. Click it and you can take a pick from a choice popular video formats. In our case, select “MPEG-4 Video (*.mp4)” or “H.264/MPEG-4 AVC Video (*.mp4) under “General Video” category.

Once you have made your format selection, choose an output directory to save the results. You can stick to the default folder or pick a new one by clicking “Browse”, beneath “Profile”.

How to convert webm to mp4

You also have the option of working with conversion elements that have impacts on video quality. Check the button that labels “Settings” to the right side of “Profile” drop-down menu.

Normally, we accept the default settings (codec, resolution, frame rate, bitrate, etc.) that have been optimized by this WebM to MP4 converter, but you can change them if you have trouble or want to get exact what you want for video.

If you don’t want to take the trouble, just ignore this part and continue.

How to convert webm to mp4

Don’t want to fiddle with these annoy parameters when it comes to converting a video for portable playback? The good news is that the software offers flexibility through a set of optimized device/ player-oriented presets, with the purpose of making the output results full compatible with the device you are working on.

For instance, if you want to view a 1080p MKV movie through Apple TV, all you need to do is click “Apple TV” column on the left pane and then choose a model you hold in the right expanding pane. This way, you don’t have to rack your brain to tackle the format and profile settings that your ATV requires. It’s that simple.

How to convert webm to mp4

This WebM converter also get your videos just the way you want it with some basic editing options. It’s worth taking some time to explore them in depth if you want the files look better. You can preview the video clip in real-time to see if the edits you’ve made suit your needs.

  • Trim: split the video into small portions to be saved as new files
  • Crop: remove black bars on the sides
  • Rotate: flip the video that is captured upside down or sideways.
  • Others: add watermark, subtitles or just adjust hue and saturation.

Step 3: Specify an Output Path and Start Converting WebM to MP4 for Mac

When you’ve happy with the edits you’ve made, now you need to tell this program where to save the converted file. To do this, click the “Browse” button underneath “Settings”. A window will appear allowing you choose the location and name of the file.

Press the orange button “Convert” and the program begins converting your imported WebM videos to MP4 in Mac and save them to your chosen location. Please be patient.

That’s it! We suggest that it is better to play the new created MP4 files on your desktop media player to make sure that the conversion was successful and without errors.

How to convert webm to mp4

This is all very basic, with only three relative steps, still, what you learn here works well. Apart from the controls and features mentioned above, it is also a exactly simple way to build and share short fun movies for social media like Facebook, YouTube, Instagram and more.

How Can I Get WMV Video Files to Play on iPad (Air, Pro, Mini)

Convert MP4 to WebM or WebM to MP4 in seconds! Turn MP4 videos, films, clips into WebM files or convert WebM videos in MP4 to watch them on any device. Save WebM movies without quality loss – same as MP4 original source. Make WebM files for the web in any format: standard, HD, Ultra HD, 4K videos. Get ready WebM player for your website. All browsers supported.

Download best MP4 to WebM converter of 2019 for free!

See how to convert MP4 to WebM free:

Download WebM converter freeware

Download here Free MP4 to WebM software from the official Freemake website. Launch an online or an offline installer of the conversion software on your Windows desktop or laptop computer. The supported operating systems are Windows Vista, Windows 7, 8, 8.1, and Windows 10. Follow all installation steps to install & set up the program properly.

If you need an offline software version, please contact our support team.

The download and installation are 100% secure. There are no toolbars, add-ons or any unwanted third-party apps.

Add an MP4 video

Adjust original video file

Choose “to HTML5” option

Select the “to HTML5” button on the formats bar at the bottom of MP4 to WebM utility. Select one of the available presets with output WebM video quality such as: 1080p, 720p, 480p, 360p, etc. If you need a better video quality, please pick up one of the HD formats like 1080p or 720p. If you plan to upload the resulted video onto a web page, you might use a smaller file quality like 480p or 360p.

Also, choose an output folder where to store converted WebM videos. It may be any location on your computer or cloud storage folder, such as Dropbox, Google Drive, etc. By default, all videos after MP4 to WebM conversion are in the Videos folder on your PC.

Convert MP4 to WebM

Click the “Convert” button to convert MP4 to WebM. Wait till the conversion ends. It might take from several seconds up to several minutes depending on the original video length and selected conversion settings. MP4 to WebM program will notify you when the multimedia processing is done.

Open the destination folder with the converted files. There will be 3 files: an MP4 file, an OGV file, and a WebM file. Please take WebM video file and feel free to use it as you want.

In the same folder, you can find an HTML page with a ready web player source code for your WebM video that you can copy and paste onto your website or blog to play WebM film online. Don’t forge to upload the output files onto your FTP as well.

To say even more:

What is WebM?

WebM is an open source video file format made for online video streaming. WebM structure replicates the MKV (Matroska) media container. WebM video file steams use VP8 or VP9 video codecs. Both VP8 and VP9 are open and royalty-free video compression technologies owned by Google. WebM audio streams are compressed with the Vorbis (OGG) or Opus audio codecs.

Which is better MP4 or WebM?

There is no ultimate answer to this question. WebM is a rather new format which appeared only 8 years ago. MP4 is an old well-known media extension supported by almost all modern handheld and desktop devices. Speaking about playback in various browsers, MP4s play fine in all browsers (Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, etc). However, you might have issues with WebM video player in Microsoft Internet Explorer.

Why is encoding time for WebM so long?

It’s a myth. Our MP4 to WebM software is quick and easy. It doesn’t take a lot of time to convert & encode to WebM. The program processes an average 5 minute MP4 video for one minute. Is it long?

How to play WebM files?

To playback WebM videos on a webpage, feel free to use the web video player created by Freemake. See step #5 above for details.
To play WebM files offline on Windows, Macintosh or Linux, use any free cross-platform video/audio player like VLC. It’s free and supports WebM format natively.

How to convert MP4 to WebM with Handbrake?

Handbrake is a popular conversion tool for Mac OS. To convert MP4 files with it, install the software on your computer, then select Media > Convert/save from the menu. Click the “Add” button and upload the video file you want to convert. Next, press the “Convert/Save” button and in the profiles dropdown menu choose “Video – VP80 + Vorbis (Webm)”. Start the conversion.

As you can see, the process isn’t so straightforward as the steps above. So for Windows OS we recommend you using Freemake software.

Convert WEBM video file to MP4 video, convert WEBM to MP4 online.
WEBM to MP4 converter, 100% free. Select your WEBM file (max 500MB) and
click the upload button. This service is free,
share it with your friends.

Free Online WEBM to MP4 Converter

This free video tool lets you quickly convert an WEBM video file to MP4 online, from your browser web. You can use this tool to convert an WEBM video file
to a MP4 H.264 video file.

MP4 is a popular video file format that works on any modern device, convert WEBM to MP4 for free.

This website makes use of an encrypted https connection to ensure transmitted data is secured.

You can use this web service without paying a single penny, it is free to use for anyone!

You can use this MP4 compressor from anywhere around the world, you just need a web browser.

All files uploaded and converted are automatically removed from the servers after a few hours.

Compress MP4 files with peace of mind, just select the MP4 you want to compress and press the button.

Statistics | Today: 42 Files, 2.28GB | Total: 3,281,969 Files, 166.77TB | From March 2019

© 2019-2022 MP4Compress.com | All rights reserved

Contact Us

Do you have questions? Feel free to contact us via email. If you don’t receive a reply within two business days, please re-send the message. We receive a lot of spam messages and your email may be blocked by the anti-spam software.

If you want to convert WebM format video files to MP4 videos on Windows 11/10 PC, then this post can help you with some best free WebM to MP4 converter software. Apart from converting WebM to MP4 video files, these tools support many other input-output formats such as AVI, MPEG, FLV, MOV, DIVX, 3GP, and lots more.

How to convert webm to mp4

WebM to MP4 converter software

We have covered some free WebM files to MP4 converter tools to convert WebM files to MP4 videos:

  1. Any Video Converter
  2. Pazera Free MP4 Video Converter
  3. Miro Video Converter
  4. XMedia Recode
  5. Free WebM to MP4 Converter.

Let’s check these tools.

1] Any Video Converter

Any Video Converter (free version) is one of the best options for converting WebM videos to MP4 video files. It is more than just a simple WebM to MP4 converter. There are a lot of interesting features such as:

  • Support for 200+ input and output video formats (VOB, MP4, OGG, MKV, RMVB, AVI, FLV, MPEG, MOV, etc.) for conversion
  • Video to audio conversion
  • Preview input video files
  • Take a snapshot from the input video
  • Trim a video.

After installation, open its interface and then use Add button to insert WebM files. Once the videos are added, you can see a preview of any video using the upper right section. The bottom right section lets you view basic video details, set video frame rate, bitrate, audio sample rate, etc. Though default settings are good, you can play with settings if you want.

For each added video, there is a Clip this item option is also present. Using that option, you can set start and end points so that you get the output within the selected range only. You should also access the Settings of this tool so that you can set the output folder.

When you are ready, use the drop-down menu present on the top right part to set the output format. Finally, use Convert Now! button and it will store MP4 files one by one.

2] Pazera Free MP4 Video Converter

Pazera Free MP4 Video Converter is an open-source tool that has some really interesting features. It lets you rotate output videos to any of preset angles, flip videos horizontally or vertically, set brightness, saturation for output videos, crop videos, set sampling frequency, audio bitrate, channels for output video files, etc. You can also preview input video files.

A lot of input formats are supported by this tool such as HEVC, WEBM, MPEG, DIVX, AVI, MKV, RMVB, FLV, 3GP, MKA, MP4V, TS, WTV, etc. The output can be generated in MP4 or M4V format. Multiple WebM video files can be added at a time for converting them to MP4 format.

Get this tool and open its interface. You can add a folder containing your WEBM files or add a single file using available buttons. Once the files are added, use the settings panel available on the right part to set output format, folder, audio-video settings, etc.

Once everything is set, press the Convert button. It will begin the conversion process and start saving the output video files to the folder set by you.

3] Miro Video Converter

Miro Video Converter is also an open-source tool that can convert almost any popular video file to MP4, WebM SD, WebM HD, and Ogg Theora format. It also lets you select a custom width and height for output files. You can also use it to generate a thumbnail for each output video.

One unique feature that you might like is it supports parallel conversion. That means multiple input videos are converted together.

Apart from converting input videos to supported output formats, you can also generate output for specific devices such as Apple TV, iPad, Samsung Galaxy Admire, Kindle Fire, etc. The resolution for output videos is adjusted automatically for the device selected by you.

Open this tool and use Choose Files option to add WebM files. After that, you can use the bottom section of this tool to set output format, adjust settings, etc. Finally, use the Convert button, and then access output MP4 files after conversion.

4] XMedia Recode

XMedia Recode is also a fantastic tool for converting WebM files to MP4 format videos. It supports hundreds of input and output formats such as MKV, MOV, MP4, H264, FLV, AVI, etc. You can also set output stream type to video only, audio only, or video and audio.

Open its homepage and grab its EXE file. Install it and launch the software. Now, use the Open File button to add WebM files. Once files are added, set its output format, output folder, and output stream type by accessing the Format tab. You can also access other available tabs to set frame rate, audio sample rate, audio bitrate, channels, and other options.

Now, select your input files, and press Add to queue button. When videos are added to the queue for conversion, press the Encode button. This will begin the conversion process and you will get your output MP4 video files.

5] Free WebM to MP4 Converter

Free WebM to MP4 Converter comes with a very simple interface but it supports batch WebM to MP4 conversion. It also lets you save output MP4 files to the same or another location.

Use this link to grab this tool. After installation, launch this tool. Now you can either drag n drop input files on its interface or use Add button to insert WebM files.

Once files are added, set the output folder or keep the same location. Finally, press the Convert to MP4 button. Wait for the conversion process to be completed and then you can access the output folder to start using output MP4 videos.

Hope you like these WebM to MP4 converter tools.

This article makes a brief explanation of what the WebM file is and introduce an efficient free WebM to MP4 converter to help solve the format incompatibility issue.

Updated on Feb 24, 2022

Why Convert WebM to MP4, AVI, MKV, MOV, WMV, Etc?

After all, WebM is designed for the web, just like the OGV file. Despite its brilliant performance on the web, the defect is also obvious. You may get frustrated and upset that it’s not convenient to play and edit WebM video file offline since currently it’s not compatible with most media players, portable devices and video editing software.

To solve this problem, the most direct and effective way is to convert WebM to MP4 or AVI, WMV, MKV, MOV. Therefore, a free WebM to MP4 converter is requisite for this job. Follow this step-by-step guide below on how to convert WebM to MP4 or other formats and devices.

How to Convert WebM Files?

The best free WebM video converter – Free HD Video Converter Factory is highly recommended. Free download it and install on your Windows PC (Windows 11/10/8/7/Vista).

Free HD Video Converter Factory is the best free solution to convert WebM to MP4, AVI, MKV, MOV, WMV or other popular formats and portable devices. Learn more >

  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • 4

Step 1 – Add WebM Videos to the Free WebM to MP4 Converter

Launch HD Video Converter Factory Pro and enter the Converter module. Then click “Add Files” to import your WebM video files or simply drag the wanted WebM videos into the program.

Note: This free .webm converter also enables you to import and convert M2V to MP4, PVR to AVI, and more.

How to convert webm to mp4

Add WebM Videos

Step 2 – Select MP4 as Output Format

Open the output format drop-down list on the right and select MP4 as the output format.

Note: Apart from MP4, there is a wide range of video&audio formats available so that you can convert video to H.265, 4K, VP9, etc, or choose from various devices including Android, iOS, smartphones, tablets, TVs, game consoles.

How to convert webm to mp4

Select Output Format

Optional – Regulate Video Settings

If you’re an experienced user, this free WebM video converter empowers you to modify video and audio parameters by clicking the “Parameter settings” button. You can change resolution, change aspect ratio, encoder, bitrate, frame rate and so on right there.

How to convert webm to mp4

Regulate Video Settings

Step 3 – Start to Convert WebM to MP4

Click the Run button to start the process of converting WebM to MP4 when all things are ready.

After done, you can play WebM video with portable devices anytime and anywhere, even edit it in Windows Movie Maker, iMovie, QuickTime or professional 4K video editors.

Enjoy More Features of the Free WebM Video Converter

With this free WebM converter, you can even download YouTube MP4/WEBM videos in batches and combine videos into a single one. Meanwhile, simple editing like cut, merge, rotate, crop and add special effect are offered for you as well.

What Is WebM?

WebM, sponsored by Google, is a container format based on the Matroska media container (well-known as MKV). WebM files are typically compressed and encoded with the VP8, VP9 or AV1 video codec, Vorbis or Opus audio codecs, and WebVTT text tracks. It is primarily intended to offer a royalty-free alternative to use in the HTML5 video tag.

How to convert webm to mp4

WebM Video File

Pros and Cons of WebM

WebM was built for the web. Make sure you have installed the latest version of a browser so that WebM video can play directly in your web browser using HTML5 without the flash player. However, everything has two sides, check out the Pros and Cons of WebM below:

Advantages:
1. 100% free and open to everyone.
2. Play video with higher quality and better performance, even on old PCs.
3. Have been implemented on more and more popular sites like YouTube, Wikimedia, 4chan, etc.

Disadvantages:
1. Fewer supported web browsers currently, only Mozilla Firefox, Opera, Microsoft Edge, and Google Chrome. Internet Explorer 9 and Safari require third-party WebM Media Foundation Components.
2. Less media players support WebM video or need to install components or plug-ins.
3. WebM video cannot play on most portable devices.

How to convert webm to mp4

1. Onlineconverter.com

2. FreeConvert.com

How to convert webm to mp4

1. What is Renee Video Editor Pro?

Screen RecordingRecord screen and webcam in Windows computer.

Cut Videos & AudiosUsers are free to cut videos and audios clips with setting start and end time.

Multiple Edit ToolsMerge, crop, rotate, cut and transform video easily. Change and add background music, subtitles and remove watermark from video.

Format ConversionSupport to convert videos and audios into different formats.

Screen Recording Record screen and webcam in Windows computer.

Multiple Edit ToolsCut Videos & Audios Users are free to cut videos and audios clips with setting start and end time.

Multiple Edit ToolsMerge, crop, rotate, cut and transform video easily. Change and add background music, subtitles and remove watermark from video.

Format ConversionSupport to convert videos and audios into different formats.

3000 users have downloaded and edited videos with fun!

You can convert webm file to mp4 as well as to variety of other formats with free online converter.

How to convert webm to mp4?

Upload webm-file

Convert webm to mp4

Download your mp4-file

Online and free webm to mp4 converter

Web Media File

MPEG-4 Video File

MP4 is one of the popular digital multimedia formats. The original name is MPEG-4 Part 14. It is one of the most versatile digital multimedia formats because it can play both video and audio files.

Besides, you can use MP4 file formats for many other purposes, such as streaming over the Internet and storing still images.

The characteristics of MP4 files include but are not limited to:

  1. MP4 file formats are mostly preferred by users because of the versatile use that includes playing audio and video files.
  2. You can use MP4 to stream or watch live events over the Internet.
  3. MP4 file stores multiple data types, such as audio, video, scene descriptors, and object descriptors.

How to create and how to open an MP4 file

You can create an MP4 file by recording video with your device or by using certain software.

You can also use various converters to convert videos to MP4 file formats.

How to Open an MP4 File

Almost all the video players open an MP4 file because MP4 is a standardized digital file format.

You can open an MP4 file in several ways, such as using either the Windows Media PlayerorVLC Media Player.

Some of the others that can open the MP4 file are QuickTime (for macOS), MPlayer, VLC Media Player, and X Codec Pack.

Which other formats MP4 can be converted into and why

MP4 is widely used as a video file format because of the efficient video compression scheme that prevents data loss when converting.

Besides, you can use a lot of tools to seamlessly convert your MP4 file to another file format. Some of the popular video formats are:

  1. 1. m4w
  2. 2. mkw
  3. 3. mov
  4. 4. avi
  5. 5. flv

MP4 is supported by almost any device that is able to play video. However sometimes a user might need to convert it to another format. MKV is well known for being able to store a huge amount of information like dozens of audio streams and subtitles. WMV format provides better compression than MP4 does.

How to convert webm to mp4

Choose ‘Mp4’ and ‘Mp4 low’ video formats in EasyHTML5Video application to convert your video to Mp4

Technology is improving, never standing still. This is clearly seen in the development of the WebM format for video content. Here we have something that’s free, that works on the popular HTML5 code and was researched and developed by Google; a company with obviously enough tech know-how and reliability to be trusted. Why then, would you want to use, for example, MP4 format? Do you remember when Blu-Ray discs first came out and you bought one and wanted to watch it with someone but couldn’t because they didn’t have a player? WebM is one of the newest and efficient video formats but not everyone has the capability to watch it. This includes some older mobile devices such as Android and iPhones and pretty much the entire Apple line. Even Internet Explorer and Apple browser Safari, still in use, only support WebM with plug-ins instead of native support. Therefore, if you want to ensure that your message, advertisement or even just a video short production is able to be viewed by the maximum number of people, it’s wise to have the option to change to a common format like MP4. Many converters exist but are either expensive or require command line/coding knowledge that you don’t have time to learn.

Discover http://easyhtml5video.com for yourself as it can easily convert webm to mp4!

  • test
  • streaming
  • formats
  • events
  • autoplay
  • player
  • not found
  • loop
  • mobile
  • poster
  • create
  • controls
  • tag
  • convert
  • insert
  • tutorial
  • add
  • fullscreen
  • code
  • preload
  • embed
  • html
  • html5
  • ogg
  • mp4
  • webm

Support

For troubleshooting, feature requests and general help contact us at . Make sure to include details on your browser, operating system, Easy Html5 Video version, link to your page. In most cases you’ll get a reply within 1 business day.

Convert WEBM to MP4 for free online

Are you sure you want to cancel processing?
you will lose your progress

From Google Drive

How to convert WEBM to MP4

  1. 1. Choose your video file or Click on the drop down arrow and select Dropbox/Google Drive
  2. 2. Wait till the video gets uploaded
  3. 3. Choose the appropriate video, audio and compression settings
  4. 4. Click on convert to convert your WEBM to MP4 file
  5. 5. Click on Download

Frequently Asked Questions

Is it safe to allow access to my drive?

Yes, it is absolutely safe to allow and give us access to your drive. We won’t be making any changes to your site and your dfiles will be safe with you

How can I upload files from my drive/dropbox?

Click on the drop down arrow and select Dropbox/Google Drive. Select the Google account from where you want to link your drive. Now you can select the files that you want to upload

Will I be charged to use the website?

Our website is absolutely free and you can use it as many times as you want. There is no free trial uses, after which you will have to pay for using our services. We won’t charge you anything.

Does it support both Android and iOS platforms?

Yes, our website works on browser, and therefore supports both iOS and Android platforms

What are the encoding speeds?

WEBM to MP4 converter allows you to choose encoding speed i.e., the speed at which you want to convert the video and save it for download. The encoding speeds available with WEBM to MP4 converter are ultrafast, superfast, very fast, faster, Fast, medium, slow, slower, very slow. The slower the speed the better is the compression. WEBM to MP4 converter provides a wide range of encoding speeds according to varying needs of our users and ensures to provide the best quality videos for each edit made by the user.

Can I Extract Audio from my video files on this platform?

Yes, WEBM to MP4 converter has an Extract Audio feature with which you can extract the audio from your video files. After uploading your file, you need to select the file format in which you want your audio, and the audio quality. After selecting the desired output format and audio quality, you can extract the audio. The file formats available are MP3 and ACC. The available audio qualities are 48k. 64k, 80k, 96k, 128k, 256k, and 320k. We also have a feature to remove the audio from the video completely.

Can I compress my videos?

WEBM to MP4 converter allows you to compress your video files. By going to the compression settings, you can select the video size in MB, selecting the encoding speeds and CRF value. Video size also depends on the resolution, frame rate and bitrate. You can convert your videos to the desired size, by selecting the desired settings.

How long will it take to upload my video?

The time taken to upload your video for converting depends on the size of your video. Better quality videos with higher resolution will take more time to upload as compared to low quality videos with lesser resolution. It also depends on the type of video you want to convert. The larger the size of the video, the longer it will take.

What are the resolutions available and what will be size of the file of different resolutions?

WEBM to MP4 converter provides all the standard resolutions i.e., 1080p, 720p, 480p, 360p, 240p and 144p. Keep in mind that a higher resolution file size will be more than a file with lower resolution. The size of the file will also depend on the length of the video, the resolution, the aspect ratio and the CRF values.

Will my uploaded files be saved on the server?

All processing is done on your browser, and no files are transferred to the server. Hence your files are 100% safe.

Will I have to create an account to use the converter?

Our website does not require you to sign up or create an account. The platform is absolutely free and you can compress as many files as you want.

What are the video framerate?

Videos are made by multiple still photos taken and projected onto a screen, per second. Frame rate or frames per second is the speed at which pictures are shown in a second. For a normal motion picture 24 frames per second is the standard rate. It means 24 pictures are shown within a second, which looks like a video. With WEBM to MP4 converter you can select the frame rate which you want, according to your need. The frame rates available with us are 24 fps, 30 fps and 60 fps and custom, in which you can type in your desired frame rate. 24 fps are ideal if you want a cinematic look, 30 fps for TV and live sports and 60 fps is ideal for walking videos, blowing candles etc.

What video encoder should I choose?

The best video codec is H.264. Almost every device that exists supports this codec and it is the most commonly used codec. You can watch H.264 encoded videos on laptops, smartphones, desktops, smart TVs, tablets, gaming consoles and almost every other device which supports video formats. MPEG4 has a slower compression rate as compared to H.264. The image quality and playback are more fluent for files encoded with H.264 encoder. It also has a small file size as compared to MPEG4.

What is video bitrate?

Bitrate refers to the amount of data transferred at any given time. A higher transfer speed means more data passes through, and a higher bitrate provides a better-quality video. Simply put, the higher the bitrate the better is the quality of your video. This doesn’t mean you can go overboard with it. Higher bitrate also means higher buffering time. So, it will all depend on your requirement. Bitrate is measured in bits per second(bps). Since bits are lesser values, we use terms like kilobits, megabits, gigabits, depending on the usage. With WEBM to MP4 converter you can select your own bitrate, at which you want your videos to be processed. The default measurement is kilobits per second.

Will the quality of my videos decrease after converting?

WEBM to MP4 converter allows you to choose the quality of the video as per your requirement. If you want high-quality video, you can choose a higher resolution and the file size will be bigger. But if you care about the size of the file and can compromise in the size then chose a lesser resolution. WEBM to MP4 converter also allows all the standard resolutions from 144p to 1080p.

What is video encoder?

Video encoding is a process done to make video files smaller through compression. It is done to convert analog recordings into digital and to make videos that you would play on the internet. The tools used for video file compression and playback are known as “codecs”. There are many codecs available such as H.264, MPEG-2, VP9, WMV, HEVC and Quicktime. A video may be compressed using different codecs and if you don’t have a software that is not capable of playing the video of that codec, the playback fails. At WEBM to MP4 converter you can find two best different codecs available, H.264 and MPEG4.

For larger files, please use our desktop converter.

Your file is larger than 100 MB 1 GB . To convert a file of this size, please choose a plan or log in.

You can also purchase the Basic Superior plan right away for to convert any number of single files under 1 GB 2 GB each.

Already have a plan? Log in

To register or log in, please click the link.

  • Maximum file size: 1 GB
  • Single file conversions per day: unlimited
  • Online storage per month: 3 GB
  • Maximum file size: 1 GB
  • Single file conversions per day: unlimited
  • Online storage per month: 50 GB
  • Maximum file size: 2 GB
  • Single file conversions per day: unlimited
  • Online storage per month: 50 GB

The limit of free single conversions for our service is 1 per day. If you want to convert more than one file in a day, please choose a plan.

You can also purchase the Basic plan right away for to convert any number of single files under 1 GB each.

Already have a plan? Log in

How to Convert WEBM to MP4

Add your WEBM file.

Choose MP4 as the target format.

Click the Convert button.

Click Download if the file was not downloaded automatically.

Popular conversions

Convert from WEBM

Convert to WEBM

Convert from MP4

Convert to MP4

WHY USE THE ONLINE CONVERTER

Free File Conversion

You can change the video format of your files or use this tool as a free audio converter at absolutely no charge (up to 100 MB).

Easy Online Access

There’s no need to install any special file converter. Just a few clicks in your browser – and your files are ready. Download our extension for Google Chrome to always have quick access to this service.
Go to the Google Chrome extension page

Many Popular Formats

Choose from over 40 media formats, including many popular and rare file types. Discover more than 2,000 different combinations for video-to-video, audio-to-audio, video-to-audio, and audio-to-video conversions. Upload files as large as 2 GB.

Fast Conversion

Your files are converted on our powerful servers, so the conversion is faster than on most home computers to best suit your needs.

Safe and Reliable Encoder

Only you have access to the files you upload. Once you get your converted files, they’re immediately deleted from our servers.

Support for Dropbox and Google Drive

Now you can upload videos and music from your Dropbox or Google Drive account. There’s also an option to export your converted files to Dropbox or Google Drive.

Enhanced Settings

You can also compress your videos online, including HD movies (1080p and higher), and reduce their size by adjusting the video resolution and audio quality of your files.

Converting Selected Fragments

Use the settings to choose a specific media fragment you want to process with this free video converter.

  • Privacy Policy
  • Terms of Use
  • EULA
  • Shipping and Returns Policy
  • Refund Policy
  • Contacts

To offer you a better experience, this site uses profile cookies, including cookies from third parties. By closing this pop-up, scrolling down the page or clicking on any element on the page, you consent to the use of cookies and agree to Movavi using your personal data in accordance with our Privacy Policy. You also confirm that you meet the minimum age requirements. Read our Privacy Policy.

By Staff Writer • 12:00 pm, April 29, 2021

  • Sponsored

How to convert webm to mp4Convert WebM videos to MP4 and other formats with an easy-to-use online converter.
Photo: Szabo Viktor/Unsplash CC

This post is brought to you by Evano converter.

Videos are a part of our daily lives, whether for blasts of knowledge or pure entertainment. But while we rely on them for work and pleasure, the file formats of some videos can present a problem. For example, the increasingly popular WebM video format — which was designed for the web, as you probably guessed from its name — doesn’t work on all devices.

If you need to convert WebM to MP4 or another widely used audio or video format, conversion tools are your friend. However, you should choose a video converter wisely. You want a user-friendly app that can change the video format within a few minutes.

WebM format

The WebM video format (with its .WebM file extension) offers a higher compression ratio than the MP4 format. Optimized for the web and HTML5, it enables high-quality video streaming. Free to use, it is employed by many reputable websites like YouTube and Wikimedia.

However, WebM videos do not work on all portable devices. A few media players support WebM, but they typically require the installation of special components or plugins to run the video. Additional, several browsers support the WebM format. But again, you might need to install a special plugin to play your WebM video file.

What is the need to convert WebM files to MP4?

As mentioned, the WebM file is designed for the web. To play a WebM video offline, whether for personal viewing or work, you need to download it and convert it into MP4 or another format.
Evano, an all-in-one tool for multimedia conversion, is one of the most popular video converters for WebM and other file formats. It is user-friendly and converts videos at a faster rate than many competitors.

The web-based tool also can convert more than one file at a time. It works on multiple file types. And, after converting the video to an appropriate format, Evano’s built-in tools let you edit the resulting audio and video files.

How to convert WebM to MP4 using Evano converter

To take advantage of this free tool to convert video files, follow the steps below.

  • First, go to the Evano website.
  • Click Choose File, then select the WebM or other file you want to convert. You can drag it into the converter from your hard drive, Google Drive, Dropbox or from a URL.
  • Select the format of your file, as well as the desired format you want to convert it to, e.g., WebM to MP4.
  • Click the Convert button. Within a few seconds, the online interface will convert your video from WebM to MP4.
  • When the conversion finishes, click the link and save your file.

As you can see, this is a pretty simple platform to use.

How to get a WebM file from Ontiva and convert it into MP4

As you undoubtedly know, YouTube is a fantastic repository for video. It’s great for streaming everything from cooking and music videos to how-to clips that show you how to solve various problems. And it can be useful to convert YouTube to MP4 videos.

Unfortunately, downloading your favorite YouTube videos is not straightforward. You need a separate tool like Ontiva. With this free online tool, you can download videos, and even edit and crop them. Some YouTube videos are in WebM format, and Ontiva can convert them to MP4 just like Evano did.

To download and convert YouTube videos, just follow these steps:

  • Go to the Ontiva website. Copy and paste the YouTube video link into the indicated field. (If you want to edit the video, use the range slider to select the particular segment of the video you want to download.) Then click Start Now.
  • On the next page, Ontiva offers various audio and video formats. Select the format you prefer. For example, to download as an MP4, go to the Video tab, choose the desired format, then click Download.

How to convert the WebM file into audio (MP3 format)

If all you want to do is create an audio file, you can use an even simpler tool to download YouTube videos (including those in WebM format) as MP3s.

To do so just follow these simple steps.

  • Go to MPdownload.to.
  • Paste the YouTube URL into the input box. Then click Search.
  • You will see a variety of options regarding the quality of the MP3 file the tool can produce (and the resulting file sizes). Select the option you want, then click the Download button.

Conclusion

These days, we’re all watching videos for work and play. They help us solve problems and provide hours of entertainment.

If you want to share your videos with other people, you should make sure you deliver them in a file format they can enjoy. Sending a video they can’t watch is frustrating. So before sending, choose a video format that everyone can use. People will not download software or use plugins simply to watch a video you send in an unfamiliar format. You should send them videos in a format usable by most people.

As mentioned, the WebM file format cannot meet such criteria. You need a good video converter to convert WebM videos into MP4 files — a file format that can be used on any media player and can run on the widest possible array of devices. (You can share such MP4s on social media platforms like Facebook, Twitter and Instagram, too.)

Evano converter makes it easy to convert video files into the format you desire. It’s easy to use, fast and free. You can upgrade your experience by paying for some advanced features, but for most people, the free version works fine.

If you need to convert a WebM video to MP4 (or some other file format), Evano gets the job done.

CAN’T SELECT FILES?

You can convert WEBM Learn more about WEBM

Your files are automatically deleted from our servers after 24 hours.

ADD FILES Add folder

ADD FOLDER Cancel

CANCEL ALL Download

How to convert WEBM to MP4?

About the formats

Extension webm
Category Video file formats
Developed by Google
Mime type video/webm

Description

Extension mp4
Category Video file formats
Developed by MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group)
Mime type video/mp4

Description

Common questions about converting WEBM to MP4

Can I convert WEBM to MP4 in bulk?

Can I convert a WEBM file to MP4, if its size is 1 GB?

Is converting WEBMs to MP4 safe with MConverter?

How long does it take to convert WEBM to MP4?

This site attempted to download multiple files automatically

and enable Downloads

If you get MConverter Premium, it will show up here.

MANAGE PAYMENTS LOG OUT

Otherwise, your Premium benefits may stop working.

MANAGE AND COMPLETE PAYMENT

DOWNLOAD ALL AS ZIP

To access files you have converted in the past during previous sessions,
you need to:

Fetching your file in order to share it with other apps.

Upgrade to Premium

And get more features

  • Convert more than 2 files simultaneously
  • Unlimited daily conversions
    • Instead of just 10 files per day
  • Maximum size: 1 GB per file
    • Instead of just 200 MB
  • Money back guarantee Learn more about refunds
    • If you are unsatisfied with the service, you can contact us within the first 24 hours of your purchase to receive a full refund.
  • No ads
  • Keep your original file names
  • Use it on all of your devices
  • Access your conversion history
  • Priority customer support

How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

Recently i bought a spalding never flat basketball. The company promise buyers that the ball will remain inflated for one year. However, how do i inflate the ball after one year since the hole is capped. Should i remove the cap during then or is it that the ball can only be used for one year.

7 Answers

Carefully take off the cap with pliers and fill the ball with air like you would with a normal basketball. Be careful not to damage the cap so that the ball will stay inflated longer

I was just given a never flat yesterday, and it feels great the grip is right on. I’m torn between returning it thought because it bounces just high enough, like I would like to add maybe a half# to a # to get that extra bounce. As it says on the ball DO NOT REMOVE CAP FOR AIR VALVE UNDER ONE YEAR OR THIS WILL VOID WARRANTY.

That kind of ꜱᴜcκs but I think I can deal with the pressure given. One advantage is you can use this ball and if it does lose pressure under a year, go pick out your new ball hence the year warranty.

In answer to your ? Yes the ball will last more than one year as far as being able to inflate it. There is a removable cap over the air valve that should have better instructions in my opinion, but from what I gathered pliers should remove this cap no problem then inflate and replace the cap.

If you use the ball all the time year around just like any other ball the exterior is going to go to sh*t just like any other ball.

If you don’t mind pumping a ball up once in a while go with a $15 to $20 ball It will perform just as good. I’m going to pick up a rawlings ten “x” panel I’ve heard really good thing about this ball $15. I could buy two of those for the same price as the spalding never flat and still have some change.

This Site Might Help You.

How to inflate Spalding Never Flat Basketball after one year.?

Recently i bought a spalding never flat basketball. The company promise buyers that the ball will remain inflated for one year. However, how do i inflate the ball after one year since the hole is capped. Should i remove the cap during then or is it that the ball can only be used for one year.

Never Flat Basketball

You want to play basketball buy a basket ball, no need shelling out for a fancy one. Just buy a 3 buck pump or something.

  • Nov 20, 2009
  • #1
  • lauk4kicks

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #2
  • airjordan jb23

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #3
  • daprescription

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #4
  • lauk4kicks

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #5
  • durden7

    more like SPALDING NEVER USE.

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #6
  • 2g00d4u

    • Nov 20, 2009
  • #7
  • mt3130

    theres a plug in the the little gap where you would stick the pump needle to inflate the ball. just remove that and go to work on it like any old ball.

    you arent supposed to pump it for the first year or something like that or it will void the warranty.

    if you want to get it as good as new, go to a place that inflates car tires with nitrogen and have them inflate your basketball. thats all thats inside thatmakes it so special.

    Table of Contents

    Can you pump up a Spalding Never Flat basketball?

    Pump the ball as normal. If the warranty has expired or doesn’t apply, you can pump a Neverflat basketball just like any other basketball. Despite the name, all Neverflat balls will need pumping occasionally, especially after the first year. If you’re not sure how to inflate a basketball, keep reading.

    How does a Never Flat basketball work?

    How does it work? Spalding NeverFlat uses NitroFlate, which is the brand’s proprietary air mixture that makes use of large air molecules, which physically cannot leak out of the ball’s outer pores, and smaller molecules, which are trapped from escaping by the larger ones.

    Is Spalding a good basketball brand?

    Spalding is known for their high-quality, durable basketballs, and their Zi/O model is no exception. It’s perfect for basketball lovers who want a durable, versatile ball that can go from blacktop games to indoor courts.

    How do I keep my basketball from going flat?

    Store your basketball in a warm area. The cooler the temperature, the more the air inside the basketball will expand and leak. Don’t kick the basketball. Unlike soccer balls, basketballs aren’t meant to be kicked and can deflate much more quickly when they are exposed to extra force.

    Do basketballs come inflated?

    Although I understand your situation, I would advise AGAINST deflating the ball. Basketballs are not made (or meant) to be deflated. You always take a risk deflating and then flattening a ball. It does come semi-inflated meaning that has enough air to bounce in a store but not enough to play.

    Why is my ball pump not working?

    Inspect the barrel or the rubber pump of the tool. If the hand pump has a metal barrel, check for dents, holes or cracks. If it has a rubber pump, inspect it for punctures, cracks and deterioration due to time or exposure to the elements. In either case, if damage is noted, try to take the pump apart.

    Are Neverflat balls good?

    4.0 out of 5 stars Great ball! It’s what you expect from a spalding basketball. It’s a very good ball indoor and outdoor. I always use it outdoors and it works great.

    Is Wilson or Spalding better?

    When it comes to how the ball feels in the hand; how slippery or firm it is, then the Spalding basketball is the better choice. The reason why the Spalding outshines Wilson in terms of feel is the premium genuine leather used in its construction.

    Which is better Spalding or molten?

    While both basketballs impressed us with their quality and feel, the Spalding Zi/O Excel performed better than the Molten FIBA GM7X in most aspects. As indoor/outdoor basketballs, both would be great as outdoor only basketballs, and at the end of the day, you can’t go wrong with purchasing either basketball.

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    Share This Story

    Comment bubble icon

    KNOW YOUR TECH breaks down the scientific technology used in your favorite sneakers and activewear. Let’s demystify your next purchase: today’s technology is Spalding NeverFlat. Whether you play the majority of your hoops indoors or outdoors, you’re bound to run into a common and annoying problem: deflating basketballs. If this happens and you’re not equipped with a pump or a spare ball, there’s no other choice but to cut the game short. With Spalding NeverFlat technology, this becomes a much rarer occurrence and will allow you to play at your peak level for longer.

    What is it? Spalding NeverFlat technology is designed to provide greater air retention than traditional basketballs. Fully meeting all performance specifications, the Spalding NeverFlat ball uses a treatment known as NitroFlate, which allows it to hold air ten times longer than standard inflated gear.

    How does it work? Spalding NeverFlat uses NitroFlate, which is the brand’s proprietary air mixture that makes use of large air molecules, which physically cannot leak out of the ball’s outer pores, and smaller molecules, which are trapped from escaping by the larger ones. Although the technology doesn’t literally never go flat, it’s been found to retain the same level of rebound over a minimum of a one year period, as opposed to traditional basketballs which will lose over 50% of their air in the same amount of time.

    Bottom line: A ball with a bad bounce or rebound can affect an entire game, so consider Spalding NeverFlat for its long-lasting air retention.

    RELATED: Spalding Upgrades with the Cytek Basketball Shoe
    RELATED:
    SPOTTED: Mario Chalmers Sparks Heat in the Spalding Threat PE

    Hoops Fiend Rating: Spalding Never Flat Basketball

    Bounce: 4/5

    Grip: 4/5

    Feel: 3.5/5

    Durability: 4/5

    Value: 3/5

    Overall: 3.7/5

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    Main Features

    • Uses a proprietary membrane and NitroFlate technology that keeps air in and prevents leaking
    • The Never Flat basketball comes inflated and is guaranteed to stay inflated based on Spalding’s warranty
    • Has a cap placed over the air valve that helps to prevent leaking and keep dirt out
    • Made of a quality composite leather that is advertised as being “tacky” and “grippy”

    Most basketballs have similar characteristics features. However, there are some basketballs that are truly unique in their design and technology. One such basketball is the Wilson Wave, which we have reviewed previously here. Today, we want to have a closer look at another basketball featuring advanced technology, the Spalding Never Flat Basketball. Our expectation before receiving the Never Flat was that it would perform and feel identical to the Spalding Zi/O Basketball, but this was not the case.

    When we received the Never Flat it came already fully inflated in the packaging. There is a warning that states basically if you attempt to inflate the basketball within a year you will void the warranty. Assuming the basketball will stay inflated for that year we don’t see this being a significant problem as the basketball was inflated to a useable level.

    The Spalding Never Flat has a cover that is more tacky than the comparably slick cover of the Spalding Zi/O, while still having a durable feel. The bounce of this basketball was also superior to the Spalding Zi/O, but could not compete with one of our highest rated basketballs, the Spalding Replica Game Ball. Speaking of bounce, you will see from our test in our review video that the Spalding Never Flat basketball has a low pitched, heavy sound when being dribbled compared to other basketballs. While not our preference, we do not feel like this is a huge issue. Still, this may bother you and if so you should consider buying a different basketball.

    The price of this basketball is on the high side, usually hovering around the $40 price point. This is significantly more expensive than the Spalding Replica Game Ball and slightly less expensive than the Molten GM7. Overall, we would say that this is an average to below average basketball in terms of its value.

    • The composite leather cover is durable and has a tacky grip
    • This basketball bounces quite consistently and should perform well
    • If you are a basketball traditionalist and like traditional channel designs it will suite your preferences
    • You can put away your air pumps as they will not be needed often with the Never Flat
    • The Value of this basketball is not great with the high price point
    • Makes a noticeable low pitched sound when being dribbled

    If you do not like having to inflate your basketball on a semi-regular basis then the Spalding Never Flat Basketball would be a good choice for you. Personally, having to inflate the basketball is not a big priority for us as we are more concerned about the actual performance of the basketball. We were pleasantly surprised with how much better this basketball performs compared to the Spalding Zi/O and Spalding All Conference. However, we would recommend anybody looking for a Spalding Basketball to get the Spalding Replica Game Basketball instead as its performance is far superior to any other Spalding ball currently on the market.

    What is Spalding Never Flat?

    W hat is it? Spalding NeverFlat technology is designed to provide greater air retention than traditional basketballs. Fully meeting all performance specifications, the Spalding NeverFlat ball uses a treatment known as NitroFlate, which allows it to hold air ten times longer than standard inflated gear.

    Which basketball is better molten or Spalding?

    While both basketballs impressed us with their quality and feel, the Spalding Zi/O Excel performed better than the Molten FIBA GM7X in most aspects. As indoor/outdoor basketballs, both would be great as outdoor only basketballs, and at the end of the day, you can’t go wrong with purchasing either basketball.

    Is Spalding TF 500 outdoor?

    This ball is both indoor and outdoor.

    Can you pump up a Spalding Never Flat basketball?

    Pump the ball as normal. If the warranty has expired or doesn’t apply, you can pump a Neverflat basketball just like any other basketball. Despite the name, all Neverflat balls will need pumping occasionally, especially after the first year. If you’re not sure how to inflate a basketball, keep reading.

    Is Spalding a good basketball brand?

    Spalding is known for their high-quality, durable basketballs, and their Zi/O model is no exception. It’s perfect for basketball lovers who want a durable, versatile ball that can go from blacktop games to indoor courts.

    Who invented Neverflat?

    Don Sandusky
    Don Sandusky, a 10-year veteran of Du Pont’s apparel business and one of the creators behind the technology that became the Spalding Neverflat basketball, is taking his five-year old, Newark, DE company into the sports equipment business.

    Can you use outdoor basketball indoors?

    You can take an outdoor ball into an indoor court, though. You might not get the highest quality shots and ball control, but your ball will withstand the court just fine.

    Is composite leather good for outdoors?

    Composite leather is also used in indoor basketballs so outdoor basketballs using this type of material will feel much more comfortable for experienced basketball players. It’s the perfect choice if you play on high-quality outdoor courts and don’t want to compromise on your ball handling and shooting touch.

    Is TF 500 good for outdoor?

    The TF-500 offers an exclusive composite leather cover and wide grooves for great game characteristics of excellent grip and control. Whilst suitable for outdoor use it make a superb indoor training or school/college game ball.

    How do you inflate a Spalding Never Flat?

    Push up the basketball cap. Look for a round, black rubber cap on the basketball. Push the cap up enough that you can bend it aside, exposing the hole underneath. This will release air and break the one-year warranty on Neverflat basketballs.

    How do I keep my basketball from going flat?

    Store your basketball in a warm area. The cooler the temperature, the more the air inside the basketball will expand and leak. Don’t kick the basketball. Unlike soccer balls, basketballs aren’t meant to be kicked and can deflate much more quickly when they are exposed to extra force.

    Table of Contents

    How do you deflate a basketball without popping it?

    How do you deflate a basketball without a needle? If you don’t have access to a pump and needle, you can use a pen, paper clip, sewing needle, or anything long enough to get into the valve.

    Does cold air deflate a basketball?

    As the temperature decreases, gas molecules contract and move around more slowly with less energy. Thus, lower pressure leads to a lower bounce of the ball. That’s why a fully-inflated ball might appear deflated if the temperature drops dramatically.

    Can you remove air from a ball?

    If you only want a little air to come out of the ball, simply squeeze the ball with your hands until the desired amount of air remains in the ball. Pull the needle slowly out of the ball. When you remove the needle, the ball will stop deflating, but be careful not to pull the valve out of the ball as well.

    Is it normal for a basketball to deflate?

    Basketballs tend to lose a little air when left unused and through normal use over time. In order to bounce properly, basketballs need the right amount of air pressure. To get the most out of your basketball it is very important to keep it at its recommended air pressure, and to inflate and deflate it correctly.

    What’s the best way to deflate a basketball?

    How do you pump a Spalding neverflat basketball?

    Look for a round, black rubber cap on the basketball. Push the cap up enough that you can bend it aside, exposing the hole underneath. This will release air and break the one-year warranty on Neverflat basketballs. Insert the needle into the hole. Screw the needle in until it is firmly attached.

    Can a neverflat basketball deflate in cold weather?

    Warm up the ball. The Neverflat ball won’t lose as much air as a normal basketball, but it can still deflate a little in cold weather. If you stored it outside or in a cold garage and it feels flat, dribble it until it warms up. Take advantage of the warranty for balls under a year old.

    Is there a warranty on a Spalding basketball?

    Spalding basketballs are covered by a limited warranty for one year after purchase. Pumping a Neverflat ball will break the warranty. If the ball went flat and there’s no obvious sign of damage, tell Spalding about the defect to request a refund or replacement.

    Look for a round, black rubber cap on the basketball. Push the cap up enough that you can bend it aside, exposing the hole underneath. This will release air and break the one-year warranty on Neverflat basketballs. Insert the needle into the hole. Screw the needle in until it is firmly attached.

    If you only want a little air to come out of the ball, simply squeeze the ball with your hands until the desired amount of air remains in the ball. Pull the needle slowly out of the ball. When you remove the needle, the ball will stop deflating, but be careful not to pull the valve out of the ball as well.

    Warm up the ball. The Neverflat ball won’t lose as much air as a normal basketball, but it can still deflate a little in cold weather. If you stored it outside or in a cold garage and it feels flat, dribble it until it warms up. Take advantage of the warranty for balls under a year old.

    Is the Spalding never flat basketball still good?

    The first one simply wore out after much use and never needing air. The NeverFlat technology is great. Looking forward to this second one lasting as long as the first, about 4+ years. We get these for our dog, she loves to chase it. Good exercise. And she can’t destroy it right away. Eventually she does bite it and it does go flat.

    Free Store Pickup

    \n Description\n \n

    \n Built for a year’s worth of play without the need for a pump, this indoor-outdoor basketball hits the sweet spot of durability and soft grip. It’s injected with NitroFlate molecules, which help it stay inflated for longer than your average ball.Play harder, longer with the Spalding NBA Hexagrip NeverFlat Basketball. This officially licensed NBA size 7 basketball’s premium composite cover is made with Never Flat air retention technology that stays inflated 10 times longer than any other ball! Great for players of all skill levels, this professional quality ball features a unique Hexagon pebbling pattern and wide black channeling for superior grip and handling

  • Official NBA size and weight: Size 7, 29.5\”
  • Soft Grip Technology cover;
  • Neverflat air retention technology stays inflated for at least one year;
  • Deep channel design for superior control;
  • Shipped inflated and game-ready. Designed for indoor and outdoor play \n

    \n Additional Information\n

      \n \n \n
    • SKN: 414530 \n \n \n \n
    • ID: C56404D4 \n \n \n \n
    • UPC: 29321737921 \n \n \n \n
    • Brand: Spalding \n \n \n \n
    • Part Of Assortment: No \n \n \n \n
    • MFR Number: 73792CA \n \n \n \n
    • Ship to Quebec: Yes \n \n \n \n
    • Maximum Order Quantity: 5 \n \n \n \n \n
    • Toysrus Recommended Age: 7 – 12 years \n \n \n \n \n
    • Registerable: No \n \n \n \n
    • Language: Bilingual \n \n \n \n
    • Gift Wrap: Gift wrap is not available for this item \n \n \n

    \n

    \n Assembly\n

      \n \n \n
    • Item Height: 9.6 inches \n \n \n \n
    • Item Length: 9.3 inches \n \n \n \n
    • Item Weight: 1.65 lbs \n \n \n \n
    • Item Width: 8.9 inches \n \n \n

    \n

    \n \n \n \n \n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n\n

    This item is not in stock at #, please select another location

    This item is not in stock at #, please select another location

    Currently Credit Card is the only form of payment supported for pre-orders.

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    To pick this item, click the green REDEEM CODE button. You will then Apply your 16 digit GiftYouPick™ code and add your shipping info.

    • Official NBA size and weight: Size 7, 29.5″
    • Soft Grip Technology cover
    • Neverflat air retention technology stays inflated for at least 1 year
    • Deep channel design for superior control
    • Shipped inflated and game-ready
    • Designed for indoor and outdoor play

    Weight: 1.61 pounds

    Dimensions: 10 x 10 x 10 inches

    Description: Built for the everyday hustle and a year’s worth of play without the need for a pump, the Spalding NBA SGT Neverflat Hexagrip Basketball hits the sweet spot of durability and soft grip. It’s injected with NitroFlate molecules, which help it stay inflated for longer than your average ball. Also, the protective Neverflat valve cap help to prevent air seepage and debris from getting into the valve. The deep channels help for a good release and rotation on your shots, and the hexagon pebbling pattern help to provide a great grip in your hands. Lay it up, and lay it down, with the Spalding NBA SGT Neverflat Hexagrip Basketball.

    • Gift Card + ™
    • Turkey/Grocery Certs
    • GiftYouPick™
    • Grocery Stores
    • FAQ
    • Contact

    © 2022. All rights reserved. 1-800-872-3214 [email protected] Federal Tax Identification Number(EIN) 47-3731094
    Privacy Policy | Terms and Conditions

    Corporate Traditions™ is not affiliated with the brands listed on this website. The merchants represented are not sponsors of the rewards or otherwise affiliated with Corporate Traditions™. The logos and other identifying marks attached are trademarks of and owned by each represented company and/or its affiliates. Please visit each company’s website for additional terms and conditions.

    Sold by Focus Camera

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    Hover Over to Zoom In

    Highlights

    • Care Instructions: Other
    • Color: Brown
    • Material: Plastic

    Product Details

    Spalding NBA Neverflat Premium Indoor/Outdoor Basketball (29.5in.),Pump (12in.)

    Premium composite cover provides soft gripNeverflat technology for air pressure retentionInjected with NitroFlate moleculesCalibrated to match NBA game ball specifications Indoor as well as outdoor use Rule the game with this exclusive bundle from Lifestyle by Focus comprising the Spalding NBA Neverflat Indoor/Outdoor Basketball and a 12in. Dual Action Inflation Pump. The pump allows for easy and quick inflation.Spalding NBA Neverflat Indoor or Outdoor Basketball (29.5in.)Keep the game going with the NeverFlat 29.5in. Premium Indoor/Outdoor Basketball from Spalding! Featuring a breakthrough technology that allows it to maintain its air pressure 10 times longer than a normal basketball, this ball provides any player with the right amount of court time. Designed for terrific performance and longevity, the 29.5in. NeverFlat basketball has a circumference of and is further calibrated to match the Official NBA Game Ball bounce specification.Neverflat TechnologyThis basketball features premium composite cover that handles the rough conditions of the outdoor court while providing a soft grip for control. In addition, this ball features Neverflat technology that maintains air pressure retention and is injected with NitroFlate molecules which keep it inflated for longer than your average ball. The NeverFlat technology uses a valve cap which eliminates leaks and keeps dirt out. This ball is also versatile, adapting to both indoor and outdoor use. Whether you are shooting hoops at a court in the park or practicing in the gym after school, bring the Spalding NeverFlat Basketball along and you will never have to worry about airing up!Spalding Dual Action Basketball Pump (12in.)The Spalding 12in. Dual Action Basketball Pump features a lightweight plastic construction and is the quickest pump and with each push and pull, it fills the ball with air. This dual action pump is designed for athletes who want every second to count.

    • Spalding NBA Neverflat Indoor/Outdoor Basketball and a 12″ Dual Action Inflation Pump
    • The NeverFlat 29.5in. Premium Indoor/Outdoor Basketball from Spalding
    • Neverflat technology that maintains air pressure retention, injected with NitroFlate molecules which keep it inflated
    • This basketball features premium composite cover that handles the rough conditions of the outdoor court

    Spalding NBA Neverflat Premium Indoor/Outdoor Basketball (29.5in.),Pump (12in.) Brown

    • Care Instructions: Other
    • Fabric/Material: Plastic
    • Dimensions: 14.8 inches (H) x 10.4 inches (W) x 14.8 inches (L)
    • Weight: 45.0 ounces
    • Made in United States

    Table of Contents

    What causes a basketball to bounce higher?

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    Basketballs bounce because of the pressurized air inside of them, gravity and Newton’s Laws of Motion. When you dribble a basketball, your hand and gravity both push the ball towards the ground (Law #1). The more air pressure inside, the harder it will push on the sides of the ball and the more bounce you’ll get.

    What happens if a basketball has too much air?

    NBA rules dictate that basketballs should be inflated to between 7.5 and 8.5 pounds per square inch. If the basketball is inflated below this level, it won’t bounce correctly. If it is inflated above this level, the basketball could be damaged or burst.

    Why does my basketball keep deflating?

    Basketballs tend to lose a little air when left unused and through normal use over time. In order to bounce properly, basketballs need the right amount of air pressure. When a ball is manufactured and inflated, it is drop-tested to determine its ideal air pressure which is then printed on the ball near the hole.

    How do you get air out of a basketball?

    If you only want a little air to come out of the ball, simply squeeze the ball with your hands until the desired amount of air remains in the ball. Pull the needle slowly out of the ball. When you remove the needle, the ball will stop deflating, but be careful not to pull the valve out of the ball as well.

    What PSI should a basketball be?

    between 7.5 and 8.5 psi

    Can you pump a basketball at a gas station?

    Gas stations and the bike shops usually have air pumps available. If you know how to use them correctly with your ball needle, then yes, you can inflate your basketball at the gas station or the bike shop. You need to be careful not to over-pump the ball as it might explode.

    How do you get air out of a basketball without a needle?

    It is always best to use a pump and needle when possible. Occasionally, in emergency situations, it is okay to use a pen or paper clip to deflate your ball if you don’t have access to a pump and needle. For this method you will need a pen or paper clip, water or coconut oil, and a friend.

    Do you have to deflate a basketball when flying?

    Balls in carry-on Balls that you inflate, like soccer balls, basketballs, footballs, etc., should also be deflated in order to take them in your carry-on luggage. A fully inflated ball at sea level could burst in the plane due to the pressure, so let the air out before you even check in for your flight.

    How do you deflate a basketball with an air pump?

    Point the inflation needle perpendicularly to the valve. Gently push it in the valve and push until you hear the air coming out with a hissing sound. Help the deflation process by squeezing your ball gently. When you reach the desired deflation size, gently and slowly pull out the inflation needle.

    How long does it take for a basketball to deflate?

    How long does it take for a basketball to deflate? There is no generalized answer to the question. Because every ball has its own capacity. Some could hold up the air in them for 3-4 months, while some deflate after 5-6 months.

    How do you deflate a Never Flat basketball?

    Push up the basketball cap. Look for a round, black rubber cap on the basketball. Push the cap up enough that you can bend it aside, exposing the hole underneath. This will release air and break the one-year warranty on Neverflat basketballs.

    Can you put air in a Never Flat basketball?

    If you do not like having to inflate your basketball on a semi-regular basis then the Spalding Never Flat Basketball would be a good choice for you. Personally, having to inflate the basketball is not a big priority for us as we are more concerned about the actual performance of the basketball.

    How does a Never Flat basketball work?

    How does it work? Spalding NeverFlat uses NitroFlate, which is the brand’s proprietary air mixture that makes use of large air molecules, which physically cannot leak out of the ball’s outer pores, and smaller molecules, which are trapped from escaping by the larger ones.

    How do you know if a basketball is inflated?

    How Do I know If My Basketball is Properly Inflated?

    1. Hold the basketball at about the level of your face.
    2. Drop the basketball.
    3. Let the ball bounce.
    4. If the ball is properly inflated, it should bounce back up to around your waist level.

    Are Neverflat basketballs good?

    It has a nice bounce to it and seems to be a pretty great basketball all around. It seems to be a little heavier, but it really isn’t too much of a difference to affect anything performance wise, in my opinion. I definitely recommend Spalding’s Neverflat Premium Composite Basketball.

    What is the best basketball?

    List of the Best Basketballs

    • Wilson Evolution Basketball (link)
    • Spalding TF-1000 Basketball (link)
    • Wilson Solution Basketball (link)
    • The Rock Basketball (link)
    • Molten GG7X Basketball (link)
    • Spalding Official NBA Basketball (link)
    • Baden Elite Basketball (link)
    • Spalding Never Flat Basketball (link)

    Is Spalding better than Wilson?

    If you are looking for a basketball that is durable and affordable, then the Wilson Basketball is better. If you are looking for a basketball that has better feel, then the Spalding basketball is better. You can have the best basketball and ball like the pros with the Spalding NBA Official Game Ball.

    What is the most expensive basketball shoe in the world?

    The 10 Most Expensive Basketball Shoes in the World

    • 1) Air Jordan I. Top of the list is a pair of Air Jordan I shoes that sold for a whopping $25,000.
    • 2) Air Mag.
    • 3) Air Jordan V.
    • 4) Air Jordan I.
    • 5) Air Jordan VI.
    • 6) Air Jordan III.
    • 7) Adidas KB8 Selection.
    • 8) Air Jordan XI.

    How much does a good basketball cost?

    A good basketball will cost anywhere between $29.99 and $69.99. Some affordable basketballs are the Spalding NBA Zi/O, Wilson NCAA Replica Basketball, Spalding TF-5000, and the Wilson Evolution Basketball.

    What balls do NBA players use?

    The Spalding NBA Official Game Basketball has been the official game ball of the NBA since 1983. This indoor basketball features a full-grain leather cover that provides exceptional feel and touch, setting the standard for ultimate performance and playability.

    What should I look for when buying a basketball?

    You need to be able to shoot, ball and palm the ball without having to strain. Switch to a smaller basketball if you find that the ball is a hindrance to your ball handling skills.

    How to pump a spalding neverflat basketball

    Table of Contents

    How long is the warranty offered on Spalding basketball systems that are 48 and above?

    one year
    All Inflated Products (excluding NEVER FLAT) All Spalding inflated products (excluding NEVER FLAT & INFUSION product, which have separate warranties as noted below) are guaranteed for one year.

    Do lifetime basketball hoops have a lifetime warranty?

    L ifetime Products For instance, on Lifetime’s high-end basketball hoop warranty, the rim is warrantied against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship for the lifetime of the hoop. However, if the rim is damaged due to dunking, the warranty is void. These warranties are only good for residential use.

    What is the warranty on Lifetime coolers?

    What is the warranty on Lifetime coolers? Lifetime coolers have a 5 Years limited warranty. This is a warranty covers any manufacturing defects on the cooler. So if you damage the cooler yourself by accident or if the cooler is attacked by a bear, this is not covered under warranty.

    What happened to Huffy Sports?

    In 2004, Huffy sold its Huffy Sports division to Russell Corporation. Huffy Sports manufactured sporting goods, including the Hydra-Rib basketball systems used by the NBA.

    What is the warranty on a Spalding neverflat basketball?

    Spalding basketballs are covered by a limited warranty for one year after purchase. Pumping a Neverflat ball will break the warranty. If the ball went flat and there’s no obvious sign of damage, tell Spalding about the defect to request a refund or replacement. There are two ways to do this:

    What is Spalding’s warranty policy?

    If the equipment is defective within the terms of this warranty, Spalding will repair or replace defective parts at no cost to the purchaser (subject to any shipping and labor charges detailed herein, which shall be the purchaser’s responsibility).

    What happens if Spalding no longer sells the same product?

    If Spalding no longer sells the same or equivalent product, Spalding will credit the customer an amount equal to the last purchase price.

    Do you have to pump a neverflat basketball?

    The manufacturer of Neverflat balls guarantees one year without going flat. If you’re still under that warranty, you might get a free replacement. After the warranty is up, you’ll need to pump the ball just like you would any other basketball. Warm up the ball.

    target spalding basketball Suscripciones

    • planters dry roasted peanuts Suscripción 1 Año $ 48.00 / año durante 1 año
    • rashawn slater salary Suscripción 6 meses $ 24.00 / 6 meses durante 6 meses
    • department of labor union complaints Suscripción Mensual $ 4.00 / mes

    target spalding basketball Lo más Leido

    target spalding basketball

    Integración se enfoca en apoyar el desarrollo de instrumentos de precio y mercados de.

    target spalding basketball

    La fintech chilena logró a través de la certificación CarbonNeutral→ Company, certificarse mediante créditos.

    target spalding basketball

    Expertos detrás de los productos y tecnologías de Samsung Electronic responden algunas preguntas sobre.

    target spalding basketball Lo Último

    target spalding basketball

    target spalding basketball

    La entidad financiera española comercializará en exclusiva los 200 millones con los que se.

    target spalding basketball

    Tras su llegada oficial a España este pasado otoño, Juice Technology, multinacional líder en.

    Somos un medio de noticias que aborda todo el acontecer energético. Online news media that addresses all the energy events. [email protected]

    Ministros del Segundo Tribunal Ambiental visitan zonas en proceso de
    demanda por reparación ambiental

    #Quintero #Chile #ministros #SegundoTribunalAmbiental #comunas #Quintero
    #Puchuncaví #recorrieron #puntosdeinterés #conciliación #judicatura #demanda

    Alianza de Airlife y Cabify para sanitizar los autos de sus asociados

    #Santiago #Chile #salud #conductores #pasajeros #Cabify #aplicación #movilidad #alianza
    #AirlifeChile #sanitización #sociosconductores #RegiónMetropolitana
    #descontaminación #vehículos

    Kobus Partners y Banca March lanzan el primer fondo español de deuda ‘unitranche’

    #Madrid #España #KobusPartners #BancaMarch #fondoespañol #especializado #deuda #unitranche #financiar #construcción #energíasrenovables #zonaeuro #PenínsulaIbérica

    Table of Contents

    How do you put air in a Never Flat basketball?

    Push up the basketball cap. Look for a round, black rubber cap on the basketball. Push the cap up enough that you can bend it aside, exposing the hole underneath. This will release air and break the one-year warranty on Neverflat basketballs.

    What is Nitro flate?

    Spalding NeverFlat uses NitroFlate, which is the brand’s proprietary air mixture that makes use of large air molecules, which physically cannot leak out of the ball’s outer pores, and smaller molecules, which are trapped from escaping by the larger ones.

    How do you fix a flat basketball?

    Ball Doctor seals leaks and punctures in all valve inflatable balls without a bladder. Simply insert the syringe tip into the ball valve and depress the plunger. Then pump up the air pressure, bounce the ball vigorously for several minutes, and its ready to play!

    Is composite leather basketball good for outdoor?

    Pros: Composite leather balls are cheaper, don’t wear out as fast and feel soft and broken-in when new. They’re good for indoor and outdoor play—although driveways will get to them after a while—and don’t dry out as much as their leather brothers.

    Why do balls get flat?

    When soccer balls and basketballs are left out in the cold they go flat. When the gas in a balloon is cold, the molecules have less energy, move more slowly and don’t collide as hard or as often with the side of the ball. The ball decreases slightly in size and it becomes flat.

    Does fix a flat work on footballs?

    Most bladders dry out and crack over time and “fix-a-flat” does not work. (Footballs injected with “bicycle fix-a-flat” are not accepted without prior approval and will be charged double the fee for the flat football repair.)

    How long do composite leather basketballs last?

    For example, if you played with an outdoor basketball made of rubber every day for 1-3 hours, it would last about 3-6 months before the grip is gone. An outdoor basketball made of composite leather lasts longer than an outdoor basketball made out of rubber.

    Can a tire be filled with air and nitrogen?

    Similarly, the design may increase the life of the tire. Nitrogen is always compatible with air. Typically, as you fill your tire from a compressor, 78% is still nitrogen. The remaining 21 % is oxygen. There is a minute percent that is miscellaneous gases.

    Is it OK to mix air and nitrogen?

    The nitrogen filling stations are not readily available. If any, you have to endure the queue, especially on a busy day. In case you fill the same tire with regular air, it may dilute the nitrogen. Consequently, it will drain the benefits.

    What happens to nitrogen atoms when they split?

    Once split, the nitrogen atoms quickly bond to oxygen in the atmosphere, forming nitrogen dioxide. Along with the lightning in the cloud are cloud droplets and raindrops. Nitrogen dioxide dissolves in water, creating nitric acid, which forms nitrates.

    How does Lightning add nitrogen to the soil?

    Yes, lightning adds nitrogen to soil, but not directly. The atmosphere’s composition is 78 percent nitrogen, but the nitrogen in the air is not available to our bodies.

  • How to play hand and foot

    Hand and Foot is a variation of Canasta that became popular in the United States in the 1950s.

    • Comments(0)
    • Share –>
    • Game Type: Other
    • Age: 13+
    • Players: 5+

    The Pack

    Hand and Foot uses five to six decks of cards with Jokers.

    Object of the Game

    Be the first to get rid of all your cards, ‘hand’ first, and then ‘foot’.

    Card Values/Scoring

    Jokers (Wild Cards) – 50 points

    Deuces (Wild Cards) – 20 Points

    Aces – 20 Points

    Eights through Kings – 10 Points

    Threes through Sevens – 5 Points

    Rounds

    A game consists of four rounds. Each round has a minimum meld requirement that increases with each round.

    You must put down cards whose individual face values add up to at least the minimum requirement before your team is “in the game”. You can put down several melds at once to achieve this. If you are picking up the pile, you can meld additional cards from you hand along with the top discard and the two that match to help you make up the minimum count, including wild cards. However, you cannot count any of the other six cards you are pick up towards the minimum.

    Round 1, cards points must total at least 50 to start play
    Round 2, cards points must total at least 90 to start play
    Round 3, cards points must total at least 120 to start play
    Round 4, cards points must total at least 150 to start play

    The Deal

    Shuffle the decks of cards thoroughly. Each player is dealt 11 cards. This first set of 11 cards is called a ‘Hand’. The ‘Hand’ can be picked up and examined by each player.

    Each player is then dealt a second set of 11 cards. This second set of dealt cards is called the ‘Foot’, which is played when the ‘Hand’ has been used up, and is kept face-down.

    Now, each player has two sets of cards, one set that he has seen, and another set that is kept face-down.

    The remainder of the cards are to be kept in the center of the table and are called the ‘Stock’.

    The topmost card of the Stock pile is turned face-up as a discard pile. If it turns out to be a red Three, a Deuce, or a Joker, then this card goes back into the pile, and another card is drawn for the top.

    The Play

    The objective is to get rid of all the cards from your ‘Hand’, and then ‘Foot’ by melding them. A Meld is a set of 3 – 7 cards of the same rank, that are placed face-up. It cannot have less than three cards or more than seven cards. A Meld belongs to the team, and not any individual player. After a Meld of three or more cards starts, more cards can be added to it until there are seven cards in the pile. It then becomes a ‘Closed Pile’ or ‘Book’. Deuces and Jokers can be used in melds along with at least four natural cards, but not the red and black Threes.

    Types of Melds

    ‘Clean’ or natural meld – Seven real cards of the same rank (‘Red’ Book).

    ‘Dirty’ or wild meld – A minimum of four cards of the same rank, and at least one wild card. Example: 5 Nines and two Wild Cards (‘Black’ Book).

    The melds should not consist of all Wild Cards. When a Book is complete, it is identified as Red (Clean) or Black (Dirty). The Black must have a Wild Card turned to show that it is a Dirty Meld.

    Red Book – All natural cards, no Wild cards (500 Points).

    Black Books – At least 4 natural cards and Wild Cards (300 Points).

    Each player picks up their ‘hand’, and play begins with the player on the left side of the dealer. The player is supposed to draw two cards from the Stock on each turn, and then discard one card on each turn. If a red Three is drawn, it is put down immediately and replaced with a new card from the deck.

    The player also has the option of ‘picking up the pile’, which means that he can take the top seven cards from the discard pile. However, ensure that the top of the discard pile is not a black Three. The player must hold two cards of the same rank as the top card. These three cards (the two he is holding and the top discard) must be immediately laid out, possibly along with the other cards he is holding. Also keep in mind that, the player’s team must have melded till then, or he is melding while picking up the pile.

    Only the top card of the discard pile can be used towards the points needed for melding: the 6 other cards cannot be used towards points needed for the meld.

    To meld, all the cards that are played must equal the number of points that are required for that round. Wild cards have bonus points.

    If the player chooses to pick up the pile, they must make a meld of the top card of the pile. As you go on making melds, the number of cards in ‘Hand’ keep reducing, and you then eventually go on to the ‘Foot’. You need to announce that you are playing your ‘Foot’, and then continue playing. If you happen to lay out all other cards except one, then you can discard it. This marks the end of your turn.

    When the ‘Book’ of seven is completed, the player has to place them in a single stack, with the topmost card being a Red for ‘Clean’ and Black for ‘Dirty’.

    To ‘Go Out’, the player must get a Clean and Dirty, and get completely rid of the cards. Players must discard the final card, and not ‘simply run out of cards’.

    How to Keep Score

    When a player goes out, it marks the end of the round. The players are then supposed to calculate their scores, recording the ‘meld count’ first. The players then calculate their second point count, which is calculated from each card’s value that is played. If any card is left in the player’s hand, it will count against the score for that round.

    The person or team with the highest score wins.

    How to play hand and foot

    Hand and Foot is a fun rummy style card game. Score points by melding similar ranking cards. Find the video tutorial and written explanation for how to play hand and foot below. Be sure to keep the hand and foot quick guide close while playing for a quick reference to help you learn as you play.

    Hand and Foot Tutorial


    “>

    Needed

    Five 52 card decks; Ten Jokers; Four Players (divided into two teams)

    All five decks are shuffled together. Each player is dealt a total of 22 cards, one card at a time. The first 11 cards dealt to each player is known as the player’s hand stack and are kept together. The next 11 cards dealt to each player is known as the player’s foot stack. These cards are kept together and remain face down to begin the game.

    The remaining deck is placed in the middle. The top card of the deck is flipped up to start a discard pile.

    Objective

    The object of the game is to score the most points. Points are scored by melding cards of the same rank together as a team. Three cards of the same rank are needed to start a meld, and a meld can have up to seven total cards.

    The jokers and the 2s are wild cards. These cards can be added to any meld, but a meld can never have more wild cards than cards of the actual number. There are two types of melds, clean and dirty. A clean meld is a meld of seven cards all in the same rank. A dirty meld is a meld of seven cards where some of the cards are wild cards.

    Once a player melds all the cards from their hand, they will pick up their foot cards. Once a player melds all the cards in their foot, the round is over. The game is played over four rounds.

    Game Play

    The player left of the dealer is first to play. If a player is dealt a red 3, or if a red three is ever drawn, it is immediately played on the table, and a card is drawn to replace it.

    The Draw

    Each turn begins with a draw. A player is allowed to draw from the discard pile if the top card is used to create a meld.

    If the top card of the discard pile is successfully melded, the player will draw the top seven cards in the discard pile. If a player cannot draw the top discard, the player must draw two cards from the deck. The player can also choose to draw the top two cards of the deck, even if it is possible to draw the top discard.

    Melding

    After the draw, a player can choose to create melds, if possible. Three cards of similar rank are needed to start a meld. Wildcards (jokers and 2s) can be used in any meld, but a meld can never have more wildcards than natural cards.

    Each card has a value:

    Jokers = 50 points

    Aces/2s = 20 points

    Kings to 8s = 10 points

    7s to 4s = 5 points

    Black 3s = 5 points

    In the first round, the first melds laid by a team need to have a combined card value of 50 points when starting the game. In round two, the first melds must be at least 90 points. In round 3, the first melds must be at least 120 points. And in round 4, the first melds must be at least 150 points.

    When a meld has seven cards, it is complete. If the meld has no wild cards, it is called a clean meld. Melds are stacked to the side with a red card on top for a clean meld. If the completed meld includes one or more wild cards, it is called a dirty meld. A completed dirty meld is stacked to the side with a black card on top.

    The Discard

    A player’s turn ends with a discard. If a black 3 is discarded, the discard pile is blocked. A player cannot draw from a blocked pile.

    Going Out

    A player can only end the round by getting rid of all cards if their team has a completed clean meld, a completed dirty meld, and their teammate has picked up their foot stack.

    A player is allowed to ask their partner if they should go out. Depending on what is left in the partner’s hand, the partner may want the round to continue.

    Scoring

    There are four areas where points are scored.

    Card Values: Using the card values from above, teams score the points from the cards in their melds (including completed melds), minus the points from the cards left in their hands.

    Completed melds: A team gets 500 points for each clean meld and 300 points for each dirty melds. If the completed meld does not include a wild card, it is considered a clean meld. If the completed meld does include a wild card, it is considered a dirty meld.

    Red 3s: A team gets 100 points for each red 3.

    Going Out: The team of the player who ended the round gets 100 points.

    Winning

    The team with the most points after four rounds wins the game!

    Rules

    If the opponent’s end a round before getting to your foot, and there is a red three in your foot, your team loses 100 points for it.

    If the first card flipped up is a red 3 or a wild card, the card is buried into the draw deck, and the next top card is flipped up.

    A team cannot have two incomplete melds in the same rank.

    A meld cannot have more wildcards than natural cards at any time.

    Once a wildcard is melded, it cannot be moved.

    A meld cannot have more than seven cards.

    Black 3s cannot be melded and are only used to block the discard pile.

    How to play Hand & Foot Remastered – Team Play

    There are no agreed upon “official” rules of Hand & Foot but we believe these instructions are the most fun and competitive version.

    Note: If you are still playing Hand & Foot with old fashioned playing cards these rules can be applied but 2s will replace the 20 point wild cards and Jokers will replace the 50 point wild cards.

    The Basics:

    4 – 8 Players – With teams of 2 players or 3 – 6 players with teams of 3 players.

    Play with one more deck of cards than the number of players. The backs of each deck are color coded to help you quickly adjust the number of decks you are playing with.

    Each game consists of 4 rounds with the highest score winning.

    Place one or two draw piles on the table with a discard pile between them with one card face up. The first card on the discard pile cannot be a wild or a three.

    The Goal:

    The object of the game is to accumulate the most points by laying down melds with the goal of creating books.

    What are melds and books?

    A meld is 3+ cards of the same value from 4 through Ace. A meld of seven cards or more is a book. Books cannot be made with 3’s.

    Clean book – Seven identical cards is a clean book and is worth 700 points. For example, seven 8’s is a clean book.

    Dirty book – A book that includes up to two wild cards is a dirty book and is worth 300 points. For example, a book of five 8s and two wilds is a dirty book while four 8s and three wilds would not be valid.

    Wild book – A book of 7 wild cards. Cannot be used in a team’s inital meld.

    The Game Play:

    Tip: Shuffle thoroughly! Shuffling with the cards face up and spread out on the table will help you spot groups of like cards to be separated. Poor shuffling creates a poor game experience.

    To begin form teams and ensure teammates are not sitting next to each other.

    Each player then takes a small portion of a draw pile and, without looking at them, counts out two stacks of 11 cards each. A 100-point bonus is awarded if a player picks up exactly 22 cards. The first stack is the player’s “Hand”. The second stack is passed to the player on the left and becomes that player’s “Foot”.

    Each player begins with their Hand and sets their Foot aside face down in a location visible to the other players.

    To determine the order of play each player selects one card from the draw pile. The player with the highest card, Aces are high, begins the first round with playing continuing clock-wise.

    On each turn the player must pick up two cards and discard one. The only exception is to “go out” (end the round) you must play your final card.

    The top three cards in the discard pile can be picked up as long the top card can immediately be played with two natural cards from your hand.

    A player cannot pick from the discard pile if he/she has already picked a card from one of the draw piles.

    Red threes are worth 100 points and should be immediately laid down, face-up at the top of the individual’s play area and replaced with a card from the draw pile.

    Black threes are -100 points and should be discarded before all other cards.

    Your team can “be in the game” by laying cards down when one teammate holds a meld, or melds, that total at least the minimum point values as shown below. All team members will now play on these melds and hand additional melds to the opening player.

    First round: 60 points

    Second round: 90 points

    Third round: 120 points

    Fourth round: 150 points

    If you lay your cards down to meld and discover you do not have enough points you must pick them up and it will cost your team 500 points.

    When laying down cards you must leave them visible to your opponents. Melds are placed in front of you, in ascending order, in a vertical row clearly showing how many cards of each value you have.

    Clean books are neatly piled and placed horizontally above the melds next to the red threes, if any.

    Dirty books must have a wild card placed vertically on top.

    Natural cards can be added to complete books, wild cards cannot. This will not increase the value of the book but it will add the point value of the natural card.

    A player must play their hand completely before they can play their foot. If, to clear their hand, a player must discard, they must wait until their next turn to start playing their foot. If no discard is needed to clear their hand, they can immediately begin playing their foot.

    The first team to have one team member go out by playing all cards from their hand and foot, plus having the team complete at least two Clean books and at least three Dirty books, receives a 100-point bonus for ending the round.

    Once a player goes out all cards left in the other players’ hand and/or foot are to be counted as negative points. Cards they have laid on the table are positive points.

    The scoring:

    At the end of the round the score keeper will first record the points each player has in books and red threes.

    Example: 3 red Threes and one clean book is worth 1000 points.

    Example: 1 red Three and one dirty book is worth 400 points.

    All red Threes are then discarded.

    The individual card values are now added, if they were laid down, or subtracted if they are still in the player’s hand and/or foot.

    Tip: Match, and discard, a positive card equal to any negative cards. With the remaining positive cards count out piles of 100 points each. This is the fastest and easiest way to calculate scores.

    Provide your total to the scorekeeper and start helping to shuffle for the next round.

    The review:

    To Lay Down (Meld):

    Round 1: 60 Points
    Round 2: 90 Points
    Round 3: 120 Points
    Round 4: 150 Points

    Red 3: 100 Points (If laid down, -100 if caught in your hand)
    Black 3: (-100) Points
    4 – 7: 5 Points
    8 – K: 10 Points
    Ace: 20 Points
    Wild: 20 or 50 Points

    Clean: 700 Points
    Dirty: 300 Point
    Wild: 1,500 Points

    Picking 22 Cards: 100 Points
    Going Out: 100 Points

    How to play Hand & Foot Remastered – Individual Play

    There are no agreed upon “official” rules of Hand & Foot but we believe these instructions are the most fun and competitive version.

    Note: If you are still playing Hand & Foot with old fashioned playing cards these rules can be applied but 2s will replace the 20 point wild cards and Jokers will replace the 50 point wild cards.

    The Basics:

    3 – 8 Players – You can play with 2 but it would be a really lame game.

    Play with one more deck of cards than the number of players. The backs of each deck are color coded to help you quickly adjust the number of decks you are playing with.

    Each game consists of 4 rounds with the highest score winning.

    Place one or two draw piles on the table with a discard pile between them with one card face up. The first card on the discard pile cannot be a wild or a three.

    The Goal:

    The object of the game is to accumulate the most points by laying down melds with the goal of creating books.

    What are melds and books?

    A meld is 3+ cards of the same value from 4 through Ace. A meld of seven cards or more is a book. Books cannot be made with 3’s and no completely wild books are allowed.

    A meld or book must always have one more natural card than wild. Two wilds and two Aces, or two wilds and one Ace, would not be legal melds.

    A meld cannot be played on by other players.

    Clean book – Seven identical cards is a clean book and is worth 700 points. For example, seven 8’s is a clean book.

    Dirty book – A book that includes wild cards is a dirty book and is worth 300 points. For example, a book of four 8s and three wilds is a dirty book.

    The Game Play:

    Tip: Shuffle thoroughly! Shuffling with the cards face up and spread out on the table will help you spot groups of like cards to be separated. Poor shuffling creates a poor game experience.

    To begin, each player takes a small portion of a draw pile and, without looking at them, counts out two stacks of 11 cards each. A 100-point bonus is awarded if a player picks up exactly 22 cards. The first stack is the player’s “Hand”. The second stack is passed to the player on the left and becomes that player’s “Foot”.

    Each player begins with their Hand and sets their Foot aside face down in a location visible to the other players.

    To determine the order of play each player selects one card from the draw pile. The player with the highest card, Aces are high, begins the first round with playing continuing clock-wise.

    On each turn the player must pick up two cards and MUST discard one. You cannot “go out” (end the round) without discarding. You can continue to play with no cards in your hand but cannot go out without completing your books.

    The first card in the discard pile can be picked up as long that card does not complete a book. For example, if you have 6 eights laid down you cannot pick from the discard pile if the top card is an eight.

    A player cannot pick from the discard pile if he/she has already picked a card from one of the draw piles.

    Red threes are worth 100 points and should be immediately laid down, face-up at the top of the individual’s play area and replaced with a card from the draw pile.

    Black threes are -100 points and should be discarded before all other cards.

    You can begin laying cards down when you hold a meld, or melds, that total at least the minimum point values as shown below.

    First round: 60 points

    Second round: 90 points

    Third round: 120 points

    Fourth round: 150 points

    Tip: Laying down too early only helps your opponents, hold your cards until your hand hurts. Of course, waiting too long to lay down could leave you a lot of negative points at the end of the round.

    Total point value is determined by the card’s individual value which is the smaller number printed in the top left corner and shown below.

    Four thru seven: 5 points

    Eight thru King: 10 points

    Wild: 20 or 50 points

    A meld of 7 eights, for example, would be worth 70 points when laying down

    The additional value of complete books or red threes cannot be included when laying down for the first time each round.

    When laying down cards you must leave them visible to your opponents.

    Melds are placed in front of you, in ascending order, in a vertical row clearly showing how many cards of each value you have.

    Clean books are neatly piled and placed horizontally above the melds next to the red threes, if any.

    Dirty books must have a wild card placed vertically on top.

    Natural cards can be added to complete books, wild cards cannot. This will not increase the value of the book but it will add the point value of the natural card.

    A player must play their hand completely before they can play their foot. If, to clear their hand, a player must discard, they must wait until their next turn to start playing their foot. If no discard is needed to clear their hand, they can immediately begin playing their foot.

    Tip: There is no obligation to announce that you are playing your foot. It is up to the other players to be aware of the game.

    The first player to go out by laying down or discarding all cards from their hand and foot, plus completing at least one Clean book and at least one Dirty book, receives a 100-point bonus for ending the round. Players can accumulate more than one Clean and/or Dirty books each round.

    Once a player goes out all cards left in the other players’ hand and/or foot are to be counted as negative points. Cards they have laid on the table are positive points.

    Tip: Going out doesn’t guarantee that you have the most points, you may want to wait. But, if your main rival is not yet playing their foot drop the hammer and lay all those negative points on them.

    The scoring:

    At the end of the round the score keeper will first record the points each player has in books and red threes.

    Example: 3 red Threes and one clean book is worth 1000 points.

    Example: 1 red Three and one dirty book is worth 400 points.

    All red Threes are then discarded.

    The individual card values are now added, if they were laid down, or subtracted if they are still in the player’s hand and/or foot.

    Tip: Match, and discard, a positive card equal to any negative cards. With the remaining positive cards count out piles of 100 points each. This is the fastest and easiest way to calculate scores.

    Provide your total to the scorekeeper and start helping to shuffle for the next round.

    The review:

    To Lay Down (Meld):

    Round 1: 60 Points
    Round 2: 90 Points
    Round 3: 120 Points
    Round 4: 150 Points

    Red 3: 100 Points (If laid down, -100 if caught in your hand)
    Black 3: (-100) Points
    4 – 7: 5 Points
    8 – K: 10 Points
    Ace: 20 Points
    Wild: 20 or 50 Points

    Clean: 700 Points
    Dirty: 300

    Picking 22 Cards: 100 Points
    Going Out: 100 Points

    Hand and Foot Card Game Rules and How to Play

    We all love a good card game, and Rummy-type games are a common favorite. There are plenty of games that fall under this category, and one of our favorites is Hand and Foot. In this piece, we’ll be looking at the Hand and Foot card game rules, and you need to know.

    What is The Hand and Foot Game?

    Hand and Foot is a variant of Canasta, one of the main card games in the Rummy family. Its exact origins are unknown, but we know that game was quite popular in the 80s, which is likely when it originated.

    Making it quite young compared to some other Canasta variants. Hand and Foot is also a team-based game best played with two teams of two players. However, the game can be played with more than two teams. The game is, in many ways, a simpler version of classic Canasta.

    But it does have its unique gameplay elements as well. Hand and Foot can seem quite intimidating to new players as they’ll often be many cards in play. But it’s simpler than you might think. Players can play canasta with up to 7 decks of cards.

    However, you can use less. Under standard Hand and Foot card game rules, the number of decks used should be one more than the number of players. However, many players do use the maximum number of decks as well.

    What You’ll Need?

    To play Hand and Foot, you’ll need playing cards and plenty of them. Buying in bulk is probably your best option, like these playing cards. You might also want to get some Hand and Foot score sheets.

    These will likely be especially beneficial to new players. Who may otherwise struggle to keep track of their score as the game goes on. An automatic card shuffler isn’t essential but could be helpful due to all the cards in play. We’ll talk a little more about how the cards are used below.

    Cards

    Unlike some games, all the playing cards are used under Hand and Foot card game rules. Cards will have different values, though. If you follow traditional Hand and Foot card game rules, then both Jokers and 2s are wild. This makes them especially valuable during gameplay. This nicely brings us to the next section.

    How to Play Hand and Foot: Rules and Gameplay

    The Aim of The Game

    The game aims to be the first team to use all their cards. But you’ll also need to be sure you have scored the most points as well. While Hand and Foot is designed to be a simpler version of Canasta, it could still be a little intimidating for new players. But our in-depth guide below will help you learn everything you need to know.

    Setting Up

    The first thing you should do is select a dealer. To do this, every player should be given a single card from a pre-shuffled deck. The player with the highest card wins and becomes the dealer. If there is a draw, then repeat the process till a dealer is chosen.

    The dealer will then shuffle the deck and cut it. Teams sit facing each other, and each player should be given two sets of 11 cards. The first 11 cards are the hand, and the second is the foot.

    Any remaining cards are then placed face down in the center. The top card should then be turned up and sat across from the pile. This will form the base of the discard pile. The other pile of cards is called the stock.

    Under traditional Hand and Foot card game rules, the role of the dealer should swap each round. Normally it will be the player to the current dealer’s right, who takes up the role.

    Playing Hand and Foot

    Players should work together to build up melds. Matching cards make melds of the same rank; there must be 3 cards in a meld. The game begins in a clockwise motion, the player nearest to the dealer should go first.

    A player can take a card from either the stock or discard pile. However, cards from the discard pile can only be taken if used in a meld. You must also take all the cards from the discard pile, so it might be best to stick with the stockpile at first.

    Players can also only use the 11 cards from their hand pile. After they have all been used, you can move across to your foot pile. Building up melds should be your priority, but you need to build two books to win the Hand and Foot card game.

    Books are sets of 7 cards. A red book is made up of non-wild cards. While a black book can have wild cards in it. Once the books are made, a matching colored card should be placed on top of them.

    As we said earlier, Jokers and 2s are wild, which means they can be used in books and melds without needing to match. After you have made a red book and a black book and used all your cards, you can go out.

    This will end the round, and then all that’s left is totally up the remaining scores. Any team with cards remaining will have their total deducted from their score. To help make scoring easier, use our chart below.

    Also, be sure to remember that the team that goes out first receives a 100 point bonus. You can play Hand and Foot with just one round or multiple.

    Card/s Value
    Red Book 500 points
    Black Book 300 points
    Jokers 50 points
    2s 20 points
    Aces 20 points
    8, 9, 10s 10 points
    4, 5, 6, 7s 5 points
    Jacks, Queens, Kings 10 points
    Black 3s 5 points
    Red 3s 100 points

    The Wild Book Addition

    The opinion is split on whether the wild book is part of standard Hand and Foot card game rules. Some players say it is, while others don’t. A wild book is a book of 7 cards made out of just wild cards.

    This will score players 2500 points but isn’t needed to go out. If a team starts to make one but doesn’t finish, then 2500 points will be deducted from their score. Because the wild book’s value is so high, some players don’t include it.

    Hand and Foot – A Fun Twist on Canasta

    Hand and Foot is the perfect card game for a more relaxed gaming session. Games like Canasta are fun but have a learning curve to them. But Hand and Foot is a great way to learn the fundamentals and an enjoyable game in its own right. If you’re looking for a new card game to try, why not give it a go?

    About Bar Games 101

    Bar Games 101 is a website devoted to helping you learn about the best games to play with your friends. We review the games, research the rules, and uncover helpful tips and strategies.

    Hand and Foot is a much easier variation of the rummy-type card game Canasta. It requires 5-6 decks of standard playing cards and is suitable for ages 12 and up. Hand and Foot can be played by 2-6 people. It is most commonly played in teams of two.

    Like regular Canasta, the objective of Hand and Foot is to make the most melds and to be the first team to go out.

    Set Up

    To set up a game of Hand and Foot, players need to form a circle around a stable playing area. Teammates should sit across from each other.

    Before gameplay can begin, every player draws a card from the deck. Make sure it’s shuffled well. Whomever draws the highest card gets the honor of being the first dealer. If you have a tie, simply redraw.

    The dealer then shuffles the decks and passes out twenty-two cards, one by one, clockwise to each player. The first eleven cards are known as the Hand and the second set is known as the Foot.

    Players should separate the Hand and Foot into two decks. The remaining cards form the stock. The top card of the stock is then flipped over and placed to the side to form the discard pile.

    Melds

    Points are awarded when teams meld their cards. A meld is a group cards of the same ranks. Melds must begin with at least three cards. After a meld is formed, teammates can build upon their own melds until a meld has seven cards.

    Wildcards

    In Hand and Foot, 2s and Jokers are wildcards. They can be used in place of any card. A meld must, however, have more natural cards than wildcards.

    Card Values

    In Hand and Foot:

    • 2s are worth 20 points
    • Jokers are worth 50 points
    • Black 3s are worth -100 points
    • Red 3s are worth -300 points
    • Aces are worth 20 points
    • 4s, 5s, 6s, 7s, 8s, and 9s are worth 5 points
    • 10s, Jacks, Queens, and Kings are worth 10 points

    How to Play Hand and Foot

    Gameplay moves clockwise, starting with the player left of the dealer. Players start with their Hand deck and then, after they’ve played all of their cards, begin playing their Foot deck.

    To begin their turn, a player first draws two cards from the stock pile. The first meld of any round must at least be worth 60 points.

    After a player makes all of the moves they can, they end their turn by discarding one card.

    Books

    When a meld reaches seven cards, it is called a book and it is flipped over to prevent more cards from being built on it. A clean book is a book made of all naturals. A Dirty book is a book made with naturals and wildcards. A Wild book is a book made of all Wildcards.

    Going Out

    Once a team has completed a Clean and Dirty book and once one of the players in that team has played all of the cards in their Foot, they may go out and end the round.

    Scoring

    To calculate a team’s score, subtract the point value of un-melded cards to the point value of melded cards

    The value of completed books are as follows:

    • A Clean book is worth 500 points.
    • A Dirty book is worth 300 points.
    • A Wild book is worth 2,500 points.

    If a team starts to and then fails to complete a Wild book before the round ends, 2,500 points are subtracted from their score.

    The team that goes out is also awarded 100 points.

    Resources:

    Want to learn more about how to play Hand and Foot, check out some of these resources:

    About Bar Games 101

    Bar Games 101 is a website devoted to helping you learn about the best games to play with your friends. We review the games, research the rules, and uncover helpful tips and strategies.

    The best Hand & Foot Canasta

    Web2mil.com

    Designed for iPad

      • 4.3 • 3.2K Ratings
      • Free
      • Offers In-App Purchases

    Screenshots

    Description

    Play the best Hand and Foot Canasta now!

    Hand and Foot is a Canasta variant involving three to six decks. The number of decks used is typically one more than the number of players. You need to pick up the Foot and have one natural and one mixed Canasta to go out. Red threes are valued 500 points, always against you.
    When you pick up the pile, you only pick up the top 7 cards. Play and enjoy the best Hand and Foot Canasta!

    What’s New

    This version fixes some crashes, an update is recommended.

    Ratings and Reviews

    Best old fashioned card game EVER!

    My friends and I used to stay up 1/2 the night playing Hand and Foot. The rules were a little different but we loved it. Over time they moved, I moved and we all lost touch or did see each other for years at a time. I really missed playing this game.

    One day I found it and have been addicted all over again. I play daily. The rules are very similar to the game we played. The graphics in this app are very good. I only have a couple of negative critiques: coins – 1. you are assuredly going to buy coins as you cannot earn them and watching adds only gives you 50 but the minimum buy in is 500, 2. Sometimes it feels like the draws are not random, like the algorithm is designed to make the hands go longer.

    All in all, this app has put an old favorite right on my tablet and I couldn’t be happier. Thank you.

    One Sided

    Love the game but hate the one sided thing that goes on all the time and that’s when you can get on to play, too many times when I try to log in I get the “log in through Facebook” then when you try that it just keeps circling then starts the process all over again, then it’s connection issues, you all have a lot of bugs to fix in this App, please make it fun to play. Thank you

    Terrible card randomization

    Overall the game is great except one huge issue – randomness of cards. The dealing of cards is obviously not being done in a manner that simulates an actual card deck. The result is that the majority of games are extremely one sided and stay that way the entire game. It is common to win games of four hands by several thousand points. I have personally been in a game where we won with close to 14,000 while the other team could only manage 4,000 – over four rounds! And that is not uncommon.

    Another complaint is pulling from the discard pile. Rather then giving the last 7 cards from the discard it gives the top card and 6 random cards from the discard. This mean that if you take from the discard you will always have a chance to get a hand full of red 3’s.

    One star but I still play it because I like the UI and if you pay attention and match with people with good win rates you will do well.

    App Privacy

    The developer, Web2mil.com , indicated that the app’s privacy practices may include handling of data as described below. For more information, see the developer’s privacy policy.

    Data Used to Track You

    The following data may be used to track you across apps and websites owned by other companies:

    Data Linked to You

    The following data may be collected and linked to your identity:

    Data Not Linked to You

    The following data may be collected but it is not linked to your identity:

    Privacy practices may vary, for example, based on the features you use or your age. Learn More

    How to play hand and foot

    Hand and Foot Card Game

    What is the Hand and Foot Card Game?

    Hand and Foot is a fun card game typically played in a rummy style. The game is closely related to the Canasta and Pennies From Heaven games and also seems to be a mix of Jack Change It and Solitaire. The hand and foot game involves the melding of cards but has no standard rules; therefore, there are several variations in rules that can accommodate many players.

    The most common version of this game is played in partnership between four players but can also be played by six players in two teams or more players. If you have never played this game before, and it sounds like an exciting game, you might as well include the game in your next game night must-plays. Don’t know how to play hand and foot? Fret Not! Take a quick peek into the gameplay and simple rules and pretend like you always knew how to play this fun card game.

    How do you play the Hand and Foot Game?

    Objective

    The object of the game is to get rid of all cards in hand. The players are dealt two sets of cards; the first set played is called the Hand, and the set played after is called Foot.

    Dealing

    The game is played using five to six decks of cards, including Jokers. The cards are shuffled, and one person takes the deck. The dealer deals 11 cards, face down, to each player, clockwise, until each player has a hand. The players can pick the hand and examine the cards. After that, each player is dealt the second set of 11 cards, face down, called the foot. Cards in the foot are played when all the cards in hand have been played.

    After all the cards are dealt, the players have two sets of cards, one set that they have seen – the hand, and the other set that is placed face-down – the foot.

    The remaining cards are placed at the center of the table in a stock pile. The top card of the stockpile is flipped face-up to form the discard pile. The card that forms a discard pile can be any card other than a Joker, a Three, and a Deuce. If any of these three cards are at the top of the stock pile, they are placed back into the pile, and another card is drawn to form the discard pile.

    Rounds

    A game includes four rounds with a minimum meld requirement increasing after every round. Before your team is in the game, you should put down the cards with individual face values whose sum is at least the minimum requirement. You can also put down more than one meld to achieve the minimum requirement.

    • In Round 1, the play begins when the card points total at least 50
    • In Round 2, the play begins when the card points total at least 90
    • In Round 3, the play begins when the card points total at least 120
    • In Round 4, the play begins when the card points total at least 150

    The Gameplay

    The turn begins with a draw, and each player can draw from the discard pile if the topmost card is used to create a meld. If the player successfully melds the top card of the discard pile, they draw the top seven cards in the discard pile. If the player fails, they must draw two cards from the stockpile.

    Melding

    The players attempt to meld cards and get rid of the cards first from the Hand and then the Foot. To meld the cards, you can form a set of 3-7 cards of the same rank and place them face-up. The meld must not have less than three or over seven cards. Moreover, a meld doesn’t belong to an individual but collectively belongs to a team. When the players form a meld of up to seven cards, it becomes a Book or a Closed Pile. You can also use Jokers and Deuces to form melds along with four natural cards, excluding the red and black 3s.

    Types of Melds:

    Natural or Clean Meld: A meld of seven cards of the same rank (red book) is called a clean or natural meld.

    Dirty or Wild Meld: A meld containing a minimum of four same rank cards and at least one wild card is called a dirty meld or a wild meld. For instance, five 9s and two wild cards (black book).

    Red Book: All the natural cards are red books that don’t include wild cards.

    Black Book: At least four natural cards and wild cards are called black books.

    Discard

    The turn ends with a discard by a player. The discard pile is blocked if a player discards a black 3, and no player can draw from the blocked pile.

    Going Out

    Any player can end the round by getting rid of all cards and after the team has made a clean meld, a dirty meld, and picked the foot stack. The player can ask the partner for permission to go out. Depending on what is in their hand, the partner can decide whether to let the player go out or continue the round.

    End Game

    The game ends in two circumstances – when a player successfully goes out or when the stockpile is over and the players don’t wish to draw cards from the discard pile. If a player doesn’t permit their team partner to go out, the player must-have two cards left after melding – one to continue playing with and one to discard.

    In the end, players evaluate their scores of books and melds, including any bonuses. The team with the highest points after four deals is declared the winner.

    Scoring

    The round ends after a player goes out and the score is then evaluated. The card values in the game of hand and foot are as follows:

    • Wild card books made from jokers and 2s carry 1500 points
    • Red books carry 500 points
    • Black books carry 300 points
    • Jokers (wild cards) are worth 50 points
    • Aces are worth 20 points
    • Deuces (wild cards) are worth 20 points
    • Eights through Kings carry 10 points
    • Fours through Sevens carry 5 points
    • Black Threes carry 5 points
    • Red Threes carry 100 points
    • Going out is worth 100 points

    The points from the team’s remaining cards in hand are deducted from the points of the cards played by the team to arrive at the score.

    Hand and Foot Card Game Rules

    • A team must not have two incomplete melds of the same rank.
    • A meld should have more natural cards than wildcards at any time.
    • A wildcard cannot be moved once melded.
    • A meld should have a minimum of three and not more than seven cards.
    • Black 3s are used to block the discard pile; therefore, they cannot be melded.
    • If the opponent team ends the round before your team picks the foot stack and your foot includes a red three, your team will lose 100 points.
    • If the first card turned face up in the draw pile is a wild card or red 3, that card is placed back into the pile, and the next card is flipped.

    Is hand and foot the same as Canasta?

    Hand and foot is a card game variation of Canasta that got popular in the United States in the 1950s. The game is a simpler version of Canasta which is excellent for beginners.

    How to play hand and foot

    Check out this fun twist on hopscotch! Turn a classic favorite into a new game that develops concentration and coordination in a laugh out loud hopscotch game guaranteed to start the giggles.

    You will need print outs of left and right footprints and print outs of right and left hands, or if printouts aren’t available of course you can use squares with handprints and footprints traced on them from your own hands and feet!

    After you have your squares, (about the size of half sheet of paper for younger children and a full-size piece of paper for older children) and blue painters’ tape, duct tape, or packaging tape, you’re ready to get started.

    How to Play:

    • You can set up any number of rows, but each row should have 3 squares.
    • Each square will have one hand or foot (either drawn or a print out).
    • Place the sheets of paper out in rows of footprints and two hand prints using tape to stick them to the floor.
    • Mix up the order of hands and feet in each row. For little children keep two feet in each row. But if your kids are older, it’s fun to have one foot and two hands in the three-box row. Also, the younger the group of children the shorter you will need to make the game.
    • Players take turns jumping through the rows matching their hand and foot to the pictures in the row. Right hand on right hand picture, left foot on left foot picture, etc.

    Variations to up the giggling factor:

    • Make two playing courses and divide into teams to see which team finishes first.
    • Time each player to see who is the fastest.
    • Just like regular hopscotch use a beanbag or other small object to toss onto the course and skip that square on the way up the course.
    • If you have a surface outside, try making this course with sidewalk chalk.

    Links to Youtube videos of people playing this version of hopscotch: (online everyone seems to refer to this hopscotch game as “Gioco Coop” or “Hand and Foot Challenge Game”)

    Photos from one of our wonderful children’s librarians giving this Hand and Foot Hopscotch a try:

    How to play Blackjack & Game Rules: Hand and Foot is a popular variation from the rummy type game of Canasta. It can be described as a simpler, easier version of Canasta for beginners. Hand and Foot uses about 5 or 6 decks of standard playing cards and is played with 2-6 players. The objective of Hand and Foot is to be the first to

    OBJECTIVE OF HAND AND FOOT: Play the hand and foot while making the needed melds. NUMBER OF PLAYERS: 2-7 players NUMBER OF CARDS: Five 54-card decks (52 cards + 2 Jokers) RANK OF CARDS: A,K,Q,J,10,9,8,7,6,5,4,3,2 TYPE OF GAME: Canasta/Rummy AUDIENCE: Adult

    Hand & Foot is played with five or six decks of cards, including Jokers. The number of players typically determines how many cards are dealt in the hand and foot for each player: 2-player games: 15 cards each in the hand and foot. 3-player games: 13 cards each in the hand and foot. 4-player and 6-player games: 11 cards each in the hand and foot.

    2. The playersfoot” cards are placed faced down and set aside – players are not allowed to look at them until they have played all the cards in their hands. 3. Each player picks up their “handand play begins with the player on the left of the one who “dealt” the round. 4.

    Hand and Foot can be played by 2-6 people. It is most commonly played in teams of two. Like regular Canasta, the objective of Hand and Foot is to make the most melds and to be the first team to go out. Set Up. To set up a game of Hand and Foot, players need to form a circle around a stable playing area. Teammates should sit across from each other.

    Hand and Foot card games is played with 4 to 6 standard decks, and was ideally designed for 2 players but four to six players can also play it forming a team of two or three. Usually, number of decks is one more than the player but it is not standard.

    To play Hand and Foot, you’ll need 5 standard card decks with the jokers included. Shuffle all of the cards together and deal 11 cards to each player. These cards are referred to as the “hand,” and players should pick them up and look at them. Deal a second set of 11 cards to each player.

    Play online+ Add to favorites Remove from favorites. This is an implementation of the Canasta variant called Hand and Foot, in which players receive two sets of cards, played according to variations of standard Canasta rules, in which cards are played into melded sets. It supports from 3 to 7 players playing as individuals, with team play

    This first set of 11 cards is called a ‘Hand‘. The ‘Handcan be picked up and examined by each player. Each player is then dealt a second set of 11 cards. This second set of dealt cards is called the ‘Foot‘, which is played when the ‘Hand’ has been used up, and is kept face-down. Now, each player has two sets of cards, one set that he has …

    himself two hands of eleven cards. One hand becomes the “handand the other becomes the “foot”. For Round #1, one player is chosen to play first. For subsequent rounds, the privilege to play first rotates clockwise. For Round #1, each player passes one hand to the left. For Round #2, each player passes one hand to the right.

    Hand and Foot Tips and Strategies. Playing this card game can be a lot of fun, but it can also be surprisingly challenging to master. Thankfully, there are a number of helpful tips and strategies that you can employ whenever you play Hand and Foot to beat the odds and best the other players. Here are a few useful ones to remember for your next …

    What is Hand, Knee, and Foot card game? Similar to a card game named ‘Canasta’ the main difference is the number of cards that players need in order to start playing. Number of Players Required: 4 teams of pairs so about 8 players. Who Can Play It: All ages but may be tricky for younger players to grasp. Requires patience.

    If you lay out all but one card from your hand, you can discard it, ending your turn, announce that you are discarding in, pick up your foot and continue play with it on your next turn. Red threes in your foot should be laid out on the first turn in which you play your foot. Going Out. The play is ended by the first player who “goes out”.

    Triple Play, also known as Hand, Knee, and Foot, is a variation on Canasta for four players in partnerships. Like Hand and Foot, Triple Play gives each player extra hands of cards they must play through before going out. However, while Hand and Foot requires a player to play out their hand and one extra hand, in Triple Play, you have two extra …

    THE GIST OF THE GAME. The goal of Hand And Foot is to win the most points by creating “books” of cards. The player to get rid of their first cards is the winner of that round, with the game consisting of 4 rounds. Each player is dealt two sets of cards – the hand, which is played first, and the foot, which is played when the hand has been used up.

    Hand and Foot Canasta. Hand and Foot is a Canasta variant involving three to six decks. The number of decks used is typically one more than the number of players. You need to pick up the Foot and have one natural and one mixed Canasta to go out. Red threes are valued 500 points, always against you.

    A player can finish the deal if all the cards in their hand are placed somewhere face up on the table; either melded or on the discard pile. But first they need a Canasta . As said before, this title thing is when there are at least 7 cards in any of the sets that you or your partner has melded.

    Hand and Foot Rules

    Hand and Foot is a version of Canasta in which each player is dealt two sets of cards, known as the “hand” and the “foot”. Hand and Foot is closely related to Pennies From Heaven. The normal Canasta rules apply except for the following:

    The game is typically played by four players in two partnerships of two players each, although it can also be played with numbers of players ranging from two to eight, individually or in partnerships.

    Use one deck more than the number of players, so for a four-handed game you’d use five 52-card decks plus ten jokers (270 cards).

    Each player is dealt two separate thirteen-card hands. The first is called the “hand”, and the second is called the “foot”. Initially, each player plays from their “hand”, while leaving the “foot” face-down on the table. The “Foot” is not used until the “hand” is empty.

    When drawing from the stock, draw two cards at a time.

    The discard pile may only be taken by a player having a natural pair matching the upcard, or if they’re able to add the upcard to an existing meld.

    In Hand and Foot, a canasta (a meld of seven cards) is called a book, and will take one of the following forms:

    A red book contains only natural cards (no wildcards). When you make a red book, square up the cards into a pile and top it with a red card. (Some rules refer to this as a clean meld; it is analogous to a “natural canasta” in Canasta.)

    A black book contains a mixture of natural and wild cards. When you make a black book, square up the cards into a pile and top it with a black card. (Some rules refer to this as a dirty meld; it is analogous to a “mixed canasta” in Canasta.)

    A wild book contains only wild cards (deuces and jokers in any combination). When you make a wild book, square up the cards into a pile and top it with a wild card. (Some rules refer to this as a wild meld.)

    Wild cards may be melded as a set of their own (three or more).

    There is no distinction between jokers and twos; both are wild, and may be mixed freely.

    A mixed meld must always contain more natural than wild cards.

    A 7-card meld (a book) cannot be extended. (However, some versions of the rules do allow books larger than 7 cards.)

    A game is played as four hands. The initial meld requirements are based on the hand number, and not the team’s score:

    Hand Number Minimum Count
    1 50
    2 90
    3 120
    4 150

    If you meld the last card in you hand, you may pick up your foot and use it immediately. If you discard the last card of your hand, you may pick up you foot, but not use it until your next turn.

    To go out, a player must get rid of the last card from their foot, either by melding it or discarding it. However, a player cannot go out until his side has made at least one wild book. Also, a player cannot go out by melding black threes. Also, before going out, a player must as and receive permission from his partner.

    Each red book is worth 500 points, each black book is worth 300 points, and each wild book is worth 1500 points.

    Any black threes left in your hand incur a 5-point penalty each. Any red threes left in your hand incur a 500-point penalty each.

    To go out, a side must have completed, at a minimum, a red book, a black book, and a wild book.

    Game is 20000 points.

    Note: Hand and Foot is a game that hasn’t made it into most standardized rulebooks, and there is a good deal of variety in the rules available on the web. The preceding is a good consensus of the rules from various sources. Check out some of the following links for other versions of the game.

    Etsy предоставляет возможность прямой связи покупателей и продавцов со всего мира. Когда вы используете сервисы Etsy (мы будем называть etsy.com, Pattern by Etsy, наши мобильные приложения и другие сервисы нашими «Сервисами»), вы несете ответственность за соблюдение этой политики, независимо от вашего местоположения.

    Эта политика является частью наших Условий использования. Используя любые наши Сервисы, вы соглашаетесь с этой политикой и нашими Условиями использования.

    Как транснациональная компания из США, ведущая деятельность в других странах, Etsy должна соблюдать экономические санкции и торговые ограничения, включая введенные Управлением по контролю за иностранными активами (OFAC) Министерства финансов США. Это означает, что Etsy или кто-либо, пользующийся нашими Сервисами, не может участвовать в транзакциях, в которые вовлечены определенные люди, места или изделия из этих мест, указанные государственными органами, такими как OFAC, в дополнение к торговым санкциям, предусмотренным соответствующими законами и нормами.

    Эта политика действует в отношении всех, кто использует наши Сервисы, независимо от их местоположения. Решение об ознакомлении с такими ограничениями остается за вами.

    Например, эти ограничения в целом запрещают, кроме прочего, транзакции, в которых участвуют следующие стороны:

    1. определенные географические регионы, такие как Иран, Крым, Куба, Северная Корея, Сирия, Россия, Беларусь, Донецкая Народная Республика («ДНР»), Луганская Народная Республика («ЛНР»), а также любые физические или юридические лица, ведущие деятельность или находящиеся на этих территориях;
    2. физические или юридические лица, состоящие в санкционных списках, таких как Список лиц особых категорий и запрещенных лиц (SDN) или Список иностранных лиц, уклоняющихся от санкций (FSE) организации OFAC;
    3. граждане Кубы независимо от их местоположения, не имеющие гражданства или вида на жительство за пределами Кубы; и
    4. изделия, из Ирана, Крыма, Кубы и Северной Кореи, за исключением информационных материалов, таких как публикации, фильмы, постеры, грампластинки, фотографии, кассеты, компакт-диски и определенные произведения искусства.
    5. Любые товары, услуги и технологические решения из ЛНР и ДНР за исключением информационных материалов и сельскохозяйственной продукции, в том числе продуктов питания для людей, семян сельскохозяйственных культур или удобрений.
    6. Импорт в США следующей продукции российского происхождения: рыба, морепродукты, алмазы непромышленного назначения и любая другая продукция, согласно периодическим указаниям министра торговли США.
    7. Экспорт из США либо гражданами США предметов роскоши и любых других товаров, согласно указаниям министра торговли США, любому лицу, находящемуся в России или Беларуси. Список и определение «предметов роскоши» приведены в «Дополнение № 5 к Разделу 746», опубликованном Федеральным реестром США.
    8. Изделия, изготовленные за пределами США и попадающие под действие Закона о тарифах США и связанных с ним законов о запрещении принудительного труда.

    Для защиты нашего сообщества и торговой площадки Etsy предпринимает меры для соблюдения режимов санкций. Например, Etsy запрещает участникам пользоваться своими аккаунтами в определенных географических регионах. Если у нас есть основания полагать, что вы управляете своей аккаунтом из места, находящегося под санкциями, например, любого из перечисленных выше санкционных мест, или иным образом нарушаете какие-либо экономические санкции или торговые ограничения, мы можем приостановить или прекратить использование вами наших Сервисов. Как правило, участникам не разрешается выставлять на продажу, покупать или продавать изделия из регионов, находящихся под санкциями. Сюда входят изделия, появившиеся ранее санкций, поскольку у нас нет возможности проверить, были ли они вывезены из запрещенного места. Etsy оставляет за собой право обращаться к продавцам с запросом предоставить дополнительную информацию, раскрыть страну происхождения изделия на странице товара или предпринять другие шаги для соблюдения обязательств. Мы можем отключить товары или отменить транзакции, представляющие опасность нарушения этой политики.

    Кроме соблюдения требований OFAC и применимых местных законов, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что другие страны могут вводить собственные торговые ограничения и что определенные изделия могут не допускаться к экспорту или импорту согласно международным законам. Когда в транзакции участвуют лица из разных стран, вам следует изучить законы любых соответствующих стран.

    Наконец, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что сторонние платежные системы, например PayPal, могут самостоятельно отслеживать транзакции на предмет соблюдения санкционных требований и могут блокировать транзакции в рамках собственных программ, обеспечивающих соблюдение требований. Etsy не имеет власти или контроля над процедурами независимого принятия решения в таких системах.

    Экономические санкции и торговые ограничения могут применяться к порядку использования вами Сервисов и могут изменяться, поэтому участникам следует регулярно проверять источники информации о санкциях. За юридической консультацией обращайтесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

    Вы можете прочитать эту политику на вашем языке, но помните, что версия этого документа на английском имеет преимущественную силу в отношении использования вами сервисов Etsy. Язык можно изменить в настройках аккаунта.

    How to play hand and foot

    What is hand, foot, and mouth?

    Hand, foot, and mouth is a common childhood virus often caused by coxsackie virus which occurs in spring, summer, and fall. It most often affects infants and children up to 5 years of age. Adults can also develop hand, foot, and mouth disease also, but this happens much less frequently. The virus is spread through saliva, nasal secretions, and contact with stool. Children commonly pass it to each other through sharing drinks or utensils, sneezing or coughing close to others, and playing with toys touched by unclean hands.

    Signs and Symptoms

    A child will not develop symptoms of hand, foot, and mouth virus until around 3-6 days after they were exposed to the illness. The first symptoms to develop are similar to a common cold: fever, sore throat, and runny nose. After these symptoms begin, a rash with small blisters may appear in the mouth, on palms of the hands, on the soles of feet, and on the buttocks. The rash and blisters may appear in all these areas or in only 1 area. The rash is worst at the beginning and fades over 1 week.

    How is the diagnosis made?

    Your provider can tell if your child has hand, foot, and mouth disease from the description of symptoms and by evaluating the rash and mouth sores.

    Treatment

    A virus can be frustrating for parents because there is no treatment that helps to resolve the virus more quickly; however, there are treatments that can help alleviate symptoms until the virus resolves. Taking pain relievers such as Ibuprofen (Motrin or Advil) or acetaminophen is often very helpful for mouth discomfort. Sometimes we will recommend making a solution of Maalox liquid and Benadryl liquid that can be swished in the mouth to help with discomfort. You can call our office to determine if this is the best thing for your child. It is common to have a decreased appetite due to blisters in the mouth; this is okay if the child is continuing to drink clear liquids and is not dehydrated.

    Prevention

    It is difficult to prevent the spread of hand, foot, and mouth disease because those with the virus can pass the virus to others before they have developed the rash and for weeks or months after the virus began, through contact with stool. The best ways to prevent the spread of illness are to:

    • Make sure that tissues used to blow the nose are thrown directly into the trash and not left on a counter where germs can be picked up by others and disinfect counter surfaces often.
    • Encourage your child to cover his/her mouth with coughing or sneezing.
    • Wash hands after coughing, sneezing, blowing nose, using tissues, and changing diapers.
    • Clean toys that have been in contact with children’s saliva.
    • Remind children not to share food, drinks, utensils, or towel, and not to kiss or hug siblings during illness.

    Hand, foot, and mouth disease can occur in the same person more than once, so using the precautions each time your child is exposed to this illness is important. It is not transmitted to and from pets and other animals.

    Return to School

    Your child can return to school when he/she has been fever-free for 24 hours. It is also important to wait until they feel well enough to participate in class.

    How to play hand and foot

    Details

    Hand and Foot is a version of Canasta in which each player is dealt two sets of cards, known as the “hand” and the “foot”. It is a fun easy game for all ages. Join a partner and collect cards to create ‘books’ to wipe out your competition.

    Can’t find anyone to play with? Just sit and play with robots!

    Come see Hand and Foot Canasta at Brock games:
    http://maps.secondlife.com/secondlife/Bunyip/196/122/56

    Contents

    Features

    • Robots
    • Insta-HUD (Just sit and play)
    • Full Mesh

    Reviews (XX)

    DON’T BUY.

    Posted May 07, 2022 by Jada Akina 1 star

    This is just plan greedy! I understand that creators think that they have to have no copy items so if things are lost through SL (which is quite often), or god forbid you lose it in another unfortunate manner, you will be forced to buy another item. The creator has an awesome product, however, customer service is close to non-existence. BUT. for the price of THIS item or ANY item that cost THIS MUCH should be copyable !! No if’s, and’s or but’s !! So. with all of this being said, ask yourself. Can I afford to lose L$2,471 . I will NEVER buy another product with there name on it again. There are other ones out there that are No Copy, but cost a HECK of a lot less than this. DON’T WASTE YOUR MONEY.

    Love it. but

    Posted April 06, 2022 by ladyhawk45 1 star

    I lost the table while moving houses. It never came back to me and I only had it for 2 months. I asked the creator to redeliver it but I never took an answer back. I need a new table or my money back.

    Web Minesweeper – Play Free Minesweeper online

    Hand and Foot constitutes one of the more unusual variants to the typical rummy-style card game. According to Rummy-Games.com, this is a variation on Canasta in which each player receives two sets of cards, respectively known as the “hand” and the “foot”. Four people typically play as partners.

    Decks And Number Of Cards

    According to Rummy-Games.com, Hand and Foot requires one more deck than the number of players. For example, if you have a four-player game, then you must have five decks. Each player receives two sets of thirteen cards. The first set is called the hand, while the second set is referred to as the foot. The foot remains face down until the player empties the hand.

    Canasta

    According to Rummy-Games.com, a Canasta consists of a meld of seven cards of the same rank. In Hand and Foot, this is referred to as a “book,” and must occur in one of three combinations. A red book is a Canasta that completes the book with no wild cards (deuces or jacks). When you finish a red book, stack the cards face up, with a red card on top. A black book completes the book with wild cards included. When you get a black book, stack the cards face up, with a black card on top. A wild book contains only wild cards. In this case you would stack the cards face up with one of the wild cards on top.

    Playing The Foot

    You can pick up your foot if you either meld or discard the final card in your hand. If you meld that card, you may continue playing your foot on the same turn. If you discard the final card, then you begin playing the foot on your next hand.

    Scoring

    Each completed red book earns 500 points, while a black book earns 300 and a wild book awards 1,500. Once the hand ends, any black threes in your hand incur a five-point penalty. Red threes receive a 500-point penalty. To win the hand, a team must complete at least one red book, one black book and one wild book. The game ends when someone reaches 20,000 points.

    • Rummy-Games.com: Hand and Foot Rules
    • Rummy-Games.com: Canasta Rules

    Keith Owings began writing professionally in 2010, with his work published on various websites. He worked for several years in the financial and travel agency industries. He has trained and coached employees in the art of customer service. Owings has a Bachelor of Arts in psychology from Dallas Baptist University and holds several financial licenses.

    A card game to Begin now

    Enjoy for a lifetime!

    Are you looking for a new card game? Why not try something different and unique? American Hand-N-Foot is a card game with a new twist on an old favorite. It is fun for the entire family, and can be played as individual players, or as partners. Fun for all ages, from teens to 100’s. Our players say, “To play it is to love it!”

    How to play hand and foot

    About Us

    American Hand-N-Foot was created in 2005, by twin sisters Dot and Norma, from Minnesota. The twins and their husbands wintered in Arizona, and they played the original game of hand and foot with many friends. They noticed that the “rules” changed with every couple who played the game. Dot and Norma grew frustrated with this, and set out on a quest to create a game with new twists, new specialty cards, and a set of rules.

    When the twins returned to Minnesota, they enlisted the help of a few family members to help bring to life the new game that they envisioned. The family worked and played together for a couple of years to determine all of the fun twists, an original card design, and to bring American Hand-N-Foot to life. Now, more than a decade later, American Hand-N-Foot is being played from coast to coast across the United States and Canada.

    The game is called American Hand-N-Foot because Dot and Norma loved our country! They wanted to emphasize its heritage. This is why on our unique card set, you will see George Washington, the Statute of Liberty, and other great American icons.

    Our Game

    Our game consists of 6 specialty card decks of 56 Cards each which use “red hands” and “black feet.” The decks contain additional cards which allow changing a book from “black” to “red” and a card which provides an additional way to gain points. These features provide interest to make this a very unique, catchy, and habit- forming game.

    In addition to the 6 specialty card decks, our game includes 6 quality chips, a score sheet master (to use for copies), and an easy to follow instruction sheet. American Hand-N-Foot is packed solidly in a brown recycled kraft box with the game label affixed to it. To help stabilize the package during shipping we have added beige tissue sheets. Finally, the entire game is wrapped in a clear plastic bag which makes it an attractive gift set.

    How to play hand and foot

    The hand and card game is Canasta’s variation. This Game is played using 4 / 6 standard Card decks . The Game can be played among four to six players by forming teams. Every player plays with dealing with two sets of cards. The first card set is called the Hand, while the second set of cards called the Foot.

    Hand and Foot Card Game Rules for four players

    In a four-player game, Two teams are formed of 2 players each. The Game is played using five decks of 54 cards each, which contains jokers. So in total, there are 270 cards .

    One teammate deals the cards with 13 cards to each player. The first stack of cards is called Hand . Then Another teammate distributes deck with 13 cards to every player in the clockwise order. The second stack is called the Foot.

    The remaining cards are kept in the center, facing down and form a stock. The topmost card in the Stock is kept facing up, and it should not be three red or a Joker.

    The Foot stack of the card cannot be used until all the Hand cards have been used.

    Meld Cards Objective

    Melding is getting rid of all the hands of a team. 3-7 cards set is MeldMeld. Melds can have maximum of seven cards and minimum three cards. Any card can be MeldMeld, for example, Ace, Queen, King, and so on. Jokers , Deuces cards cannot be melded.

    There are three types of MeldMeld:

    1. Dirty Meld Meld is when players have two or more(when there are six or more melds) wild cards.
    2. Natural Meld is having Clean Melds without any wild card.
    3. Wild Meld Meld is a meld of only wild cards.

    A seven cards meld is called a Pile . Red top card pile is a natural pile, a joker for a wild pile. The blacktop card is for a dirty pile . Players earn points for their melds, and players lose points on the left cards.

    When a player has to get rid of all the cards he needs to :

    • A teammate needs to have picked “Foot.”
    • A team needs to have accomplished Natural Melds, that’s is two dirty melds and two wild melds (each MeldMeld should have seven cards or more)
    • All the team members need to agree for melding all of the cards.

    The Empty Nest Years – Cricut Tutorials, Farm Life, Recipes, Crafts & Tips,

    Pages

    • Cricut Index
    • Free SVGS
    • Free Fonts
    • Project Tutorials

    Printable Hand & Foot Rules, Cheat Sheets, & Score Sheets

    The Hand & Foot Card Game is a variant of Canasta. It is typically played with 4 players, two teams. But up to 6 can play, using one deck of cards per a player.

    Download a pdf file of rules, cheat sheets for the players to keep track of the rules, and scoring sheets, here: https://drive.google.com/file/d/19LVdLgJxNRD_F8x8abO5Cn7BDHsVPA8X/view?usp=sharing

    2-6 players is possible, 4 is ideal. One deck of cards is needed for each player. Play for 4 or 6 is in teams. You can play on your partners melds in teams.

    Shuffle all cards, pull your “stack” from the top. If you pull exactly 22 cards, receive 100pts. If not, discard or pull more to equal 22, then the next person pulls.

    Without looking at the cards, divide in half. Set 11 aside in one pile as your “foot”. The other 11 are your hand, you may now look at those.

    How many cards you pick up increases each round. One is discarded each round. If a red Three is drawn, it is put down immediately and replaced with a new card from the deck.

    To pick up from the discard pile, you have to pick up the last 7 cards, the top card cannot be a black 3, and you MUST be able to immediately lay the top card into a meld.

    A meld is a group of 3 of the same value card. (3 kings make a meld, 3 4s make a meld, etc). Continue to add to your meld until it has 7 cards—then it is a “book”. Books are the goal.

    A game consists of four rounds. Each round has a minimum meld requirement that increases with each round. You must put down cards whose individual face values add up to at least the minimum requirement before your team is “in the game”.

    You can put down several melds at once to achieve this. If you are picking up the pile, you can meld additional cards from you hand along with the top discard and the two that match to help you make up the minimum count, including wild cards. However, you cannot count any of the other six cards you are pick up towards the minimum.

    To meld, all the cards that are played must equal the number of points that are required for that round. Wild cards have bonus points.

    Wilds are Jokers & 2s. If you use a wild card in your book, it is a ‘dirty’ book. Books (groups of 7) that do not have a wild are ‘clean’ books. Only one wild can be used in a meld. A book can never have more than 2 wilds.

    When the ‘Book’ of seven is completed, the player has to place them in a single stack, with the topmost card being a Red for ‘Clean’ and Black for ‘Dirty’.

    PICKING UP YOUR FEET – When you have been able to play all the cards in your hand, by either melding or discarding them, you then pick up your foot and play from that.

    To ‘Go Out’, the player must get a Clean and Dirty, and get completely rid of their cards.

    Once a player goes out, the remaining players must count the cards left in their hand, those points are subtracted from their total points.

    How to play hand and foot

    How to play hand and foot

    I’m not much of a card player because most of the time it seems like card games require some kind of strategy. When I play games, I think it’s more fun to just relax.

    One exception is a game called Hand & Foot, a game my family has played for years. Though there are many versions of the rules, I thought I’d share the rules I prefer to play by here. By sharing these, I’m exposing readers to a fantastically fun family game, but also establishing “house rules” on the Internet. (At least one family member declares his rules are the real rules because he found them on the Internet. That means my rules can now be the real rules…HA!)

    You need:

    • A deck of cards per player plus one. (Example: If you have four players, you need five decks.) Combine and shuffle all the decks of cards together
    • I would recommend an auto-shuffler
    • Writing instrument and paper to keep score

    Objective:

    The person with the most points at the end wins…profound, I know. A person wins a round by collecting “books” of 7 cards that are of the same number. To “go out” (win the round), a player must collect a “clean” and a “dirty” book. A clean is one that is made up entirely of 7 cards with the same number (can be of any suite). A dirty is a book made up of 7 cards combining wild cards and the numbered cards (must have at least one more numbered card than wild cards).

    How to play Hand & Foot:

    1. Separate the cards into two piles, and each player picks a small group of cards off the top of one of the larger piles. These “piles” are stacked neatly and usually divided into two just to make them easier to handle.
    2. Each player counts their small pile into two stacks of 11. If a player gets exactly 22 cards, they get a bonus 100 points. Any remaining cards are added back onto draw pile.
    3. The first stack of 11 becomes the player’s “hand”.
    4. The second pile, or “foot”, is placed to the player’s side for later play.
    5. To determine who starts the game, each player randomly picks a card from the middle of the draw pile and whoever has the highest value card (Aces are high) gets to start first. In subsequent rounds, the person to start the round is the next player in a clockwise motion.
    6. When a player has a turn, he or she must pick two cards from the two draw piles (either one card from each pile or two cards from one pile) and when they are done playing that round, they must discard a card into the discard pile.
    7. A player starts to create the books by starting with a set of three: Either all three of the same number or 2 of one number and a wild card. (Example: 3 Queens or 2 Queens and a wild card.) To “lay down” (start their first book), the point values of the first three cards must equal a “meld.” The first book usually requires that the player meld 50 points before laying down (more on this later). Subsequent books created must start with three cards of any total value.
    8. The players take their turns, each drawing two cards and then playing what cards in their books that they can before discarding one hand.
    9. When the first hand runs out, the player can then “get into their foot” to play those cards as well. If the hand runs out before the player discards, the player must declare “I’m just playing my foot” or “I’m still playing”…or something to that effect. They can then seamlessly continue playing until they have no other options to lay a card down and then must discard a single card.
    10. When a book of seven is achieved, the player places them in a single stack with the top card being a red card for a clean and a black card for a dirty. Again, to “go out” a player must get a clean and a dirty and be completely out of cards to go out. To go out, a player must discard a final card, not simply run out of cards. Players can accumulate more than one clean and one dirty through the course of the round.
    11. When a player goes out, thus signifying the end of the round, all the players must count their point totals for the round. The score keeper records the “meld count” first, meaning how many points in completed books each player has earned. The players then get their second point count by counting the point total from each played card’s value. This includes individual cards in the completed books as well as cards that have already been laid down into a partial book. Any card left in the player’s hand counts against the net total for that round.
    12. To start a new round, the same 22 cards must be counted for each player and the process starts over again with the first player in the round being the person next to the first player from the first round in a clockwise order (to the first player’s left).

    Counting points in Hand & Foot:

    • Each card and each book has its own assigned value.
    • For the most part, cards numbered 3-7 are worth five points (see below for exception)
    • Cards numbered 8-10, J, Q and K all count 10 each
    • Jokers and Deuces (2s) count as wild cards and are 50 points each.
    • Aces count as 20.
    • Major exception: All red 3s count as 300 points (yes, three hundred) against the player, even if played. This would mean that red 3s are of top priority to get out of the hand and are to never be played.
    • A player that “goes out” in a round earns an additional 100 points for going out. People consider it worth more points to hold off on going out and attempt to earn more books.
    • Clean books are worth 500 points.
    • Dirty books are worth 300 points.

    A few more playing points:

    • Smith house rules say that a player cannot pick up the discard from the previous player’s discarded card. This allows the next player to go ahead and draw their two cards while the player before them is still playing their hand, making the game move faster.
    • Once a book has been established, if a player draws a card that fits that book, they can add that card to the book, thus creating a book of more than seven cards. A player cannot change a dirty to a clean if seven cards of the same number are eventually achieved. Some players believe that a new book must be started when the same numbers are drawn.
    • There are different ways to change the meld required to lay down an initial book on a round. A way to make the game shorter is to decide there will be four rounds with the first round requiring a lay down meld of 50, 90 for round 2; 120 for round 3; and 150 for round 4.
    • You can also play to 10,000 points, meaning you play rounds until a player earns 10,000 points to win the entire game. This can take a very long time! If this method is used, then the melds go by total points. Up to 1250 points a player must meld 50. After that, each time a player achieves another 1250 points, the meld requirement increases from 50 to 90 to 120 to 150.

    To read other rule variations, check out this site.

    My wife and I play Hand and Foot from time to time. We have toyed with the idea of allowing a book of 3’s to count positive, with the caveat that they are only positive if the book is closed and clean. If the book is not closed and clean then each of the 3’s has their usual negative score.

    We have not found this particularly effective because if a player attempts it then the state of that book determines the winner of the game.

    My question is if anyone else has tried a book of 3’s in Hand and Foot and if they have found a way to make it work.

    How to play hand and foot

    4 Answers 4

    Assuming you’re playing with the Red (100) Black (5) variation (there are not official rules for hand and foot), then the purpose of the 3’s is to add a bit of randomness to the game to offset player ability. If your goal is to remove this randomness, then you can simply treat all 3’s as normal cards and the game will ‘work’ just fine. I have played that particular variation.

    I’m not sure by which rules you’re playing, but if you’re allowing threes to hit the table singly, and also allowing the bonus for making a book of them, it’s a bit of an unfair advantage to that random chance.

    I’ve played a variant where you are allowed to go out if in your foot by laying down 4 or more black 3’s without a discard. This counts as 400 extra points.

    You wouldn’t be able to use them while in your hand, so you’d still have to discard them to get to your foot first.

    In our games, typically the first person to reach the foot wants to pick up the pile as soon as possible and usually has a bunch of black 3’s. We play simple requirements where you can pick up the whole pile if you can use the top card anywhere, which is usually always. If the partnership makes the book requirements quickly, before this player has discarded them all, then it’s an extra bonus.

    We play a version where black threes can be melded under certain conditions. Everyone needs to play all their cards in their hand before they can pick up their foot. Because you cannot meld black threes, you must discard the black threes in your hand one at a time before you can pick up your foot. Because of this difficulty in getting rid of black threes, it becomes very dangerous to pick up the discard pile (it may have black threes in it). This problem of getting rid of your black threes needs to remain as a part of the game. However, if you can meld your black threes in the process of going out, it relieves some of the problems. It must be understood that only the person going out can meld black threes. If someone else goes out, the black threes still in your hand count against you. Because there are so many variations, it may be necessary to play variants where the problem has already been worked out. I have written down the rules we use and posted it here: http://gameofhandandfoot.blogspot.com

    You can lay down a book or Canasta of 3s if you have seven cards to lay down. This is worth 2000 points.

    Upgrade the old-fashioned hopscotch game by playing the hopscotch with hands and feet. The Hopscotch Hands and Feet Game is a great party game that can be played by all ages. And the more players have, the better! Print out the hopscotch game with hands and feet printable, tape it to the floor, and start hopping.

    How to play hand and foot

    Make sure you’re landing on the right foot pattern or hand pattern but what makes this game actually fun is when a player actually gets the foot and hand pattern all wrong. Make sure to get the phone ready to take videos as this hopscotch game using your hands and feet is really hilarious!

    HOW TO PLAY THE GAME

    To play the Hopscotch Hands and Feet Game, simply print the printable hands and feet outline. Each row of hopscotch will have a combination of 3 landing spaces. The landing space can be a combination of 2 feet with 1 hand or 2 hands with 1 foot. You can then make as many rows but I do recommend 8 rows.

    Once you’ve laid out the sheets of hopscotch with hands and feet, tape them to the floor and gather the players around. It can be all kids, all adults, or the whole family playing this hopscotch game.

    To start playing, pick a player to start hopping. The hands and feet hopscotch game mechanics are pretty simple. The player must be able to land their hand or feet on the corresponding hand and feet pattern on the floor and make it all the way to the end row without missing a skip. If they land their hand or feet on the wrong hopscotch pattern, they are out and can try again later after everyone has taken their turn playing the game.

    GAME FOR ANY OCCASION

    The hopscotch hands and feet game can be played at any party or occasion or even just a fun activity for the kids.

    Add the hopscotch game to your Easter party and play it as Bunny Hopscotch Hands and Feet game by letting the kids wear bunny masks as they hop.

    You can also add this party game to a Superhero Party and dress the kids in superhero masks as they hop through the hands and feet hopscotch game to make it more fun.

    MATERIALS NEEDED

    • Hopscotch game with hands and feet printable
    • Tape or washi tape – use different pattern washi tapes to match the occasion. Ex. cobweb washi tape for Halloween, glittery ones for unicorn parties, etc.

    Hopscotch Hands and Feet Printable

    The hands and feet hopscotch pdf is available in 3 sizes – small hands and footprint for toddlers and pre-schoolers, medium for young kids or grade-schoolers, and large full-size hands and feet for teenagers and adults.

    The first page of the 8 pages of printable includes the hands and feet hopscotch rules and the hopscotch suggested layout but you can invent different hopscotch patterns. Make it an easier pattern for toddlers and a more confusing pattern for adults.

    If toddlers and pre-schoolers are playing, print page 2 of the printable to play the Hopscotch Hand Foot Game for toddlers & preschoolers. The 8.5” X 11“ sheet includes 2 hands and 2 feet so you can save on printing paper when playing this game. You just need to print 8 pages to make 8 rows of hopscotch hands and feet game.

    If young kids or grade school kids are playing the hopscotch hands and feet game, print pages 3 and 4. They are medium hands & feet outline. 1 8.5” X 11“ sheet containing 2 hands, the other sheet containing 2 feet. To play 8 rows of hopscotch, print 5 of the hands’ sheet & 8 of the feet sheet.

    If teens or adults are playing the hopscotch hands and feet game or the whole family starting from toddlers to the grandparents, print pages 5-8. Each 8.5” X 11“ sheet contains a full-size hand or feet. If you follow the pattern provided on the instructions in the printable, print out 7 of the left foot sheet, 8 right foot sheets, 4 left hand sheets, and 5 right hand sheets.

    If you want fewer rows or if you want to adjust the suggested sequence layout, you can print less. Make sure to do this game on a leveled floor versus a sloping floor to avoid players from falling over.

    Note: For those who wish to re-use these sheets, I would recommend laminating them so more kids can play them over and over again. Example: at Daycares or Pre-schools.

    4. Once all sheets are ready, let the fun begin with each kid or adult taking their turn. The ones who get the whole sequence correctly – wins! Enjoy!

    Setting up the Game


    1. Spread the mat faceup on a flat surface, indoors or outdoors.
    2. Players take off their shoes and set them aside. If you’re playing outdoors, you may want to anchor the mat corners with your shoes.
    3. Designate an extra person as the referee. The referee is not considered a player; during the game, the referee will spin the spinner, call out the moves, and monitor the game play.
    4. Position yourselves on the mat according to the number of players, as explained below.

    For a 2-player game: Players face each other from opposite ends of the mat, near the word Twister . Place one foot on the yellow circle and the other foot on the blue circle closest to your end of the mat. Your opponent does the same on his or her end.

    For a 3-player game: Two players face each other on opposite ends of the mat, near the word Twister . Each player places one foot on the yellow circle and the other foot on the blue circle closest to his or her end of the mat. The third player faces the center from the red-circle side of the mat, placing one foot each on the two middle red circles.

    How to Play

    The referee spins the spinner, then calls out the body part and the color that the arrow points to. For example, the referee may call out: “Right hand, red.” All players, at the same time, must then try to follow the referee’s directions as explained below.

    • Each player must try to place the called-out body part on a vacant circle of the called-out color. For [example, if the referee calls out “Right hand, red,” each player must try to place a right hand on any vacant red circle.
    • If your called-out hand or foot is already on a circle of the called-out color, you must try to move it to another circle of the same color.
    • There can never be more than one hand or foot on any one circle. If two or more players reach for the same circle, the referee must decide which player got there first. The other player(s) must find another vacant circle of the same color.
    • Never remove your hand or foot from a circle unless you’re directed to by the referee after a spin. Exception: You may lift a hand or foot to allow another hand or foot to pass by, as long as you announce it to the referee beforehand , and replace it on its circle immediately afterward.
    • If all 6 circles of a color are already covered, the referee must spin again until a different color can be called out.

    Strategy: Try moving toward an opponent’s portion of the mat, forcing the player to go over or under you to place a hand or foot!

    Being Eliminated

    Any player who falls, or touches the mat with an elbow or knee, is immediately out of the game. (If you feel that a new position is impossible, or will cause you to fall, you may elminiate yourself.)

    In a 2-player game, the game ends and the remaining player wins. In a 3-player game, the remaining two players keep playing until one player is eliminated and the remaining player wins.

    How to Win

    The last player left in the game is the winner!

    Team Play

    For a 4-player game, form 2 teams of 2 players each. Teams face each other on opposite ends of the mat, standing side-by-side with each foot on a circle so that all 4 circles closest to the Twister name are covered.

    Just as in a 2- or 3-player game, the referee spins the spinner and calls out a hand or foot and a color circle. Play as in the 2- or 3-player game, with this exception: members of the same team can cover the same circle with one hand or foot each.

    As soon as a player falls or touches the mat with an elbow or knee, the player’s team is eliminated and the other team is the winner.

    2-Player Game with No Referee

    If there are only 2 players and no referee, you can play without using the spinner. One player calls out the body part; the other player calls out the circle color. Players alternate turns calling out the body part first. Otherwise, game play is the same, with the last remaining player the winner.

    Party Games

    Round Robin: Form several 2-player teams. Each team, in turn, plays every other team. Players keep track of wins and losses. The team with the most wins wins!

    Elimination Game: Form several 2-player teams. Play against each other, with losing teams dropping out. Winning teams play each other until only one winning team is left!

    Hand, foot and mouth disease is common among kids under 10 years old, and in most cases it is mild . The virus is contagious and is not the same as foot and mouth disease in animals .

    How does the disease spread?

    Your child can catch the disease by:

    • breathing in droplets from a person with the illness who is c oughing or sneezing
    • contact with mucus, saliva, blisters or the poo of an infected person
    • touching infected objects like toys , and then putting their hands or toys in their mouth.

    Symptoms

    • Blisters in the mouth, tongue, the palms of the hands and soles of the feet ( blisters can be painful)
    • Fever
    • Loss of appetite
    • Tiredness
    • Sore throat

    The symptoms are often confused with chickenpox. However, typically with chickenpox, the rash is all over the body and your child will be sicker. If you’re not sure what type of illness your child has, call PlunketLine.

    How to play hand and foot

    How to play hand and foot

    How to play hand and foot

    Prevention

    T here are a few things you can do to prevent hand, foot and mouth disease:

    • t each your child proper hygiene
      • cough and sneeze into an elbow
      • wash hands properly before eating, after using the toilet and at other times too
    • keep your child at home if they have hand, foot and mouth disease so they don’t spread it to others.

    Treatment

    H and, foot and mouth disease is a viral illness so there is no specific treatment . Just k eep your little one comfortable by resting at home until they’re better, and all the blisters have dried.

    Below are some other tips to help your child recover . Ensure that your little one:

    • avoid s sour, salty or spicy foods if their mouth is sore
    • drink s plenty of liqu ids to h elp their body feel better and avoid dehydration
    • suc k on ice or ice blocks to help with a sore mouth
    • frequently wash their hands to decrease the chance of spreading the infection to others
    • sneeze and cough into their elbow – and i f tissues are used, throw them in the rubbish right after.

    Can hand, foot and mouth disease happen more than once?

    Yes, hand, foot and mouth disease can occasionally happen more than once as there are different types of the virus that cause it.

    When to visit a doctor

    Call PlunketLine or your family doctor if your little one:

    • hasn’t been able to drink because of a painful mouth
    • has had fewer than four wet nappies in 24 hours
    • seems to be getting worse , or are not getting better after a few days.

    It’s unlikely that you’ll get the illness if you are pregnant. If you do catch the disease , the risk of complications is also quite low. However, there are still risks so talk to your doctor or midwife if you think you may have hand, foot and mouth disease.

    (Dyshidrotic Dermatitis)

    , MD, PhD, Georg-August University of Göttingen, Germany

    • 3D Models (0)
    • Audios (0)
    • Calculators (0)
    • Images (1)
    • Lab Test (0)
    • Tables (0)
    • Videos (0)

    How to play hand and foot

    Pathophysiology

    A hallmark histologic feature of dermatitis is edema between epidermal keratinocytes (spongiosis). When enough edema accumulates, cell-cell adhesions (desmosomes) rupture, forming microvesicles. The microvesicles become visible macroscopically only after they enlarge. In areas other than the hands and feet, these vesicles typically rupture quickly and are not noticed. However, on the hands and feet, because of their thicker stratum corneum, vesicles tend to persist longer and become visible. Visibility of these vesicles indicates dyshidrotic dermatitis (a misnomer because it has nothing to do with sweating or abnormal sweat glands). The most severe form of dyshidrotic dermatitis (pompholyx) is characterized by coalescence of vesicles, forming larger bullae (called cheiropompholyx when on the hands, podopompholyx when on the feet, and cheiropodopompholyx when on both hands and feet).

    Symptoms and Signs

    Erythema, scaling, and skin thickening may progress to pruritic vesicles or bullae on the palms, sides of the fingers, or soles (called dyshidrotic dermatitis), which can rupture, resulting in erosions and crusting. The vesicles may be the first symptom noticed. Depending on the etiology and exposures, symptoms can be intermittent. Frequent or prolonged water contact (eg, frequent handwashing, work involving water or wet substances), particularly with detergents, is a common trigger, particularly in patients with atopy.

    A player may go out by melding, laying off, or discarding the last card from in hand, provided that the partnership has made at least one canasta. Before going out, a player has the option of asking his partner’s permission. If permission is asked, the player must abide by the response (which must be a simple yes or no answer). A player cannot go out if, after the draw, he holds two black 3s and nothing else. With just one black 3, he could go out by discarding it. With three or four black 3s, he could go out by melding them; wild cards may not be included in such a meld. If a player holds just one card in hand and the discard deck also consists of just one card, he cannot go out by taking the deck. There is a bonus for going out “concealed”—that is, by going out (with or without a discard) without having previously made any melds or layoffs other than red 3s; the hand must consist entirely of melds, of which at least one must be a canasta.

    The stock rarely ends before anyone goes out. If the last card drawn is a red 3, it automatically ends the game, although the player drawing it may first meld and lay off. (That player may not discard.) If it is not a red 3, play continues without a stock. Each player in turn then takes the upcard if it can be melded or layed off and ends the turn by discarding or melding out. This continues until someone either goes out or cannot use the previous player’s discard, when all play ceases.

    Scoring

    Each side scores the total value of all its melded cards, plus bonus points for each natural canasta (500), each mixed canasta (300), going out (100, but 200 if concealed), and each red 3 declared (100, but 200 points for each if all four are declared by one side). Each partnership subtracts the point values of any cards still held from its meld score. If a side has failed to make any meld other than red 3s, then every red 3 counts for 100 against, or for 200 apiece if all four were melded. (In some variants wild-card canastas are allowed and count 1,000 points.)

    The most-common penalties are the loss of 500 for each red 3 held in hand, 100 for trying to go out without permission, 100 for being unable to go out after receiving permission to do so, and 50 for taking the upcard when unable to use it legally. The adjusted scores are then carried forward to the next deal, and play ceases when one side reaches 5,000 points.

    Variants

    Canasta can be played by two players, with a few modifications to the rules. Each player is dealt 15 instead of 11 cards and at each turn draws two cards but discards only one. Finally, two canastas are required for going out.

    Another popular variant is samba, played with three 52-card decks and six jokers. Samba allows suit sequences of three or more cards to be melded. A seven-card sequence, or samba, ranks as a canasta for the purpose of going out and scores a bonus of 1,500 points. No meld may contain more than two wild cards, and no wild card may be melded with a sequence. (In the bolivia variant, wild cards may be used in sequences.) Each player in turn draws either two cards from the stock or one card from the deck and in either case makes one discard. The top discard may never be taken without a natural matching pair. Game is 10,000 points, and the initial meld requirement for a side with 7,000 or more points is 150.

    What Is Hand, Foot, and Mouth Disease (HFM)?

    Hand, foot, and mouth disease (HFM) is a common viral infection that causes painful red blisters in the mouth and throat, and on the hands, feet, and diaper area.

    HFM is contagious and easily spreads to others through contact with unwashed hands, feces (poop), saliva (spit), mucus from the nose, or fluid from the blisters. Kids under age 5 are most at risk for HFM, as infections are common in childcare centers, preschools, and other places where kids are in close quarters.

    Besides the blisters, kids often have a fever for a few days and can get dehydrated because it hurts to swallow liquids. Symptoms usually clear up within a week and kids recover completely.

    There’s no cure for HFM and no vaccine to prevent it, but your doctor can recommend home care to make your child more comfortable during recovery.

    What Are the Signs and Symptoms of Hand, Foot, and Mouth Disease (HFM)?

    The blisters caused by HFM are red with a small bubble of fluid on top. They often peel, leaving an ulcer, which is a sore with a reddish base. The soles of the feet and the palms of the hands may have a rash that can look like flat red spots or red blisters.

    How to play hand and foot

    Occasionally, a pink rash may be seen on other parts of the body, such as the buttocks and thighs. However, some kids will have no problems other than sores in the back of the throat.

    It can be hard for parents to tell if a child (especially a very young one) has HFM if sores are only inside the mouth or throat. Very young kids might not be able to communicate that they have a sore throat, but if a child stops eating or drinking, or wants to eat or drink less often, it’s a sign that something is wrong.

    A child with HFM also might:

    • have a fever, muscle aches, or other flu-like symptoms
    • become irritable or sleep more than usual
    • begin drooling (due to painful swallowing)
    • only want to drink cold fluids

    How Is HFM Treated?

    You can give acetaminophen or ibuprofen if your child is achy or irritable. Never give aspirin to children or teens, as it may cause a rare but serious illness called Reye syndrome.

    Cold foods like ice cream, smoothies, and popsicles also help by numbing the area, and will be a welcome treat for kids who have trouble swallowing (and even those who don’t!). Avoid hot drinks, sodas, and acidic food (citrus juice, tomato sauce, etc.) because they can make the pain worse.

    Kids with blisters on their hands or feet should keep the areas clean and uncovered. Wash the skin with lukewarm soap and water, and pat dry. If a blister pops, dab on a bit of antibiotic ointment to help prevent infection and cover it with a small bandage.

    Make sure your child drinks plenty of fluids to stay hydrated. Call your doctor if your child remains very irritable, can’t be comforted, is sluggish, or seems to be getting worse. Also call if you see signs of dehydration, like a dry or sticky mouth, sunken eyes, or decreased urine output.

    Can Hand, Foot, and Mouth Disease (HFM) Be Prevented?

    To prevent the spread of HFM, keep kids home from school and childcare while they have a fever or open blisters on the skin and in the mouth.

    Hand washing is the best protection. Remind everyone in your family to wash their hands well and often, especially after using the toilet or changing a diaper, and before preparing or eating food. Shared toys in childcare centers should be cleaned often with a disinfectant because many viruses can live on objects for a few days.

    How to play hand and foot

    Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease, also known as HFMD, is most common in children under the age of 5. At this time there is no vaccine to prevent against contracting HFMD, but researchers are working on developing vaccinations. Because HFMD is very painful beginning with sores in the throat area, of course, you want to prevent getting this disease altogether. There are several precautions you and your children can take to prevent HFMD. Let’s take a closer look at a few ways children can prevent Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease.

    What are signs of HFMD? Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease is a virus caused by the Enterovirus. It is contagious and symptoms include painful mouth sores or blisters, A small rash will then develop on the palms of the hands and soles of the feet. Other signs to look for are fever, low appetite and generally not feeling well.

    4 ways to prevent Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease

    Do any of your children’s school mates or playmates have HFMD? Staying aware of which children currently have the condition is the very first step in preventing your own child from contracting it. This can be challenging. Signs of HFMD appear in areas of the body not always visible: soles of feet, back of throat. This is why keeping an open line of communication among other parents, daycare staff, teachers and others in your child’s life is the key.

    Ramp up routine hygiene practices

    You likely already practice good hand washing and other forms of routine hygiene. If you learn that your child is being exposed to HFMD you will want to ramp up these efforts. Frequent handwashing is important. If your child is in daycare, pack extra hand sanitizer and go back over how to apply this independently or voice your concerns for more application to the teachers. If your child is still in the diaper stages, you will want to be extra sure to wash up with hot, soapy water after each changing and take extra care to dispose of the diapers out of the way.

    Mythbusters: It’s a myth that HFMD is contracted from household

    pets like dogs and cats.

    Protect from coughs and sneezes

    For young children, coughing and sneezing are common ways to spread HFMD. But in the busy day of play they can forget to cover their mouths until after the deed is done. Be sure to go over the important steps of covering their mouths during coughs and sneezing to prevent the spread of germs and also to protect them from inhaling germs during coughs and sneezes.

    Disinfect all around

    One last step in helping children prevent Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease is to disinfect your surroundings all around. Disinfect all toys, inside your cars, the furniture and especially any items your child comes in contact with daily – their bedroom furniture, wash sheets with a bleach solution, bedtime books and more.

    If you suspect your child has Hand, Foot and Mouth Disease give us a call at OneSource Healthcare for a full assessment.

    How to play hand and foot

    Your child is cranky, running a fever and developing a rash. Once they start refusing to eat, you contact your pediatrician’s office — only to learn that this lack of appetite is due to mouth sores from a common but highly infectious childhood illness, hand, foot and mouth disease.

    Cleveland Clinic is a non-profit academic medical center. Advertising on our site helps support our mission. We do not endorse non-Cleveland Clinic products or services. Policy

    “Like most viruses, it’s fairly contagious,” says pediatrician Dana Schmidt, MD. “So in a daycare or school setting, it can spread very quickly.”

    Caused by a strain of the coxsackievirus, hand, foot and mouth disease is best known for the blister-like rash it causes on the hands, feet and mouth. However, this rash can appear all over the body. When someone only has blisters in their mouth, but not hands and feet, it’s called herpangina (and the advice below applies to this too).

    Dr. Schmidt explains more about this common and highly contagious illness.

    What are the first symptoms of hand, foot and mouth disease?

    The first symptoms of hand, foot and mouth disease that show up include fever, lack of appetite, sore throat and a runny nose. A day or two later, a blister-like rash appears on the hands, feet or mouth.

    “Typically, we see most cases in the warmer spring and summer months, but since it’s an infection that’s easily spread, it can be seen at any time of the year,” says Dr. Schmidt.

    How is hand, foot and mouth disease spread?

    Hand, foot and mouth disease spreads through direct contact with these blisters, as well as the droplets expelled when you sneeze or cough. The virus can also be passed along in poop, so be sure to wash your hands right away if you’re changing diapers, pull-ups or otherwise come in to contact at home or working at a daycare. But it’s important to note that it can also be passed via shared utensils, towels and clothing, as well as physical contact and by touching contaminated surfaces and toys.

    How long is a person with hand, foot and mouth disease contagious?

    You are most contagious during the first few days of being sick, often before the blisters appear. Once these blisters dry up, you are less likely to pass on the virus.

    Can adults get hand, foot and mouth disease?

    Yes. Hand, foot and mouth disease is very common and usually affects infants and children under the age of 5. But because it’s so infectious, it can spread among family members and also make older kids, teenagers and adults sick.

    Can you get hand, food and mouth disease twice?

    Yes. Because multiple viruses can cause hand, foot and mouth disease, it is possible to catch the virus multiple times.

    Is this related to foot-and-mouth disease?

    No. Hand, foot and mouth disease has nothing to do with foot-and-mouth disease, which affects cattle, sheep and swine. In fact, both diseases are caused by different viruses — and animals can’t even get hand, foot and mouth disease.

    How to treat and prevent hand, foot and mouth disease

    Hand, foot and mouth disease has no specific treatment, although the CDC reports that most people get better on their own within seven to 10 days. However, you can treat symptoms of the virus with over-the-counter pain medications.

    It’s also important to stay hydrated, as dehydration is a common side effect. Avoid foods and drinks that are acidic, like orange juice, because they can irritate mouth sores. Stick to milder or cold foods. Older children and adults may also relieve some discomfort with salt water gargles, although this treatment isn’t recommended for infants, toddlers or younger children.

    Be especially vigilant if hand, foot and mouth disease symptoms become severe, or if you or your child has a weak immune system or becomes dehydrated. If you or your child’s fever does not go away after three days — or if all symptoms don’t improve after 10 days — see a doctor.

    Tips to reduce the spread of hand, foot and mouth disease

    You can do several things to prevent or reduce the spread of hand, foot and mouth disease:

    • Wash your hands often, especially after changing diapers.
    • Disinfect any contaminated surfaces with a water and bleach or sanitizing wipes.
    • Wash your child’s clothing, bedding and any other soiled items.
    • Stay away from other people, especially during the first few days of the illness. If your child becomes infected, prevent spread by keeping them home from daycare, school or any other group activity. If you are infected, be sure to stay home from work or school.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Subscribe Below to Download the Article Immediately

    You can also select your interests for free access to our premium training:

    Photoshop grids and guides are tools to make editing your photos easier. Use them if you need to straighten lines in a photo or when creating a layout.

    In this article, I’ll show you how to use both of them.

    How Do You Make a Grid in Photoshop?

    We’ll start with the grid. The grid is non-printing and a great help when aligning objects or laying out elements symmetrically.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Architecture and landscape photographers will find it especially helpful to straighten buildings and horizons.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    It’s very easy to make a grid in Photoshop. Here’s how.

    Step 1: Add a Grid

    Open any file or create a new one. Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    Step 2: Edit the Photoshop Grid Preferences

    Go to Photoshop CC > Preferences and select “Guides, Grid & slices…”. For Windows, go to Edit > Preferences and select “Guides, Grid & slices…”.

    A new window will pop up where you can edit the preferences.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    You can change the color of the lines and their appearance.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    And, more importantly, you can set how far apart you want the grid lines from each other. Then, depending on your project, set how many subdivisions you want between the main lines.

    Step 3: Snapping

    Enable Snapping if you want Photoshop to help you place objects. Go to View > Snap to and choose “Grid”.

    You’ll notice now that objects will click into place on your grid.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    When finished, turn the grid off again to check out your design.

    How to Add Guides in Photoshop

    Guides have a similar purpose but the difference is that you create every guideline yourself.

    Step 1: Adding the Ruler in Photoshop

    Before you can add guides, you need to add the rulers to your workspace. Go to View and select “Rulers”.

    Two rulers will appear. One on the left and one at the top of the workspace.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    You can also change the Photoshop ruler preferences. Go to Photoshop CC > Preferences and select “Units and Rulers”.

    A new window will pop up where you can set the units and other preferences.

    Step 2: Add Guides

    To create a guide, simply click on one of the rulers and drag a guide onto your photo or layout.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    To move a guide, make sure the Moving tool is selected and then click on a guide and drag to move it.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Once you have created all the guides you want, you can lock them. Go to View and select “Lock Guides”.

    Step 3: Snapping

    You can also add Snapping to your guides. Go to View > Snap to and select “Guides”.

    Like before, this will make objects snap or click into place along your guides.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 4: Remove and Hide Guides

    When you’re finished, you can either clear or hide guides in Photoshop.

    Go to View and select “Clear Guides” to remove them.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Go to View > Show and select “Guides” to hide or make them reappear.

    Conclusion

    The Photoshop grid and guides are useful for all kinds of projects. I use them mostly when I want to straighten landscape or architecture shots.

    If you like graphic design, you’ll want to use the grid or guides for laying out and/or aligning elements, too.

    It is definitely worth learning how to use them and can make a huge difference in your post-processing workflow.

    Want to improve your Lightroom editing skills as well? Check out our course Effortless Editing with Lightroom!

    Suppose I need to draw a grid in Photoshop, each square being the same size, and a certain amount of pixels tall and wide, and the grid lines having a certain pixel width. Like this:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Currently I do this by drawing one square, copy+pasting+moving+merging it a few times to create one row, copy/pasting that a few times to create more rows above each other.

    It works, but feels very clumsy, I’m sure there ought to be a more efficient way to do this?

    What are some efficient methods for creating a grid of equally sized squares?

    5 Answers 5

    Try using patterns. For your example of a square:

    Draw your initial square and marquee-select a smaller square that includes the top and left sides only. Then select Edit > Define Pattern. and save your pattern with a name.

    Next, marquee-select the area that you wish to fill. Then select Edit > Fill. , choose Use: Pattern and select your square pattern.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    If you are attempting to create a grid just for your benefit while designing, there’s an extension named GuideGuide that will do this efficiently.

    If you need the grid to be part of the design, I’d recommend creating a line using the marquee tool and then duplicating it as many times as you need, then using the Layer >> Distribute options to get them perfectly even.

    Under the “view” tab New Guide layout

    this will open a new window Preset – you can save, load & create a guide layout to use over and over again check or uncheck columns or rows depending on your needs I suggest having “preview” checked Number = The number of guides you desire Width = The distance between the generated guides Gutter = the space between guides Margin = sets your designs desired margins, you can type in a value for top, left, bottom and right

    center columns and clear existing guides can be selected as well

    This is for Photoshop CC 2015.5

    Select photoshop → preferences → guides, grids & slices.

    Define grid as desired

    Select view → show → grid; then check extras.

    Check view → snap to grid; then check snap.

    Turn on the Paths window if it isn’t already visible. Create a new path called Horizontal.

    Use the pen tool ( P ). Define a horizontal line segment at the top of the grid. Single click first on left side, then the right.

    Use the path selecetion tool ( A , black arrow). Click on the path, hold down option ( Alt ) to make copies of the object.

    Create another new path called vertical.

    Use the pen tool ( P ). Define a vertical line segment of the grid on the left side. Single click first on the top, then the bottom.

    Use the path selection tool ( A , black arrow). Click on the path, hold down option ( Alt ) to make copies of the object.

    Create a new layer for the grid (optional). Otherwise, the grid will be drawn on whichever layer is active.

    Palette window → Select horizontal path, then choose stroke path (using foreground color) from the options submenu (click the little triangle with three lines on the upper right corner of the palette window), choose brush or pencil.

    Repeat previous step to stroke the vertical path.

    Sometimes, after taking a stellar photograph of your couple, you might realize that the alignment is wonky, or the building in the background looks a little tilted. But don’t worry, this is something that you can easily fix using a grid as you edit your photos during post-production. Grids in Photoshop help position the elements correctly while editing or designing a layout for your images. They are non-printing lines that float over your pictures and can also be displayed as dots, allowing you to maintain symmetry in your photos. In this blog, we will show you how to create a grid in Photoshop and ensure balance and alignment in your images.

    7 Steps to Creating a Grid in Photoshop

    1. Make a New Document

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Open Photoshop and start creating a New Document. For this, you’ll have to select File and then click on New. You can also use shortcut keys Ctrl + N on Windows or Cmd + N on Mac. Next, you’ll have to set the document size (width and height) at this step. You can do so according to your monitor resolution or printing needs. Note that more pixels per inch (PPI) will result in higher resolution images and better quality prints.

    2. Make Your Grid

    Now, go to the View option in your toolbar at the top of your workspace. Then, click on Show and then select Grid. You will immediately see a grid pop up. The grid will consist of continuous or dotted lines. To have more control over how your grid will look and function, you can edit the appearance of these lines and subdivisions in your next step.

    3. Edit Preferences

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    At the leftmost corner of your workspace, go to the Photoshop option, and from the dropdown menu, select Preferences. In Preferences, select Guides, Grid & Slices. You will now see a new window. In this window, you can set your preferences, such as a change in the color of your grid, the distance between lines in your grid, and the number of subdivisions you want between the main lines in your grid.

    4. Snap to Grid

    After setting your preferences, you can enable the snapping feature if you want Photoshop to help you place objects correctly. To do so, go to View and then select Snap to. From the side menu, choose Grid. After this step, you’ll notice that the objects you drag and drop into squares of your grid will click into place and snap to the size of your chosen square.

    5. Create Shapes

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    You can also use your Photoshop grid to create shapes if you want. Go to Custom Shape Tools and choose your preferred shape. Grab the shape and drag it to the square you want. Then, release the shape. You will see it snap to the size of the square. Repeat this process for that row as many times as you wish. Once you’re satisfied, you can either duplicate it or move it to an entirely new area. You can do so by navigating to Layers Palette by choosing Window and then selecting the Show Layers option or just by pressing the F7 key on your keyboard.

    6. Link Images to Shapes

    A grid in Photoshop can also help you link an image to each shape you create. The first thing you’ll have to do is to choose the layer where you’d want to place your image. Next, click on File and then Place. Now, select the image and go to Layer. Click on Create Clipping Mask, and your photo will appear in the grid you’ve specified.

    7. Save Your Photoshop Grid

    Now that you’re done creating your grid in Photoshop, you can save it for your current editing session and even for future use. Just press Ctrl+S on Windows or Cmd + S on Mac, and you will see a save box pop up. You can name and assign your grid a file type while saving. The most common file types for grids are .TIF and .PSD.

    Adding Guides in Photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Besides using a grid in Photoshop, you could also use guides to align shapes and position your elements in an image. The difference between the two is that while you can use the same grid for all the pictures once created, you’d need to create a new guide for every image. Also, guides have one cool feature to them – the objects dragged to within 8 screen pixels of a guide get attracted to it and snap to it. This makes it very easy to align your objects precisely on the guide and not just near them.

    To add a guide in Photoshop, you will first have to add Rulers. To do so, go to View and then choose Rulers. You will see two Rulers appear after this, one of them on the left and one at the top of your workspace. Now, you can change the Ruler preferences. Go to the Photoshop tab at the top left corner, then click on Preferences from the dropdown menu, and choose Units and Rulers. In a new window that pops up, you will be able to set Ruler preferences. Now, to create a guide, just click on one of the rulers and then drag a guide over your image or layout.

    If you want to move a guide, make sure you select the Moving tool and then click on a guide before you drag to move it. After having created all the guides you want, you can lock them in their position. Go to View and click on Lock Guides to do so. Just like grids in Photoshop, you can also enable Snapping for your guides. For this, you will have to go to View, choose Snap to, and then select Guides. To hide the guides, go to View and then Show. Select Guides from the side menu to make them disappear or reappear. To remove guides after you’re done working with them, you can navigate to View and then select the Clear Guides option from the dropdown menu.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Guides and grids in Photoshop can not only make your image editing work easier but also quicker and more accurate. We hope this Photoshop tutorial enables you to gain more control over your edits and bring out desired results.

    At ShootDotEdit, we are passionate about helping you grow your wedding photography business. Besides offering helpful tips to help you hone your skills, we also offer photo editing services to lessen your post-production workload. To learn more about our services, you can check out our pricing plans.

    How to make a grid in photoshop How to make a grid in photoshop

    The Photoshop grid is an useful tool that you can use to create layout designs for web and for print.

    Photoshop Grid

    Use the Photoshop grid when creating layout designs like website templates, posters, flyers, magazine templates, etc.

    This tool will assist you with your layout designs. You can align objects very precisely using the grid lines.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to Add a Photoshop Grid

    How do I turn on grid in Photoshop?

    Go to View > Show > Grid to add a grid in Photoshop. Then you can go to View > Snap to > Grid.

    Snapping helps with precise placement of selection edges, cropping marquees, slices, shapes, and paths. However, if snapping prevents you from correctly placing elements, you can disable it. (source: https://helpx.adobe.com)

    Once you turned on the grid, you will see a grid over your document.

    This grid is not a part of your design and doesn’t appear in print. It’s only here to guide you, and you can hide it at any time.

    If you want a grid that you can print, you have to use a grid pattern or a grid texture. In the download file you have a grid pattern, a grid texture and a 🤩 grid pattern generator 🤩.

    Photoshop Grid Shortcut

    The Photoshop grid shortcut is:

    • Command + ‘ (Mac)
    • Control + ‘ (Win)

    Click Control + ‘ once to add the grid, click again to hide the grid.

    Edit Grid Photoshop Preferences

    Photoshop allows you to edit the grid settings.

    Go to Edit > Preferences> Guides > Guides & Grid & Slices.

    This opens the Photoshop Preferences dialog box. (Note: Depending on your Photoshop version you might have slightly different names for the menus and settings.)

    You can edit the color of the grid, the style of the grid lines, the grid size and the size of the subdivisions.

    How to Make a Printable Grid in Photoshop

    How to make a grid in Photoshop? The easiest way is to use a grid Photoshop pattern.

    In the download file you will get a Photoshop grid generator (PS action – ATN file) that will help you create all kinds of grid patterns.

    With the grid pattern you can then create a grid background of any size and color. Add grid lines in Photoshop that you can print. So, now you know how to print grid in Photoshop.

    Here are the Photoshop grid freebies that you will find in this pack.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    1. Photoshop Grid Brushes

    You get 12 Photoshop grid brushes to use in your layout designs. Learn how to load the ABR file.

    The pack contains different grid layouts including some useful perspective grid images. (Read more about the Vanishing Point filter)

    Inside the grid brushes pack you will find: paper grid, square, perspective grid, circle grid, etc. These Photoshop brushes work in other software like Photoshop Elements or Gimp.

    • How to make a grid in photoshop
    • How to make a grid in photoshop

    2. Photoshop Grid Pattern

    You also get a grid pattern to play with. Load the PAT file.

    3. Grid Texture (Seamless)

    If you don’t have Photoshop, you can use the grid texture (3200x3200px) that is included in this pack. Download to get the seamless grid pattern.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    4. Photoshop Grid Generator

    To make this pack even more awesome for you, I have added a Photoshop grid generator. Load the ATN file.

    You can create your own grid layout. In just a few seconds you can create a Photoshop grid template or simply a grid texture.

    TIP: Rule of Thirds Grid

    1. To create a rule of thirds grid, press Command-K (Mac) or Control-K (Win) to open your Preferences.
    2. Click on Guides, Grid & Slices from the list on the left.
    3. Set Gridline every 100 percent and Subdivisions 3.

    You can also use my rule of thirds grid tool for creating a 3×3 grid in Photoshop.

    Add Grid to Photo Online

    Don’t have Photoshop? You can still add grid to photo online using the MockoFun‘s free grid drawing tool.

    Watch the video tutorial to see exactly how to use the Photoshop grid generator to make grid background and to add grid to photo.

    Item Details

    This freebie contains 1 ABR file, 1 PAT file, 1 ATN file, 1 JPG file

    • Format: ABR file, PAT file, ATN file, JPG file
    • Author: PhotoshopSupply(exclusive item)
    • License: Free for personal and commercial use with attribution. License Agreement

    When you need to work with content that needs precise division, creating a grid in Photoshop is extremely necessary, when creating the grid, you will have the milestones to deploy content and ideas. However, creating a grid requires a lot of skill set parameters to get the most beautiful grid frame with high accuracy.

    • How to create custom grid systems in Photoshop
    • How to create checkboxes with CSS Grid

    1. Create a freehand grid

    If you only need to create a grid to get milestones, regardless of the size or distance between the cells in the grid, you can do the following:

    You proceed to hold down the left mouse button on the bar and drag down the framework. Each time you do this you will create a grid line, repeated you will get a lot of mesh on the screen.

    To delete the free mesh, you just need to hold and click on the grid bar and drag them back to the ruler area to automatically delete.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    2. Create an even grid of images

    This method is used when you want to create squares, grid lines of equal size and straight, evenly divided from the main working frame.

    Step 1: First, select View -> New Guide Layout .

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 2: When the New Guide Layout window appears, you proceed to set the following information:

    1. Columns: Vertical columns

    1. Number: The number of cells to divide
    2. Width: The width of the cell
    3. Gutter: The thickness of the grid line

    2. Rows: Horizontal rows

    1. Number: The number of cells to divide
    2. Height: The height of the cell’s height
    3. Gutter: The thickness of the grid line

    If you want to split cells equally based on the size of the working frame, then you set Width and Height to 0.00cm, the system will default to split the size equally.

    Typically, Gutter (size grid thickness) people will also set to 0.00cm always so they do not take up too much work area on the screen. If you leave Gutter big, they will hide a lot of details on your main canvas.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    3. Move the gridlines

    To move the grid line, you just need to move to the grid line, the mouse pointer will switch to the Move tool. You proceed to hold and right click on the grid line and drag away to move them.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    4. Lock the gridlines

    If you are afraid that during the process you will move the wrong net and cause the size to be skewed, you can lock them. When locked, it is impossible to move the grid line (unless you unlock it again)

    You choose View -> Lock Guides (Alt + Ctrl +;)

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    5. Save grid settings

    If you use that grid, you can save them as a Preset so that the next use will only need to choose without setting information and parameters.

    Step 1: First, select View -> New Guide Layout .

    Step 2: Then, in the Preset section you choose Save Preset .

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 3: Then, you proceed to name the grid to easily distinguish and select Save to save.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    After saving, you will see that there are always Presets created the grid you just saved. From now on you can click on it to create a set of pre-set nets.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    When you know how to create a grid, you will create a lot of different products. One of the good examples of grid making is Instagram photos.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    In this article, TipsMake showed you how to create grids and all grid related settings. Have a nice day!

    by Amanda Tromley / in Computers & electronics

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Good graphic design begins with layout, and one of the key principles of design is alignment. Adobe Photoshop CS2 features a grid function you can access by going to View>Show>Grid. This feature makes perfect alignment of design elements a breeze. However, the grid in Photoshop is merely a layout tool, and it will not print with your design. Occasionally you may find you need a grid to use as an actual design element in your graphic. Fortunately there is a simple solution.

    • Good graphic design begins with layout, and one of the key principles of design is alignment.
    • However, the grid in Photoshop is merely a layout tool, and it will not print with your design.

    Decide the size of the squares needed in your grid. Divide the horizontal size of your grid by the number of squares desired to calculate the size of each square. For example, if your image is 1000 pixels wide and you want 10 squares across the document, each square would be 100 pixels by 100 pixels (1000/10=100).

    Go to File>New and set the document size to the size of your square. Using the example in the previous step, the document size would be 100 pixels by 100 pixels.

    • Go to File>New and set the document size to the size of your square.

    Press Control+A to select the entire work area.

    Use the down and left arrow buttons on your keyboard to move the selected area one pixel at a time. The more pixels down and to the left you move the selection, the wider the lines of your grid will be.

    Go to Select>Inverse. This should make a backward L-shaped selection along the right and bottom of the square.

    Select the Paint Bucket tool (G) and fill the selection with your chosen line colour.

    Press Control+A again to select the entire square. Go to Edit>Define Pattern. Name the pattern “Grid.”

    Go to File>New and set the document size to the dimensions you want for your grid. If you’ve already started the image you want to apply the grid to, open that file instead.

    • Select the Paint Bucket tool (G) and fill the selection with your chosen line colour.
    • Go to File>New and set the document size to the dimensions you want for your grid.

    Click the Paint Bucket tool (G) and, in the toolbar across the top of the screen, change the “Set Source for Fill” drop-down option to “Pattern.” Click on the pattern swatch to open the pattern drop-down list. Select the “Grid” pattern you created previously.

    Click anywhere inside your document to fill with the grid pattern.

    Your grid doesn’t have to be comprised of perfect squares. To create grids with rectangles, play with different document dimensions while creating patterns.

    Table of Contents

    Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    What is the shortcut to enable Grid in Photoshop?

    Turn it by choosing View > Show > Grid, or use the keyboard shortcut Cmd + ‘ (Mac) or Ctrl + ‘ (Windows). The grid appears on your document and by default the gridlines are spaced an inch apart with four subdivisions.

    How do you make a 3×3 Grid in Photoshop?

    In latest version of Photoshop CC, Go to to File > New. Create a new canvas that is 3000px X 3000px and 300 ppi. Go to View > Show > Grid. Go to View > Snap to > Grid. Go to Edit > Preferences > Guides, Grid & Slices. Change the Grid settings to a Grid Line every 1000 pixels and subdivisions 1. Hit OK.

    Is there a grid in Photoshop?

    To add the grid, choose View > Show > Grid. You will immediately see a grid overlaid on your new document. The grid that you can see is non-printing, it’s simply there for your benefit and reference. To open up the grid preferences choose Edit > Preferences> Guides, Grids & Slices & Count.

    How do I show pixel grid in Photoshop?

    The pixel grid appears when you zoom past 500% and can help with editing at the pixel level. You can control whether this grid is displayed or not using the View > Show > Pixel Grid menu option. If you don’t see the pixel grid menu option, then you most likely haven’t got OpenGL enabled in your Photoshop preferences.

    What is a 3×3 grid?

    A 3 × 3 magic square is a square grid containing the numbers 1 to 9 in such a way that the sum of each row, column, and diagonal has the same “magic total”.

    What is a 3 by 3 grid?

    A 3 x 3 grid will actually have four columns and four rows, because the shaded area with the printed numbers (numbers you will multiply or add together) does not necessarily count as part of the grid.

    How do I put a Grid on a photo?

    How to Make a Photo Grid Collage? Open Fotor and click the “Make a Collage” button. Click “Classic Collage” and select the photo grid template you like. Upload your images, drag and drop your photos into collage cells. You can also modify the backgrounds, borders and add effects, stickers and texts.

    How do I add gridlines to a photo?

    How can Users Add Gridlines in Paint? First, open the search box by clicking the Type here to search button. Enter ‘Paint’ in the search box. Click the View tab. Select the Gridlines option to add a grid to the canvas as shown below. Users can open images by clicking File > Open.

    How do I create a grid pattern in Photoshop?

    Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    How do you copy grid lines in Photoshop?

    select the first document and click from menu : File > Scripts > Guides Copy.

    What is 3×3 magic square?

    For a 3×3 magic square, there is actually only one normal solution and all of the puzzles are derived from rotations or reflections of that puzzle. The normal variations of these puzzles (the 3×3 puzzles that contain only 1-9) will have a magic constant of 15.

    What is the area of a 3×3 grid?

    a 3×3 grid has 9 1×1 (3 * 3) squares 4 2×2 (2 * 2) squares and a single 3×3 square = 14.

    How do I put a grid on a picture on my iPhone?

    How to Put Grid on iPhone Camera Open the Settings app. Tap Photos & Camera (or just Camera if using iOS 11 or later). Find Grid and toggle it on.

    How do I put a grid over a picture on a Mac?

    Open your image; then click Edit on the top right of the program window. Select the Crop button (third from the top) on the toolbar at the right. Drag the brackets at the corners of your image, and use the grid lines on the screen to help compose your picture.

    What are grid lines?

    : any of a series of numbered horizontal and perpendicular lines that divide a map into squares to form a grid by means of which any point may be located by a system of rectangular coordinates.

    What is an isometric grid?

    What is an isometric grid? The isometric grid itself is basically the guideline to have the right angles when drawing from an isometric perspective. ‍ The “true isometric grid” has a 30º angle between the x and z axes to the plane.

    How do I add a ruler in Photoshop?

    Rulers and Guides In the menu, click on Photoshop and select Preference and General. Select Units & Rulers from the sidebar in the pop-up window and adjust your ruler to inches, pixels, millimeters, or other unit of measurment you wish to use. Click the OK button when you are finished.

    How do I add a grid to Photoshop on IPAD?

    To turn on the grid, tap the Precision menu on the right. In the menu, you can turn on Snap To Grid to snap content to the hidden grid. To show the grid, turn on the Grid option. You can then set options for the grid like style (lines or dots), color, spacing, and subdivisions.

    How do I show ruler in Photoshop?

    To show or hide rulers, choose View > Rulers.

    How do I change grid size?

    To change the grid size on Home screen, follow these steps: 1 On the Home Screen, tap and hold an empty area. 2 Tap Home screen settings. 3 Tap Home screen grid. 4 Select the Grid Size to display. Tap APPLY to change the Screen Grid on the Home Screen.

    What is the rule of thirds in photography?

    The rule of thirds is a composition guideline that places your subject in the left or right third of an image, leaving the other two thirds more open. While there are other forms of composition, the rule of thirds generally leads to compelling and well-composed shots.

    What is Albrecht Durer’s magic square?

    Dürer’s magic square is a magic square with magic constant 34 used in an engraving entitled Melancholia I by Albrecht Dürer (The British Museum, Burton 1989, Gellert et al. 1989). The engraving shows a disorganized jumble of scientific equipment lying unused while an intellectual sits absorbed in thought.

    Colin Smith

    You could draw rules and lines all over the page to produce this effect. But let me show you a quicker way!

    Step 1

    We will first make a pattern. Create a new document the size of the squares you want in your grid. Be careful to check transparent for the contents. If you don’t, nothing will show behind your grid.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 2

    Select all Ctrl/Cmd+A

    Now got to Edit>stroke, select your color and enter the settings as shown in the picture.

    Make it 1 for the width and choose “Inside”

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 3

    Now we will save our new pattern. Edit>Define Pattern. I called it umm.. grid. You now have it saved and you can use it as often as you wish.

    Step 4

    Create a new document. Make it however large you want your image to be and fill with black.

    Create a new blank layer and open the fill dialog box by: Edit>Fill or press Shift+Backspace. Under contents use Pattern.

    Click on the custom pattern, select our little grid that we just made.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 5

    Hit Ok and wow, imagine that? We have a tiled pattern that just happens to be our grid. You could stop right here if you wanted, or go a little further into the world of 3D!

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 6

    Press Crtl/Cmd+T to bring up the free transform tool. Now Cmd click on Mac, or right click on PC and select perspective. Grap the little box on one of the bottom corners and drag out from the image.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 7

    If you really want a Tron effect, you will need the grid to glow.

    Choose the layer styles from the bottom of the layers panel (the little f icon)

    Select Outer Glow and copy the settings as shown.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    And there you have it, a glowing, Tron style perspective grid. Enjoy!

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Comment and let me know what you think.

    CS6 Superguide

    Join our list to receive more tutorials and tips on Photoshop. Get exclusive tutorials, discounts and the free super guides. No spam, all content, no more than once a week.
    If you’re on our list, you will receive it free by email as soon as it’s available. If not, sign up now and get the CS6 Superguide for free. Or click the image below.

    One response to “Tron Perspective Grid glowing lines Photoshop Tutorial”

    I followed these instructions with modifications for Elements 13 and it works! So sweet of you to do this. I just love it.(Perspective grid lines – TRON) Thanks very much. Patterns are a great tool and so easy to make.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Сегодня мы с вами научимся создавать календарную сетку в программе Adobe Photoshop.

    Для начала поясню, зачем делать сетку именно в программе Photoshop. Во-первых, вы в любой момент сможете поправить размер шрифта, цвет, яркость, контраст и другие параметры своего текста, что невозможно при создании календарной сетки в других программах, либо настройки в них ограничены. Во-вторых, у вас появится макет, с помощью которого возможна дальнейшая обработка, то есть вы редактируете только изображение, а календарную сетку перемещаете куда заблагорассудится. И, в третьих, вы можете создать операции по добавлению текста, корректировке вашего макета (пример такой операции в видео чуть ниже).

    Сперва создадим любой документ, например формата A4. Далее выбираем Horizontal Type Tool

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Печатаем цифры, например, 01. Затем создаем направляющие, для того чтобы было легче распределить текст впоследствии. Делаем их в форме квадратов, как показано на рисунке ниже. Должно получится 7 клеток по горизонтали и столько же по вертикали.

    Теперь создаем остальные цифры — до 07 числа, внося их в каждую клетку отдельным блоком.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Чтобы вам было проще при клонировании номеров, можете при нажатой клавише Alt и выбранной цифре перетащить ее на новое место, таким образом вы делаете копию слоя.

    Когда все числа будут введены, выделяем первые 7 цифр по горизонтали и идем в меню Layer-Align-Vertical Centers . Выравниваем междустрочный интервал и двигаемся дальше.

    Упрощать задачу — вот, что самое главное в данном проекте, поэтому выделяем при нажатой клавише Shift слои от 01 до 07, нажимаем правой кнопкой мыши и выбираем пункт Link Layers . Затем при нажатой клавише Alt передвигаем слои вниз — на следующий ряд пустых клеток. Переименовываем текст и совершаем аналогичные операции с оставшимися числами. У вас должно получится 5 слоев с номерами от 01 до 31. Ненужные цифры удаляем.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Теперь при необходимости можете добавить таким же действием дни недели.

    Выделяем снова все текстовые слои и идем в меню Photoshop: Layer-Smart Objects-Convert to Smart Object . Таким образом мы преобразуем все слои в Смарт Объект, что нам даст более гибкие настройки над последующими действиями.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Переименовываем слой на «month», или как вам больше нравится 😉

    Затем берем инструмент Rectangular Marquee Tool и выделяем в виде прямоугольника цифры от 06 до 28, как показано на рисунке ниже.

    Далее нажимаем в панели слоев на пункт Create new fill or adjustment layer , выбираем красный цвет и нажимаем OK.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Выбрав слой с красной заливкой, нажимаем клавиши Alt+Ctrl+G или идем в меню Layer-Create Clipping Mask .

    Вот, что у нас должно получится.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    В приведенном ниже видеоролике произведена автоматизация действий, таких как набор данных в текстовые поля, соединение и группировка слоев, создание дополнительных экшенов для удаления лишних чисел и многое другое.

    Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    How do I make a print grid in Photoshop 2020?

    Use Ctrl+” then Shift+Ctrl+” to toggle off the grid and snap-to-grid mode. Draw a rectangle shape to the size you want, then change Fill to pattern and choose your new grid pattern. You can scale the size of your pattern in the Pattern Fill menu.

    How do you make a 3×3 grid in Photoshop?

    The 3×3 grid is also called the “Rule of Thirds” grid. With your image open, click on the “Crop” tool, then click on one of the crop handles around the perimeter of the image, and the 3×3 grid will appear.

    How can I turn a picture into a grid?

    Drawing Grid Maker

    1. Load a picture from your device or web browser (press and hold picture to share with Drawing Grid Maker from web browser).
    2. Set number of rows and columns.
    3. Set color of grid.
    4. Set line width.
    5. Save the image and print it out, or display it on your monitor/tablet/phone while you draw. Reviews.

    How do you make a grid system?

    Building your grid system

    1. Choose a spec to create your grid with.
    2. Set box-sizing to border-box.
    3. Create a grid container.
    4. Calculate column-width.
    5. Determine gutter positions.
    6. Create a debug grid.
    7. Make layout variations.
    8. Make your layouts responsive.

    How do I create a grid layout in Photoshop?

    Set guide and grid preferences

    1. Do one of the following: (Windows) Choose Edit > Preferences > Guides, Grid, & Slices. …
    2. For Color, choose a color for the guides, the grid, or both. …
    3. For Style, choose a display option for guides or the grid, or both.
    4. For Gridline Every, enter a value for the grid spacing. …
    5. Click OK.

    Can I print a grid in Photoshop?

    4 Answers. Set the grid size to the increments you want then double-click the Grid tool. Then with the little preferences menu there at the top left be certain to select “Render Grids to Photoshop”. … You’ll get a grid on the document as a pixel layer.

    Can you change the grid size in Photoshop?

    Grid Size is controlled in the Preferences. Choose Edit > Preferences > Guides, Grids & Slices The Guides, Grids & Slices dialog box appears. In the Grid section choose a Color:, Style:, and Gridline Every: for grid spacing. You can even create Subdivisions for increased accuracy.

    What is a 3 by 3 grid?

    A 3 x 3 grid will actually have four columns and four rows, because the shaded area with the printed numbers (numbers you will multiply or add together) does not necessarily count as part of the grid.

    How do I make a grid background?

    How do I save a grid image in Photoshop?

    You could make a pattern that is the size of one grid square (make a square selection, stroke the selection, then go to the edit menu and “define pattern” and then fill a layer with the pattern you made (edit menu, fill, use pattern, then custom pattern, choose the pattern you just made) and save the image….

    A Step-by-Step Guide to Designing an Instagram Grid for Your Feed

    Have you ever noticed a full image spanned across multiple squares of an Instagram feed and wondered how to do it for yourself? We’ve got a super simple Instagram grid layout guide for you to follow to create your own—EVEN IF YOU’RE NOT A DESIGNER! Instagram content lives and dies on image quality, and when spanning larger images across multiple posts, resolution is key, so we’ll be using Adobe Photoshop to create high-resolution images for the best output. Here’s what you’ll need to begin:

    • An Instagram account
    • Adobe Photoshop
    • 1 high res image (at least 1500px wide)
    • For a grid of 3, use a photo in landscape
    • Grids of 6 should be taller landscape photos
    • Grids of 9 should be square
    • Grids of larger than 9 should be in portrait

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 1:

    Download and install Adobe Photoshop, if you don’t already have it. If you’re not ready to pay for a full license, select the free trial (and remember to set a calendar reminder to cancel before you’re auto-billed!)

    STEP 2:

    Download one of the following Instagram grid layout templates we’ve created for you by simply clicking the below link for the arrangement you want. Once it’s downloaded, open it in Photoshop.1 Row – 1 x 32 Rows – 2 x 33 Rows – 3 x 3 Once you have it open in Photoshop, it should look something like this (2×3 for reference purposes):

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 3:

    Pull your image into Photoshop. We’ve already set up a layer for you, all you need to do is make sure you’ve selected the layer titled “Place Photo Here” on the right (see below), and simply drag your photo from your desktop or folder into the document.

    You should initially see something like this:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 4:Scale the image by holding option + shift and dragging a corner to scale the image to the size you want. Make sure you cover the full grid. The end result should look like this:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 5:

    Select your sections, and save them individually. Hit “M” on your keyboard, or select the “Rectangular Marquee Tool” (the dotted-line rectangle, second item down from the top on your left “Essentials” toolbar). Make sure you have “snap to guides” enabled (VIEW > SNAP TO > GUIDES ). Move your cursor to the bottom right square, and select that full square within the blue grid. Copy that selection. You should now have a white dotted rectangle surrounding the area.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 6:

    Save your grid item individually.Open a new project and place your selection. Go to FILE > NEW and paste your grid selection. Finally, go to FILE > SAVE AS > select JPEG > and save your first grid section as something easily recognizable, like “insta_grid_1”. You have successfully created the first image for your grid.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 7:

    Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each grid item. Depending on how many items are in your grid, repeat the steps in the order of the numbers we’ve placed on our grid templates, saving each item with the corresponding number, so you remember the order to post it. Here is a visual representation of the order to follow:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    STEP 8 (FINAL):

    Upload to Instagram! Upload your photos in ascending order. We recommend adding a short and sweet description for each image just in case a user scrolls past it in on their actual feed in real time and it seems confusing (for example, start the caption with the place in which that specific image falls into the grid, like “(3/6)” and instruct users to view your feed for the full image. Happy posting!

    Looking for help elevating your social game for your brand or business? Our experts at Hawke Media will elevate your social media to reach more customers and increase revenue.

    Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    As many you asked, how do you quickly make a grid in Photoshop?

    Also the question is, is there a grid in Photoshop? The Grid feature in Photoshop is a great tool to assist you with your layout designs, whether its design for the web or print. Adding a “Snap” lets you align objects very precisely along the lines of the grid. And rather than make a new grid each time you’re designing, you can set up grid preference that can be reused.

    Considering this, how do I make rows and columns in Photoshop?

    1. Choose Edit > Preferences > Units & Rulers (Windows) or Photoshop > Preferences > Units & Rulers (Mac OS).
    2. Enter values for Width and Gutter.
    3. Use the File > New command to create a new image, select Columns for the Width value, and enter the number of columns you need for the new document.

    In this regard, how do you make a grid in Photoshop 2021?

    How do you make a grid?

    To draw the grid: Place the ruler at the bottom of the paper and do the same thing. Then use the ruler to make a straight line connecting each dot at the bottom with its partner at the top. Now place the ruler on the left side of your paper, and make a small mark at every inch.

    How do you center a grid in Photoshop?

    In the Layers palette, select two or more layers that you want to center. Choose Layer on the menu bar, followed by Align and Vertical Centers to center the layer contents vertically. Choose Layer > Align > Horizontal Centers to center the layer contents horizontally.

    How do I export a grid in Photoshop?

    1. Click the GuideGuide panel flyout menu.
    2. Click Export Grids .
    3. Choose a location for the exported file.
    4. Click Export .

    Can you make tables in Photoshop?

    Whether you need to draw information-holding tables for a client or for your business’s promotional materials, you can use Photoshop’s Shape tool to draw the table’s columns and rows. The Text tool provides text for the table, and layer styles enable you to add color and flair.

    What is column size in Photoshop?

    Columns help you position images or elements precisely. The New, Image Size, and Canvas Size commands let you specify image width in terms of columns.

    How do I insert a table in Photoshop cs6?

    1. Select the cells or table you want to embed, and then choose Edit > Cut or Copy. Place the insertion point in the cell where you want the table to appear, and then choose Edit > Paste.
    2. Click inside a cell, choose Table > Insert Table, specify the number of rows and columns, and then click OK.

    How do you make a 3×3 grid in Photoshop?

    1. Go to to File > New. Create a new canvas that is 3000px X 3000px and 300 ppi.
    2. Go to View > Show > Grid.
    3. Go to View > Snap to > Grid.
    4. Go to Edit > Preferences > Guides, Grid & Slices.
    5. Change the Grid settings to a Grid Line every 1000 pixels and subdivisions 1. Hit OK.

    How do you make a grid on word?

    1. Display the Page Layout tab (or the Layout tab if you are using Word 2016 or a later version) of the ribbon.
    2. Within the Arrange group, click the Align drop-down list.
    3. Choose Grid Settings.
    4. Use the controls in the dialog box to set the specifics of the grid.

    How do I make a grid online?

    1. ① Choose a Photo Grid Template. Choose from 50+ pre-defined photo grid templates to begin the magic and fun.
    2. ② Edit. Upload your photos, and just drag drop to template & decorate with background patterns.
    3. ③ Save/Share.

    Is the grid method cheating?

    So is drawing using a Grid cheating? No, it is not. … But it is also not good to rely on drawing with the grid method because you are relying on the grid instead of your eyes. So when you are trying to draw from your Imagination and you are used to the grid method, then you will have a hard time.

    APPLY A CUSTOM GRID EFFECT TO ANY IMAGE IN PHOTOSHOP! | Learn to create a custom, exactly precise grid pattern that will automatically work perfectly with any image in this Photoshop tutorial.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    In this Photoshop tutorial, we’ll create an exact 1×1 inch pattern overlay that can be placed over any image or graphic. This grid will save with or be printed with the file and can be useful for sketching or building a reference grid over a complicated piece of artwork.

    Tags: photoshop tutorial, photoshop grid, grid effect, place grid over image, photoshop grid effect, photoshop CC, photoshop tutorials, Adobe Photoshop, sketch grid photoshop, graphic design photoshop, how to, photoshop help, tutvid, nathaniel dodson, FEAT

    Tutorial Recording Notes:

    Disclaimer: these are the actual notes I used to record this video and are written in a language you may or may not understand. Hopefully, you find them useful or cool.

    1. The goal here is to create an inch by inch grid that can be placed over any image that you’re working on.
    2. Use the crop tool to crop the image to 24in X 18in at 300ppi
    3. Note that the ppi setting is important to remember, but it can be any number you like.
    4. Hit Cmd/Ctrl + R to turn on the rulers and right-click on the rulers and choose to view the inches
    5. Show how you can create a grid layout 24×18 and show how this lines up perfectly with the inch markers, but this will not appear on a printed image or when you export a JPEG
    6. We need something more permanent so create a new document and set the size to 1 inch by 1 inch and make sure you set the ppi to the same ppi you set in the Crop tool earlier
    7. In this new document grab the rectangle tool and click a single time and create a rectangle that is 1 in X 5px and set the fill to black(this will be the color of your grid), no stroke and make sure snapping is turned on and drag this shape to the bottom of the document.
    8. Duplicate this shape and use Free Transform to rotate upright and drag to the right side of the document.
    9. Merge these shape layers together and unlock and delete the background layer
    10. Go Edit> and define this as a pattern. Name it 1x1inch300ppi.
    11. Go to the image where you want the grid and add a Pattern fill layer and choose this new pattern.
    12. We can now double check this pattern by dropping that 24×18 guide layout over this again and see how good it is.
    13. A couple final things. You can use this new grid on any 300ppi image regardless of the size. The important factor is that 300ppi.
    14. Create a 10x10inch image and show how the grid still works.
      If you don’t want to crop the image, use the Crop tool, but don’t input anything into width/height, but do change the ppi to 300 and commit the change.
    15. The image will change pixel size, but everything will be at that 300ppi and none of the image will be cropped away and lost.
    16. The new, uncropped image is ready to accept that grid that we created.
    17. Of course, you could always make grids for 72ppi, 96ppi, and 150ppi images as well. This would ensure your grid is always at the 1x1inch size.
    18. Show how to use a clipped Hue/Saturation layer to convert a black grid to white, etc…

    Need some help precisely positioning the elements in your photos and designs? In this tutorial I will teach you how to create custom Photoshop grids and Photoshop guides layouts. This will help you create more appealing compositions, line up text, shapes and images.

    How to Setup a Photoshop Grid?

    1. Add a Grid

    Go to View-Show-Grid to add a grid to your image, or use the shortcut Ctrl + ‘ (Cmd + ‘).

    2. Use the Grid for Photos and Drawings

    The grid should now be superimposed over the image. It’s a perfect tool if you like to use the rule of thirds in photography. You can also use grids as a template when making a collage in Photoshop.

    You can also use it for your drawings and designs to align the objects more precisely. Remember, that the grid is there just for your reference. If you decide to print your work, the grid won’t appear on the printed image.

    3. Go to Preferences

    To adjust the color of the grid, open the Photoshop menu, and go to Preferences (Ctrl + K/Cmd + K) – Guides, Grid & Slices.

    4. Set Preferences

    Find the “Grid” section in a window that appears. Here you can adjust the color, size of the lines, as well as the number of subdivisions. You can also choose between 3 styles: lines, dashed lines, and dots. Click “OK” to apply changes.

    How to Setup Photoshop Guides?

    1. Add Guides

    Go to View – Rulers to make the rulers visible, or use the shortcut Ctrl + R (Cmd + R).

    2. Drag the Rulers to Create Guides

    The rulers should now be displayed around your working area. Click on the ruler and start dragging out as many guides as you like.

    3. Position Your Guides

    Select the Move Tool (V) to drag the lines to the desired position and orientation.

    4. Go to Preferences

    To adjust the guides further go to Photoshop – Preferences (Ctrl + K/Cmd + K) – Guides, Grid & Slices.

    5. Set Preferences

    Find the “Guides” section at the top of the window. Here you can adjust the color and the style of guides. Click “OK” to apply changes.

    This is from an article I wrote for PhotographyBB magazine – the best photography magazine on the web! It’s a technique you can use to gather together a number of your shots with a common theme and present them in a nice grid format. The idea is to do some close cropping on the images so they are all the same shape.

    1. The first thing you need to do is to sort through your photographs and choose nine images that you want to use in your poster. It doesn’t matter if the pictures are in Portrait or Landscape orientation because you will be cropping them into squares.

    2. In Photoshop, choose File > New. From the Preset dropdown box, choose International Paper and from the Size dialog box, choose A4. We want to create a poster for printing leave the Resolution at 300 pixels. Click OK.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    3. Open up your nine images (ideally related to each other in some way). I’m using nine pictures I took of my friends’ beautiful daughter in her cot. They’re not brilliant pictures by any means but by putting them together as a group on a grid they make a nice impact.

    4. Click back on your main document to make it active. Choose View > Show, and choose Grid. An alignment grid will appear over your blank document. The grid consists of “big” boxes with 16 smaller boxes inside them. You’ll use this to line up your nine images but it will be removed before printing out your poster.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    5. Switch to the first photo you want to place on your grid. You can use the Rectangular Marquee tool (M) to make a selection in each of your photographs. When you’ve selected the Rectangular Marquee tool, hold down the Shift key and drag out a perfectly square selection of the part of the image that you want to appear on your poster.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    6. Press V to select the Move tool and drag your photo onto your grid document. Depending on the size of your original, you might find that when you drag it over, it may appear really large or really small. You’ll need to scale it to fit on the grid with your eight other photos.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    7. Press Ctrl + T (windows) or Cmd + T (Mac) to bring up Free Transform. Hold down the Shift key then grab the bottom-right corner point and drag inward to scale your photo in size. Drag the handles until your photo is three big squares high and three big squares wide. With the transform handles still in place, put the cursor inside the handles and drag the photo so it is two small squares from the left and one big square from the top. Press Enter/Return to commit the transformation.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    8. Choose the second photo you want to appear on the grid from the Window menu and with the Rectangular Marquee tool selected, press-and-hold the Shift key, and drag a perfectly square selection around the focal point of your image. Switch to the Move tool again, click within the selected area, and drag-and-drop it onto your grid document.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    9. Now here’s a small time-saving tip. Since you’ve already used Free Transform to scale the first photo, you can now take advantage of “Transform Again.” Just press Shift + Ctrl + T (windows) or Shift + Cmd + T (Mac) and the exact same resizing that was applied to the previous photo will be applied to this one. Press Enter/Return to commit your transformation. Use the Move tool to position this photo to the right of your first photo, with just one small grid square separating them.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    10. Repeat the process with the remaining seven photos, lining them up as you go. Separate each row of images by one small box.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    11. You can get rid of the grid now that all the images are lined up. Choose View > Show > Grid.

    12. Now to add some text to your poster at the bottom. I used a sans-serif font called Century Gothic.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    And that completes the poster.

    An optional step you might like to take is to convert all the images to black and white.

    In the Layers palette, select the top layer (not the text layer) then click on the Create New Adjustment Layer icon at the bottom of the Layers palette. Choose Channel Mixer from the drop down menu. Make sure the Preview check box is checked, then when the dialog appears, turn on the Monochrome checkbox.

    Use the Red, Green and Blue sliders to change how the images look. When you get the black and white effect you like, click OK.

    Grids are very popular among web designers. While working on my current project I decided to use a grid for the background. Normal grids didn’t give my design the edge I was looking for. I wanted to add a diagonal grid. Normal grids usually get associated with technical, futuristic design, where as diagonal grids give a more funky, modern feel to a design.

    Let’s get started on creating the diagonal grid.

    Note: If you get confused at any point, start again at Step 1.

    Step 1

    Open Photoshop and create and new document.

    The shortcut

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    I will be using a 20 x 20 square for this tutorial. Feel free to experiment with different sizes if you’d like.
    Make sure you set the background contents to transparent, otherwise we won’t be able to reuse this pattern in future projects.

    Step 2

    Zoom in to a 3200% so that we can see what we are doing.

    Windows: ctrl + + (plus sign)
    Mac: cmd + + (plus sign)

    Step 3

    Select a foreground colour, I chose black (#000000)
    Grab the line tool and draw a line form the top-left hand corner to the bottom-right hand corner.
    Then do it for the other corner as well (top-right hand corner to bottom-left hand corner).
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Note: Remember to hold shift while dragging your line to get a perfect 45 degree line.

    You should end up with a image resembling an “X”.

    Step 4

    Go to Edit > Define pattern
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Step 5

    Give you pattern a relevant name. I prefer to always put the size of the grid at the back of my pattern name. That way I don’t get confused if I had 5 different “diagonal grid” patterns.

    Step 6

    Create a another new document. I made mine 500px by 500px.

    Step 7

    Go to Edit > Fill

    The shortcut

    Windows: shift + backspace
    Mac: shift + return

    Step 8

    Under Contents, from the drop down menu. Select Pattern.
    How to make a grid in photoshop
    Select the pattern we created. This will always default to the last pattern in the box. Hit OK.
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    End Result

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    The colours can obviously be changed to whichever colours you’d prefer.
    You can change the colours if you’d like.

    Any questions or comments?

    I’d be interested to know how to make a tiling texture from a crumpled peace of paper or maybe from an interesting vintage texture I’ve scanned from a book cover. The trick is to make the tile not look tiled but still keep the image file size down.

    Would be cool to see a tut like that on CSS-PLUS 😉

    Crumpled paper. I have done tiling of crumpled paper before. This took me a while to figure out, but once you get it. You will be able to tile nearly anything.

    For example, one of my past projects I managed to tile water

    Thank you very much!
    A simple and easy to follow guide 🙂

    Cancel reply

    This site uses Akismet to reduce spam. Learn how your comment data is processed.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Popular Articles

    • Create your own jQuery Image Slider
    • 6 steps to take if your jQuery is not working
    • jQuery if / else statements
    • PlusSlider 1.0
    • Create Accordions with CSS3, HTML5 and jQuery

    My name is.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    . Jamy Golden. I’m a web developer from Cape Town, South Africa with a passion for the web. I aim to think differently and come up with innovative ideas.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Table of Contents

    How do you make a grid in Photoshop cs3?

    G o to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    What is the shortcut to enable grid in Photoshop?

    Turn it by choosing View > Show > Grid, or use the keyboard shortcut Cmd + ‘ (Mac) or Ctrl + ‘ (Windows). The grid appears on your document and by default the gridlines are spaced an inch apart with four subdivisions.

    How do I show the ruler in Photoshop cs3?

    1. To show the Rulers in Photoshop, either go to View in the menu and select Rulers, or press CMD+R (Mac) or CTRL+R (Windows) on your keyboard.
    2. To hide Rulers in Photoshop, either go to View in the menu and deselect Rulers, or press CMD+R (Mac) or CTRL+R (Windows) on your keyboard.

    How do I show grids in Photoshop?

    Show or hide a grid, guides, or Smart Guides

    1. Choose View > Show > Grid.
    2. Choose View > Show > Guides.
    3. Choose View > Show > Smart Guides.
    4. Choose View > Extras. This command also shows or hides layer edges, selection edges, target paths, and slices.

    How do I show pixel grid in Photoshop?

    The pixel grid appears when you zoom past 500% and can help with editing at the pixel level. You can control whether this grid is displayed or not using the View > Show > Pixel Grid menu option. If you don’t see the pixel grid menu option, then you most likely haven’t got OpenGL enabled in your Photoshop preferences.

    How do I show the grid in Photoshop?

    Do one of the following:

    1. Choose View > Show > Grid.
    2. Choose View > Show > Guides.
    3. Choose View > Show > Smart Guides.
    4. Choose View > Extras. This command also shows or hides layer edges, selection edges, target paths, and slices.

    How do you show rulers in Photoshop?

    To show or hide rulers, choose View > Rulers.

    How do I get rid of grid lines in Adobe?

    Go to menu View -> Show/Hide -> Ruler & Grids and choose Grid to hide it if it is visible. A check mark appears next to the command name when the grid is displayed. You can also use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+U (Windows) or Command+U (Mac) to show/hide it.

    How do I put a grid on a photo?

    How to Make a Photo Grid Collage?

    1. Open Fotor and click the “Make a Collage” button.
    2. Click “Classic Collage” and select the photo grid template you like.
    3. Upload your images, drag and drop your photos into collage cells.
    4. You can also modify the backgrounds, borders and add effects, stickers and texts.

    How do I show grid lines in Photoshop cs6?

    Objects and tools can optionally snap to the lines on a grid, depending on whether you have View→Snap To→Grid turned on or off. You can show or hide grids by choosing View→Show→Grid. Or click the View Extras icon in the Application bar and select Show Grids from the drop-down list to toggle the view off and on.

    Why is my grid not showing in Photoshop?

    You can control whether this grid is displayed or not using the View > Show > Pixel Grid menu option. If you don’t see the pixel grid menu option, then you most likely haven’t got OpenGL enabled in your Photoshop preferences. To fix this, select the Edit > Preferences > Performance… menu option.

    dan.abner99

    Member

    I am new to Photoshop, however, I was hoping to use it to plan and visualize some mosaic tile projects before getting started with the physical medium. Therefore, I am looking for a method to:

    1) Create a grid (usually of squares, sometimes rectangles or triangles) to overlap on a blank document of varying heights and lengths. There could be anywhere from 50 to 100 squares needed across the length and height separately.

    2) Easily be able to fill in color to each square separately with one click.

    3) Because the grid will actually represent the grout in the mosaic, ideally I would be able to change the grid line widths and color.

    I have read many posts and blogs and watched many videos. I was able to follow the instructions in this video to create the grid relatively easily, however, the grid squares do NOT fill in as expected using the paint bucket tool:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    I watched another video where video where the person used the rectangle tool to draw a separate square within the grid. I am hoping that there is a one-click method of assigning colors to each square. Any assistance is appreciated.

    More options

    ph_o_e_n_ix

    Well-Known Member

    Mod edit: This is an executable file.

    Attachments

    More options

    IamSam

    Administrator

    Hello and welcome!

    No matter what method you choose to create the grid, unless a script does it for you, you will still have to make a selection of the individual cells in order to fill with color. There really isn’t a “one click method”. At the very least it could be two clicks, one to select (cell or grid) and one to fill.

    More options

    ph_o_e_n_ix

    Well-Known Member

    More options

    IamSam

    Administrator

    Yes, this is correct. (depending on how the grid was created) as long as you select all cells and give them a solid color.

    All cells need to be selected first.
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    On a blank layer, add a color to the cells, in this case white.
    (note: in this example, I left the selection on but it can be turned off after filling)
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Now you can fill the individual cells using the Paint Bucket Tool and one click.
    This is a three+ step process that leads up to being able to add “one click” color to the cells.
    (note: in this example, I left the selection on but it can be turned off after filling)
    How to make a grid in photoshop

    More options

    ph_o_e_n_ix

    Well-Known Member

    It’s not necessasary to select the sells first.

    If you have applied my script, you can see, that the paint bucket tool was already selected, a new layer called “fill” was added on top of the grid layer, so you can fill the cells directy (if you have you color already choosen and your settings of the paint bucket tool are the right one).

    The grid below limits the cells to be filled.

    More options

    IamSam

    Administrator

    More options

    IamSam

    Administrator

    @ph_o_e_n_ix – Can you post screenshots and explanations of how and what your script does? This may be exactly what the OP is looking for.

    Note: I have a habit of NEVER opening an executable file from this forum (or any forum). This isn’t a trust issue, it’s just a personal policy. So I have not opened your script. sorry!

    More options

    dan.abner99

    Member

    More options

    dan.abner99

    Member

    More options

    thebestcpu

    Well, there is a way to both select and fill at the same time yet it may not be everyone’s cup of tea or for the faint of heart.

    This can be achieved by using the capability under File > Scripts > Script Event Manager along with a very simple Action

    1) Create an Action that all it does is a Fill command using Foreground using Cmd +Opt keyboard shortcut (Cntrl + Alt for PCs) Remember where you park your Action

    2) File > Scripts > Script Event Manager
    — Click on the checkbox in upper left corner labeled “Enable Events to Run Scripts/Actions”
    — Click on the dropdown box “Photoshop Event” and select the option “Add an Event”
    —- Fill out the dialog box. The upper box is just a descriptor name (you can name it anything) the second box must be set to lower case “setd” without the quotes as shown. This is the event for a simple selection (not add to, subtract from, exclusive or select)

    ——Click OK
    —— Back in the original dialog box click the check box to run an Action and select the Action Set and Action you created in #1 above. I filled in where mine was located
    —— CRITICAL CRITICAL CRITICAL after doing these steps you need to click on the “Add” button to have this event activated

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    3) I will assume you have already set the grid and a Layer above for the fill action you need
    4) Select the Magic Wand Tool with a simple select mode, contiguous, and sample all Layers. I used “Point Sample” and tolerance of 8 yet this depends on the background color of your grid. Setting Anti-Alias is optional
    5) Select desired foreground color from the foreground color chip in the toolbox
    6) Click in the middle of the grid area you want filled and the grid square will be automatically filled with the foreground color. Keep picking square to fill. You can change the foreground color and click grid cells with the new color
    7) When done, go back into Files >Scripts >Scripts Event Manager and turn off the event by unclicking the checkbox in upper left corner (you will regret it if you don’t do this last step)

    Here is a simple grid that I filled one click at a time and changing foreground color as I went along:

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    NOTE: This event is also triggered by some other actions such as deleting a selection so the downside of this approach is the overhead of turning it on and off and not doing other Photoshop work in the meantime. I believe the Event Handling could also be turned on and off with a simple Action if that is helpful.

    Just another way to consider and hope this helps
    John Wheeler

    There is no need to deny the usefulness of the grid for (web) design, at least it would be silly. Any photoshop grid template is capable to simplify the work of a designer, and omit questions like: “I think I should move it a bit to the right.

    Photoshop grid is needed for a harmonious arrangement of elements on the page. Every website or an app you have seen was designed using the grid, even in a drag-and-drop interface you’re arranging content blocks using the grid.
    Not a single design can be created without the grid. No matter how advanced your designing skills are, you will need it to arrange all the content blocks pixel to pixel.

    If you’re not using grids (for some reason) you need to try them on, and you will see how much time you will save on your designs.

    So why do you need to use grids?

    • The grid allows you to organize information in proper order.
    • The grid can save time you spend searching for free or a suitable place in the layout.
    • The grid allows you to add new information, which will not violate overall graphics design concept.
    • The grid can become the basis for building sub-pages on your site.
    • Grids ease perception of the material, and help find the right information much quicker.

    Ok, now you know why using the grid is important, time to get some. Below you will find number or resources where you can download free photoshop grid templates.

    GuideGuide

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    GuideGuide makes designers work less painful. Pixel accurate columns, rows, midpoints, and baselines can be created according to your document or selected with the click of a button. Frequently used guide sets can be saved for further use. Grids can use multiple types of measurements. Honestly, if you haven’t started downloading it by now, you’re probably a masochist.

    Modular Grid Pattern

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    The tool for a quick design modular grid in Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Fireworks, GIMP, Microsoft Expression Design and other. You just follow the link and download it as a PNG file, Photoshop pattern or transparency mask. Simple, convenient and useful for any web developer or designer.

    1200px grid

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    All modern screens are at least 1200 pixels wide, so a 1200px grid is a necessity for every developer. You can download it as a Photoshop, Illustrator or CSS file and get a flexible and convenient 15-columns grid. You will able to use just after downloading, in a blink of an eye.

    Bootstrap responsive grid PSD – Mobile, Tablet, Web – Free

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    This set of responsive grids are based on a classy Twitter combination of column/gutter width. You can use it for all types of screens: mobile, tablets and PCs.

    Used sizes:

    • Web: 1280px width – 70px columns – 30px gutter
    • Tablet: 1024px width – 60px columns – 20px gutter
    • Mobile: 320px width – 10px columns – 10px gutter

    iPad Retina Wireframe Grid

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    If you were looking for an IPad grid – here it is. Some really great person also didn’t find a Retina grid, so he created it and now shares it with everyone completely for free. You can download it as a PSD template. Its dimensions are: 2048x1536px.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    1200px Grid Template

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Here’s 1200px Photoshop grid for free made by Piotr Wilk for his project. The grid consists of 12 columns, 10px gutter, 80px per column. Enjoy!

    Bootstrap 4 Grid PSD

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Many Bootstrap websites start their life as a mockup in Photoshop. When designing for Bootstrap, it comes in handy to have the targeted column sizes available in some form, so objects and text can be aligned to the grid easily. For Bootstrap 3, there’s a myriad of good templates, but for the upcoming Bootstrap 4 there is not much around yet. This is why I created this Bootstrap 4 Grid PSD as a foundation to quickly mockup a theme or website. Here’s a quick overview of the features I’ve included. For a more detailed rundown, see further down.

    Phoshop Grid Template FAQ

    There’s no need to spend your time on predesigned assets, feel free to download various PSD grid templates from our compilation.

    Photoshop grid template can ease design process of a responsive layout.

    Grids ease perception of the material, and help find the right information much quicker.

    The grid allows you to add new information, which will not violate overall design concept.

    If you’re familiar with other resources or types of grids, you’re free to add them in the comments below.

    Don’t miss out these all-time favourites

    1. The best hosting for a WordPress website. Tap our link to get the best price on the market with 30% off. If Bluehost didn’t impress you check out other alternatives.
    2. Website Installation service – to get your template up and running within just 6 hours without hassle. No minute is wasted and the work is going.
    3. ONE Membership – to download unlimited number of WordPress themes, plugins, ppt and other products within one license. Since bigger is always better.
    4. Ready-to-Use Website service is the ultimate solution that includes full template installation & configuration, content integration, implementation of must-have plugins, security features and Extended on-page SEO optimization. A team of developers will do all the work for you.
    5. Must-Have WordPress Plugins – to get the most essential plugins for your website in one bundle. All plugins will be installed, activated and checked for proper functioning.
    6. Finest Stock Images for Websites – to create amazing visuals. You’ll get access to Depositphotos.com to choose 15 images with unlimited topic and size selection.
    7. SSL Certificate Creation service – to get the absolute trust of your website visitors. Comodo Certificate is the most reliable https protocol that ensures users data safety against cyber attacks.
    8. Website speed optimization service – to increase UX of your site and get a better Google PageSpeed score.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Writing a blog post or building a micro niche WordPress website is something Alex can do bare-handed. You’re welcome to contact him via Telegram, Facebook, or LinkedIn.

    Get more to your email

    Subscribe to our newsletter and access exclusive content and offers available only to MonsterPost subscribers.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Today, a quick tour of one of the hidden gems of Photoshop – especially for building and structure mapping: The Grid.

    Photoshop has a grid built in. You can reveal it by pressing cmd/ctrl + ‘ Chances are that the default grid won’t be quite what you’re after so here’s some steps for making the grid work for you.

    1. Customise the scale

    I tend to work on projects with a 1 inch scale. Customize the grid by going to Preferences -> Grids, Guides and Slices. Set the Gridline every xxx pixels to every 100px for a 100dpi image, or every 300 pixels a 300dpi image (or just change the units in the dropdown and set it to have a gridline every inch).

    I also set the grid to have 10 subdivisions. This is useful if you need more fine grained control over your grid squares. You should now have something like 1. in the image.

    2. Use your grid!

    Yes, it’s really that easy. I create a new layer and fill it with black (or TSR blue, or whatever other starting colour you want to begin with for your walls). Then cut out rooms using the select tool and delete to remove the contents of the selection. Here I’m running the walls along the primary gridline. It looks fine, but the problem is that all walls have to be at least 5′ thick. That’s not ideal.

    3. Smarter Walls

    In this version you can see why I use 10 subdivisions in the grid. I make every wall start 1/10 of a grid square inside the major line. This way, when I want to place internal walls, they are only 2/10 of a grid wide. This gives enough room to place door icons as well. And if I’m going to use a map in a vtt later, I can run the Fog of War down the major grid lines and the players will still always be able to see the walls.

    The snap-to-grid behaviour is great, but you can toggle it using shift+cmd/ctrl+; So that will let you freehand, but still have the grid visible. Handy for drawing natural caverns.

    More tutorials under the Tips and Tricks archive

    If you have any questions, or suggestions for future tutorials, throw them in the comments!

    Explains the steps required to print the grid in Photoshop using Vanishing Point Filter.

    This tutorial explains all the steps required to print the grid in Photoshop using Vanishing Point Filter.

    To print the grid in Photoshop, We will start with the setup as shown in Fig 1. I have created 3 layers having a device picture. All the 3 layers are also having a corresponding empty layer on which we will print the grid.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Keep your layer selected on which you want to pint the grid. In my case, it is device-grid-1. Now Click on Filter -> Vanishing Point as shown in Fig 2. You can also use the standard shortcut Alt + Ctrl + V keys to open the Vanishing Point pop-up.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Click on the Create Plane Tool as shown in Fig 3.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Now draw your plane and adjust the grid value to get the desired results. I have made a grid having 3 columns as shown in Fig 4.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Click on the Settings Menu on top left corner as shown in Fig 5. Click on Render Grids To Photoshop option to print the grid on the layer selected by us in previous steps. Make sure that your grid is in blue color in order to print it. In case it turns to yellow or red, click on the plane points to turn it back to blue.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Now press the OK Button. We can see the grid printed on the layer selected by us as shown in Fig 6.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Now we can change the color of the grid printed by us. I have filled the other two devices with different grid sizes. The final result is as shown in Fig 7.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    This is how we can print the Grid in Photoshop using Vanishing Point Filter.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    When you set your layout grids on Sketch, Figma, Adobe XD, or Photoshop, Zeplin automatically displays them on your projects.

    After setting the layouts and exporting the artboards to Zeplin, you’ll be able to enable them and access their details from the grid button on the bottom left.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Setting up layout grids

    Sketch

    You can set up layouts from the menu “View > Canvas > Layout Settings. ” in Sketch. Zeplin supports both column and row layouts you set in your design file.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Figma

    To set up layouts, click the + icon next to Layout Grids in the Properties Panel in Figma. Zeplin supports only the column layouts you set in your design file.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Adobe XD

    With the release of the new XD plugin, it is not possible to view grids on Zeplin.

    ☝️ Previously, you could set up layouts from the Grid’s section of the Property Inspector and view column layouts on Zeplin. This is no longer possible due to a limitation with XD’s plugin API, but we’re in touch with their team to restore this functionality.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Photoshop

    You can set up layouts from the menu “View > New Guide Layout. ” in Photoshop. Zeplin supports only the column layouts you set in your design file.

    1,155 sales

    • Add to Favorites
    • Add to Collection

    PLEASE WATCH THE ABOVE VIDEO FOR A DEMONSTRATION OF THE ACTION AND DETAILED VIDEO TUTORIAL

    You may also like:

    Scroll down for the full list of over 100 photo effects.

    Grid Photoshop Action

    The action has been tested and working on Photoshop CS3,CS4,CS5,CS6,CC,CC 2015.5, CC 2017, CC 2018, CC 2019+

    For best results use photos that are between 1500-4000px (300ppi)

    Important to know

    • Make sure you are using the English version of Photoshop to run the Action on. All Sevenstyles Actions will only work in the English version of Photoshop.
    • Check you are using a version of Photoshop that the Action supports.
    • Watch the video tutorial to ensure you have your Photoshop file setup correctly. A link to the tutorial is also included in the ‘Readme.txt’ file in the download. You can view all of my Action tutorials here.
    • Use high-resolution photos with the Action for the best results and to avoid errors. An optimal photo resolution is between 2000px – 4500px.
    • With Adobe Creative Cloud, you can install multiple versions of Photoshop. If you like this Action but is not supported on your version of Photoshop, you can always install an additional version of Photoshop to run the Action on. Once an Action has been tested and working on a version of Photoshop, it will work forever.
    • Use Jpeg images to run the Action on. Other file types such as TIFF, BMP, PNG, PSD can cause issues with Actions, as Photoshop disables various features for different file types.
    • If a Sevenstyles Action includes a brush (.abr), pattern (.pat) or shapes (.csh) file in the download, then it must be loaded into Photoshop before playing the Action.
    • Avoid using the Action on logos or clip art style images as the lack of detail and color contrast can lead to errors.

    Having troubles with the Action?

    Table of Contents

    How do I create a grid pattern in Photoshop?

    Go to View > Show and choose “Grid” to add a grid to your workspace. It will pop up immediately. The grid consists of lines and dotted lines. You can now edit the appearance of the lines, units, and subdivisions.

    How do you make a 3×3 grid in Photoshop?

    In latest version of Photoshop CC,

    1. Go to to File > New. Create a new canvas that is 3000px X 3000px and 300 ppi.
    2. Go to View > Show > Grid.
    3. Go to View > Snap to > Grid.
    4. Go to Edit > Preferences > Guides, Grid & Slices.
    5. Change the Grid settings to a Grid Line every 1000 pixels and subdivisions 1. Hit OK.

    How do I create a pattern in Photoshop CC?

    Choose Edit > Define Pattern. Enter a name for the pattern in the Pattern Name dialog box. Note: If you are using a pattern from one image and applying it to another, Photoshop converts the color mode.

    How do I save grid lines in Photoshop?

    You could make a pattern that is the size of one grid square (make a square selection, stroke the selection, then go to the edit menu and “define pattern” and then fill a layer with the pattern you made (edit menu, fill, use pattern, then custom pattern, choose the pattern you just made) and save the image….

    What is a 3 by 3 grid?

    The 3×3 video grid helps people view your greatest videos. The 3×3 video grid is simply 3 of each why, how and what style videos. Use this 3×3 grid and give people and prospects the best chance to get to know you, like you and trust you.

    Is there a grid in Photoshop?

    To add the grid, choose View > Show > Grid. You will immediately see a grid overlaid on your new document. The grid that you can see is non-printing, it’s simply there for your benefit and reference. To open up the grid preferences choose Edit > Preferences> Guides, Grids & Slices & Count.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    How do I load a pattern into Photoshop?

    To install a pattern set take the following steps:

    1. In Photoshop open the Preset Manager (Edit > Presets > Preset Manager)
    2. Select “Patterns” from the drop down menu at the top of the Preset Manager.
    3. Click the load button then locate your . pat file on your hard drive.
    4. Click Open to install.

    How to disable snap to grid in Photoshop

    There are a few ways to show gridlines in Photoshop. One way is to use the rulers. To do this, select the object you want to show the gridlines on and click on the ruler icon at the top of the screen. You can also use the Gradient tool to create a gradient with a gridline pattern.

    There are a few things that can cause your grid not to show up in Photoshop:
    -Your grid may not be enabled in Photoshop. To enable the grid, go to Edit > Preferences > General and check the box next to “Show Grid.”
    -If you’re using an older version of Photoshop, your grid may not be supported. Check the version of Photoshop you’re using to see if the grid is available. If it’s not, upgrade to a newer version of Photoshop.

    There is no one-size-fits-all answer to this question, as the shortcut to enable grid in Photoshop will vary depending on your version of Photoshop and your preferences. However, some general tips on how to enable a grid in Photoshop include opening the file you want to work on in Photoshop, selecting the necessary layers, and clicking on the “Grid” button (or pressing “G”).

    There are many ways to put a grid on a photo. One way is to use a software program like Adobe Photoshop or GIMP. Another way is to use a digital photo frame.

    There are a few ways to turn on the grid on your camera. One way is to go into your camera’s settings and look for “grid.” Another way is to go into your camera’s menu and find “format” and then choose “grid.

    There are a few ways to make a pixel grid in Photoshop, but the easiest way is to use the Pen Tool. First, create a new document and fill it with white. Then, using the Pen Tool, draw small circles on the white background. You can make the circles any size you want, but make sure they’re all about the same size so that they form a grid.

    There are a few ways to turn off the pixel grid in Photoshop. One way is to go to Edit > Preferences > General and under the Editing Options heading, uncheck the “Use Pixel Grid” checkbox. Another way is to go to File > Automate > Create Paths and then under the Type drop-down menu, select “No Pixel Grid”.

    To make a 3×3 grid in Photoshop, first, create a new document with the dimensions of 300×300 pixels. Next, select the Rectangular Marquee Tool (M) and draw a rectangle around the entire document. Next, use the Direct Selection Tool (A) to select the entire rectangle and delete it. Finally, use the 3×3 Grid Tool (G) to create the grid.

    There are a few ways to save grid lines in Photoshop. One way is to select the gridlines you want to save and choose “Save As.” Another way is to hold down the Shift key and click on the gridlines you want to save.

    To turn on the ruler in Photoshop, go to Edit > Preferences > General and check the ” Ruler ” box.

    To toggle the ruler in Photoshop, you can either click on the ruler icon in the toolbar or use the keyboard shortcut (Ctrl+R).

    This Photoshop plugin will generate custom grids.

    • Overview
    • Documentation
    • Installation
    • Compatibility

    Grid Generator is a powerful & versatile plugin for generating all sorts of custom grids, quickly and efficiently, in Adobe Photoshop.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Grid Generator provides full control for horizontal and vertical cell size, along with locks for universal scaling. More importantly, Grid Generator features aspect ratio controls allowing the user to develop square cells or ones that respect the image’s aspect ratio.

    Grid Generator offers control over line color, cell color, intensity and even image border. Make your grids painstakingly easy to generate using Grid Generator.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    There are several methods in which grids can be created within a limited horizontal and vertical resolution. One method is to attempt to subdivide the space into x and y number of cells. The problem with this method is that one will never get equally-sized cells due to integer division. As a result, Grid Generator was developed so as to place as many equally-sized cells across the space until the end is reached, whereupon the remaining space is handled as the last cell. Although this results in an uneven cell at the horizontal and vertical ends, it was decided that this was more favorable than cells of uneven-sizes throughout. Additionally, the last cell can be easily cropped away whereas cells of uneven sizes cannot be handled well. One final method that could be considered (and was actually tried), was to use antialiasing to draw the grid and therefore sub-pixel cells would have different shading than the others. Once again, the result was not favorable so the first method outlined was chosen.

    Grids: Defines the number of horizontal grid boxes.

    Y Grids: Defines the number of vertical grid boxes.

    Intensity: Controls (in percent) the intensity of the line.

    Solid Background: Forces the background to be a solid color.

    Line Color and Background Color: Specifies the line and background colors respectively.

    Grid Aspect: Specifies the grid aspect ratio. Square aspect will lock horizontal and vertical cell sizes so as to produce square cells. Image Aspect will set horizontal and vertical cell sizes to match the image aspect ratio. Horizontal and vertical cells sizes will still be locked to one another in this mode, but will be proportional. Finally, Custom Aspect will unlock the vertical cell size and allow the user to specify their own value.

    Border: Forces a border around image.

    • v1.0 – First release.
    • v1.1 – Progress Bar now works.
    • v1.2 – Plugin filesize is now less than half of v1.1.
    • v1.2 – Previews are now substantially faster than previous builds.
    • v1.3 – Fixed stretching interface.
    • v1.5 – Re-organized user interface.
    • v1.5 – Added RGB output options.
    • v1.5 – Added Realtime display option.
    • v1.5 – Recompiled with updated compiler.
    • v1.6 – New GUI design.
    • v1.6 – Windows Vista Compatibility.
    • v1.7 – Added Y=X Proportional button.
    • v1.7 – Added Y=X Absolute button.
    • v1.7 – Preview image now scales correctly to zoom level.
    • v1.7 – Preview no longer flickers on button / slider adjustment.
    • v1.7 – Ability to use up to 3 GB of RAM under 32bit Windows (2000, XP, Vista) and 4 GB of RAM under 64bit Windows (2000, XP, Vista).
    • v1.8 – 64 bit release.
    • v1.8 – Interface and features simplified for increased ease of use.
    • v1.9 – Fixed file access crashing bug in Windows 10.

    Installing this software is easy and only requires three simple steps:

    1 – Download the software by clicking on the Download Demo button located above on the software page. This will prompt you to save a .zip file on your computer.

    2 – Extract the contents from the .zip file and place the .8bf file into your host’s plugin folder. For instance, to install for Adobe Photoshop CS6, place the .8bf file into the location shown below. You can make a sub-folder to keep your plugins organized, such as the one below. Please make sure 64 bit plugins such as these are placed in the corresponding 64 bit Adobe Photoshop plugin folder.

    If you’re using Photoshop CC (eg. version 2013 – 2019 or later), your Photoshop plug-ins are stored in a folder shared between all Photoshop CC versions shown below.

    3 – Launch Adobe Photoshop, open an image and click on Filter > Richard Rosenman > Filter Name. If the filter is grayed out, it may not support your current image color depth.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    If you have purchased a commercial license, please review the activation section.

    This software is compatible with the following OS:

    • Windows 10 Home 64 bit
    • Windows 10 Pro 64 bit
    • Windows 10 Enterprise 64 bit
    • Windows 10 Education 64 bit
    • Windows 8 64 bit
    • Windows 8 Pro 64 bit
    • Windows 8 Enterprise 64 bit
    • Windows 7 Home Basic 64 bit
    • Windows 7 Home Premium 64 bit
    • Windows 7 Professional 64 bit
    • Windows 7 Enterprise 64 bit
    • Windows 7 Ultimate 64 bit
    • Windows Vista Home Premium 64 bit
    • Windows Vista Business 64 bit
    • Windows Vista Enterprise 64 bit
    • Windows Vista Ultimate 64 bit
    • Windows XP 64 bit
    • Windows XP Professional 64 bit

    This software is compatible with the following hosts:

    I’ve been working on 4K for the last year, and as such, I have to zoom in quite considerably more than resolutions such as 1080 and 1440 to get to the same level of “zoomed in” view. This extreme zoom-in adds a grid to the view. As a photographer and a retoucher, it can make life very difficult if you’re not aware that you can turn this grid off.

    Standard view at 1080P

    When someone sends you 16 images to retouch, and you have to work on pore level details, you zoom in on a 4K monitor and boom, the grid from hell.

    Here’s the issue at a 1080 resolution:

    And here’s the issue at 4K:

    As you can see, this is a cr–shoot for retouching work.

    It kicks in faster and faster the higher the resolution you’re working with (you can zoom in less before it turns on).

    To see the difference, here’s a comparison with and without the grid:

    The problem we have as retouchers is that the grid popping on gives us a false impression of luminosity, as well as making it very difficult, if not impossible, to accurately see which pixels need to be dodged and burned effectively when zoomed in for precise work.

    Even looking at the image as widely as possible before the grid kicks in changes the perceived shape of the face, and this is something we have to avoid at all costs when it’s not something we’re able to control.

    We want to be able to see an image and it’s problems clearly so that we, as retouchers and editors can dictate the corrections with as few complications as possible.

    I hope this fix helps you on your journey!

    The fix is simple my friends: VIEW>SHOW>PIXEL GRID

    May your zoomed in experience be forever improved as a retoucher/photographer.

    Hi, another technical question I’m afraid. I’ve got my photo on Photoshop almost ready to print out for a reference. However, I’m stuck on two things:
    1: how on earth do I add a grid to the photo and print it with the grid on??

    2: I have watched marks video on how to make the print the same size as the paper but it won’t allow me to draw the boxes over the area I want. Can anybody help with this please?

    Comments

    How to make a grid in photoshop How to make a grid in photoshop

    How to make a grid in photoshop How to make a grid in photoshop

    I agree, any graphics program or app can do layers. So dropping the photo into a lower layer and reducing opacity to show both is easy. Can also layer a colour tone, a perspective assist or a grid if you wish.

    To improve observation and eye/hand coordination this is the simplest, photo can be removed and drawing resized for further work.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    While studying the Reilly method I used a two layer technique. In progress here, but plenty of scope for playing around with infinite undo.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    These were done on Procreate but any app should work.

    Here is another method to create images for a photo grid upload to Instagram. It is a very smart use of the Slice Tool which is often used in the creation of webpage layouts. Like the last method, once the image is ‘cut-up’ there is a simple export option to save all the images at once.

    I want to thank a colleague of mine, Pat Bombard, for showing me this method.

    First crop the image into a square. To make sure the image is a perfect square go to Canvas Size (Command + Shift + C) and set the height and width to the same number; this will Crop (C) the image. Or go to the Crop tool (C) and set the ratio to 1:1.

    Note: Instagram full resolution size is 3240px X 3240px at 72 dpi.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Under the Crop (C) tool select the Slice tool.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Right click inside the image. In the fly-out menu choose Divide Slice.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Click the Check Box for Divide Horizontally Into and Divide Vertically Into. Set both of these options to 3.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Go to File > Export > Save for Web (Legacy).

    Or (Command + Option + Shift + S).

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    In the dialog menu click on the Original Tab and zoom out (Command + -) until you can see the whole image with all 9 slices.

    Shift-left-click all 9 squares to highlight them. Next, on the right hand side, click the Preset drop down menu and select JPEG High. Then hit Save.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    In the next dialog menu, select the location. At the bottom of the dialog box make sure Format is set to ‘Images Only’ and Slices is set to ‘All Slices’.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    In the selected save location a folder named ‘images’ will pop up with all 9 images inside.

    How to make a grid in photoshop

    Looking for a fast way to get images from the computer to an iOS device? Here an article explaining my favorite method.

    How to fold an american flag

    There’s a traditional method for storing Old Glory when you take it down.

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    Flag etiquette is an important part of the American tradition that ensures the Stars and Stripes are treated with the dignity they deserve. Established by Congress in 1942, the official U.S. Flag Code created guidelines for the care and display of the flag. Although it does not describe an official method for folding the flag, the rules do state that you should never store a flag in a way where it can get torn, soiled, or damaged. You should also never let the flag touch anything beneath it, such as the ground or floor.

    Over time, a triangular shape has become the traditional way to fold the flag and store it in a safe manner. According to the American Legion, the exact origin of this specific procedure is unknown, but it may trace back to the Gold Star Mothers of America or the United States Air Force Academy.

    You can fly Old Glory any day of the year, but you may want to put away an especially large flag after displaying it on Memorial Day. This method will keep your flag looking pristine until until the Fourth of July or the next major holiday. If you’re by yourself, first lay the flag out on a table face-up, smoothing out any wrinkles. Otherwise, find a partner and stand opposite each other at the short ends, holding the flag taut and parallel to the ground. Here’s what to do next:

    How to Fold an American Flag

    1. Fold the lower, striped section of the flag over the blue field.
    2. Fold over the folded bottom edge to meet the top edge.
    3. Begin a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge to the top edge.
    4. Turn the outer point inward, parallel with the top edge, to form a second triangle.
    5. Continue until the final folds ensure that only the Union (the blue portion with white stars) is showing and the open edges are folded in.

    See Exactly How to Fold the Flag

    • In the first two steps, you’re essentially folding the flag in quarters lengthwise.
    • If you’re folding the flag with a partner, the person at the striped end should make all of the triangular folds while the person at the Union end keeps the flag taut.

    How to fold an american flag

    Flag etiquette dictates only flying your flag between sunrise and sunset unless it is properly illuminated. You should also take down Old Glory in the event of inclement weather except if it’s an all-weather flag made out of a non-absorbent material like nylon. Only fly American flags in good condition, but as long as you follow these guidelines, your Stars and Stripes will last years to come.

    How to fold an american flag

    Most Americans have seen the traditional folding of the American flag, at specific events, such as funerals. Have you ever wondered why Old Glory is folded that specific way? Much more than just pomp and circumstance, each of the 13 folds holds special meaning.

    The Flag Itself

    The portion of the flag denoting honor is the canton of blue containing the stars representing states our veterans served in uniform. The field of blue dresses from left to right and is inverted only when draped as a funeral cloth over the casket of a veteran who has served our country honorably in uniform. In the U.S. Armed Forces, at the ceremony of retreat, the flag is lowered, folded in a triangle and kept under watch throughout the night as a tribute to our nation’s honored dead. The next morning it is brought out and, at a ceremony of reveille, flown high as a symbol of belief in the resurrection of the body.

    Meaning Behind the 13 Folds

    The flag-folding ceremony represents the same religious principles on which our great country was originally founded.

    1. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.
    2. The second fold is a symbol of our belief in eternal life.
    3. The third fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veteran departing our ranks, and who gave a portion of his or her life for the defense of our country to attain peace throughout the world.
    4. The fourth fold represents our weaker nature; as American citizens trusting in God, it is Him we turn to in times of peace, as well as in times of war, for His divine guidance.
    5. The fifth fold is a tribute to our country. In the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right, but it is still our country, right or wrong.”
    6. The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the republic for which it stands, one nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.
    7. The seventh fold is a tribute to our armed forces, for it is through the armed forces that we protect our country and our flag against all enemies, whether they be found within or without the boundaries of our republic.
    8. The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor our mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day.
    9. The ninth fold is a tribute to womanhood. It has been through their faith, love, loyalty and devotion that has molded the character of the men and women who have made this country great.
    10. The 10th fold is a tribute to father, who has also given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since he or she was first born.
    11. The 11th fold represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob.
    12. The 12th fold represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies God the Father, the Son and Holy Ghost.
    13. The 13th and last fold, when the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost, reminding us of our national motto, “In God We Trust.”

    After the Folding Ceremony

    After the flag is completely folded and tucked in, it has the appearance of a cocked hat, ever reminding us of the soldiers who served under Gen. George Washington and the sailors and Marines who served under Capt. John Paul Jones and were followed by their comrades and shipmates in the U.S. Armed Forces, preserving for us the rights, privileges and freedoms we enjoy today.

    The source and the date of origin of this Flag Folding Procedure is unknown. However, some sources attribute it to the Gold Star Mothers of America while others to an Air Force chaplain stationed at the United States Air Force Academy. Some sources also indicate that the 13 folds are a nod to the original first 13 colonies. The flag folding ceremony is provided as a patriotic service.

    VA Policy on Flag-Folding Recitation of “13-Fold” Ceremony

    To ensure burial services at the 143 national cemeteries operated by the Department of Veterans Affairs reflect the wishes of veterans and their families, VA officials have clarified the department’s policy about recitations made while the U.S. flag is folded at the grave site of a veteran.

    “Honoring the burial wishes of veterans is one of the highest commitments for the men and women of VA,” said William F. Tuerk, VA’s undersecretary for Memorial Affairs. “A family may request the recitation of words to accompany the meaningful presentation of the American flag as we honor the dedication and sacrifice of their loved ones.”

    Don’t forget to hang the real Old Glory. The star-spangled American flag is most commonly flown on holidays such as Flag Day, Independence Day, and Veteran’s Day, but it can be flown from sunrise to sunset on any day of the year. When not on display, it should be respectfully folded into a triangular shape. This triangle is emblematic of the three-cornered hats worn by Colonial soldiers in the Revolutionary War. The flag is folded in such a way to represent the original thirteen colonies of the United States, and each individual fold also carries its own meaning. Here’s how to do so, as dictated by the American Legion.

    Fold 1

    It takes two people to fold the flag properly, as it should never touch the ground. Both people should hold out the flag waist high, right side up, with its surface parallel to the ground, keeping the tension in the fabric at all times. Fold the flag in half lengthwise, bringing the striped lower section over the canton (which is the blue field of stars) and holding the edges together. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.

    Fold 2

    Fold it again lengthwise, bringing the canton to the outside. The second fold is a symbol of our belief in eternal life.

    Fold 3

    Start a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge up to meet the open edge. The third fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veteran departing our ranks, and who gave a portion of his or her life for the defense of our country to attain peace throughout the world.

    Fold 4

    The outer point is then turned inward to form a second triangle. The fourth fold represents our weaker nature; as American citizens trusting in God, it is to Him we turn in times of peace, as well as in times of war, for His divine guidance.

    Folds 5-12

    Continue folding the flag in this manner eight more times. The fifth fold is a tribute to our country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right, but it is still our country, right or wrong.” The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the republic for which it stands, one nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all. The seventh fold is a tribute to our armed forces, for it is through the armed forces that we protect our country and our flag against all enemies, whether they be found within or without the boundaries of our republic.

    The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor our mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day. The ninth fold is a tribute to womanhood, for it has been through their faith, love, loyalty and devotion that the character of the men and women who have made this country great have been molded. The tenth fold is a tribute to father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since he or she was first born. The eleventh fold, in the eyes of Hebrew citizens, represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies, in their eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob. The twelfth fold, in the eyes of a Christian citizen, represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in their eyes, God the Father, the Son, and Holy Ghost.

    Fold 13

    These triangular folds bring the red and white stripes into the canton, symbolizing the day’s light vanishing into the darkness of the night. The last fold, when the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost, reminding us of our national motto, “In God We Trust.”

    Step By Step Procedures

    The rules for proper display and use of the U.S. flag are established by generally accepted custom and by Public Law 94-344 approved by Congress and signed by the President in 1976. The Flag Code does not impose penalties for the misuse of the flag. Such penalties are determined by the individual states and the District of Columbia.

    Request flags from your representatives for federal employee’s and retiring military retirements. Flags can be ordered in either nylon or cotton that have flown over the U.S. Capital. Each flag comes with a letter from the Architect of the Capital certifying the day the presentation flag was flown over the Capital Building. A flag that was presented to me at my retirement luncheon is 3′ x 4′ cotton and it displays nicely in a flag display case.

    Flag Folding Procedure

    To properly fold the American flag, follow these directions:

      To begin, with one person at either end, hold the flag waist high so that’s its surface is parallel to the ground.

  • Fold the lower half of the stripe section lengthwise over the field of stars, holding the bottom and top edges securely.
    How to fold an american flag
  • Fold the flag again lengthwise, now with the blue field on the outside.


    Make a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge to meet the open (top) edge of the flag. (It is easier if the person folding the flag takes one step forward before starting to fold the flag.)

    Turn the outer (end) point inward, parallel to the open edge, to form a second triangle.

    Continue the triangular folding until the entire length of the flag is folded in this manner.

    When the flag is completely folded, only a triangular blue field of stars should be visible. If a hem protrudes beyond the blue field, it should be neatly tucked inside the folds of the flag so that it does not show. The folded flag is then presented to the next of kin.

    The American Flag may be folded for a number of reasons. Since the Flag Code specifies that the flag should not be carried flat, folding the flag may be necessary for transportation, storage or display. The flag is also folded by members of the Armed Forces after it is lifted from a casket at a military funeral. It is then given to the next of kin.

    The Flag Code does not specify how the flag should be folded, but a standard flag will require thirteen folds. To specify there should be two lengthwise folds and eleven triangular folds.

    When folding the flag in this manner gained popularity, there wasn’t a symbolic meaning associated with the folds. Through the years, the public has attributed meaning to each fold. Most of these meanings are religious, and all of them reflect the ideals of this country.

    How to fold an american flagStep 1: Facing each other two people should hold the flag horizontally at both ends.

    How to fold an american flagStep 2: Make your first fold lenthwise, bringing the stripes over the union area of the flag. *The first fold of the flag is a symbol of life.

    How to fold an american flagStep 3: Match up the corners, keeping the flag taut.

    How to fold an american flagStep 4: Make another lengthwise fold, match up the corners and keep the flag taut.

    *The second fold of the flag is a symbol of a belief in eternal life. *The third fold is a symbol of honor and remembrance of veterans.

    How to fold an american flagStep 5: Keeping the flag taut at both ends, fold a triangle from fold to edge. Keep folding triangles, making sure you keep a 90 °angle and your folds are smooth. *The fourth fold is a symbol of weakness. *The fifth fold is a tribute to our country. *The sixth fold is where our hearts lie. *The seventh fold is a tribute to our Armed Forces.

    How to fold an american flagStep 6: Continue folding triangles in the same manner. *The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, so that we may see the light.

    How to fold an american flagStep 7: Continue folding triangles onto the union of the flag. *The ninth fold is a tribute to womanhood *The tenth fold is a tribute to fathers *The eleventh fold represents the lower portion of the seal of King David & King Solomon, glorifying the God of Abraham, Isaac & Jacob. *The twelfth fold represents the emblem of eternity and glorifies the God of the Father, the Son & Holy Ghost.

    How to fold an american flagStep 8: Fold the last triangle and tuck the ends in.

    *When the folds are complete, the stars are uppermost and remind us of our national motto, “In God we Trust.” *The flag will resemble a cocked hat, representing soldiers, Marines & Sailors of the past & present.

    Didn’t find what you were looking for, or just have a new product suggestion? Please email us at: [email protected]

    You can buy a pre-folded American flag from us in two different sizes – large 5×9.5 standard US military burial (casket) size or small 3×5 presentation size. These flags are made in the USA and skillfully folded by our craftsmen in the mountains of NC. Or use our step by step instructions below to fold your American flag.

    How to fold an american flag

    When you have successfully folded your flag, place it in a high quality American made Flag Display Case.

    How to fold an american flag

    Step 1

    To properly fold the Flag, begin by holding it waist-high with another person so that its surface is parallel to the ground.

    Step 2

    Fold the lower half of the stripe section lengthwise over the field of stars, holding the bottom and top edges securely.

    How to fold an american flag

    Step 3

    Fold the flag again lengthwise with the blue field on the outside.

    Step 4

    Make a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge to meet the open (top) edge of the flag.

    How to fold an american flag

    Step 5

    Turn the outer (end) point inward, parallel to the open edge, to form a second triangle.

    Step 6

    The triangular folding is continued until the entire length of the flag is folded in this manner.

    Step 7

    When the flag is completely folded, only a triangular blue field of stars should be visible.

    How to fold an american flag

    Step 8

    Preserve the quality of your heirloom flag by placing it in a high quality American made Flag Display Case. Customize your flag case with laser engraving or a personalized engraved plate. Add a service medallion or laser logo.

    How to fold an american flag

    You may also take your flag to a local Boy Scout troop of VFW post for folding. A nice donation would be appreciated.

    How to fold an american flag

    1. Hold the flag waist-high with a partner; the flag should be parallel with the ground.
    2. Bring the upper and lower halves of the flag together, folding it lengthwise in half.
    3. Fold the flag lengthwise again, bringing the lower half up to the top. The field of stars should be visible on the left side.
    4. Bring the striped corner of the folded edge up to meet the the top edge of the flag, making a small triangle. Fold the triangle over itself, making the triangle point inward. Continue triangular folding.
    5. The triangular folding continues until the entire length of the flag is folded. When the flag is completely folded, only a triangular blue field of stars should be visible. Tuck the remaining rectangle into the triangle’s folds.

    Like this illustrated guide? Then you’re going to love our book The Illustrated Art of Manliness! Pick up a copy on Amazon.

    Illustration by Ted Slampyak

    Related Posts

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    Never miss an update

    Subscribe to the AoM Newsletter

    Want to start taking action on the content you read on AoM?

    Never miss an update

    Subscribe to the AoM Newsletter

    The 5 Allies Every Man Needs
    Getting Along Is Overrated
    The Harrowing Life of a World War II B-17 Pilot
    Overcome the Decision Traps Around Diet and Exercise

    Articles ///

    How to Bet on the Ponies

    How to Clean Out Your Dryer Vent

    20 Classic Poems Every Man Should Read

    How to Sharpen a Pocket Knife: An Illustrated Guide

    • Contact
    • Legal
    • About
    • All Topics
    • Archives

    The Art of Manliness participates in affiliate marketing programs, which means we get paid commissions on editorially chosen products purchased through our links. We only recommend products we genuinely like, and purchases made through our links support our mission and the free content we publish here on AoM.

    Folding The American Flag and The Meaning Behind It

    Posted by Hayley Adams on Feb 25th 2021

    You have probably seen the traditional folding of the American flag at some point, maybe at a military funeral or at special ceremonial occasions, or just on display somewhere. But have you ever wondered why the American flag is folded in such a specific manner?

    Well, much like everything that has to do with our nation’s greatest symbol, the 13-step folding process of the American flag actually holds significant meaning with each and every fold. Here is some information about how to fold the flag, displaying a folded flag, and the meaning behind each fold.

    Folding the Flag

    How to fold an american flag

    Displaying a Folded Flag

    A great way to display a folded flag is in a display box. There are several options to choose from based on the size, style, and material of your flag. Our most popular display boxes are the LED prisms, they make for beautiful decor and will most definitely strike up a conversation!

    Meaning Behind the Folds

    According to the United States Flag Code, the 13 folds are a symbolic passing of the 13 truths. These truths represent the same religious principles upon which our country was originally founded.

    1. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.
    2. The second fold signifies our belief in eternal life.
    3. The third fold is made in honor and tribute of the veteran departing our ranks, and who gave a portion of his or her life for the defense of our country to attain peace.
    4. The fourth fold exemplifies our weaker nature as citizens trusting in God; it is to Him we turn for His divine guidance.
    5. The fifth fold is an acknowledgment to our country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right, but it is still our country, right or wrong.”
    6. The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the republic for which it stands, one nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.
    7. The seventh fold is a tribute to our armed forces, for it is through the armed forces that we protect our country and our flag against all enemies.
    8. The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor our mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day.
    9. The ninth fold is an honor to womanhood, for it has been through their faith, love, loyalty, and devotion that the character of men and women who have made this country great have been molded.
    10. The tenth fold is a tribute to the father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since he or she was first-born.
    11. The eleventh fold, in the eyes of Hebrew citizens, represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies, in their eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.
    12. The twelfth fold, in the eyes of a Christian citizen, represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in their eyes, God the Father, the Son, and Holy Ghost.
    13. The last fold, when the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost, reminding us of our national motto, “In God We Trust.”

    Owning an American flag is a honorable tradition for many American families, but it also comes with great responsibility. The American flag is a representation of the country’s values as well as the sacrifices that thousands of men and women in the armed forces make each day.

    As a result, this symbol should always be respected. If you own an American flag or are considering getting one, here are a few important things to know about how to fold an American flag properly.

    Flag Folding Instructions

    American flags need to be folded in a very specific manner as a sign of respect. One of the first things to always remember is that you should never let the fabric touch the ground as it is a sign of utmost disrespect.

    Those that do touch the ground, do not have to be traditionally burned or buried with a special ceremony as commonly thought, but it should be avoided anyway.

    When folding a flag, working with a partner is advised so that you can avoid that scenario. However, if you are working to fold the flag alone, it is acceptable to spread it out on a clean, dry surface such as a dining room table to accomplish the task while maintaining respect.

    How to Tri Fold the American Flag

    To make a triangle folded flag, follow these steps:

    1. Fold the flag lengthwise so that the bottom stripes meet the field of blue.
    2. Create a second lengthwise fold by bringing the folded edge over again.
    3. Start to make it into a triangle by folding the striped corner up to the top edge.
    4. Fold that side again until it looks like a rectangle once more.
    5. Continue this pattern until you have created 13 folds.
    6. Finally, tuck the end into the open fold to create a perfect triangle.

    Once this is complete, only the field of blue should be seen no matter how you look at it.

    Flag Folding Meaning

    How to fold an american flag

    You might be asking yourself, “Why is the American flag folded 13 times?” The flag folding process may seem a bit tedious and excessive, but each fold is done for a reason and has a specific meaning.

    The thirteen folds as a whole symbolize the thirteen original British colonies that America from which America was born. In a full flag folding ceremony, a reading takes place based on religious principles important to the country’s founders.

    Here are the specific meanings of each fold in order that would be explained in greater detail in the ceremony reading:

    1. Life
    2. Belief in Eternal Life
    3. Honor and Remembrance of Departed Veterans
    4. Weak Human Nature and Need for God
    5. Tribute to the Country
    6. Where Our Hearts Lie
    7. Tribute to Armed Forces
    8. For Those Who Have Died
    9. Tribute to Womanhood
    10. Tribute to Fathers
    11. Glorifies the Jewish God
    12. Glorifies the Christian God
    13. In God We Trust

    The final tri folded flag takes on the appearance of the hat that the founding fathers of the United States of America wore as they fought for freedom.

    When to Observe Flag Folding Ceremonies

    How to fold an american flag

    This flag folding method is also used in military style ceremonies and funerals. American flag folding ceremonies are performed all over the country every Memorial Day and Veteran’s Day. Additionally, the family members of every deceased veteran receive a beautifully folded flag that was draped on their casket.

    The ceremony of removing it from its pole is usually done at dusk, and if done right, then the stripes are folded into the field of blue as the day turns into night. As is Navy and Army custom, this was always done at the last note of retreat.

    Where to Find a Great American Flag

    How to fold an american flag

    Now that you know how to fold an American flag properly and how important it is, you are ready to acquire one for you and your family.

    Get the best American flags from Star Spangled Flags. We offer a wide variety of sizes, and our flags are made from polyester and nylon designed to withstand UV degradation. When it comes to something as precious as the symbol of our country, don’t settle for something cheaply made in China. Every one of our durable and high-quality products are 100% made in America.

    They also make amazing gifts! If you would like to give a patriotic gift to your loved ones this year, our flags are the highest quality available on the market. Take a look at our premium American flags here and pick out your favorite one today!

    How to fold an american flag

    The American flag is an emblem of freedom and sacrifice deserving of the utmost respect. When it comes to storing the flag instead of flying it, the manner in which you fold it is important. Here are the steps in how to properly fold an American flag every citizen should know.

    Hold the flag with a partner

    The first action in how to properly fold an American flag is to find another person to help with the folding. A flag is a bigger object and you want to fold it without letting it touch the ground, so a buddy system is best. One person should hold one end of the flag while the other person holds the other end to make folding easier.

    Fold the flag in half lengthwise

    Start by folding the lower half of the striped section over the field of stars. Make sure you fold it below the grommet into a gutter to guarantee there will be no red showing in the end result.

    Fold lengthwise again while keeping the blue field on the outside top

    Make sure the crease is tight and the corners are perfectly aligned with the first fold to get the correct appearance.

    Make a triangular fold with the striped end

    Bring the striped corner of the folded edge to meet the offset edge of the folded flag. It’s crucial to begin with the folded edge when creating the triangle, to ensure the folds align correctly in the completed end result. Just remember to always start folding with the stripes and work your way towards the blue field. This will guarantee the stars are the visible part when the final act of folding is done.

    Fold the triangle fold inward

    The next step in folding the flag is to take the outer end point and turn it inward. From there, make a second triangle parallel to the open edge.

    Continue this movement of folding

    Continue folding in a triangular method for the remainder of the flag until you reach the end of the material. For the average standard-sized flags, this method will require thirteen folds which is a nod to the original colonies.

    Tuck in the ends the right way

    When the flag is completely folded, and the only visible part is the blue field of stars, tuck the end into the fold to secure it in place. The end result should be a flag folded with neat edges that shows only the blue, showcases four stars in an upward point position, and has corners that are pointed for easy placement the flag in a viewing case.

    Here’s what to do with a tattered, soiled American flag

    Bruce Hamilton , The Morning Show anchor

    JACKSONVILLE, Fla. – We all know the Fourth of July is a day to celebrate America’s birthday, but the idea of celebrating the flag is believed to have originated in 1885.

    It started with a school teacher in Wisconsin who wanted to celebrate what was then the 108th anniversary of the official adoption of the Stars and Stripes. Now, we recognize Flag Day every June 14.

    And 242 years after we adopted the Stars and Stripes, do you know the right way to honor Old Glory and dispose of her if she becomes torn, soiled and tattered or just worn out?

    According to the United States Flag Code, when a flag is so damaged that it no longer can serve as a symbol of the country, it should be retired in a dignified way. The preferred method is burning it. But before doing that, you should shred the flag by separating the 13 stripes and leaving the blue spangled field intact.

    You can also bury your flag in a wooden vessel, but it has to be folded correctly first.

    You can watch the tutorial above by The 3rd U.S. Infantry Regiment (The Old Guard) or follow these steps:

    There are a number of organizations that help with flag disposal. Among them are American Legion and VFW Posts as well as the Boy Scouts of America.

    And there’s another way to properly retire your flag: News4Jax has partnered with area Carpet One stores to offer new flags in place of old ones. Just take your worn or tattered flag to one of their stores, and they will make sure it is properly taken care of and give you a new flag to display on Friday (while supplies last).

    Garbage man pulls flag out of trash can, folds it properly

    Marine Corps veteran Don Gardner has pulled at least 11 American flags from landfills in his 11 years in the garbage business.

    HUNTINGTON, Utah – Don Gardner is the kind of garbage collector who will get out of his truck to bring elderly residents’ cans to the street when they forget.

    And when the Marine Corps veteran was caught on camera last week taking an American flag out of the trash to fold and dispose of it properly, it came as a surprise to no one who knows him.

    “That is Don. That is who Don is,” friend Whitney Phelps told KSTU.

    Gardner has been collecting garbage in Emery County, Utah, for 11 years. In that time, he’s pulled at least a dozen flags from trashcans and landfills.

    “I took an oath once to defend this country and our flag, and I still do,” he said.

    Brooke Cowley caught the latest act on video, then shared it to social media so the community could “see the care and love that he gave our flag.” Cowley told KSTU that she’s the one who accidentally threw the flag away.

    “Immediately I was so embarrassed,” Cowley said. “I was petrified, because I’m married to a veteran. What am I doing?”

    Gardner, meanwhile, had no idea he was being filmed.

    “It’s just something I do,” he said. “I get angry sometimes. Sometimes it’s a mistake; most of the time it’s on purpose. I have a problem with that, so I just take it out and take care of it.”

    The veteran wants his neighbors to know there’s a right way to dispose of an American flag, and he’s happy to educate anyone who will listen.

    “If you don’t know what to do with it, get it to me. I’ll make sure it’s took care of proper,” he said.

    How to dispose of an American flag

    When an American flag “is in such condition that it is no longer a fitting emblem for display,” it should “be destroyed in a dignified way, preferably by burning,” according to the U.S. Flag Code.

    How to fold an american flag

    BOSTON, MA – APRIL 18: A member of the Hanscom Air Force Base looks on as the American Flag is displayed over the Green Monster before a game between the Boston Red Sox and the Minnesota Twins on April 18, 2022 at Fenway Park in Boston, Massachusetts

    One way to ensure it’s given a dignified sendoff is to bring the flag to a local flag collection box. They can be found at local VFW and American Legion chapters, Boy Scout and Girl Scout offices, and sometimes at government buildings like police stations. Once the flag boxes are full, the respective organizations will hold flag-retirement ceremonies.

    If you can’t drop off the flag, you can have your own private retirement ceremony, but make sure the flag is folded properly. Then, say the Pledge of Allegiance or have a moment of silence as the flag burns. Be sure to follow local and state fire laws.

    When burning isn’t an option, you can fold the flag and place it in a ceremonious box, then bury the box. In some cases, American flags can be recycled.

    How to fold an american flag

    There are many names for the American flag: Old Glory; The Stars and Stripes; The Red, White, and Blue; and The Star-Spangled Banner to name a few. The original 13-star version of the flag was first unveiled on June 14, 1777, and that is why June 14 is known as Flag Day. And in case you were wondering, our current 50-star flag has flown since July 4, 1960.

    At some point in time, whether in person or witnessed on television or in film, you probably saw the folding of the flag. As part of the Chapters Health Valor Program, flag-folding plays a large role during an Honor Walk.

    The Art of Flag Folding

    Have you ever noticed that the honor guard pays meticulous attention to correctly folding the flag? The flag is folded exactly 13 times in remembrance of the original 13 colonies. But did you know there is a specific meaning to each fold?

    Here is what each fold of the flag means:

    • The first fold symbolizes life.
    • The second fold represents a belief in eternal life.
    • The third fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veterans who gave their lives in defense of the country in order to help attain peace throughout the world.
    • The fourth fold is in recognition of the nature of the country’s citizens to trust in God.
    • The fifth fold is a tribute to the United States. According to Stephen Decatur, S. Naval Commander during the American Revolution and War of 1812, “Our country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right, but it is still our country, right or wrong.”
    • The sixth fold symbolizes where people’s hearts lie in keeping with the words of our pledge of allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the republic for which it stands, one nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.
    • The seventh fold pays tribute to the armed forces. After all, through our armed forces, the United States is protected against all enemies.
    • The eighth fold is a tribute to those who died, and as Psalm 23 states, “entered into the valley of the shadow of death.”
    • The ninth fold honors womanhood.
    • The 10th fold is a tribute to fathers.
    • The 11th fold represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies, in Judaism, the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob.
    • The 12th fold represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in the eyes of Christians, God the Father, the Son and Holy Ghost.
    • The 13th and last fold reminds us that when the flag is completely folded, in the uppermost corned signify our national motto, “In God We Trust.”

    Watch this video demonstrating how the flag is folded:

    Additionally, when the flag is completely folded and tucked in, the resulting shape appears like a tricorne hat and represents the soldiers who served under General George Washington, the sailors and marines who served under Naval Commander John Paul Jones and the many who have followed them in order to preserve the rights, privileges and freedoms we enjoy today. So in the future when you see a flag folded, you will hopefully now have a deeper understanding and appreciation of the tradition.

    Chapters Health System is committed to serving the needs of its patients, families, caregivers, health providers, partners and communities.

    For more information, please call our helpful Chapters Health team at 1.866.204.8611 or Contact Us.

    The month of May kicks off, what we call in the flag industry, flag season. May 15, Armed Forces Day, I personally believe is the beginning. As we approach the next 6-8 weeks, this is a very patriotic season which includes Memorial Day (May 25), Flag Day (June 14), and Independence Day (July 4). The big three! I would also include Labor Day, September 11, Veteran’s Day which occur in the late summer, early fall. It is proper to fly your flag any day of the year, but these are a few of the flag flying days you do not want to miss. When you bring your flag in after flying, we often get asked, how do you fold the American flag?

    There is no right or wrong way to fold an American flag. The triangle fold has become a popular and recognizable way to fold Old Glory. Showing respect for the flag and what it represents is what really matters. The Flag Code was created to provide guidelines for the display and care of the flag but it does not describe an official method for folding the flag. One reason may be because flags vary in size. There is a standard ratio for government flags, but in practical use not all flags maintain the same ratios. Common flag sizes are 2’x3’, 2.5’x4’, 3’x5’, 4’x6’, 5’x8’, and larger. The most popular size is 3’x5’ for residential use. The rules state that you should never store a flag in a way where it can get torn, soiled, or damaged.

    Flag Folding Steps:

    Step One

    Make sure the flag is clean and dry. You may wash the flag in a mild detergent and hang to dry.

    Step Two

    If you’re by yourself, first lay the flag out on a table face-up, smoothing out any wrinkles. Otherwise, find a partner and stand opposite each other at the short ends, holding the flag taut and parallel to the ground.

    Step Three

    Fold the lower, striped section of the flag over the blue field. You are basically folding the flag in half, lengthwise.

    Step Four

    Fold over the folded bottom edge to meet the top edge. You are folding it in half again, lengthwise. If two people are folding the flag, the person on holding the stripe end will be making all the folds while the other person holds the flag taught.

    Step Five

    Begin a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge to the top edge.

    Step Six

    Turn the outer point inward, parallel with the top edge, to form a second triangle.

    Step Seven

    Continue until the final folds ensure that only the star field is showing and the open edges are folded in. Remember not every flag will fold into the same size, shape, and number of folds.

    Flag folding plays an important role in showing respect for the flag and what it represents. It is a moving and meaningful part of many ceremonies, including funeral services and burial rites.

    Here’s how you should properly handle your flag this summer.

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    Summer is almost here, which means it’s time to get your American flags up and ready for the season’s two major holidays—Memorial Day and July 4th. In honor of the most patriotic time of the year, we’re taking a look at how to properly display, store, and take care of your American flag. In fact, the United States has an entire Flag Code to govern how American flags are handled and presented—we broke down the guidelines below:

    There Are Specific Standards of Respect.

    The flag code features instructions on how the flag should not be used based on standards of respect. That includes the rule that the flag should never be dipped to any person or thing, and the flag is flown upside down only as a distress signal. The flag should also never be used as clothing, drapery or decoration, and it should never touch anything beneath it, including the ground or floor, even as you lower it. You should also not attach or add a mark, insignia, word, or any type of drawing on a flag. It also should not be used for advertising purposes.

    Keep Your Flag Clean and Mended.

    When your flag is worn out and no longer in great condition, or if it’s damaged, it should be destroyed in a “dignified way, preferably by burning,” according to the flag code.

    Follow the Guidelines on How to Display Your Flag.

    How to fold an american flag

    When displayed in a window, the flag should have the union or blue field to the left of the observer in the street. If you are displaying the flag horizontally or vertically, the union should appear on the upper-left hand side. If you are showcasing a flag over the middle of the street, it should be suspended vertically with the union to the north, if placed in an east and west street, or with the union to the east, if placed in a north and south street.

    When displayed with another flag cross-staff, place the American flag above the other on the flag’s own right, which is the observer’s left. If the flags of two or or more nations are displayed at the same time, they should be flown from separate staffs of the same height, and the flags should be equal in size. If you’re also flying the flag of states, cities, or localities at the same halyard with the American flag, the American flag should always be at the peak. No other flag should be placed above or to the right of the United State flag.

    How to fold an american flag

    The custom is to display the flag from sunrise to sunset, but if you’d like to keep your flag up 24 hours a day, then just make sure it is “properly illuminated during the hours of darkness,” per the flag code. Etiquette also dictates that the flag should not be displayed n inclement weather, except when you have an all-weather flag.

    As you prepare to display your flag, keep in mind that it should be hoisted briskly and lowered ceremoniously. The flag code also dictates that your American flag can be showcased everyday, but particularly on holidays and special occasions, including New Year’s Day, Memorial Day, Flag Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Columbus Day, Thanksgiving, Christmas, and any other day proclaimed by the President. It should also be displayed on state holidays.

    There Are Rules Dictating When Your Flag Should Be Flown at Half-Staff.

    How to fold an american flag

    The term half-staff specifically means one-half the distance between the top and the bottom of the staff, and when flying your flag at half-staff, you should first hoist the flag to the peak of the staff, then lowered to the half-staff position.

    There special occasions throughout the year when your American flag should be flown at half-staff. On Memorial Day, the flag code dictates that your flag should be displayed at half-staff until noon—after that time, the flag should be raised to the top of the staff, according to a 2008 Congressional report. The flag should also be flown at half-staff by order of the President after the death of a public political figure in their memory.

    After the death of a President or a former President, flags should be flown at half-staff for thirty days. When George H.W. Bush died in December 2018, Trump put this half-staff protocol into action “as an expression of public sorrow,” according to the New York Times.

    In the wake of the death of the Vice-President, Chief Justice or retired Chief Justice, or Speaker of the House of Representatives, the flag should be flown at half-staff for ten days. In the past, Presidents have also directed that flags be flown at half-staff after the death of leading citizens as a tribute to their lives. Just last year, Trump directed the flags be flown at half-staff when Reverend Billy Graham died.

    There’s a Proper Way to Fold Your American Flag.

    Considering the guidelines that dictate how you handle the flag on a daily basis, it’s no surprise that there’s a proper way to fold your flag—and it should actually be folded into a triangle. Watch the video below for a step-by-step guide:

    October 21, 2021 3 min read

    How to Correctly Care for and Store the American Flag

    The United States Flag Code offers everyone a formal and unified manner to provide respectful care and storage. It unifies the traditional ways Americans pay homage while delivering specific instructions to follow.

    When you want to care for and store the American flag correctly, the first step to review is the correct folding method.

    How to fold an american flag

    You’ll start by folding the lower striped section over the blue starfield. The folded edge created from this action gets folded again toward the open edge.

    That’s when a triangular fold begins from the stripes. Bring the corner of the folded edge to the open edge, then turn the outer point inward to create consecutive triangles. Continue with that process until you’ve completed the length of the flag.

    Once you’ve finished that work, you’re ready to discover how to care for and store your U.S. flag.

    How to Care for Your American Flag

    When you follow the manufacturer’s instructions to care for your U.S. flag, cotton or nylon, you will extend the life of you flag considerably.

    Cloth materials always succumb to the elements and are best suited for indoor display.

    When caring for your American flag, here are some tips to follow to preserve your investment.

    1. Use a flag made for exterior display only when flying one outside.
    2. It shouldn’t be exposed to high winds, rain, or snow because these elements shorten its lifespan considerably.
    3. If the U.S. flag gets wet, the best way to care for it is to spread it out flat so that it can dry completely. It should never be folded or rolled when damp.
    4. Dust, smoke, dirt, and other contaminants can create stains in an American flag that dull its luster. Cleaning it before these elements set in can preserve its quality and extend its life. Most outdoor flags only need a mild detergent and warm water to remove soiling.
    5. Avoid having the flag soak in detergent water because the red or blue colors can bleed into the white with some materials.
    6. Parade and indoor flags often require professional dry cleaning to preserve their quality. Many businesses that offer this service provide it free or at a substantial discount, especially around the Fourth of July or Flag Day.
    7. The U.S. Flag should not be placed where the wind can push it into rough surfaces. Cables, tree branches, and other obstacles can cause tears that eventually lead to tattering.
    8. All flagpole surfaces require ongoing cleaning and care to prevent dirt buildup and corrosion. Rusty spots are known to damage American flags.

    When you display the U.S. flag, it helps to inspect it regularly for signs of wear and tear. You might see thread or fabric breaks forming on the flying end of the material.

    How to fold an american flagHow to fold an american flag

    Another place to look for damage with your American flag is around the grommets. When tears happen there, severe problems can develop quickly.

    How to fold an american flag

    How to Store Your American Flag

    When it is time to bring your U.S. flag in for the evening, the best storage place is a dark, cool spot. If it receives exposure to bright light, the fading process can hasten. Fabric deterioration can also occur, especially when humidity levels are excessively high or low inside.

    Most people know that the American flag should not touch the ground. Even when you keep it in an appropriate storage container, it should remain elevated on a shelf.

    Since many American flags are made from cotton or nylon, storing them in a high-moisture environment can damage them quickly. Try to avoid storing it in a basement, garage, or closet close to a bathroom.

    Storing a flag in the attic can pose pest and heat problems that could ruin it.

    If you use mothballs or other pesticides, keep the U.S. flag away from these items. The chemicals they contain are often harmful to the fabric.

    When you use your American flag infrequently, the best way to store it is flat or in a designated storage container. Anything made from acid-free materials is your best choice. If you must use wood, it helps to seal the organic surfaces to preserve the color and quality.

    Acid-free paper or tissue also helps to preserve the flag while in storage. You can also use an unbleached cotton cloth.

    Once the flag does wear out, the respectful way to retire it is to contact a local Veteran’s Association. These groups often have an annual ceremony to burn all the flags that wore out through the year. It should never just get tossed in the trash.

    America’s Largest
    Veterans Service Organization

    Walter Le Pere Post 208

    225 Old Sulphur Spring Rd., Manchester, Missouri

    Flag Etiquette

    When to Display your Flag

    1. Bring the striped half up over the blue field.

    WHY THE AMERICAN FLAG IS FOLDED 13 TIMES.

    1. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.

    2. The second fold is a symbol of our belief in eternal life.

    3. The third fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veterans departing our ranks who gave a portion of their lives for the defense of our country to attain peace throughout the world.

    4. The fourth fold represents our weaker nature, for as American citizens trusting in God, it is to Him we turn in times of peace as well as in time of war for His divine guidance.

    5. The fifth fold is a tribute to our country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our Country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right; but it is still our country, right or wrong.”

    6. The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the Republic for which it stands, one Nation under God, indivisible, with Liberty and Justice for all.

    7. The seventh fold is a tribute to our Armed Forces, for it is through the Armed Forces that we protect our country and our flag against all her enemies, whether they are found within or without the boundaries of our republic.

    8. The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day.

    9. The ninth fold is a tribute to womanhood; for it has been through their faith, their love, loyalty and devotion that the character of the men and women who have made this country great has been molded.

    10. The tenth fold is a tribute to the father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since they were first born.

    11. The eleventh fold, in the eyes of a Hebrew citizen represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon, and glorifies in their eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.

    12. The twelfth fold, in the eyes of a Christian citizen, represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in their eyes, God the Father, the Son, and Holy Spirit.

    13. When the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost reminding us of our nation’s motto, “In God We Trust”. After the flag is completely folded and tucked in, it takes on the appearance of a cocked hat, ever reminding us of the soldiers who served under General George Washington, and the sailors and marines who served under Captain John Paul Jones. Those who were followed by their comrades and shipmates in the Armed Forces of the United States, preserving for us the rights, privileges, and freedoms we enjoy today.

    To show respect, citizens of the United States of America fold the flag a special way, outlined below.

    1. Hold the flag waist-high with another person so that its surface is parallel to the ground.
    2. Fold the lower half of the stripe section lengthwise over the field of stars (The Union), holding the bottom and top edges securely.
    3. Fold the flag again lengthwise with the blue field on the outside.
    4. Make a triangular fold by bringing the striped corner of the folded edge to meet the open (top) edge of the flag.
    5. Turn the outer (end) point inward, parallel to the open edge, to form a second triangle.
    6. Continue the triangular folding for the entire flag.
    7. When the flag is completely folded, only a triangular blue field of stars should be visible.

    • Always display the flag with the blue union field up. Never display the flag upside down, except as a distress signal.
    • Always carry the flag aloft and free. Never carry it horizontally.
    • Always dispose of a flag properly, preferably by burning it.
    • The U.S. flag takes precedence over all other flags when flown within the United States. It should be raised first and lowered last. It should not be flown lower than another flag nor should it be smaller than another flag if flown at the same height.
    • Other national flags should not be smaller nor flown lower than the American flag when displayed together. If it is not possible to display two or more national flags at the same height, then it is not proper to display them together at all.
    • If one flag is at half-staff in morning, other flags flown with it should be at half-staff. First raise the flags to their peak, then lower to half-staff.
    • The U.S. flag is raised first and lowered last.
    • A salute (hand over heart for those not in uniform) should be rendered when the flag is raised, lowered, or carried by on parade; when the Pledge of Allegiance is recited; and when the national anthem is played (unless the flag is not present).
    • If the flag is displayed at night, it should be illuminated.
    • In a public gathering (lecture hall, church, etc.), the U.S. flag should be to the right of the speakers when on the stage or podium, to the right of the audience when not on the podium or on the wall behind speaker.
    • Do not display the flag if it is raining, or if there is a thunderstorm, etc.
    • Watch how the military, police, fire department, or Boy Scouts fold the flag. They have all been trained to fold it properly.
    • Always keep the flag clean and safe. Never let it become torn, soiled or damaged.
    • Always treat the flag with respect.
    • Never use it for advertising purposes.
    • Never embroider it on household items or pieces of clothing.
    • Never use it as part of a costume or athletic uniform. However, it is proper to attach a flag patch to the uniform of military personnel, firefighters, police officers and members of other patriotic organizations, provided the patch is properly affixed.
    • Do not let the flag touch the ground.

    How to Dispose of a Damaged American Flag

    The United States Flag Code states: “The Flag, when it is in such condition that it is no longer a fitting emblem of display, should be destroyed in a dignified way, preferable by burning.”

    1. Find a safe location, away from any buildings or trees.
    2. Clear away any flammable debris.
    3. Build a fire, such as a campfire or bonfire. Wait for the fire to reach a temperature that is hot enough to ensure a proper burn, but not so intense that it may blow partially burnt flag particles out of the fire.
    4. Cut the field out of the flag (separate the stars and stripes).
    5. Place the flag on top of the fire with the field on top of the rest of the flag, which should be respectfully folded, and watch to be sure that it is burned safely and completely.
    6. Allow the fire to burn out, and then exercise proper fire safety protocols.
    7. Only the US Military, American Legion, and the Boy Scouts of America are official organizations that will take and properly dispose of an American Flag.

    * Soak or coat the flag lightly in an accelerant, such as lighter fluid, to ensure a complete burn.

    * However, if you are worried the fire alone won’t do, some civic organizations will take custody of a worn flag and dispose of the flag properly. Check local organizations for assistance. Always exercise caution when dealing with fire and flammable materials.

    FLAG RECYCLING

    Our company is working with the organization American Flag Recycling to change the way American flags are retired. As you probably know American flags used to be made out of cotton. Now American flags are made of synthetic materials like nylon. When you burn a nylon flag creates hazardous gases including formaldehyde and cyanide. It is much better to recycle American flags.

    Etsy предоставляет возможность прямой связи покупателей и продавцов со всего мира. Когда вы используете сервисы Etsy (мы будем называть etsy.com, Pattern by Etsy, наши мобильные приложения и другие сервисы нашими «Сервисами»), вы несете ответственность за соблюдение этой политики, независимо от вашего местоположения.

    Эта политика является частью наших Условий использования. Используя любые наши Сервисы, вы соглашаетесь с этой политикой и нашими Условиями использования.

    Как транснациональная компания из США, ведущая деятельность в других странах, Etsy должна соблюдать экономические санкции и торговые ограничения, включая введенные Управлением по контролю за иностранными активами (OFAC) Министерства финансов США. Это означает, что Etsy или кто-либо, пользующийся нашими Сервисами, не может участвовать в транзакциях, в которые вовлечены определенные люди, места или изделия из этих мест, указанные государственными органами, такими как OFAC, в дополнение к торговым санкциям, предусмотренным соответствующими законами и нормами.

    Эта политика действует в отношении всех, кто использует наши Сервисы, независимо от их местоположения. Решение об ознакомлении с такими ограничениями остается за вами.

    Например, эти ограничения в целом запрещают, кроме прочего, транзакции, в которых участвуют следующие стороны:

    1. определенные географические регионы, такие как Иран, Крым, Куба, Северная Корея, Сирия, Россия, Беларусь, Донецкая Народная Республика («ДНР»), Луганская Народная Республика («ЛНР»), а также любые физические или юридические лица, ведущие деятельность или находящиеся на этих территориях;
    2. физические или юридические лица, состоящие в санкционных списках, таких как Список лиц особых категорий и запрещенных лиц (SDN) или Список иностранных лиц, уклоняющихся от санкций (FSE) организации OFAC;
    3. граждане Кубы независимо от их местоположения, не имеющие гражданства или вида на жительство за пределами Кубы; и
    4. изделия, из Ирана, Крыма, Кубы и Северной Кореи, за исключением информационных материалов, таких как публикации, фильмы, постеры, грампластинки, фотографии, кассеты, компакт-диски и определенные произведения искусства.
    5. Любые товары, услуги и технологические решения из ЛНР и ДНР за исключением информационных материалов и сельскохозяйственной продукции, в том числе продуктов питания для людей, семян сельскохозяйственных культур или удобрений.
    6. Импорт в США следующей продукции российского происхождения: рыба, морепродукты, алмазы непромышленного назначения и любая другая продукция, согласно периодическим указаниям министра торговли США.
    7. Экспорт из США либо гражданами США предметов роскоши и любых других товаров, согласно указаниям министра торговли США, любому лицу, находящемуся в России или Беларуси. Список и определение «предметов роскоши» приведены в «Дополнение № 5 к Разделу 746», опубликованном Федеральным реестром США.
    8. Изделия, изготовленные за пределами США и попадающие под действие Закона о тарифах США и связанных с ним законов о запрещении принудительного труда.

    Для защиты нашего сообщества и торговой площадки Etsy предпринимает меры для соблюдения режимов санкций. Например, Etsy запрещает участникам пользоваться своими аккаунтами в определенных географических регионах. Если у нас есть основания полагать, что вы управляете своей аккаунтом из места, находящегося под санкциями, например, любого из перечисленных выше санкционных мест, или иным образом нарушаете какие-либо экономические санкции или торговые ограничения, мы можем приостановить или прекратить использование вами наших Сервисов. Как правило, участникам не разрешается выставлять на продажу, покупать или продавать изделия из регионов, находящихся под санкциями. Сюда входят изделия, появившиеся ранее санкций, поскольку у нас нет возможности проверить, были ли они вывезены из запрещенного места. Etsy оставляет за собой право обращаться к продавцам с запросом предоставить дополнительную информацию, раскрыть страну происхождения изделия на странице товара или предпринять другие шаги для соблюдения обязательств. Мы можем отключить товары или отменить транзакции, представляющие опасность нарушения этой политики.

    Кроме соблюдения требований OFAC и применимых местных законов, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что другие страны могут вводить собственные торговые ограничения и что определенные изделия могут не допускаться к экспорту или импорту согласно международным законам. Когда в транзакции участвуют лица из разных стран, вам следует изучить законы любых соответствующих стран.

    Наконец, участникам Etsy следует иметь в виду, что сторонние платежные системы, например PayPal, могут самостоятельно отслеживать транзакции на предмет соблюдения санкционных требований и могут блокировать транзакции в рамках собственных программ, обеспечивающих соблюдение требований. Etsy не имеет власти или контроля над процедурами независимого принятия решения в таких системах.

    Экономические санкции и торговые ограничения могут применяться к порядку использования вами Сервисов и могут изменяться, поэтому участникам следует регулярно проверять источники информации о санкциях. За юридической консультацией обращайтесь к квалифицированному специалисту.

    Вы можете прочитать эту политику на вашем языке, но помните, что версия этого документа на английском имеет преимущественную силу в отношении использования вами сервисов Etsy. Язык можно изменить в настройках аккаунта.

    The American flag isn’t your average piece of cloth. As one of this country’s most iconic symbols, its care is governed by a specific set of rules.

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    You see the American flag hanging in classrooms, above porches and flying from nearly every flagpole. With 13 red and white stripes and a blue field of 50 stars, it’s a symbol for American freedom that’s known around the world. What Americans might not know is that there are a specific set of guidelines that govern the way each flag should be flown, taken care of and ultimately destroyed.

    The US Flag Code dictates that American flags should be hoisted and lowered each day, although they can be flown through the night if properly illuminated. If tattered, flags should be destroyed in a dignified way (although Texas v. Johnson affirmed a person’s right to burn one in protest). When it comes to folding an American flag, the Boy Scouts of America teach that — out of respect — it should never touch the ground. To prevent this, flags should be folded between two people. From there follow these six steps, which were curated with the guidance of the Boy Scouts of America handbook, to learn how to fold your own flag or lend a hand in a pinch.

    1 Hold the flag parallel to the ground. You will need a partner since most flags are too large (three feet by five feet) to fold properly with one person. Each of you should grab two corners, with the flag’s stripes running towards you.

    2 Fold the flag in half, lengthwise. Each person should fold over and unite the two corners of the flag that they’re holding. Then secure the flag tautly and turn it so it’s once again parallel to the ground. The blue field of stars should remain on the same left side.

    3 Fold the flag in half again, lengthwise. This should be a repeat of the previous step, cutting the folded flag’s surface area in half. This step makes the flag narrow enough so that it can then be folded into triangles.

    4 Start folding the flag into triangles. One person (the one on the side without the blue field of stars) should fold their closed corner up to their side’s open edge.

    5 Continue folding triangles at 90-degree angles. From here, it should be fairly self-explanatory. Each new triangle fold should overtop itself and continue up the length of the flag.

    6 Tuck the final bit. When you get near the end and can’t make anymore triangles, tuck the part of the flag that’s into final triangular folds. This should secure it, with the finished folded flag showing nothing but a blue starry field.

    About Us

    The Folded Flag Foundation is a 501(c)(3) organization that provides educational scholarships and support grants to the spouses and children of the U.S. military and government personnel who died as a result of hostile action or in an accident related to U.S. combat operations.

    How to fold an american flag

    March to
    A Million

    Join Folded Flag in our goal to raise $1 million to go directly to providing scholarships for our Gold Star recipients for the 2022 – 23 school year.

    How to fold an american flag

    Educational
    Scholarships

    We are now accepting scholarship applications through May 13 for Fall/Spring 2022-2023. Summer scholarship period is now closed. For a list of documents you will need, click here. Returning recipients MUST apply each year. For questions, please reach out to [email protected]

    The Incredible Need
    of These Families

    Since 2001, nearly 10,000 men and women have died while deployed in the combat zone, leaving behind thousands of spouses and children. Limited government funding exists to support surviving families in their critical transition to civilian life.

    Posted on June 18, 2020 | Updated on June 19, 2020

    Quick Take

    Headlines on social media misleadingly suggest that House Speaker Nancy Pelosi violated a military tradition when she gave a folded flag to the brother of George Floyd. A folded flag is not “Reserved Only For Fallen Veterans,” as one headline claims. Members of Congress routinely present flags that have flown over the U.S. Capitol as gifts.

    Full Story

    Philonise Floyd — the brother of George Floyd, who was killed in police custody in Minneapolis in late May — testified before the House Judiciary Committee on June 10 during a hearing on police practices and law enforcement accountability.

    During Philonise Floyd’s visit to the Capitol, House Speaker Nancy Pelosi gifted him a folded, encased U.S. flag — as a photo posted on her official Facebook and Twitter accounts shows.

    “Philonise Floyd’s heart-wrenching testimony to the House Judiciary Committee left its mark on us all. May this flag, which flew over the Capitol on the day of his brother’s murder, serve as a symbol of our shared commitment to securing justice for George and all victims of police violence,” her Facebook post said.

    Headlines that circulated on social media in the days after, however, misleadingly suggested that Pelosi’s act trampled on a tradition that reserved the gifting of a folded flag only for military families.

    The conspiracy theory website InfoWars, in a June 15 story that was republished by teaparty.org, declared: “Pelosi Gifts George Floyd’s Brother Folded American Flag Reserved Only For Fallen Veterans.”

    A headline on NeonNettle.com on June 16 echoed the claim: “Pelosi Gifts George Floyd’s Brother Folded American Flag Meant for Fallen Military.” The website later corrected its story.

    The InfoWars story goes on to claim that “[f]olded American flags are traditionally presented by the U.S. government to families of fallen veterans during military funerals” and cites “specific criteria necessary to receive a folded American flag” from the U.S. Veterans Affairs website. It claims Floyd’s family “does not fall into the listed criteria of eligible recipients.”

    There are indeed criteria for those eligible to receive burial flags from Veterans Affairs; the flags are provided at no cost for the funeral of veterans and typically are given to the next-of-kin as a keepsake afterward.

    But there’s nothing that precludes Pelosi, or any other American citizen, from gifting a flag — or folding it.

    “There are no prescriptive rules saying you can’t give a flag to anyone,” said Scot Guenter, senior director of the Flag Research Center and professor emeritus of American Studies at San Jose State University. “The whole point of the American flag is that we don’t live in a society that says you can’t use the flag.”

    Guenter, who wrote the book, “The American Flag, 1777-1924: Cultural Shifts from Creation to Codification,” also told us in a phone interview that folding a flag is a sign of respect for it.

    There is also no mention in the U.S. “Flag Code,” whose provisions Guenter said are “ rules of etiquette,” of who is allowed to gift a flag.

    “While the Department of Veterans Affairs provides a casket flag for all honorable veterans and the military service provides them for active-duty service members upon their death, the U.S. Flag Code does not prohibit or limit a flag draping the coffin to any specific group,” John Raughter, a spokesman for the American Legion, a veterans association, told us in an email. “Traditionally though, as the flag is provided for veterans and active-duty service members, it has come to represent a veteran funeral rite.”

    Raughter added that “there is no rule about who may receive a flag as a gift. We encourage the display of the flag of the United States by all citizens of the United States. Now while there is no rule for it, traditionally a flag is folded into a triangle when it is not flown and may be stored in a presentation case if a particular flag has special meaning.”

    “So presenting someone with a flag, folded into a triangle and placed into a display case is an honorable way of presenting and maintaining the flag of the United States,” he said.

    Flags that are flown over the Capitol — as was the case with the one given to Philonise Floyd — are, in fact, routinely requested by the offices of members of Congress through the Capitol Flag Program, which started in the 1930s.

    The program, under the Architect of the Capitol, allows members of the public to purchase such flags through House and Senate offices; many members of Congress have instructions on their websites for ordering a flag for any occasion. The Architect of the Capitol “fulfills on average more than 100,000 flag requests from Members of Congress annually, with the number of requests and the popularity of the Capitol Flag Program growing steadily each year,” according to the program’s website.

    And, according to the House Members’ Congressional Handbook, members can use such flags as official gifts.

    “ U.S. flags flown over the Capitol for official presentation as a gift, including the flag flying fee, are reimbursable,” the handbook says. “Such flags must be for the personal use of or display by the recipient (examples may include, but are not limited to: flags presented at a building dedication for which the Member secured official funding, a flag presented to the family of a fallen soldier, flags presented for exceptional public distinction, etc,).”

    So nothing in the handbook, either, limits members’ gifting of flags flown over the Capitol only to military families.

    In December 2016, former Rep. Dennis Ross, a Republican from Florida, gave a folded, framed flag that had flown over the Capitol to a new school in Davenport, Florida. And the next year, Republican Rep. Roger Williams of Texas gifted two folded, encased flags from the Capitol to two new schools in his district.

    Update, June 19: We updated this article to reflect that NeonNettle.com has corrected its story.

    Editor’s note: FactCheck.org is one of several organizations working with Facebook to debunk misinformation shared on social media. Our previous stories can be found here.

    Sources

    “Burial Flags Frequently Asked Questions.” U.S. Department of Veterans Affairs. Accessed 17 Jun 2020.

    “Capitol Flag Program.” Architect of the Capitol. Accessed 18 Jun 2020.

    Guenter, Scot. Senior director, Flag Research Center. Phone interview with FactCheck.org. 17 Jun 2020.

    “Members’ Congressional Handbook.” House Committee on House Administration. Accessed 18 Jun 2020.

    Raugher, John. Spokesman, American Legion. Email to FactCheck.org. 18 Jun 2020.

    • Categories
      • Debunking False Stories
    • Issue
      • flag
      • veterans
    • People
      • george floyd
      • Nancy Pelosi

    Q: How d o people who have not been vaccinated against COVID-19 pose a risk to people who have been vaccinated?

    A: An unvaccinated person who is infected with COVID-19 poses a much greater risk to others who are also unvaccinated. But vaccines are not 100% effective, so there is a chance that an unvaccinated person could infect a vaccinated person — particularly the vulnerable, such as elderly and immunocompromised individuals.

    How to fold an american flagIf you are considering transporting, displaying, or presenting the U.S. flag, it is best to do so in an honorable way. There are twelve steps to folding the U.S. flag, and each fold holds its own meaning.

    When folding the flag you want to make sure it never touches the ground. To ensure this, it is best for at least two people to fold the flag together, or for the flag to be folded on top of a table.

    Always start with the flag parallel to the ground. The stars and stripes section represents the “top” while the stripes only section represents the “bottom”.

    Begin by holding the flag waist-high with another person so that its surface is parallel to the ground.

    Step 1 – The Liberty Fold

    The first fold in the flag stands for liberty

    How to fold an american flag

    Fold the bottom half (stripe section) lengthwise over the field of stars, holding the bottom (stripes) and top (stars and stripes) edges securely. The flag should appear to have all stripes and no stars but a small portion of blue.

    Step 2 – The Unity Fold

    The second fold in the flag represents unity


    Take the bottom with the small portion of blue and fold the flag again lengthwise. The flag should now show both stars and stripes with its full length but only a quarter of its width. The new “bottom” has a complete fold (folded edge) while the new “top” has folds and openings (open edge).

    Step 3 – The Justice Fold

    The third fold stands for justice


    Now make a triangular fold by bringing the bottom of the striped corner to meet the top edge of the flag.

    Step 4 – The Perseverance Fold

    The fourth fold symbolizes perseverance

    Now that the flag resembles a trapezoid with a triangular end, fold the triangle inward to form the second triangle. With two triangles folded inward, the flag should now resemble a rectangle.

    Steps 5-12


    Continue the triangular folding process (from trapezoid to rectangle) until the entire length of the flag is folded leaving only a “triangle pillow”.

    5 -The Hardiness Fold
    6 – The Valor Fold
    7 – The Purity Fold
    8 – The Innocence Fold
    9 – The Sacrifice Fold
    10 – The Honor Fold
    11 – The Independence Fold
    12 – The Truth Fold

    How to fold an american flagA United States burial casket flag drapes the casket of deceased veterans to honor the memory of their service to the country. The ceremonial folding and presentation of the flag is a moving tribute of lasting importance to the veteran’s family.

    The flag is placed on a closed casket so the union blue field is at the head and over the left shoulder of the deceased. The flag folding ceremony represents the same religious principles on which our country was originally founded. The portion of the flag denoting honor is the canton of blue containing the stars representing the states our veterans served in uniform. The canton field of blue dresses from left to right and is inverted when draped as a pall on a casket of a veteran who has served our country in uniform.

    “While Public Law 94-344 does not place any significance or meaning to the thirteen folds of the American flag, the sentiments below have been adopted as a tradition by veterans and family members of veterans of our great nation as they reflect what we recognize about our flag and our country. They give meaning and hope to those family members who have lost a loved one who served in our great nation’s military preserving and fighting for our freedoms.

    After Taps is played, the flag is carefully folded into the symbolic tri-cornered shape. A properly proportioned flag will fold thirteen times on the triangles, representing the original thirteen colonies with each fold representing a uniqueness of its own as explained below. The folded flag is emblematic of the tri-cornered hat worn by the Patriots of the American Revolution. When folded, no red or white stripe is to be evident, leaving only the blue field with stars.

    Meaning of the thirteen folds:
    Have you ever noticed that the honor guard pays meticulous attention to correctly folding the United States of America Flag thirteen times?
    The 1st fold of the flag is a symbol of life.
    The 2nd fold is a symbol of the belief in eternal life.
    The 3rd fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veterans departing the ranks who gave a portion of their lives for the defense of the country to attain peace throughout the world.
    The 4th fold represents the weaker nature, for as American citizens trusting in God, it is to Him we turn in times of peace as well as in the time of war for His divine guidance.
    The 5th fold is a tribute to the country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, ‘Our Country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right; but it is still our country, right or wrong.’
    The 6th fold is for where people’s hearts lie. It is with their heart that they pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and the Republic for which it stands, one Nation under God, indivisible, with Liberty and Justice for all.
    The 7th fold is a tribute to its Armed Forces, for it is through the Armed Forces that they protect their country and their flag against all her enemies, whether they be found within or without the boundaries of their republic.
    The 8th fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day.
    The 9th fold is a tribute to womanhood and Mothers. For it has been through their faith, their love, loyalty and devotion that the character of the men and women who have made this country great has been molded.
    The 10th fold is a tribute to the father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of their country since they were first born.
    The 11th fold represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies in the Hebrews eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.
    The 12th fold represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in the Christians eyes, God the Father, the Son and Holy Spirit.
    The 13th fold, or when the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost reminding them of their Nations motto, ‘In God We Trust.’
    After the flag is completely folded and tucked in, it takes on the appearance of a cocked hat, ever reminding us of the soldiers who served under General George Washington, and the Sailors and Marines who served under Captain John Paul Jones, who were followed by their comrades and shipmates in the Armed Forces of the United States, preserving for them the rights, privileges and freedoms they enjoy today.
    Effective April 17, 2012, the Department of Defense standardized the flag presentation verbiage for military funeral honors ceremonies. The following verbiage will be used when presenting the American flag during the funeral service:

    ‘On behalf of the President of the United States, (the United States Army; the United States Marine Corps; the United States Navy; or the United States Air Force), and a grateful Nation, please accept this flag as a symbol of our appreciation for your loved one’s honorable and faithful service.’
    It is then presented as a keepsake to the next of kin or an appropriate family member.

    Garbage man pulls flag out of trash can, folds it properly

    Marine Corps veteran Don Gardner has pulled at least 11 American flags from landfills in his 11 years in the garbage business.

    HUNTINGTON, Utah – Don Gardner is the kind of garbage collector who will get out of his truck to bring elderly residents’ cans to the street when they forget.

    And when the Marine Corps veteran was caught on camera last week taking an American flag out of the trash to fold and dispose of it properly, it came as a surprise to no one who knows him.

    “That is Don. That is who Don is,” friend Whitney Phelps told KSTU.

    Gardner has been collecting garbage in Emery County, Utah, for 11 years. In that time, he’s pulled at least a dozen flags from trashcans and landfills.

    “I took an oath once to defend this country and our flag, and I still do,” he said.

    Brooke Cowley caught the latest act on video, then shared it to social media so the community could “see the care and love that he gave our flag.” Cowley told KSTU that she’s the one who accidentally threw the flag away.

    “Immediately I was so embarrassed,” Cowley said. “I was petrified, because I’m married to a veteran. What am I doing?”

    Gardner, meanwhile, had no idea he was being filmed.

    “It’s just something I do,” he said. “I get angry sometimes. Sometimes it’s a mistake; most of the time it’s on purpose. I have a problem with that, so I just take it out and take care of it.”

    The veteran wants his neighbors to know there’s a right way to dispose of an American flag, and he’s happy to educate anyone who will listen.

    “If you don’t know what to do with it, get it to me. I’ll make sure it’s took care of proper,” he said.

    How to dispose of an American flag

    When an American flag “is in such condition that it is no longer a fitting emblem for display,” it should “be destroyed in a dignified way, preferably by burning,” according to the U.S. Flag Code.

    How to fold an american flag

    BOSTON, MA – APRIL 18: A member of the Hanscom Air Force Base looks on as the American Flag is displayed over the Green Monster before a game between the Boston Red Sox and the Minnesota Twins on April 18, 2022 at Fenway Park in Boston, Massachusetts

    One way to ensure it’s given a dignified sendoff is to bring the flag to a local flag collection box. They can be found at local VFW and American Legion chapters, Boy Scout and Girl Scout offices, and sometimes at government buildings like police stations. Once the flag boxes are full, the respective organizations will hold flag-retirement ceremonies.

    If you can’t drop off the flag, you can have your own private retirement ceremony, but make sure the flag is folded properly. Then, say the Pledge of Allegiance or have a moment of silence as the flag burns. Be sure to follow local and state fire laws.

    When burning isn’t an option, you can fold the flag and place it in a ceremonious box, then bury the box. In some cases, American flags can be recycled.

    Plus dos and don’ts for folding, cleaning, and more.

    How to fold an american flag

    How to fold an american flag

    There’s no better way to show your patriotism than with our country’s stars and stripes — especially on Memorial Day weekend. (Do you know the meaning of Memorial Day? Read up on the history of Memorial Day for a quick refresher.) Whether you hang the American flag from your porch or plant it in your front yard, it’s an easy way to showcase your gratitude and appreciation for the incredible freedoms we enjoy each and every day in the U.S.

    But even if you have the best of intentions when raising that flag, you’ll still want to be sure that your actions reflect an understanding of the United States Flag Code (test your flag knowledge with these 15 fun American flag facts!). That’s where our guide to proper flag etiquette comes in: This quick, easy-to-understand rundown of all the rules and regulations associated with that important symbol will undoubtedly come in handy this summer, whether you’ll be raising the flag for Memorial Day, the Fourth of July, or just because.

    After all, when it comes to our celebrating our great nation—and the most beautiful places in the U.S.—no detail is too small.

    How to Display the American Flag

    • When displayed with another flag cross-staff against a wall, place the U.S. flag in front of the other flag and to the viewer’s left with the union at the peak of the staff.
    • When displayed on an angled staff from a window or the front a building, the union should be placed at the peak of the staff.
    • When hung horizontally or vertically against a wall or in a window, the flag must be flat and allowed to hang freely without folds, and the union should be uppermost and to the flag’s own right (the viewer’s left).
    • No state or city flag may be placed above or to the flag’s right (the viewer’s left) of the United States flag. Flags of other nations are to be flown from separate staffs of the same height.
    • The U.S. flag should be at the center and highest point in any groupings of flags displayed from staffs.
    • If displayed after dark, the flag must be lit. Without proper lighting, the flag may only be displayed from sunrise to sunset.
    • On vehicles, the flag should be fixed to the front right fender, never draped over a vehicle.

    Remember: The flag should not be displayed during inclement weather unless it is an all-weather flag.

    How to fold an american flag

    If you’ve attended a funeral honoring a veteran who served our country, perhaps you witnessed the folding of the flag that once covered the casket of a loved one. Each of the 13 folds of the flag holds great significance.

    At the ceremony of retreat, a daily observance at bases during which all personnel pay respect to the flag, “the flag is lowered, folded in a triangle fold and kept under watch throughout the night as a tribute to our nation’s honored dead. The next morning, it is brought out and, at the ceremony of reveille, run aloft as a symbol of our belief in the resurrection of the body.”

    1. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.
    2. The second fold signifies our belief in eternal life.
    3. The third fold is made in honor and tribute of the veteran departing our ranks, and who gave a portion of his or her life for the defense of our country to attain peace.
    4. The fourth fold exemplifies our weaker nature as citizens trusting in God; it is to Him we turn for His divine guidance.
    5. The fifth fold is an acknowledgment to our country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right, but it is still our country, right or wrong.”
    6. The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the republic for which it stands, one nation under God, indivisible, with liberty and justice for all.
    7. The seventh fold is a tribute to our armed forces, for it is through the armed forces that we protect our country and our flag against all enemies.
    8. The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor our mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day.
    9. The ninth fold is an honor to womanhood, for it has been through their faith, love, loyalty, and devotion that the character of the men and women who have made this country great have been molded.
    10. The 10th fold is a tribute to father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since he or she was first-born.
    11. The 11th fold, in the eyes of Hebrew citizens, represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon and glorifies, in their eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.
    12. The 12th fold, in the eyes of a Christian citizen, represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in their eyes, God the Father, the Son, and Holy Ghost.
    13. The last fold, when the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost, reminding us of our national motto, “In God We Trust.”

    Click here to watch an Honor Guard Team demonstration of proper flag folding. For more information click here.

    ALA Mission
    Statement

    In the spirit of Service, Not Self, the mission of the American Legion Auxiliary is to support The American Legion and to honor the sacrifice of those who serve by enhancing the lives of our veterans, military, and their families, both at home and abroad. For God and Country, we advocate for veterans, educate our citizens, mentor youth, and promote patriotism, good citizenship, peace and security.

    By Lindsay Lowe Parade @linzlowe

    More by Lindsay

    • 25 Cinco de Mayo Facts, Plus the History of Cinco de Mayo
    • New Movies, Shows and Live Sporting Events Coming to Peacock in May 2022
    • 25 Earth Day Facts—Plus, How to Help the Planet Today and Every Day

    With today being Flag Day (June 14, 2021), many people and institutions will display the American flag on Flag Day, which celebrates the adoption of the United States flag in 1777. But did you know there are specific dos and don’ts for flying the American flag? To help you avoid causing offense or committing any faux pas with the American flag, we’re taking a look at some of the most important American flag rules , as well as other points of American flag etiquette .

    The rules for displaying and handling the American flag are outlined in a series of federal regulations known as the United States Flag Code. In general, there isn’t any actual punishment under the law for breaking these rules, but these guidelines are widely followed by organizations and government institutions.

    The Flag Code outlines specific rules for displaying the flag on holidays. On Memorial Day, for example, the correct protocol for displaying the American flag is to hoist it quickly to full staff at sunrise, and then lower to half-staff. Then, at noon, return the flag to full staff.

    Here are some other rules for displaying and handling the American flag, including how to fold an American flag and how to dispose of an American flag, according to the U.S. Flag Code.

    American Flag Etiquette

    When to display the American flag

    It is the “universal custom” to display the American flag from sunrise to sunset on buildings, according to the U.S. Flag Code. However, American flags may be displayed 24 hours a day if they are “properly” illuminated at night.

    According to the U.S. Flag Code, the American flag should be displayed on all days, and especially on certain holidays, including New Year’s Day, Mother’s Day, Armed Forces Day, Memorial Day, Thanksgiving Day, Christmas Day, and several other notable U.S. holidays.

    How to fold an American flag

    There is a specific method for folding the American flag into a triangular shape. Here’s a handy visual guide from the Crossroads of America Council:

    Happy Flag Day! To celebrate, here is how your properly fold a flag. Did you know that there are six American flags located on the moon? Apollo crews 11,12,14,15,16 and 17 planted the flags on the moon.

    Proper American Flag etiquette during weather conditions

    American flags, with the exception of all-weather flags, should not be displayed during inclement weather.

    Where you must display the American flag

    The American flag should be displayed in or near all schoolhouses, administration buildings of public institutions, and polling places on election days.

    American flags in parades

    American flags should only be displayed on parade floats if they are on a staff.

    The American flag on cars, trains and boats

    American flags should not be “draped over the hood, top, sides, or back of a vehicle or of a railroad train or boat,” according to the U.S. Flag Code. Flags displayed on cars should be on a mounted pole that’s firmly attached to the chassis or the right fender.

    Displaying other flags with the American flag

    Within the U.S. or in a U.S. territory, no other flag or pennant should be displayed above the American flag, with the exception of naval chaplains conducting church services at sea, “when the church pennant may be flown above the flag during church services for the personnel of the Navy,” according to the Flag Code.

    American flags on speaker’s platforms

    When displayed flat on a speaker’s platform, American flags should be above and behind the speaker.

    How to fly the American flag half-staff

    To bring a flag to half-staff, first hoist it to the peak for one moment, and then lower to half-staff.

    Days to fly the American flag at half-staff

    The American flag should be flown at half-staff until noon on Memorial Day, and should also be flown at half-staff “upon the death of principal figures of the United States Government and the Governor of a State, territory, or possession, as a mark of respect to their memory.” The flag may be flown at half-staff on other occasions as instructed by the president.

    Covering a casket with the American flag

    When covering a casket, arrange the American flag so that the union is at the head and over the left shoulder. The flag should not touch the ground or be lowered into the grave.

    An American flag should not touch the ground

    The American flag should never touch the ground, the floor, or any water beneath it.

    Rules for displaying the American Flag

    The American flag should never be displayed upside down, “except as a signal of dire distress in instances of extreme danger to life or property,” according to the Flag Code.

    Wearing the American flag on clothing

    This rule isn’t strictly followed these days, but according to the U.S. Flag Code, the American flag “should never be used as wearing apparel, bedding, or drapery.”

    Improper uses of the American flag

    The American flag should never be used as a receptacle for holding or delivering something. It should also not be used as a covering for a ceiling, or for any advertising purposes.

    Getting rid of an American flag

    When a flag is no longer fit for display—for example, if it has become too worn or damaged—it “should be destroyed in a dignified way, preferably by burning,” according to the Flag Code.

    How to carry the American flag

    The American should never be carried flat, “but always aloft and free.”

    Parade Daily

    Advertising with the American flag

    The flag should not be used for advertising purposes, and should not be printed on any discardable product such as paper napkins or boxes.

    The American flag on costumes and uniforms

    The flag should never be used as part of a costume or athletic uniform, according to the Flag Code.

    Francis Scott Key Post 11

    When to Display Your Flag

    The flag should be displayed, from sunrise to sunset, on all days when the weather permits, especially on:

    New Year’s Day, January 1.

    Martin Luther King’s Birthday, Third Monday in January.

    Washington’s Birthday, February 22.

    Mother’s Day, Second Sunday in May.

    Armed Forces Day, Third Saturday in May.

    Memorial Day (half-staff until noon), Last Monday in May.

    Flag Day, June 14th.

    Independence Day, July 4th.

    Labor Day, First Monday in September.

    Constitution Day, September 17th.

    Columbus Day, October 12th.

    Veterans Day, November 11th.

    Thanksgiving Day, Fourth Thursday in November.

    Christmas Day, December 25th.

    Election Days (various).

    Federally observed dates of the above holidays which may be different from the actual dates.

    Such days as may be proclaimed by the President of the United States.

    State and Local Holidays.

    Folding the Flag

    1. Bring the striped half up over the blue field.

    2. Then fold it in half again.

    3. Bring the lower striped corner to the upper edge forming a triangle.

    4. Then fold the upper point in to form another triangle. Continue until the entire length of the flag is folded.

    5. When you get near the end – nothing but the blue field showing – tuck the last bit into the other folds to secure it.

    WHY THE AMERICAN FLAG IS FOLDED 13 TIMES.

    Have you ever noticed on TV or at military funerals that the honor guard pays meticulous attention to correctly folding the American flag 13 times? Each fold of the U.S. flag has an important meaning. We have verified its accuracy at the U.S. Air Force Academy Web site [go to main page, then click on “Information”, then on “Flags”].

    1. The first fold of our flag is a symbol of life.

    2. The second fold is a symbol of our belief in eternal life.

    3. The third fold is made in honor and remembrance of the veterans departing our ranks who gave a portion of their lives for the defense of our country to attain peace throughout the world.

    4. The fourth fold represents our weaker nature, for as American citizens trusting in God, it is to Him we turn in times of peace as well as in time of war for His divine guidance.

    5. The fifth fold is a tribute to our country, for in the words of Stephen Decatur, “Our Country, in dealing with other countries, may she always be right; but it is still our country, right or wrong.”

    6. The sixth fold is for where our hearts lie. It is with our heart that we pledge allegiance to the flag of the United States of America, and to the Republic for which it stands, one Nation under God, indivisible, with Liberty and Justice for all.

    7. The seventh fold is a tribute to our Armed Forces, for it is through the Armed Forces that we protect our country and our flag against all her enemies, whether they are found within or without the boundaries of our republic.

    8. The eighth fold is a tribute to the one who entered into the valley of the shadow of death, that we might see the light of day, and to honor mother, for whom it flies on Mother’s Day.

    9. The ninth fold is a tribute to womanhood; for it has been through their faith, their love, loyalty and devotion that the character of the men and women who have made this country great has been molded.

    10. The tenth fold is a tribute to the father, for he, too, has given his sons and daughters for the defense of our country since they were first born.

    11. The eleventh fold, in the eyes of a Hebrew citizen represents the lower portion of the seal of King David and King Solomon, and glorifies in their eyes, the God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.

    12. The twelfth fold, in the eyes of a Christian citizen, represents an emblem of eternity and glorifies, in their eyes, God the Father, the Son, and Holy Spirit.

    13. When the flag is completely folded, the stars are uppermost reminding us of our nation’s motto, “In God We Trust”. After the flag is completely folded and tucked in, it takes on the appearance of a cocked hat, ever reminding us of the soldiers who served under General George Washington, and the sailors and marines who served under Captain John Paul Jones. Those who were followed by their comrades and shipmates in the Armed Forces of the United States, preserving for us the rights, privileges, and freedoms we enjoy today.

    Students learn to fold a flag properly and practice the technique by folding paper flags.

    • follow instructions for folding a U.S. flag.
    • practice by folding paper flags.

    flag, fold, America, U.S., following directions, symbol

    • an American flag
    • Folding the Flag Instructions
    • a paper flag for practice folding (Sources: Printable Stars and Stripes or this alternate source. Requires Adobe Acrobat Reader.)

    Invite two students — using a real flag, if possible — to read and demonstrate the steps involved in correctly folding a U.S. flag. Simple instructions for folding the flag can be found at Folding the Flag. After the first pair of students has successfully followed the folding directions, ask two or three additional student pairs to demonstrate the technique as well.

    Provide each student with a paper flag. See links to a full-color flag and a black-and-white, ready-to-color flag in the Materials Needed section above. Have students work in pairs to follow the flag folding directions, or lead the entire class in the paper flag folding exercise.

    Students follow the directions to correctly fold a U.S. flag.

    Lesson Plan Source

    SOCIAL SCIENCES: Civics

    • GRADES K – 4
      NSS-C.K-4.5 Roles of the Citizen
    • GRADES 5 – 8
      NSS-C.5-8.5 Roles of the Citizen
    • GRADES 9 – 12
      NSS-C.9-12.5 Roles of the Citizen

      Return to the Flag Day lesson plan page.

      See additional Flag Day lessons in the Education World articles A Salute to Flag Day and Celebrate the Stars and Stripes.

      By Caitlin O’Kane

      September 21, 2018 / 4:29 PM / CBS News

      A photo of three young boys folding an American flag in Hayden, Idaho, has gone viral, with many praising the boys for their efforts to protect the flag.

      Amanda Reallan spotted the boys outside of Hayden Meadows Elementary school on Wednesday. What she saw compelled her to take a photo. Two boys were holding the ends of an American flag together to fold it in half. The third boy laid underneath the flag, so if it slipped from his friends’ hands, it wouldn’t hit the ground.

      Reallan shared the heartwarming picture on Facebook. “Wow! I just watched the most amazing act of Patriotism!” the mom wrote. “Was waiting to pick up my children from school when three boys took down the flag. They were having a hard time making sure it didn’t touch the ground when the third boy laid under it to honor not letting it touch the ground!”

      The photo of the patriotic young men protecting the sacred flag soon went viral.

      Hayden Meadows Elementary School. This needs to go viral! Wow! I just watched the most amazing act of Patriotism.

      The boys are fifth graders Naylan Tuttle, Jack LeBreck, and Casey Dolan, KHQ reports. The three friends explained why the took so much care in folding the flag.

      “This is our nation’s flag, this is our school’s flag, it’s how we represent our country,” LeBreck said. “If you let it touch the ground then you disrespect our country is what I heard.”

      The boys had a mentor who taught them about the flag. Mac McCarty, the school’s custodian, showed the 5th graders how to properly fold and store it. “Mr. Mac” as the kids call him, told KHQ he is an Air Force veteran and that his father and grandfather were both in the military. He was happy the boys took his lesson to heart.

      “They did themselves proud, they did their families proud, they did our school proud and our community and I’m very proud of them and I’m sure their families are very proud of them as well,” McCarty said.

      “I think it would be very honorable for me, my dad and my grandfather, they’ve been in the service, in the military, so I probably think I would make them proud,” Naylan Tuttle said.

      The Uplift

      Caitlin O’Kane is a digital content producer covering trending stories for CBS News and its good news brand, The Uplift.

      First published on September 21, 2018 / 4:29 PM

      © 2018 CBS Interactive Inc. All Rights Reserved.

  • How to write a drum cadence

    A cadence is a piece of music played by a drumline. It is usually used functionally as a way to keep time for the band as they are marching from point A to B, either during a parade or other live performance. Cadences are usually written to be fun to perform and fun to listen to. They often borrow rhythmic ideas from popular styles of music such as Afro-Cuban, Pop, R&B, and more. Sometimes, cadences are arrangements of a particular song, while others are original compositions. By reading this guide, you will hopefully get some ideas to inspire your next drumline cadence!

    Practical Considerations

    How to write a drum cadence

    Think through these things before getting started. (Photo credit: James Scott)

    Begin with some practical considerations. Will this cadence be performed during parades and/or while the drumline is moving? If so, consider keeping it within a comfortable walking tempo of around 108-124bpm. If not, you have much more flexibility when it comes to tempo.

    Next, consider who will be performing this music. Is it for mostly beginners, very advanced performers, or somewhere in between? What skills does your target audience have in terms of rudiments, pulse control, and metric modulation abilities? Do you have any specific skills or rudiments you wish to focus on more heavily?

    Notation

    How to write a drum cadence

    Capture your musical ideas by writing them down. (Photo credit: Weston MacKinnon)

    Now it’s time to determine how you will notate the music. Will you write it by hand? If so, find some staff paper and a pencil. Will you use computer software? Sibelius, Finale, and MuseScore are some great options that each come with a learning curve. For someone just starting out, MuseScore may be the best in terms of cost (free) and ease of use. Learning how to notate music can be challenging at first, but it is worth it because it unlocks your creativity and allows you to express yourself musically.

    Consider Restrictions

    How to write a drum cadence

    Restrictions can inspire creativity. (Photo Credit: Utsman Media)

    Sometimes I find that I am the most creative when I have some type of restriction placed on my compositional process. Maybe it’s a self-imposed challenge, such as: “I am going to write an exercise using only paradiddles and double paradiddles.” Maybe it’s something as simple as a deadline beyond my control (“I have to finish the piece by tomorrow night so I can hand it out to the students on Monday”). Giving yourself a deadline or some type of restriction can serve to focus your attention and get creativity to flow. It’s up to you to decide if that makes sense for your current project.

    Coming Up with Ideas

    How to write a drum cadence

    Make yourself available for inspiration. (Photo credit: Patrick Tomasso)

    Sometimes an idea for a piece of music jumps out at you. This can happen at any time, so it’s best to keep a recording device with you. Luckily, most mobile devices have some type of voice recorder. This allows you to tap or sing the rhythmic idea into the recording to be notated later. Some of the best composers in the world use this method to keep track of new ideas.

    Other times, you may need to look for an idea. This might mean listening to some of your favorite music. It might also mean listening to musical genres that you have never listened to before. Rhythm is everywhere. I recommend not listening to a bunch of other drumline cadences for inspiration. Instead, try to capture musical ideas from other genres and bring them to life in a new and unique way in the drumline idiom!

    Notating Your Ideas

    How to write a drum cadence

    Capture your musical ideas by writing them down. (Photo Credit: Philipp Katzenberger)

    Once you have a few musical ideas, it’s time to write them out. Most cadences are written out in three or four staves, with the top line being for snares, the next for tenors, then followed by bass drums, and finally cymbals. With your staves lined up, begin recording your ideas on the page. Try moving the rhythm from one voice to another (example: maybe you have an idea for a snare part… try repeating that idea in the tenor part). I like to put an idea down, then leave a bunch of blank measures before jotting down another idea. This gives me room to expand upon the idea, leave it and work on something else, and then come back to it later. The benefit of using computer software for this task is that you can easily cut and paste ideas around the score. A pair of scissors and tape could accomplish the same task with handwritten music.

    Developing Your Ideas

    How to write a drum cadence

    Your ideas need to be shaped and refined. (Photo credit: Alice Dietrich)

    So now your score has a bunch of ideas that don’t necessarily connect to each other in any meaningful way. If you like all of the ideas, then it’s time to find what does connect those ideas musically, and develop more similar content to bridge the gaps. This could be as simple as writing a 2-4 bar transition between two unrelated ideas, with the transitional material borrowing concepts from each idea. Or maybe your 2-4 bar transitional idea evolves into a new idea of its own and becomes a 16-bar phrase. Don’t be afraid to let your musical ideas grow where they want to.

    If you have a good idea for one instrument, but not much going on in the other three parts, here are some ideas to help fill out your score:

    · Consider making it a solo for that instrument, and just fill in some sparse accompaniment parts.

    · Try copying the rhythm note-for-note into another instrument. For example, a tenor part that is in unison with the snare part rhythmically, but adds “rounds” (playing on different drums).

    · Create counterpoint. Example: a snare part that moves from eighth notes to 16th notes could be paired with a tenor part that moves from 16th notes to eighth notes.

    · When in doubt, introduce syncopation. For example: a snare part playing straight 16th notes would fit nicely overtop a dotted eighth and 16th note pattern in the bottom bass drum.

    · Use repetition to reinforce your musical ideas. That being said, avoid repeating something too many times without introducing new material. Too many repetitions can get stale.

    Continue developing your ideas until you reach a point where the cadence has a form. Musical forms that we learned about in theory class (AB, ABA, ABACA, etc.) can serve as a guide to give you structure. Some composers decide on this structure before finding and developing their musical ideas, so perhaps that is something you want to do as well.

    A drumline cadence is a musical arrangement for percussionists that is usually played to maintain the correct rhythm in a drum corps or marching band. The tempo of the drumline cadence provides all performers the speed at which they should be stepping in unison when this type of marching ensemble is moving in formation. Different marching groups typically have their own unique cadence that is sometimes specifically written for their percussion section. Both parade and field show performances are often preceded by the ensemble marching to the drumline cadence before beginning to play their selected pieces.

    The origins of the modern drumline cadence are usually traced to similar drum beats used in military marching. These cadences are intended to help recruits keep in step when either marching or even running in formation. Military cadences are either played on a percussion instrument or chanted vocally during basic training exercises. The types of drumline cadences used for marching music ensembles are sometimes more rhytmically intricate, depending on the group. Various versions of the same basic cadence can also be adapted for drum corps, pipe bands, or indoor percussion ensembles.

    Marching percussion sections usually use a drumline cadence to practice the fundamentals of drum technique, as well as to keep the rest of the ensemble in time. The typical cadence is written with combinations of each of the four specific strokes used to strike the drum surface and produce the desired notes. Each of these strokes are designated the up stroke, the down stroke, the full stroke, and the tap. Combining at least two of these strokes in succession will produce rhythms with changing accents on different notes. The more varied the drum stroke combinations, the more complex the resulting cadence generally sounds to the listener.

    Since different marching ensembles often compete with one another in field show performances and parades, the percussion section of each one often wants an intricate drumline cadence to stand out from the rest. Professional musicians often compose drumline cadences, although some percussion instructors or even experienced performers can write signature cadences as well. The process of writing a marching percussion cadence typically requires a good working knowledge of rhythm, tempo, and drum stoke technique. Musicians with experience in writing cadences often recommend starting with a basic structure of quarter notes and then adding more complicated variations as the drum section masters the basics of a new cadence.

    You might also Like

    Recommended

    Readers Also Love

    Related Articles

    Discussion Comments

    @cardsfan27 – The drums you’re thinking of are called toms. In the band, they are usually called quads because they typically have the four drum heads you mentioned.

    A lot of people think playing a bass drum would be easy, and it is to a certain extent, but some might argue otherwise.

    A lot of the difficulty in playing the bass drum is that you have to be in sync with all of the other players. Since a bass drummer doesn’t play every single stroke like some of the other members of the section, they have to be ready to jump when it is their turn to hit their beat. Hitting the drum itself isn’t that hard, but being able to remember the counts for your part can be very difficult. cardsfan27 September 3, 2011

    I have seen a few drumlines play. I really like the drums that are a set of four or five smaller drums all together. Does anyone have any idea what I’m talking about?

    I’ve always kind of thought the big bass drums were overrated. At least to me, it doesn’t seem like they would be that hard to play. Maybe I’m wrong.

    How many hours does it usually take before a drumline perfects a cadence? What are the hardest and easiest parts of learning it? matthewc23 September 2, 2011

    @Emilski – You are right about that. Where I go to college, the drumline members are outside every morning at 8 am and back at 4 pm working on their cadence and drumming skills. Rain or shine, they are there.

    I was never in band and don’t know much about music, but I think listening to the percussion section is one of the ways anyone can relate to a band, since anyone can pick up a beat. Not to mention, the drum rhythms sound very hard to play, so I think that gets them more respect, too.

    At least our band has the percussion section do a lot of moving and acting on the field. The cymbal players even do a set of cartwheels in one part of the performance. Emilski September 1, 2011

    When I was in marching band in high school, the drumline cadence was one of the biggest parts of the whole band. Our drumline spent hours and hours after school trying to make sure it was perfect. I don’t think you can underestimate how important it is.

    A lot of people judge a band by the quality of the percussion section, so the cadence has to be good. Besides that, a cadence is a sort of calling card for the band. Different bands have different styles, so before you even hear the band play, you can have a sense of their style just by hearing the cadence and seeing how the percussion section acts.

    Once I got to college and started watching marching bands, you could tell they only got more serious about it.

    Sub-Sonic is a simple cadence for beginner drumlines. This drum cadence offers a fun and entertaining sound while still being simple enough for new drummers. Sub-Sonic is an excellent cadence for 6th, 7th and 8th grade drumlines.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Bacon & Eggs is a basic drum cadence for fresh drumlines. This cadence is simple and fun and is managable for most beginner drummers. Bacon & Eggs is an excellent drum cadence for 6th, 7th and 8th grade drumlines.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Zombie Squirrels is an exciting beginner drum cadence that introduces a few new rhythms. This drum cadence is great for younger groups or for programs that are in need of a quick fun cadence. This drum cadence is recomended for 7th and 8th grade drumlines.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Storm is a very basic cadence that is simple enough for any drumline to play. This cadence consists of only a few basic rhythms and no accents. We highly recommend this cadence for 6th and 7th grade drummers.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Navigator is another one of our basic cadences. This cadence features several simple rhythms and is also very repetitive. Navigator is a great one for younger groups or can be used as an easy second cadence for groups that are capable of playing a Level 2 Cadence.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Time Travel is a great cadence for any beginner drumline. This is also a great cadence for first time tenor drummers as it helps demonstrate how the hands need to move and flow around the drums.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Tadpole is a great cadence for younger drumlines who will be soon be transitioning to a more advanced group (such as a high school drumline). This cadence is simple, fun, and packs quite a punch for a Level 1 cadence!

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Bumper is the easiest cadence in Street Beatz Pack #1. This cadence is perfect for middle school drumlines that are looking for a fun and simple cadence to learn quickly.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    1+ Marching Bass Drum
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Cargo is a simple Level 1 Cadence but is slightly more complex than Bumper. This cadence utilizes 2 bass drum and a quint tenor drum configuration.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 5 Drums
    2+ Marching Bass Drums
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    ProJam is considered to be a difficult Level 1 Cadence. If you are debating betwen selecting a Level 1 or 2 Cadence for your drumline, we recommend that you choose ProJam. This is a great cadence that’s simple but won’t put more advanced players to sleep.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    4+ Marching Bass Drums
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Earthquake is perfect for young drumlines and is a great first cadence for any group. This cadence features unison bass drum parts to make finding the beat as simple as it can possibly be.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    4+ Marching Bass Drums
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Raven is a short basic cadence that is broken down into 3 simple sections in order for it to be learned quickly and efficiently. Raven is the perfect cadence for 6th grade drumlines.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    4+ Marching Bass Drums
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    Vampire is a very simple cadece that consists of 3 repetitive sections. This is a great, fun sounding first cadence for any beginner group.

    By Cassidy Byars

    Diagram Above: Minimum Instrumentation

    Recommended Instrumentation:
    1+ Marching Snare Drum
    1+ Marching Multi Tenor Drum – 4 Drums
    4+ Marching Bass Drums
    1+ Crash Cymbals

    A powerful extension for marching percussion

    MuseScore Drumline is a FREE extension for MuseScore 3, designed to meet the unique demands and workflows of marching music directors, composers, arrangers, and students.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Realistic percussion playback

    The free extension adds a lifelike sound library of newly recorded drumline samples.
    We’ve got your pings, zings, dings, spocks, skanks, and even Dr. Beat.

    Diverse templates

    Marching band, indoor percussion, front ensemble, drumline, drum corps —
    all available in the New Score Wizard. Select a template, start writing.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Pictogram notation.

    A picture’s worth. well, more than words. Two full palettes of instrument changes, mallet changes, strokes, playing zones, and even visuals (Hi Mom!).

    . including functional pictograms

    With MDL, percussion instrument changes are as simple as a single click,
    inserting pictograms for performers and automatically updating instrument playback.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Guide to percussion notation

    MuseScore Drumline helps to unify the written language of marching percussion
    with a comprehensive notation guide for each instrument.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Played live and recorded by John Emrich, a retired Chief Musician with the US Navy Band in Washington, DC

    Includes 56 cadence grooves, 39 snare rolls and 22 additional rudiments

    Played in 2/4, 4/4 and 6/8

    Includes 285 MIDI files of unquantized grooves

    Formatted for BFD2 ® , BFD3 ® , EZdrummer ® , Superior Drummer ® , Addictive Drums ® , Cakewalk ® Session Drummer ™ , SSD4, Accent & *General MIDI Standard MIDI Files (all included)

    *Works with all VST, Core Audio & GM compatible drum software and hardware

    Buy more than one MIDI Groove Library at the same time
    and get 15% off each MIDI Groove Library

    About the Military Cadence Groove Library

    Military Cadence is a collection of grooves in 2/4, 4/4, and 6/8 time signatures. This collection also includes common Rolls and Rudiments. Rudiments are the foundation of the drumming vocabulary. Every serious drum instructor has received a set of hand written rudiments from their teachers and continue to pass them along to new students. We have included these sheets as well.

    Performed by John Emrich, a retired Chief Musician with the US Navy Band in Washington, DC. John has spent a great deal of time working with rudiments. Rudiments themselves can be traced back to military drummers. Back in the days when an army would assemble in a massive formation to do battle, the drummer was the key to controlling the movements and tempo of battle. All rudiments are made up of four basic drum strokes: a single hit, a double stroke, a flam, and a buzz stroke. Every rudiment is made up of combinations of these four stroke types. The key is that rudimental drumming actually has a “swing” to it. This collection of grooves, rolls and rudiments are all played live on an electronic drum set to preserve the correct feel.

    When a march is performed as a concert piece, a military band will often double up the rudimental snare with a second concert snare drum. The rudimental drummer will play the correct metered rolls while the concert snare drummer will play closed rolls to produce a very full sound. The Military Cadences in this collection were all recorded using this technique. This economical collection of grooves can be added to any style of music.

    Military Cadence includes 56 cadence grooves. Each of the cadences includes each part split off into it’s own lane for maximum compatibility with any drum VST program for a total of 224 parts. Think of them as building blocks. Military Cadence also includes 39 examples of snare rolls and an additional 22 examples of different rudiments.

    This multi-format collection includes grooves formatted for BFD2 ® , BFD3 ® , BFD Eco ® , EZDrummer ® , Superior Drummer ® , Addictive Drums ® , Steven Slate Drums 4, Accent, Cakewalk ® Session Drummer ™ as well as General MIDI Standard MIDI Files which can be used with any GM compatible drum software or hardware — this includes drum machines and synthesizers which have drum sounds.

    Platinum Samples and John Emrich are two of the foremost producers of drum samples in the world, with over 50 years of experience in the professional music industry, and now they have turned their attention to developing MIDI Grooves. Military Cadence was recorded by John Emrich on a Yamaha DTX900 electronic drum set. No quantization, mouse clicks, or pastes were used – we leave that to you.

    BFD3, BFD Eco and BFD2 are registered trademarks of FXpansion

    EZDrummer and Superior Drummer are registered trademarks of Toontrack Music

    Addictive Drums is a registered trademark of XLN Audio

    Cakewalk is a registered trademark of Cakewalk, Inc.

    Digital Sheet Music

    By Sean T. Kelly

    How to write a drum cadence

    • Look inside(2) Look inside(2) Listen (1) Listen (1)
    • Instrument:

    Drums – Digital Download
    Composed by Sean T. Kelly. Contemporary. Score. 6 pages. Sean T. Kelly #2845517. Published by Sean T. Kelly (A0.908321).

    Item Number: A0.908321

    Sticky Street Beat is a fairly straightforward cadence composed of two distinct sections, which can be repeated as much as the performers need, where they can eventually end the cadence with the 2nd ending as desired. Though traditional grip is specified in the score, match grip for the second section works just as well! In the first section, the snares have the left stick across the drum doing rim knocks, a technique that is often underutilized in drumline music and for young performers, may be new. This cadence is a good introduction to this technique and has a repeated pattern that won’t take long to learn. For the tenors, the right hand holds a steady beat on the spock by playing 3’s while having a more independent left hand, which might be a technique that is difficult for newer players, though is a style for tenors that can be found throughout drumline music. Though the bass part has splits (especially in the second section) which may be intimidating to a younger bass line, there is only one primary split that is repeated, and once the line gets it, they’ll have the rest of the cadence! A band can both march to this cadence even at a quicker 132 bpm, or it makes a great filler for in the stands. Enjoy!

    Total time: 1:02
    Tempo: 132 bmp
    Difficulty: Intermediate
    Instrumentation: Snares, Tenors (4 standard drums + 1 spock), 4 basses (5 can be used if 4th and 5th bass play the same part), Cymbals (optional)

    This product was created by a member of ArrangeMe, Hal Leonard’s global self-publishing community of independent composers, arrangers, and songwriters. ArrangeMe allows for the publication of unique arrangements of both popular titles and original compositions from a wide variety of voices and backgrounds.

    About Digital Downloads

    Digital Downloads are downloadable sheet music files that can be viewed directly on your computer, tablet or mobile device. Once you download your digital sheet music, you can view and print it at home, school, or anywhere you want to make music, and you don’t have to be connected to the internet. Just purchase, download and play!

    PLEASE NOTE: Your Digital Download will have a watermark at the bottom of each page that will include your name, purchase date and number of copies purchased. You are only authorized to print the number of copies that you have purchased. You may not digitally distribute or print more copies than purchased for use (i.e., you may not print or digitally distribute individual copies to friends or students).

    Drums – Digital Download
    Composed by Sean T. Kelly. Contemporary. Score. 6 pages. Sean T. Kelly #2845517. Published by Sean T. Kelly (A0.908321).

    Item Number: A0.908321

    Sticky Street Beat is a fairly straightforward cadence composed of two distinct sections, which can be repeated as much as the performers need, where they can eventually end the cadence with the 2nd ending as desired. Though traditional grip is specified in the score, match grip for the second section works just as well! In the first section, the snares have the left stick across the drum doing rim knocks, a technique that is often underutilized in drumline music and for young performers, may be new. This cadence is a good introduction to this technique and has a repeated pattern that won’t take long to learn. For the tenors, the right hand holds a steady beat on the spock by playing 3’s while having a more independent left hand, which might be a technique that is difficult for newer players, though is a style for tenors that can be found throughout drumline music. Though the bass part has splits (especially in the second section) which may be intimidating to a younger bass line, there is only one primary split that is repeated, and once the line gets it, they’ll have the rest of the cadence! A band can both march to this cadence even at a quicker 132 bpm, or it makes a great filler for in the stands. Enjoy!

    Total time: 1:02
    Tempo: 132 bmp
    Difficulty: Intermediate
    Instrumentation: Snares, Tenors (4 standard drums + 1 spock), 4 basses (5 can be used if 4th and 5th bass play the same part), Cymbals (optional)

    This product was created by a member of ArrangeMe, Hal Leonard’s global self-publishing community of independent composers, arrangers, and songwriters. ArrangeMe allows for the publication of unique arrangements of both popular titles and original compositions from a wide variety of voices and backgrounds.

    About Digital Downloads

    Digital Downloads are downloadable sheet music files that can be viewed directly on your computer, tablet or mobile device. Once you download your digital sheet music, you can view and print it at home, school, or anywhere you want to make music, and you don’t have to be connected to the internet. Just purchase, download and play!

    Sabtu, 21 Oktober 2017

    Drum Cadence – Easy Drum Cadences

    In music, a drum cadence or street beat is a work played exclusively by the percussion section of a modern marching band (see marching percussion). It is stylistically descended from early military marches, and related to military cadences, as both are a means of providing a beat while marching. Usually, each instrument will have a part that mimics a specific drum or drums on a drum set to create a sound similar to a drum beat.

    According to Hiro Songsblog a drum cadence is, “‘a drumline piece played in a parading marching band between or in place of full-band pieces’. Cadences, are also: ‘a chant that is sung by military personnel while parading or marching’.”

    Cadences employ the four basic drum strokes and often directly include drum rudiments. They have a wide range of difficulty, from simple accent patterns to complex rhythms including hybrid rudiments, and are played by virtually every modern drum line. Cadences are important from a performance standpoint, as a good drum cadence can make the band stand out from the rest in competition. Field shows are often preceded by the band marching to the beat of the cadence.

    Marching percussion generally consists of at least snare drums, tenor drums, cymbals, and bass drums, and may include timpani.

    Marching 110

    Since 1967, the Marching 110 has been playing the newest and most popular music of the day. However, there are just some songs in the Marching 110’s repertoire that have become fan favorites, and are still played today. These tunes are referred to as the “standards,” and are played by the Marching 110 each season.

    Here you can read about and listen to the “standards” of the Marching 110.

    Alma Mater, Ohio

    In 1914, Ohio University held a nationwide contest for composers to write an Alma Mater for Ohio University. In total, 19 entries were submitted. The winning selection was composed by World War I Veteran and accomplished composer of school songs from Princeton University, Kenneth S. Clarke. For his winning entry, Clarke was paid the sum of $25. Alma Mater, Ohio was rearranged for the “new” look of the marching band in 1967 by John Higgins.

    Stand Up and Cheer!

    Stand Up and Cheer! was written by George Bowles and became the Ohio University Fight Song in the 1910’s. In 1967, along with the redesigned look and sound of the “Marching Men of Ohio,” the Ohio University Marching Band debuted a new arrangement of the school fight song. Arranged by John Higgins, “Stand Up and Cheer!” now contains an opening fanfare and modulation, which is still used today by the Marching 110.

    Ain’t Been Good

    Ain’t Been Good is an original composition by John Higgins that made its debut during the 1968 season. A down and dirty blue’s song, Ain’t Been Good was one of the first songs the Marching 110 danced as an ensemble to. A routine created by Drum Major David Fowler was taught to the members of the band, who danced for the duration of the song.

    Long Train Runnin’

    Arguably the most popular selection in the Marching 110’s repertoire, Long Train Runnin’ was originally played during the 1973 season, and immediately became a crowd favorite. Arranged by Martin Osborne, the Doobie Brothers’ hit originally featured the whole band dancing, but today features four members of the tuba section.

    Light Up

    Featuring the 110 cymbals, Light Up was arranged by Geoffrey Horn in 1980. The Styx song has been the opener for the second half of Varsity Show and Ohio Theatre for many years.

    Happy you are enjoying the catalog

    You can download up to 40 songs a day.

    Please fill in a new password

    Please fill in a new password

    Please confirm your location

    $199/yr

    One Price – Unlimited Possibilities

    Upgrade to the full Artlist license now and start usinig Artlist music in all of your projects! Get a license to the entire catalog with unlimited downloads for a full year.

    Artlist license includes:

    • – Use in any project
    • – Unlimited downloads
    • – Use in any project including commercial
    • – Lifetime use for the songs you download
    • – Pre-checked for YouTube monetization
    • – New music every month

    Total price – Only $199 a year

    Inspiring music for your films!
    Subscribe today for unlimited downlads.

    Artlist is implementing a new system to keep your videos secure.
    Go to Library page and submit your video links so we can prevent them
    from ever being flagged or claimed.

    Thank You

    And welcome to Artlist

    You’re all set to start browsing SFX
    and find the perfect sound for your videos

    Thank You

    And welcome to Artlist

    You’re all set to start browsing music
    and find the perfect song for your videos.

    Thank You

    And welcome to Artlist

    Start browsing the inspiring Artlist music and SFX catalog
    with unlimited downloads for a full year

    We can’t seem to find the page you’re looking for.

    You are probably a bit sad – But we got something that might make you Happy again.

    LIMITED TIME OFFER

    Get your free
    Motion X Pack

    Get your free
    Motion X Pack

    Subscribe to the yearly plan and start creating
    with 200+ motion graphics elements today.

    Give your videos some extra special edits with 200+ exciting motion graphics elements.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Subscribe to the yearly plan today & get 200+ FREE motion graphics elements
    Subscribe to the yearly plan today & get 200+ FREE motion graphics elements

    and Welcome to Artlist!

    You can now start discovering Artlist, organize all your favorite music & SFX and download watermarked tracks for personal use

    Subscribe to the yearly plan today & get 200+ FREE motion graphics elements
    Subscribe to the yearly plan today & get 200+ FREE motion graphics elements

    The best license in the world

    Unlimited music & SFX, unlimited downloads and a lifetime license
    • Personal
    • Covers all your own
      social channels
    License covers:
    • YouTube
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Twitch
    • Podcasts
    • TikTok
  • *One channel per platform
    BEST VALUE
    • Unlimited
    • Covers everything from personal
      to commercial projects
    • Starting at
    License covers:
    • Unlimited social platforms
    • Enterprise
    • Tailored licensing & plans
      for organizations
    License covers:
    • Customized terms
    • Customized licenses
    • Dedicated curation services
    • Premium customer success
  • Holiday Giveaway

    Subscribe now and get 100 FREE SFX

      New music added daily Eligible for YouTube monetization Royalty-free
    Accepted Payment Methods
    Money Back Guarantee

    Get your money back within 14 days after purchase

    Secure Payment

    Transactions are encrypted
    and secured

    You’re in good company

    “There’s always fresh music to choose from”

    “Commercial use however you want to use it”

    If you create both personal and commercial projects, go for the Unlimited license. It covers everything, including client work, paid ads, games and more. If you only create projects for your social media channels, the Personal license has you covered.

    The Unlimited license covers all existing and future platforms worldwide. The Personal license is valid only on social media and covers one channel per platform.

    The Unlimited license never expires! You’re covered forever on any platform worldwide, and can continue using the assets you downloaded during your subscription in future projects.

    With the Personal license, every project you create and publish to your channel during your subscription is covered forever! However, once your subscription expires, you cannot use any of the assets you downloaded in new projects.

    Yes. We offer tailor-made solutions to suit each customer’s unique needs. Contact our Enterprise Team to get more information. Enterprise Team to get more information.

    You can cancel the license within 14 days and receive a full refund if you haven’t yet downloaded any music or SFX.

    Subscription payments can be made directly on the site through PayPal or credit card. After payment is completed, an invoice will be automatically sent to your email address and you will get immediate access to the entire catalog.

    You can sign up for a free trial account and download watermarked songs to test in your project and get a feel for the catalog. To license music for your projects, you’ll need to get a paid subscription.

    The Personal plan is available with both a monthly and a yearly subscription (billed annually). The Unlimited plan is billed annually.

    Thread Tools
    • Show Printable Version
    • Email this Page…
  • Display
    • Linear Mode
    • Switch to Hybrid Mode
    • Switch to Threaded Mode
  • User Info Menu

    What is your favorite drum cadence

    How to write a drum cadence

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    Not to be rude or anything but what kind of question is that? It’s been well over 40 years since I was in high school and did street parade cadences. I wrote many cadences for marching bands throughout the years. all different. There must be thousands upon thousands of cadences available.

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    well among the thousands of cadences that have been made up at my high school my favorite would be cannabis. I am pretty sure that most high schools make their own.

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    Maybe if people had recordings of their favorites.

    “You have to love music more then food. More than air. More than yourself.”-The Wizard (August Rush)

    I think I can realistically say that I will never be too old to laugh at a fart. Ever. -dave0549jv

    If we give up, we will never know what we might have been. – Pastor Bob

    DC Record for most users online at once! Be there or be square! http://www.drumchat.com/showthread.p. ers-12079.html
    RIP Frank

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    I Heard A Drumline Doin “What Is Hip” By Tower Of Power Yesterday. Funny Thing Was ,even Wif All Da Players. Garibaldi Is Still 10 Tomes Phunkier .

    “FEEL DA GROOVE & PLAY IT FORWARD. “

    “BEAUTY IS IN THE EARS OF THE BEHOLDER ,
    ENJOY IT ALL. MY BROTHERS & SISTERS”

    COMMANDER & CHIEPH OF
    “PHROGGE’S AQUARIAN ARMY”

    LEGEND IN MY OWN MIND
    & FORCE BEHIND DA
    “PHX AZ LEGEND OF DA ZYDECO GROOVE VEST”
    (AND OTHER TOYZ) INCLUDING PIZZABOX SNARE DRUM

    IT’S ALL ABOUT DA SHOW .

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    would someone be able to explain to a drumline noob what a cadence is?

    jimbolimbo99 Mapex Mafia

    Mapex M Birch
    Sabian AA and Paragons
    Zildjian A’s
    Meinl Generation X
    Dream Lion
    Trick Pro-1V

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    its what the drumline plays between songs or whenever no other instruments are playing.

    “You have to love music more then food. More than air. More than yourself.”-The Wizard (August Rush)

    I think I can realistically say that I will never be too old to laugh at a fart. Ever. -dave0549jv

    If we give up, we will never know what we might have been. – Pastor Bob

    DC Record for most users online at once! Be there or be square! http://www.drumchat.com/showthread.p. ers-12079.html
    RIP Frank

    User Info Menu

    Re: What is your favorite drum cadence

    would someone be able to explain to a drumline noob what a cadence is?

    Take a march, you know, a famous one would be stars and stripes forever. Now, strip off the instruments, leave nothing but the drums. Now, instead of the drums playing something over and over again, give the drums a chance to show off and go to work on the drums. Do this while marching to keep some entertainment, so your not moving on taps. A cadence =)

    Unless your talking piano cadences, thats like the end of a phrase or something.

    Post new topic Reply to topic Page 7 of 10 [ 237 posts ]

    • Previous
    • 1,
    • 5,
    • 6,
    • 7,
    • 8,
    • 9,
    • 10,
    • Next

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 10:00 am

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 10:07 am

    How to write a drum cadence

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 11:32 am

    How to write a drum cadence

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 12:25 pm

    How to write a drum cadence

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 12:32 pm

    “There is no feeling, except the extremes of fear and grief, that does not find relief in music.”

    ’08 KHS Vibraphone
    ’09 KHS Bass 1
    ’10 KHS Bass 1
    ’12 KHS Quads

    ’11 Oregon Crusaders Bass 1

    How to write a drum cadence

    Re: Your schools cadence names

    Posted: Fri May 27, 2011 3:34 pm

    We only have one cadence, which every school in our district knows. It’s GHHS’s Thunder Cadence. It’s awesome to play because we can be ridiculously loud but it’s easy so we can’t mess it up.

    But damn, I wish someone would write us some new cadences already -_____-

    “No one has their drill papers? BS it.”

    And in the end. only one tenors person made it out alive.

    One mile–no good.

    Two miles–No sweat.

    Three miles–Better yet.

    Four miles–All the way.

    Six miles–follow me.

    Seven miles–Ranger run

    One mile no sweat,

    Two miles better yet,

    Three miles oh no,

    Four miles gotta go,

    Five miles, gotta run

    Six miles, to the sun

    Seven miles feeling good like I should.

    C-130 rolling down the strip,

    Airborne daddy’s gonna take a little trip.

    Mission uncertain, destination unknown,

    Don’t even know if we’re ever coming home.

    Stand-up, Hook-up, shuffle to the door,

    Jump right out and count to four.

    Slip to the left and slip to the right

    Slip on down to a firefight.

    Hit the drop zone with my feet apart

    Legs in my stomach and feet in my heart.

    And if my main don’t open wide,

    I’ve got a reserve by my side.

    And if that one should fail me too,

    Look out below, I’m coming through.

    And if I die in the old drop zone,

    Box me up and ship me home.

    And if I die in the Korean mud

    Bury me with a case of Bud

    Bury speakers all around my head

    So I can rock with the Grateful Dead

    Bury speakers all around my toes

    So I can rock with Axel Rose

    Pin my medals upon my chest,

    And bury me in the leaning rest.

    Up in the morning at the break of day

    Work so hard we never play

    Run through the jungle where the sun don’t shine

    And all I do is the double time

    Up in the morning and out of the rack

    Grab my clothes and put them on my back

    Run thru the swamp and up in a tree

    First sergeant chasing after me

    I like whiskey and I like wine

    But all I do is double time

    Up in the morning before the break of day

    I don’t like it no way

    Eat my breakfast too darn soon

    Hungry as hell by noon

    Went to the mess sergeant on my knees

    I said mess sergeant, mess sergeant, feed me please

    Mess sergeant said with a big old grin

    If you want to be airborne, you got to be thin.

    When I get to heaven,

    Saint Peter’s gonna say,

    How’d you earn your living boy?

    How’d you earn your pay?

    I reply with a whole lot of anger,

    Earned my living as an Airborne Ranger.

    Livin’ a life of Guts and Danger,

    Blood, Sweat, Guts, and Danger.

    That’s the way, of an Airborne Ranger

    When I get to hell,

    Satan’s gonna say,

    How’d you earn your living punk?

    How’d you earn your pay?

    And I replied with a boot to his face,

    Earned my livin’ laying souls to waste!

    When my granny was 91,

    She did PT just for fun.

    When my granny was 92,

    She did PT better than you.

    When my granny was 93,

    She did pushups just like me.

    When my granny was 94,

    She did PT more and more.

    When my granny was 95,

    She did PT to stay alive.

    When my Granny turned 96,

    She did situps just for kicks.

    And when my granny turned 97,

    She double-timed straight up to heaven.

    She met St. Peter at the pearly gate,

    Said, Gee, St. Peter I hope Im not late.

    St. Peter said with a big wide grin,

    Drop down Granny and knock out ten.

    Saw an old lady walking down the street

    Had a ruck on her back and jungle boots on her feet

    I said “Hey old lady where you going to?”

    She said “U.S. Army Ranger School”

    I said “Hey old lady, now ain’t you been told?

    Ranger School’s for the young and the bold!”

    She said “Hey now son don’t be a fool

    I’m an instructor at the Ranger school”

    Saw an old lady walking down the street

    Had a chute on her back, and jump boots on her feet

    I said “Hey old lady where you going to?”

    She said “U.S. Army Airborne School”

    I said “Hey old lady, you’re too darn old

    You’d better leave the jumpin’ to the young and the bold”

    She said “Hey now sonny can’t you see?

    I’ve got master jump wings and my CIB”

    Saw an old lady walking down the street

    She had a tank on her back and fins on her feet

    I said “Hey old lady, where you going to?”

    She said “U.S. Army Scuba School”

    I said “Hey old lady, now ain’t you been told?

    How to write a drum cadence

    A history of excellence.

    A future brighter than the sun.

    How to write a drum cadence How to write a drum cadenceHow to write a drum cadence How to write a drum cadence How to write a drum cadence How to write a drum cadence

    FAQ

    What are auditions like and how should I prepare?
    Auditions are held both in the summer and at the beginning of band camp in August; percussionists typically move in a day earlier than the rest of the band to allow extra time for this. Beginning in 2019, the Drumline began a virtual audition process. In this process, an audition packet (containing warm-ups, a cadence, and fight songs) is sent out in July, and prospective members are asked to send in a video audition. This audition gives our percussion instructor and section leaders a preliminary idea of skill level and capability on different instruments. The line is not necessarily set based on these auditions alone, but it allows for a much more time-efficient, in-person audition during band camp. The line is set by our percussion instructor and section leaders, who rotate drummers on and off of instruments until finding the arrangement that sounds the best. During this process, you may be asked to play in a small group and/or individually. The best way to prepare is to keep your chops up – don’t wait until the night before your video audition to pick up some sticks for the first time in months. Basic exercises like double and triple beat, 16th note and triplet rolls, and accent-tap are also very beneficial to practice on your own over the summer. Essentially, the better you are at the instrument you want to play, the better chance you have of being assigned that instrument.

    What is the difference between marching band and pep band?
    During marching/football season, we use a full battery (historically 5-6 snares, 2-3 tenors, 6 basses, and a varying number of cymbals). We do not have a front ensemble. During pep band/basketball season, we use a drumset, a bass drum, and two sets of cymbals. Participation in marching season guarantees you a spot in the pep band. You will be assigned to half of the men’s and women’s home basketball games, but you may attend as many as you want. You will also have the opportunity to participate in tournament travel, should the team(s) make it to the NCAA tournament (and they will).

    I’ve never played a marching percussion instrument before. Can I still audition for Duke’s drumline?
    Absolutely! We have had drum set players, concert percussionists, and even non-drummers join our ranks. Our marching technique is not difficult to learn and as long as you can read music, have a sense of rhythm, and are willing to work hard, you stand a good chance of making the line.

    Do you play matched or traditional?
    Our snare line plays with traditional grip. However, we have had several drummers join us who played matched in high school and picked up traditional very quickly. We will work with you.

    Why should I join the drumline?
    How could you deny yourself a future brighter than the sun?

    I’m interested in joining. What should I do now?
    Fill out this form so we can get you on our information distribution list. Then go spend some quality time with your practice pad and a metronome.

    Free to use drumline warmups, exercises, cadence and street beats!

    How to write a drum cadence

    This set of free drumline warmups, exercises, cadence and street beats are composed for all skill levels from beginner to advanced, and include audio examples. Download the PDF and use them with your drumline for free, nothing, nada, zilch, etc! Each warmup and exercise builds upon the previous one and are great learning tools to progress through and develop your skills. They’re also great workouts for both the hands as well as the mind to build physical chops and also mental chops too! Be sure to check out the various skill levels for great variations.

    Below is each warmup, exercise, cadence / street beat divided into three separate skill levels which lets you find the right amount of difficulty for the application you need. Also included is an on-field warmup to prepare you for the show, and a warmdown that slowly loosens your muscles at the end of a long day.

    Some of the warmups are compatible with the pit warmups as well (as noted below). If you’re short on time at rehearsal and need to warm up the entire percussion ensemble at the same time you have the tools to do so here at your disposal!

    Download Drumline Warmups Below!

    How to write a drum cadence

    The Drumline & Pit Information Packet includes all the warmups, exercises, cadence and street beat below as well as the on-field warmup and warmdown. In addition there is a long explanation of everything you’d want to know before joining a drumline, from overarching ideals to techniques! You can pay what you want for the digital Drumline Information Packet or you can purchase a physical copy at many online retailers! (Don’t worry pit percussionists, this also includes all of the pit warmups, exercises, and songs too!) Use this with your ensemble!

    CG SubMain Menu

    • Archives
    • eEdition
    • Login
    • Subscribe

    CG SubMain Menu 2

    • Auto
    • Circulars
    • Local Businesses
    • Real Estate

    How to write a drum cadence

    Zac Mayfield brings the noise. When he gets behind a drum set, bystanders don’t hear his beats so much as they feel them. But anyone can go berserk on a snare drum; Mayfield plays with the kind of metronomic precision drummers can spend a lifetime trying to achieve.

    Mayfield is 20. And in April, he’s touring Europe with a heavy metal band.

    “I’ve never even been outside the East Coast,” said Mayfield. “I don’t think I understand exactly what’s about to happen.”

    Some may remember Mayfield, who lives off Robinsville Road near Long Neck, from the 2008 Cape Henlopen High School drum line – he’s the skinny kid with green eyes and a cocky grin. He rocked the Cape stands, and in April he’ll rock Glasgow, Scotland, his band’s first stop in the Old World. But Mayfield’s infatuation with rhythm began with an old blue snare drum. He was 9 when he found it in his uncle’s attic.

    “I got ahold of it and took it from there.” After a few years of his begging and nearly beating the blue snare to death, Mayfield’s parents agreed to buy him a drum set. His father drove him to Earle Teet Music in Dover and bought him a five-piece kit made by Gretsch.

    “I thought it was the greatest thing in the world,” he said. “It probably kept me out of a lot of trouble.”

    Time that might be spent on homework went instead to the drums. His grades were never great, he said, but they weren’t terrible, either. Instead of paying attention in class, he drummed lightly on the desk with his fingers.

    “I think it drove a lot of my teachers crazy,” he said.

    Clever thieving

    He devoured styles as they came to him. From the radio, he learned the rudiments of rock; from Barry Eli, then director of Cape Henlopen High School Jazz Ensemble, he learned swing, funk, jazz and Latin. And he learned to love performance from Walt Hetfield, Rehoboth Elementary School music teacher and leader of a rock and roll summer camp.

    The camp culminated in a performance at the Rusty Rudder in Dewey Beach. Playing for a crowd wasn’t about the attention, Mayfield said – it was about getting a response.

    “I was doing something with my hands, and I was seeing the result,” he said. “It’s so visceral. It’s so primal.”

    It was settled, he said: This is what he was meant to do. But graduation came before stardom; and before graduation, he needed to beat Dover High School’s drum line.

    Dover’s drum line was large, disciplined and stone-faced. And it was good. Mayfield remembered facing it during a drum-off as a freshman.

    “They ripped us apart,” Mayfield said, laughing. “Bit by bit. I couldn’t believe what they did to us.”

    After getting embarrassed on his home field, Mayfield went to work. He studied videos of different drum lines, stealing a beat from one, a stick trick from another.

    “The best musicians are thieves who never get caught,” Mayfield said, paraphrasing Buddy Rich, a great jazz drummer. Working with Cape alumnus Anthony Baray and fellow drummer James Sudimak, Mayfield wrote “Spartan,” a marching cadence with punch and flair. When Cape faced Dover in 2008, the drum line cranked out “Spartan” with such verve that even Dover’s stoic drummers had to crack a grin.

    “It was like having to fight Batman,” he said. “But we broke their little shell.”

    Getting creative

    After graduating the following spring, Mayfield needed money. So he got creative.

    He ransacked his mother’s kitchen, drumming on pots and pans until he found the sound he wanted. He snagged a few buckets from the garage and headed to Ocean City, where he squatted on the boardwalk and started drumming (he tried drumming on Rehoboth’s Boardwalk, he said, but several appeals to City Hall were met with disappointment).

    Unlike his drum set, his street-drumming kit would fit in the back of his coupe, and it only took minutes to set up. It wasn’t long before crowds clustered around his makeshift drum set, dancing to his rhythms and filling the tip jar with bills.

    “You meet so many people who wanted to help me out,” he said. “I made so many friends.”

    He’d drum for three or four hours – fewer if the summer sun was particularly brutal. His mother lamented the loss of her pots, but Mayfield said his parents supported him nonetheless. It was great experience, and it allowed him to quit his landscaping job. And he was making music.

    “I can’t do anything else, you know?” Mayfield said.

    He got a call from Travis Orbin, drummer for metal band Sky Eats Airplane and Mayfield’s mentor. He said Oh, Sleeper, a Fort Worth, Texas-based metal band, was looking for a drummer to join them on a European tour. Was he interested?

    Mayfield didn’t take him too seriously. He filmed drumming demos, but without much hope. He was sure his bid would be one in a hundred, well-intentioned but ultimately overshadowed.

    About a week after he posted the videos, he received a call from an area code he didn’t recognize. It was Micah Kinard, front man for Oh, Sleeper. The gig was Mayfield’s, if he wanted it.

    More than a month later, Mayfield said it’s still sinking in. When Kinard called again to ask what Mayfield wanted for the tour, Mayfield wasn’t sure what he meant. Kinard clarified his question – the drums. Mayfield was free to build his kit however he wanted. What should the band order?

    “It’s weird how the puzzle comes together,” he said. “I don’t know if there’s someone out there looking out for me, but the pieces just fit too perfectly.”

    Ruminations on destiny aside, he said his strategy for dealing with the pressure of big-ticket crowds is simple: don’t think about it.

    “My plan is to keep my head down and play my ass off,” he said.

    Mayfield also signed on for a stateside tour, with dates and locations to be announced. Until he boards a plane to rendezvous with Oh, Sleeper in Fort Worth, Mayfield is behind his set, learning the band’s songs note for note. For now, the pots remain in their cupboards.

    TikTok has revived what’s arguably the most famous movie in the percussion film canon: “Drumline,” the 2002 film starring Nick Cannon as a teen snare drum prodigy who has to fight upperclassmen (and his own ego) for a spot on the drumline at Atlanta A&T, a fictional HBCU with a renowned marching band. Nearly 20 years after its premiere, one sequence from the film has found new life on TikTok as part of a meme that depicts people furiously typing to try and finish their work on time.

    The audio — a repetitive, energy-filled drumline cadence — is lifted from a sequence in “Drumline” in which Devon, Nick Cannon’s character, challenges upperclassman Sean for a snare solo on the field. While the sound was uploaded by user @soundsforslomo_bro, the original video appears to have been deleted.

    It’s not completely clear where the meme originated, although early instances trace back to the first half of January. One of the earliest instances appears to be a January 8 video from user @mrdapper_ captioned, “When you’re trying to get off at 5 on a Friday!” @mrdapper_ went on to post several other instances of the meme that same week.

    One of the earliest viral videos associated with the sound was a January 11 video from @tyerenae, whose current TikTok bio reads “CEO of the [snare drum emoji] sound.” In a video that’s amassed nearly 825,000 likes captioned “when your assignment is due at 11:59 pm,” @tyerenae furiously types on a laptop to meet a school deadline.

    On January 13, @mrdapper_ and @tyerenae collaborated on a video set to the “Drumline” sound that features an exchange between a professor and a student.

    Reply to @tyerenae when your teacher won’t open the assignments for you 😓 collab with @mrdapper_ 🤩 ##tyerenae ##drumline ##drumlinechallenge

    Since those early days, the meme has taken off on TikTok, with people recreating similar scenarios like asking for a project extension, chatting with a boss, or cleaning the house.

    Just here to provide free, easy nutrition tips 🥰 ##dietitian ##weightloss ##nutrition

    As of now, the hashtag #drumlinechallenge has nearly 27 million cumulative views, and the sound upload is associated with over 12,000 videos.

    what’s your best call off excuse for the turn up?! ##drumlinechallenge ##work ##party

    Ultimately, the “Drumline” sound is so well-suited for TikTok — and this meme in particular — because of its nostalgia pull, dramatic arc, and resemblance to typing sounds. It’s easy to map any kind of intense exchange or deadline rush onto the mounting tension of the audio, which culminates in an explosive solo snare moment. It’s nigh-impossible not to feel the energy just from the sound alone.

    How to write a drum cadenceBack when I was shedding a lot of Philly Joe Jones and Vinnie Ruggiero stuff, I started writing out some cadences that came to me while practicing. What strikes me as I look over this material again is how musical it is. The phrases have space and are syncopated in that traditional jazz type of way. And that makes them sound great. I wrote a few of these, so I will look for the rest of them. In the meantime, this should do as a start.

    This one is called “King Cadence.” By the way, two of the definitions of “cadence” are:

    • The rhythmic flow of a sequence of sounds or words
    • A rhythmic pattern that is non-metrically structured
    • Author
    • Recent Posts

    Mark Feldman is a session drummer from NYC.

    He first gained attention as one of the winners of Modern Drummer magazine’s very first drum solo contest, judged by Rush’s Neil Peart.

    He’s played with Oz Noy, Will Lee, Alison Krauss, Curtis Stigers, Emily Remler, Joel Hoekstra, GE Smith, Andy York, Marshall Crenshaw, Tony Shanahan, The Drifters, The Marvelettes, Big Brother and The Holding Company, and many other artists.

    Your contribution will be matched dollar-for-dollar. Act by December 31!

    • Bird Library
    • Threats
    • From the Field
    • News
    • Perspectives

    News and Perspectives on Bird Conservation

    Birds make many amazing sounds, from trills and warbles to screeches, hoots, and quacks. While not exactly considered the virtuosos of the bird world, woodpeckers do make many incredible noises, vocal and otherwise. Understanding the sounds woodpeckers make can give birders interesting insights into these beautiful birds and how they communicate.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Black-backed Woodpecker. Video by Justin Hoffman/Outdoors

    A Feathered Drumline

    The most famous and familiar woodpecker sounds aren’t songs or calls, but drumming, which is also called rapping, tatting, and tattooing. Woodpeckers peck on objects to create sound patterns as communication. Resonant objects such as hollow trees, logs, and stumps are favored for drumming because their resonance increases the strength and volume of the drumming so it can be heard further away. Other objects that make popular woodpecker drumheads include:

    • utility poles and transformer boxes
    • metal chimneys and attic exhaust vents
    • rain gutters and downspouts
    • trash cans
    • exterior light covers.

    How to write a drum cadence

    Pileated Woodpecker by Jesse Seniunas/Shutterstock

    The tempo, rhythm, duration, and repetition of drumming patterns vary between different woodpecker species. Because these patterns can be very distinct, they can sometimes be used for species identification. In a particular area, birders can learn to decipher which woodpeckers are nearby just by hearing drumming patterns. But individual woodpeckers can tap and drum at different speeds and volumes, and sound travels differently depending upon weather and distance, so this takes practice!

    Drumming means a lot more than just identification to the birds, however. A strong, vibrant drumming pattern indicates a healthy, dominant bird, one that controls a rich territory or would make a good mate.

    Both male and female woodpeckers drum, most often in late winter or early spring when they are more actively seeking mates and establishing territories. Drumming is common in the morning, but woodpeckers may drum at any time of day.

    Other Woodpecker Sounds

    Woodpecker calls, even if they are composed of a variety of notes and cadences, lack distinct melodies, and are not considered “songs” in the same sense as those sung by warblers, cardinals, or mockingbirds. Nevertheless, woodpecker sounds can be just as varied and distinctive as other birds’ songs and calls.

    Calls may signal alarm, show agitation, or send a signal to a mate. Woodpeckers may not be as vocally adept as other species, but they do use churrs, purrs, rattles, chatters, screeches, and other short sounds, such as “peek” and “pik” notes.

    How to write a drum cadence

    “Red-shafted” Northern Flicker by Tim Zurowski/Shutterstock

    Like drumming, the tempo, length, tone, and rhythm of woodpecker calls vary widely between species. Larger birds, like the tremendous Pileated Woodpecker, have deeper, more robust voices, while smaller species, such as the diminutive Downy Woodpecker, have brighter, lighter voices and higher tones. The Northern Flicker is one of the most vocal of the North American woodpeckers, uttering a laugh-like “ha-ha-ha-ha” call, soft screeching begging calls, and “kreee” or “kwirr” calls.

    Using Woodpecker Sounds

    People enjoying the outdoors may simply appreciate the symphony of woodpecker sounds, but those sounds can also be useful for bird identification and so much more. Learning the precise rhythms, tempos, and durations of drumming and calls can help pinpoint which woodpeckers are around. Furthermore, even if the sounds aren’t precise enough for a positive identification, they can be useful to help triangulate a bird’s location for a closer look. The type of sound, such as a relaxed call note compared to an alarmed chattering, may also help explain the bird’s behavior and alert birders to other activity in the area.

    Hairy Woodpecker by female_rck_953/Shutterstock

    Protecting Woodpecker Sounds

    The more we learn about woodpeckers and their sounds, the more we can appreciate these birds’ diversity and distinctiveness. But without protection, it is possible that the drumming, chatters, laughs, and churring may be heard less and less.

    American Bird Conservancy is working diligently to protect woodpeckers’ habitats and to promote initiatives that can protect these birds. While many woodpeckers have healthy, even thriving, populations, increased habitat loss and pesticide use have put others at risk. The Ivory-billed Woodpecker, for example, likely went extinct following widespread habitat loss and shooting in the southeastern United States.

    Species with limited ranges and specialized habitat requirements, such as the Lewis’s, Red-cockaded, and White-headed Woodpeckers, especially benefit from targeted conservation efforts. These efforts include best practices for land management with birds in mind, increased awareness of the importance of forest conservation, and direct protection of the most critical areas of habitats.

    With your help, woodpeckers can continue to make their varied sounds for generations to come.

    It’s been my experience that learning how to drum is pretty invaluable too. I used to program drums for songs & my drummer buddies would carry on about how, “You can tell you’re a guitar player trying to do drums.” Even if you’re not using a kit and are programming on a piano roll or something you still want to have a clear vision of how the beats and everything need to come together.

    I found this site to be very helpful for getting some fundamental info on drumming http://www.freedrumlessons.com/drum-lessons/
    I’m an

    I put the song on repeat and imagine myself as a drummer, but it comes out forced and boring. Sometimes I get lucky and make something very interesting, but the fills sound janky or something doesn’t add up rhythmwise.

    I really do need to buy a tiny drum kit. I always play a kit whenever I see one.

    My specific case is:
    -acoustic/alternative pop/r&b
    -song-driven (lyric/melody/arrangement) more than production-driven
    -limited skills as a drummer
    -appreciation for streamlining my hardware/gear requirements
    -technological efficiency/simplicity during solo/duo songwriting sessions
    -‘sparkly demo’ quality of recording: sync catalogue and pitching to artists
    -songs written to exist fully on vocal + acoustic guitar; drums are supplemental
    -no DJ/electro vibes required
    -drums are not relied upon to carry any big transition moments
    -easily-achieved drum tricks: mute 1 snare hit before chorus, etc
    -song/lyric writing process is aware of drum limitations, accommodates them
    -not attempting to replicate rock format [E. bass, E. guitar(s), live kit, vocals]
    -Typically, no hihat/shakers at all required to convey said vocal catalogue
    -farthest thing from metal

    [If my specific case applies substantially to your situation]
    My recommendations are:
    -Get the Drum Pro plug-in (AU freebie, probably VST available too)
    -Set the lowest possible I/O Buffer Size (for minimal latency while recording)
    -Open “Musical Typing” (or equivalent) in Logic Pro (or other DAW)
    -Get comfortable playing “Boom Bap” (kick/snare) identities for your arrangements
    -You can either use 2 index fingers, or else do both boom+bap with one hand
    -Hi-hat/shaker programming = diminishing returns vs time invested
    -Even if free-tempo, have a conductor track for snap-to-grid right after tracking
    -Lastly: stray from musical concepts that call for drum mastery / prowess

    I know it’s not the artist way, but I often use rational, “time-cost vs benefit” forecasting in my production WHERE NEEDED, and it helps me avoid time traps: not trying to write sick guitar/drum/bass solos, or even transitions. though I can play those instruments, there’s greater value for me in lyric/melody/arrangement, and if it’s purely instrumental music, then just melody/arrangement. My instrumental pockets are quite basic, but ‘defined’ – or so I like to think. That’s partly because I know I have to keep my drum expectations low, or risk wasting much time.

    Wanna Stand Out?

    When you are learning how to rap one thing that will make you stand out from most of your colleagues is learning how to add character to your cadence. In my previous article “Cadence Explained” I broke down what cadence is along with a live demonstration of how I practice my cadences in the studio. Now, let’s go just a little deeper and discuss how you can add more character to your cadence.

    What’s The Goal?

    I would like to submit to you a theory that in art, perfection is not the goal but is rather creating something that is unique & interesting that is presented in a creative way that touches the audience emotionally. For example, if a painter were to paint an exact replica of a picture he or she took with a camera, tho it may be an amazing accomplishment it’s still just a copy from the original. But if the painter were to give their own unique perspective of the picture by exaggerating colors, shifting the focal point, increasing shadows and lighting then what you end up with is something that’s imperfect but unique with a lot of character!

    Houston We Have A Problem

    This same theory carries over into music as well. When music first made its way into the digital age we realized very quickly that something was wrong…something was missing. The audio sounded way to clean and lacked “warmth” and “grit”. The computer programmed drum loops sounded too perfect in time and seemed robotic. The issue we found was everything sounded too perfect and consequently, it lacked the character that live music and analog recording gear gave us. And ever since then we have intentionally used techniques to give our digital music back it’s analog character.

    It’s Ok To Swing

    So please remember when you are formulating your cadences to not overthink it. It’s perfectly fine if you are not saying words directly on top of the kick or snare drums at times as long as your cadence has a structure to it and sounds cool. In the music world, this is called “swing